Contents

Seat Ateca Edition 11.20 2020 Crossover SUV Owner's Manual PDF

1 of 376
1 of 376

Summary of Content for Seat Ateca Edition 11.20 2020 Crossover SUV Owner's Manual PDF

Ateca Owners manual

57 50 12 72 0B R

In gl

s 5

75 01

27 20

BR (

11 .2

0)

SE A

T A

te ca

I ng

l s

(11 .2

0)

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook. All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print. Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form. SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the Copyright Act. All rights on changes are reserved.

This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.

SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.11.20

Vehicle identification da a

Model:

Vehicle Registration:

Vehicle identification number:

Date of vehicle registration or vehicle delivery:

SEAT Official Service:

Service advisor:

Telephone:

Confirmation of eceipt of documentation and vehicle keys

The following items were delivered with the vehicle: YES NO

On-board documentation

First key

Second key

Correct working order of all keys was checked

Location: Date:

Signature of owner:

Introduction Thank you for your trust choosing a SEAT ve- hicle.

With your new SEAT, you will be able to enjoy a vehicle with state-of-the-art technology and top quality features.

We recommend reading this Instruction Man- ual carefully to learn more about your vehicle so you can enjoy all its benefits in your daily driving.

Information about handling is complemented with instructions regarding the operation and maintenance of the vehicle in order to ensure its safety and maintain its value. Moreover, we want to give you valuable advice and tips to drive your vehicle efficiently and respecting the environment.

We wish you safe and enjoyable motoring.

SEAT, S.A.

WARNING Read and always observe safety infor- mation concerning the passenger's front airbag page 32, Fitting and us- ing child seats.

About this manual This manual describes the features of the ve- hicle at the time of drafting this text. Some of the features described below will be intro- duced in the future or will only be available in certain markets.

Some of the features described here are not included in all the types or variations of the model and they can be varied or modified based on technical or marketing requirements without it being considered misleading advertising.

Some details on the drawings may vary from its vehicle and must be interpreted as a standard representation.

The direction indicators (left, right, forwards, backwards) in this manual refer to the travel direction of the vehicle unless otherwise sta- ted.

The audiovisual material is only meant to help the users better understand some fea- tures of the vehicle. It is not a replacement for the instruction manual. Access the instruction manual to see the complete information and warnings.

The features marked with an asterisk are included by default only in certain versions of the model, supplied as op- tional only for certain versions or only of- fered in certain countries.

Trademarks are marked with . The ab- sence of this symbol does not guarantee that the term is not a trademark. It indicates that the section continues on the next page.

You can access the information in this manual using:

Thematic table of contents that follows the manuals general chapter structure. Visual table of contents that uses graphics to indicate the pages containing essential information, which is detailed in the corre- sponding chapters. Alphabetical index with many terms and synonyms to help you find information.

WARNING Texts after this symbol contain informa- tion about safety and warn you about possible accident or injury risks.

CAUTION Texts after this symbol indicate possible damage to the vehicle.

For the sake of the environment Texts after this symbol contain informa- tion about the protection of the environ- ment.

Note Texts after this symbol contain addition- al information.

Digital instruction manual The digital version of the manual can be found on SEAT's official website:

Fig. 1 SEAT website

scan the QR code Fig. 1 OR enter the following address in the navi- gator website:

http://www.seat.com/owners/your- seat/manuals-offline.html

and select your vehicle.

Related videos The operation of some of the vehicle's fea- tures can be shown as an instruction video:

Fig. 2 SEAT website

scan the QR code Fig. 2 OR enter the following address in the navi- gator website:

http://www.seat.com/owners/your- seat/manuals-offline.html

choose your vehicle and then Multimedia.

Note Video instructions are only available in certain languages.

Table of Contents

Table of Contents General views of the vehicle . . . . . . . . 7 Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Overview (left hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Overview (right hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Advice about driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Correct sitting position of vehicle occu- pants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 The whys and wherefores of seat belts . . . . . 16 How to properly adjust your seat belt . . . . . . 19 Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 PreCrash system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Operation of the airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Transporting children safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Self-help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Information, assistance and emergency call service* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Emergency equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Tyre repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Changing the windscreen wiper blades . . . . 49

Jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Tow start and towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Fuses and bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Controls and displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Instruments and warning/control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Using the instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Infotainment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Multifunction steering wheel* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Set of vehicle keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Anti-theft alarm system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Window controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Sunroof* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Vehicle lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Windscreen wiper and rear window wiper systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Sun protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Seats and headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Adjusting seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Seat functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Transport and practical equipment . . . . . . 139 Storing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Roof carrier* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Power sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Heating, ventilation and cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Auxiliary heating and ventilation* . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Infotainment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 First steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Overview and controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 General instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Data transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 SEAT CONNECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Full Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 WLAN access point* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Infotainment operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 voice control* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Radio/Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Navigation* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Telephone interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Start and driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Starting and stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Start-Stop system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

5

Table of Contents

Automatic gearbox/DSG automatic gear- box* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Gear-change recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Hill Descent Control (HDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 SEAT Drive Profiles* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Driver assistance systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Drive assist sensors and cameras . . . . . . . . . . 235 Cruise control system (CCS)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Emergency brake assistance system (Front Assist)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 ACC - Adaptive Cruise Control* . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Proactive speed adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Lane Assist* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Driving Assist (Travel Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Side Assist with Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Braking and parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Braking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Stabilisation and brake assistance sys- tems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Help with parking and manoeuvring . . . . . 273 Assisted parking system (Park Assist)* . . . . . . 273 Parking aid parking and manoeuvring (ParkPilot) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Parking System Plus* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Rear parking aid* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Trailer Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Peripheral view system (Top View Cam- era)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Reverse Assist (Rear View Camera)* . . . . . . . 292 Towing bracket device* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Electrically unlocking trailer hook* . . . . . . . . . 301 Retrofitting a towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

Practical tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Checking and refilling levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Fuel types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 AdBlue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Engine management and emissions control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Windscreen washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 12-volt battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Energy management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Tyre pressure monitor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 SEAT Maintenance Programme . . . . . . . . . . 336 Service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Additional service offers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Maintenance and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Accessories and modifications to the ve- hicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Accessories, spare parts and repair work . . . 344

Information for the user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Information for the user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Information stored by the control units . . . . . . 347 Other important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Information about the EU Directive 2014/53/EU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Indications about the technical data . . . . 352 Important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

6

General views of the vehicle

Exterior view

Levels control Oil page 315 Brake fluid page 320 Battery page 321 Bonnet Unlocking lever page 313 Open/close page 313

A

B

Towing the vehicle Towline anchorage page 55 Tow-start page 53

C Driving assistance sensors page 234 Front multifunction camera Rear-view cameras Area View Front camera Area View Front radar Parking aid sensors Park assist sensor

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

General views of the vehicle

Exterior view

Rear lid Opening from outside page 111 Emergency opening page 114 Towing the vehicle Towline anchorage page 55 Tow-start page 53 Opening and closing Doors page 108 Central locking page 99 Emergency lock page 109

A

B

C

Fuel tank Fuel capacity page 352 Open/Close cap page 305 Action in the event of a puncture Anti-puncture kit page 42 Wheel change page 44

D

E

Driving assistance sensors page 234 Rear view camera Parking aid sensors Rear radars Park assist sensor

1

2

3

4

8

General views of the vehicle

Overview (left hand drive)

Electric windows page 114 Central locking page 99 Exterior mirror adjustment page 130 Open bonnet lever page 313 Headlight switch page 120 Turn signal and main beam lever page 122 Cruise control page 238 Warning lamps page 88

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Wipers and rear window wiper page 128 Driver information system page 86 Infotainment system page 91 Front passenger airbag disconnection display page 27 Fuses page 57 Steering wheel adjustment page 15 Starter button page 212 Air conditioning page 153

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

Hazard warning lights page 12516

9

General views of the vehicle

Overview (right hand drive)

Open bonnet lever page 313 Infotainment system page 91 Front passenger airbag disconnection display page 27 Turn signal and main beam lever page 122 Cruise control page 238 Warning lamps page 88 Wipers and rear window wiper page 128

1

2

3

4

5

6

Driver information system page 86 Headlight switch page 120 Central locking page 99 Exterior mirror adjustment page 130 Electric windows page 114 Fuses page 57 Hazard warning lights page 125 Air conditioning page 153 Starter button page 212 Steering wheel adjustment page 15

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

10

General views of the vehicle

Interior view

Armrest page 145 Isofix anchors page 34 Headrest adjustment page 134 Seat belts page 16 Panoramic roof page 116 Interior mirror page 130

1

2

3

4

5

6

Disconnecting the front passenger front airbag page 27 Electronic parking brake page 266 Seat adjustment page 133

7

8

9

11

Safety

Safety

Safe driving

Advice about driving

Safety first!

WARNING This manual contains important informa- tion about the operation of the vehicle, both for the driver and the passengers. The other sections of the on-board documenta- tion also contain further information that you should be aware of for your own safety and for the safety of your passengers. Ensure that the on-board documentation is kept in the vehicle at all times. This is es- pecially important when lending or selling the vehicle to another person.

Before driving

For your own safety and the safety of your passengers, always note the following points before every trip:

Make sure that the vehicle's lights and turn signals are working properly.

Check tyre pressure.

Ensure that all windows provide a clear and good view of the surroundings.

Make sure all luggage is secured page 139.

Make sure that no objects can interfere with the pedals.

Adjust front seat, headrest and mirrors properly according to your size.

Ensure that the passengers in the rear seats always have the headrests in the in-use po- sition page 134.

Instruct passengers to adjust the headrests according to their height.

Protect children with appropriate child seats and properly applied seat belts page 30.

Assume the correct sitting position. Instruct your passengers also to assume a proper sitting position page 13.

Fasten your seat belt securely. Instruct your passengers also to fasten their seat belts properly page 16.

Factors influencing safety

As a driver, you are responsible for yourself and your passengers.

Always pay attention to traffic and do not get distracted by passengers or telephone calls.

Never drive when your driving ability is im- paired (e.g. by medication, alcohol, drugs).

Observe traffic laws and speed limits.

Always reduce your speed as appropriate for road, traffic and weather conditions.

When travelling long distances, take breaks regularly - at least every two hours.

If possible, avoid driving when you are tired or stressed.

WARNING Driving under the influence of alcohol, drugs, medication or narcotics may result in severe accidents and even loss of life. Alcohol, drugs, medication and narcotics may significantly alter perception, affect reaction times and safety while driving, which could result in the loss of control of the vehicle.

Safety equipment

Never put your safety or the safety of your passengers in danger. In the event of an acci- dent, the safety equipment may reduce the

12

Safe driving

risk of injury. The following points cover part of the safety equipment in your SEAT1):

three-point seat belts, belt tension limiters for the front and rear side seats, belt tensioners for the front and rear side seats, front airbags, knee airbags, side airbags in the front seat backrests, head-protection airbags, ISOFIX anchor points for ISOFIX rear child seat system height-adjustable front headrests, rear headrests with in-use position and non-use position, adjustable steering column.

The safety equipment mentioned above works together to provide you and your pas- sengers with the best possible protection in the event of an accident. However, these safety systems can only be effective if you and your passengers are sitting in a correct position and use this equipment properly.

Safety is everyone's business!

Correct sitting position of vehicle occupants

Correct position on the seat

Fig. 3 The correct distance between the driver and the steering wheel must be at least 25 cm (10 inches).

Fig. 4 Correct belt web and headrest positions

The correct sitting positions for the driver and passengers are shown below.

If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the correct sitting position, contact a specialised workshop for help with any special devices. The seat belt and airbag can only provide optimum protection if a cor- rect sitting position is adopted. SEAT recom- mends taking your car in for technical serv- ice.

For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accident or sudden braking or manoeuvre, SEAT recommend the following positions:

Valid for all vehicle occupants: Adjust the headrest so that its upper edge is at the same level as the top of your head, or as close as possible to the same level as the top of your head and under no circumstances below eye level. Keep the back of your neck as close as possible to the headrest Fig. 4. Short people must lower the headrest com- pletely, even if your head is below its upper edge. Tall people must raise the headrest com- pletely. Always keep your feet in the footwell while the vehicle is in motion.

1) Depending on the version/market. 13

Safety

Adjust and fasten your seat belt correctly page 19.

The following also applies to the driver: Move the seat backrest to an almost up- right position so that your back rests com- pletely against it. Move the steering wheel so it is at least 25 cm (10 inches) away from the sternum Fig. 3 and you can hold it with both hands on both sides, on the outer part, with your arms slightly bent. The steering wheel must always point to- wards the chest and never towards the face. Move the seat in such a way that you can step on the pedals with your knees slightly bent and with a distance between the knees and the dashboard of at least 10 cm (4 in- ches) Fig. 3. Adjust the height of the seat so that you can reach the top of the steering wheel. Always keep both feet in the footwell so that you have the vehicle under control at all times.

For the passenger, the following applies: Move the seat backrest to an almost up- right position so that your back rests com- pletely against it. Move the seat as far back as possible (mini- mum 25 cm between the chest and the dash-

board check translation). If you are sitting closer than 25 cm, the airbag system cannot protect you properly.

Number of seats

The vehicle has 5 seats, 2 in the front and 3 in the rear. All seats are equipped with a safety belt.

In some versions, your vehicle is approved only for 4 seats. 2 front seats and 2 rear seats.

WARNING Sitting in an incorrect position may in- crease the risk of severe or lethal injuries in the event of sudden braking or manoeu- vring, in case of collision or accident and if the airbags deploy. Before starting the car, all passengers must be sitting in a correct position and stay like that for the entire journey. This al- so applies to a correct use of the seat belt. The maximum amount of people in the vehicle is the same as the amount of seats with seat belts. For children, always use a certified pro- tection system, certified and suited for their weight and height page 30. While driving, always keep your feet in the footwell. Never place them over the seat or the dashboard, for example, or out-

side the window. Otherwise the airbag and seat belt may offer insufficient protection and also increase the risk of injury in the event of an accident.

Risks of sitting in an incorrect posi- tion

If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe or lethal injuries increases. Seat belts can provide optimal protection on- ly if the belt web is properly worn. Incorrect sitting positions substantially reduce the pro- tective function of seat belts and, therefore, increase the risk of severe or even lethal inju- ries. The risk of severe or fatal injuries is espe- cially heightened when a deploying airbag strikes a vehicle occupant who has assumed an incorrect sitting position. The driver is re- sponsible for all people, particularly children, inside the vehicle.

The following list contains examples of incor- rect sitting positions that could be dangerous for all vehicle occupants.

When the vehicle is in motion: Never stand in the vehicle. Never stand on the seats. Never kneel on the seats. Never tilt your seat backrest too far to the rear.

14

Safe driving

Never lean against the dash panel. Never lie on the rear seats. Never sit on the front edge of a seat. Never sit sideways. Never lean out of a window. Never put your feet out of a window. Never put your feet on the dash panel. Never place your feet on the bench or on the backrest of the seat. Never travel in a footwell. Never sit on the armrests. Never travel without wearing the seat belt. Never travel in the luggage compartment.

WARNING Sitting in an incorrect position increases the risk of severe or fatal injuries in the event of accidents and sudden braking or manoeuvres. All occupants must sit correctly during the journey and wear the seat belt correct- ly. Occupants of the vehicle that are not sit- ting correctly, not wearing the seat belt or are not at a proper distance of the airbag risk suffering very serious or lethal injuries, especially if the airbags deploy and strike them.

Steering wheel position adjust- ment

Fig. 5 Lever in the lower left side of the steering column.

Adjust the steering wheel before your trip and only when the vehicle is stationary.

Pull the Fig. 5 1 lever down, move the steering wheel to the desired position and lift the lever back up until it locks.

WARNING Incorrect use of the steering wheel adjust- ment function and an incorrect adjustment of the steering wheel can result in severe or fatal injury. After adjusting the steering column, push the lever Fig. 5 1 firmly upwards to en- sure the steering wheel does not acciden- tally change position while driving.

Never adjust the steering wheel while the vehicle is in motion. If you need to adjust the steering wheel while the vehicle is in motion, stop safely and make the proper adjustment. The adjusted steering wheel should be facing your chest and not your face so as not to hinder the driver's front airbag pro- tection in the event of an accident. When driving, always hold the steering wheel with both hands on the outside of the ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions to reduce injuries when the driver's front airbag deploys. Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 o'clock position or in any other manner (e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel). In such cases, if the driver's airbag deploys, you may sustain injuries to your arms, hands and head.

Pedal area

Pedals

Ensure that you can always press the ac- celerator, brake and clutch pedals unim- paired to the floor.

Ensure that the pedals can return unim- paired to their initial positions.

15

Safety

Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas- tened during the trip and do not obstruct the pedals .

Only use floor mats which leave the pedals clear and which are secured to prevent them from slipping. You can obtain suitable floor mats from a specialised dealership. Fasten- ers* for floor mats are fitted in the footwells.

If a brake circuit fails, the brake pedal must be pressed down thoroughly in order to stop the vehicle.

Wear suitable footwear Always wear shoes which support your feet properly and give you a good feeling for the pedals.

WARNING Restricting pedal operation can lead to critical situations while driving. Never lay or fit floor mats or other floor coverings over the original floor mats. This would reduce the pedal area and could ob- struct the pedals. Risk of accident. Never place objects in the driver footwell. An object could move into the pedal area and impair pedal operation.

Seat belts

The whys and wherefores of seat belts

Control lamps

It lights up red

Driver or passenger has not fastened seat belt.

The control lamp lights up to remind the driver to fasten their seat belt.

Before starting the vehicle:

Fasten your seat belt securely. Instruct your passengers to fasten their seat belts properly before driving off. Protect children by using a child seat ac- cording to the child's height and weight page 30.

When starting to drive, if the vehicle's speed exceeds approx. 25 km/h (15 mph) and the seat belts are not fastened or are unfastened while driving, a warning sound will be heard for a few seconds. The warning light will also flash .

The lamp goes out when the driver and passenger seat belts are fastened with the ignition switched on.

Rear seat belts fastened display*

Fig. 6 Instrument panel: left rear seat occu- pied and corresponding seat belt fastened dis- play.

Depending on the model version, when the ignition is switched on, the seat belt status display Fig. 6 on the instrument panel in- forms the driver whether the passengers in the rear seats have fastened their seat belts.

It indicates that the corresponding seat is empty. Indicates that the seat is occupied and the occupant is wearing the seat belt.

The seat belt status flashes for a maximum of 30 seconds when a seat belt in the rear seats is unfastened while the vehicle is in motion. An audible warning will also be heard if the vehi- cle is travelling at over 25 km/h (15 mph).

If a seat belt is fastened or unfastened while driving in some of the rear seats, the seat belt

16

Seat belts

status is displayed for approximately 30 sec- onds. The indication can be hidden by press- ing the button on the dash panel.

The protective function of seat belts

Fig. 7 Drivers with properly worn seat belts will not be thrown forward in the event of sudden braking.

Properly worn seat belts hold the occupants in the proper position. They also help prevent uncontrolled movements that may result in serious injury and reduce the risk of being thrown out of the vehicle in case of an acci- dent.

Vehicle occupants wearing their seat belts correctly benefit greatly from the ability of the belts to absorb kinetic energy. In addition, the front part of your vehicle and other pas- sive safety features (such as the airbag sys-

tem) are designed to absorb the kinetic ener- gy released in a collision. Taken together, all these features reduce the releasing kinetic energy and consequently, the risk of injury. This is why it is so important to fasten seat belts before every trip, even when "just driving around the corner".

Ensure that your passengers wear their seat belts as well. Accident statistics have shown that wearing seat belts is an effective means of substantially reducing the risk of injury and improving the chances of survival when in- volved in a serious accident. Furthermore, properly worn seat belts improve the protec- tion provided by airbags in the event of an accident. For this reason, wearing a seat belt is required by law in most countries.

Although your vehicle is equipped with air- bags, the seat belts must be fastened and worn. The front airbags, for example, are only triggered in some cases of head-on collision. The front airbags will not be triggered during minor frontal or side collisions, rear-end colli- sions, overturns or accidents in which the air- bag trigger threshold value in the control unit is not exceeded.

Important safety instructions for the use of seat belts

Always wear the seat belt as described in this section.

Ensure that the seat belts can be fastened at all times and are not damaged.

WARNING If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe injuries increases. The optimal protection from seat belts can be achieved only if you use them properly. Never allow two passengers (even chil- dren) to share the same seat belt. Never unbuckle a seat belt while the ve- hicle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury. The seat belt should never lie on hard or fragile objects (such as glasses or pens, etc.) because this can cause injuries. Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged or jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges. Never wear the seat belt under the arm or in any other incorrect position. Bulky and unfastened clothing (such as an overcoat over a sweater) impairs the proper fit and function of the seat belts, re- ducing their capacity to protect. The slot in the seat belt buckle must not be blocked with paper or other objects, as this can prevent the latch plate from en- gaging securely. Never use seat belt clips, fastening rings or similar items to alter the position of the belt webbing. Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to the connections, belt retractors or parts of

17

Safety

the buckle could cause severe injuries in the event of an accident. Therefore, you must check the condition of all seat belts at regular intervals. Seat belts which have been worn in an accident and have been stretched must be replaced by a specialised workshop. Re- newal may be necessary even if there is no apparent damage. The belt anchorage should also be checked. Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat belt yourself. The seat belts must not be re- moved or modified in any way. The belts must be kept clean, otherwise the retractors may not work properly.

Head-on collisions and the laws of physics

Fig. 8 A driver not wearing a seat belt is thrown forward violently.

Fig. 9 The unbelted passenger in the rear seat is thrown forward violently, hitting the driver who is wearing a seat belt.

The effects of the laws of physics in the case of a head-on collision are easy to explain: the moment a vehicle starts moving, a type of en- ergy called kinetic energy starts acting on both the vehicle and its passengers.

The amount of kinetic energy depends on the speed of the vehicle and on the weight of the vehicle and of its passengers. The higher they are, the more energy there is to be ab- sorbed in the event of an accident.

The most significant factor, however, is the speed of the vehicle. If the speed doubles from 25 km/h (15 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph), for example, the corresponding kinetic ener- gy is multiplied by four.

Given that the passengers of the vehicle in our example do not have their seat belts fas- tened, in the event of a collision the entire

amount of the passengers' kinetic energy will be only absorbed by the mentioned impact.

Even at speeds of 30 km/h (19 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph), the forces acting on bod- ies in a collision can easily exceed one tonne (1000 kg). At greater speed these forces are even higher.

Vehicle occupants not wearing seat belts are not attached to the vehicle. In a head-on collision, they will move forward at the same speed their vehicle was travelling just before the impact. This example applies not only to head-on collisions, but to all accidents and collisions.

Even at low speeds the forces acting on the body in a collision are so great that it is not possible to brace oneself with one's hands. In a frontal collision, unbelted passengers are thrown forward and will make violent contact with the steering wheel, dash panel, wind- screen or whatever else is in the way Fig. 8.

It is also important for rear passengers to wear seat belts properly, as they could other- wise be thrown forward violently through the vehicle interior in an accident. Passengers in the rear seats who do not use seat belts en- danger not only themselves but also the front occupants Fig. 9.

18

Seat belts

How to properly adjust your seat belt

Fastening and unfastening the seat belt

Fig. 10 Insert the latch plate of the seat belt into the buckle.

Fig. 11 Release the seat belt's buckle.

Properly worn seat belts hold the vehicle oc- cupants in the position that most protects them in the event of an accident or sudden braking .

Fastening the seat belt Fasten your seat belt before each trip.

Adjust the front seat and headrest correctly page 13. Engage the seat backrest of the rear seat in an upright position . Pull the latch plate and place the belt web- bing evenly across your chest and lap. Do not twist the seat belt when doing so . Engage the latch plate in the buckle of the corresponding seat Fig. 10. Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is securely engaged in the buckle.

Releasing the seat belt Only unfasten the seat belt when the vehicle has come to a standstill .

Press the red button on the buckle Fig. 11. The latch plate is released from the buckle. Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls up easily and the trim will not be damaged.

WARNING The seat belt cannot offer its full protec- tion unless the seat backrest is in an up- right position and the seat belt is worn cor- rectly, according to your size. Unbuckling your seat belt while the vehi- cle is in motion can cause severe or fatal injuries in the event of an accident or sud- den braking. The seat belt itself, or a loose seat belt, can cause severe injuries if the belt moves from hard areas of the body to soft areas (e.g. the stomach).

19

Safety

Correct seat belt position

Fig. 12 Correct seat belt and headrest posi- tions, viewed from front and the side.

Fig. 13 Position of seat belt during pregnancy.

Seat belts offer their maximum protection in the event of an accident and reduce the risk of sustaining severe or fatal injuries only when they are properly positioned. Furthermore, if the webbing is correctly positioned, the seat

belt will hold the vehicle occupants in the op- timum position to ensure the airbag provides the maximum protection. The seat belt must therefore always be worn and the webbing correctly positioned.

Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause severe or even fatal injuries page 13, Correct sit- ting position of vehicle occupants.

The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie on the centre of the shoulder, never across the neck or the arm, under the arm or behind the shoulder. The lap part of the seat belt must lie across the pelvis, never across the stomach. The seat belt must lie flat and fit comforta- bly. Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up any slack.

In the case of pregnant women, the seat belt must lie evenly across the chest and as low as possible over the pelvis, never across the stomach and must be worn properly at all times during the pregnancy Fig. 13.

Adapting the position of the belt webbing to your size The position of the seat belt can be adapted by adjusting the height of the front seats.

WARNING An incorrectly worn seat belt web can cause severe or fatal injuries in the event of an accident. The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie on the centre of the shoulder, never across the neck or the arm. The seat belt must lie flat and fit comfort- ably on the torso The lap part of the seat belt must lie across the pelvis, never across the stom- ach. The seat belt must lie flat and fit com- fortably on the pelvis Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up any slack. For pregnant women, the lap part of the seat belt must lie as low as possible over the pelvis and always lie flat, surrounding the stomach Fig. 13. Do not twist the seat belt while it is fas- tened. Once the seat belt is positioned correct- ly, don't pull it away from your body with your hand. Do not lie the seat belt across rigid or fragile objects, e.g. glasses, pens or keys. Never use seat belt clips, retaining rings or similar instruments to alter the position of the belt webbing.

Note If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the correct position of the

20

Seat belts

belt webbing, contact a specialised work- shop for help with any special devices to ensure the optimum protection of the seat belt and airbag. SEAT recommends taking your car in for technical service.

Seat belt tensioners

How the seat belt tensioner works

The seat belts for the front seats and the side rear seats1) are equipped with belt tensioners.

The belt tensioners are activated by sensors, although only in severe head-on, lateral and rear-end collisions.

This retracts and tightens the seat belts, re- ducing the forward motion of the occupants.

The belt pre-tensioners work in combination with the airbag system. In case of overturn, the pre-tensioners do not activate unless the head airbags are deployed.

Reversible seat belt tensioning In specific driving situations, a reversible ten- sioning of the seat belts might take place page 22. For example:

in the event of sudden brakes

in the event of oversteering or understeer- ing in the event of minor collisions

Note If the seat belt tensioners are triggered, a fine dust is produced. This is normal and it is not an indication of fire in the vehicle. The relevant safety requirements must be observed when the vehicle or components of the system are scrapped. Specialised workshops are familiar with these regula- tions, which are also available to you.

Maintenance and disposal of seat belt tensioners

The belt tensioners are components of the seat belts that are installed in the seats of your vehicle. If you work on the belt tension- ers or remove and install parts of the system when performing other repair work, the seat belt may be damaged. The consequence may be that, in the event of an accident, the belt tensioners function incorrectly or may not function at all.

So that the effectiveness of the seat belt ten- sioner is not reduced and that removed parts do not cause any injuries or environmental

pollution, regulations, which are known to the specialised workshops, must be observed.

WARNING Improper use or repairs not carried out by qualified mechanics increase the risk of se- vere or fatal injuries. The belt tensioners may fail to trigger or may trigger in the wrong circumstances. The seat belt tensioner, seat belt and au- tomatic retractor cannot be repaired. Any work on the belt tensioners and seat belts, including the removal and refitting of system parts in conjunction with other re- pair work, must be performed by a special- ised workshop only. The belt tensioners will only provide pro- tection for one accident and must be changed if they have been activated.

For the sake of the environment Airbag modules and belt tensioners may contain perchlorate. Observe the legal re- quirements for their disposal.

1) Depending on version/market. 21

Safety

PreCrash system*

How it works

The PreCrash system is an assistance system that actives a series of measures to protect the occupants of the vehicles in potentially risky situations, but which cannot prevent a collision.

It only works completely if no special driving profile is selected and if there are no operat- ing anomalies.

Basic features Depending on the legal provisions of the country and the features of the vehicle, in crit- ical situations (e.g. in certain cases of emer- gency braking or loss of control of the vehicle by the driver) the following functions can be activated separately or at the same time when the vehicle is travelling faster than ap- proximately 30 km/h (20 mph).

Reversible tensioning of front seat belts that are fastened. Operation of the hazard warning lights. Automatic closing of the windows until they are just cracked open and, depending on the equipment, of the sunroof.

Depending on how critical the driving situa- tion is, the belts are either tightened individu- ally, or both belts at the same time.

In addition to Front Assist In vehicles with Front Assist page 242, within the limits of the system, information is assessed on the risk of collision with the vehi- cle in front. The functions of the PreCrash system may also be activated if there is a high likelihood of a rear-end collision, or dur- ing the activation of Front Assist.

In addition to Side Assist In vehicles with lane assist page 259, with- in the limitations of each system, information is assessed on the risk of collision with traffic to the rear of the vehicle. If a rear-end colli- sion is highly likely, the functions of the PreCrash system may also be activated. In this situation, the hazard warning lights are turned on with a higher frequency of flashes.

In addition to the Emergency Assist system In vehicles with emergency assist, driver sta- tus information is assessed within the limita- tions of this system. The following PreCrash systems may be activated if a lack of activity is detected:

Reversible seat belt tensioning of the driv- er's seat belt. Automatic closing of the windows until they are just cracked open and, depending on the equipment, of the sunroof.

Activation of the PreCrash system The PreCrash system can be partially deacti- vated by deactivating the traction and / or stability control, depending on the equip- ment. When these vehicle safety controls are switched on (by default, every time the igni- tion is turned on), the system is fully activated.

Driving profile selection settings In vehicles with driving profile selection, PreCrash adapts to suit the special vehicle configuration of the corresponding profile page 229.

Limited operation The PreCrash system is not available or only has limited availability in the following situa- tions:

When the ASR and/or the ESC are discon- nected. When driving in reverse. When the airbag control unit is not operat- ing properly. When there is a fault in the system itself, in the ESC or in the Front Assist.

Problems and solutions If the PreCrash is not working correctly, the message System unavailable or System

22

Airbag system

with limited features is shown perma- nently on the dashboard display. Have the system checked by a SEAT workshop.

WARNING The PreCrash system cannot overcome the limits imposed by the laws of physics; it on- ly works within the limits of the system. Risks that compromise safety are never jus- tified by the use of this system. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness and cannot prevent a collision. Adapt your speed and safe distance to the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit the visibility, weather, road and traffic con- ditions. The system is not always able to recog- nise objects. The system may not react to people or animals or objects that cross length-wise or that are hard to detect. Metallic objects (e.g. fences) or other el- ements of the public road or adverse weather conditions can hinder its operation and thus its ability to detect collision risk. Never ignore the warning lamps that light up or the messages shown on the dash- board.

WARNING Distracting the driver in any way can lead to an accident and cause injuries.

Never change settings on the Infotain- ment System while driving.

Airbag system

Brief introduction

Why is it so important to wear a seat belt and to sit correctly?

For the inflating airbags to achieve the best protection, the seat belt must always be worn properly and the correct sitting position must be assumed.

The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts, but it is an integral part of the vehicle's overall passive safety system. Please bear in mind that the airbag system can only work effectively when the vehicle occupants are wearing their seat belts correctly and have adjusted the headrests properly. Therefore, it is most important to properly wear the seat belts at all times, not only because this is re- quired by law in most countries, but also for your safety page 16, The whys and wherefores of seat belts.

The airbag inflates in a matter of seconds, so if you are not properly seated when the air- bag is triggered, you may sustain fatal inju- ries. Therefore, it is essential that all vehicle occupants assume a correct sitting position while travelling.

Sharp braking before an accident may cause a passenger not wearing a seat belt to be

23

Safety

thrown forward into the area of the deploying airbag. In this case, the inflating airbag may inflict critical or fatal injuries on the occupant. This also applies to children.

Always maintain the greatest possible dis- tance between yourself and the front airbag. This way, the front airbags can completely deploy when triggered, providing their maxi- mum protection.

The most important factors for triggering the airbag are the type of accident, the angle of impact and the vehicle speed.

Whether or not the airbags are activated de- pends primarily on the vehicle deceleration rate resulting from the collision and detected by the control unit. If the vehicle deceleration occurring during the collision and measured by the control unit remains below the speci- fied reference values, the front, side and/or head-protection airbags will not be triggered. Take into account that the visible damage in a vehicle involved in an accident, no matter how serious, is not a determining factor for the airbags to have been activated.

WARNING Wearing the seat belt incorrectly or as- suming an incorrect sitting position can lead to critical or fatal injuries. All vehicle occupants, including children, who are not properly belted can sustain critical or fatal injuries if the airbag is trig-

gered. Children up to 12 years old should always travel on the rear seat. Never trans- port children in the vehicle if they are not restrained or the restraint system is not ap- propriate for their age, size or weight. To reduce the risk of injury from an inflat- ing airbag, always wear the seat belt prop- erly page 16.

Description of the airbag system

The airbag system offers additional protec- tion for the occupants in combination with the seat belts.

The airbag system comprises the follow- ing modules (as per vehicle equipment): Electronic control unit Front airbags for driver and passenger Knee airbag for the driver Side airbags Head airbag Airbag control lamp on the instrument panel page 25 Key-operated switch for front passenger airbag Control lamp for disabled/enabled status of the front passenger airbag.

The airbag system operation is monitored electronically. The airbag control lamp will il- luminate for a few seconds every time the ig- nition is switched on (self-diagnosis).

There is a fault in the system if the control lamp : does not light up when the ignition is switched on page 25, turns off after 4 seconds after the ignition is switched on, turns off and then lights up again after the ignition is switched on, illuminates or flashes while the vehicle is moving.

The airbag system is not triggered if: the ignition is switched off there is a minor frontal collision there is a minor side collision there is a rear-end collision the vehicle turns over.

WARNING The seat belts and airbags can only pro- vide maximum protection if the occupants are seated correctly page 13. If a fault has occurred in the airbag sys- tem, have the system checked immediately by a specialised workshop. Otherwise there is a danger that during a collision, the

24

Airbag system

system may fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly.

Airbag activation

The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, within thousands of a second, to provide additional protection in the event of an accident. A fine dust may develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and it is not an indication of fire in the vehicle.

The airbag system is only ready to function when the ignition is on.

In special accidents instances, several air- bags may activate at the same time.

In the event of minor head-on and side colli- sions, rear-end collisions, overturning or roll- over of the vehicle, airbags do not activate.

Activation factors The conditions that lead to the airbag system activating in each situation cannot be gener- alised. Some factors play an important role, such as the properties of the object the vehi- cle hits (hard/soft), angle of impact, vehicle speed, etc.

Deceleration trajectory is key for airbag acti- vation.

The control unit analyses the collision trajec- tory and activates the respective restraint system.

If the deceleration rate is below the prede- fined reference value in the control unit the airbags will not be triggered, even though the accident may cause extensive damage to the car.

The following airbags are triggered in seri- ous head-on collisions: Driver airbag. Front passenger front airbag Knee airbag for the driver.*

The following airbags are triggered in seri- ous side-on collisions: Front side airbag on the side of the acci- dent. Curtain (head) airbag on the side of the ac- cident.

In an accident with airbag activation: the interior lights switch on (if the interior light switch is in the courtesy light position); the hazard warning lights switch on; all doors are unlocked; the fuel supply to the engine is cut; an emergency call is started* page 40.

Operation of the airbags

Airbag system control lamps

It lights up on the combi-instru- ment

Fault in the airbag system and seat belt tensioners . Have the system checked immediately by a special- ised workshop.

It lights up on the dash panel

Fault in the airbag system. Have the system checked immediately by a special- ised workshop.

Front passenger front airbag deactivated. Check if the airbag should be kept deactivated

It lights up on the dash panel

Front passenger front airbag activated. The control lamp turns off automatically 60 seconds after the ignition is switched on

Several warning and control lamps light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- ed on, signalling that the function is being verified. They will switch off after a few sec- onds.

If the airbag and seat belt tensioner system control lamp remains on or flashes, it indi- cates a malfunction in the airbag and seat belt tensioner system . Have the system

25

Safety

checked immediately by a specialised work- shop.

If the front passenger airbag is deactivated, the warning lamp re- mains lit on the dash panel to remind you that the airbag is deactivated. If, with the front passenger airbag deactivated, this lamp does not remain lit or if it is lit along with the control lamp on the instrument panel, there is a fault in the airbag system . If the control lamp is flashing, there is a fault in the disabling of the airbag system . Have the system checked immediately by a speci- alised workshop.

WARNING In the event of a fault in the airbag and seat belt tensioner system, the airbags and seat belts may not trigger correctly, may fail to trigger or may even trigger unexpectedly. The vehicle occupants run the risk of sus- taining severe or fatal injuries. Have the system checked immediately by a special- ised workshop. Do not mount a child seat in the front passenger seat or remove the mounted child seat! The front passenger front airbag may deploy during an accident in spite of the fault.

CAUTION Always pay attention to any lit control lamps and to the corresponding descrip-

tions and instructions to avoid damage to the vehicle or harm to the occupants.

Front airbags

Fig. 14 Driver airbag located in steering wheel.

Fig. 15 Front passenger airbag located in dash panel.

The driver's front airbag is housed in the steering wheel and that of the front passen- ger, on the dash panel. Airbags are identified by the word AIRBAG.

The airbag covers fold open and remain at- tached to the steering wheel Fig. 14 and the dash panel Fig. 15when the driver and front passenger airbags, respectively, are triggered.

In conjunction with the seat belts, the front airbag system gives the front occupants ad- ditional protection for the head and chest in the event of a severe frontal collision .

Their special design allows the controlled es- cape of the propellant gas when an occu- pant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and chest are protected by the airbag. After the collision, the airbag deflates suffi- ciently to allow visibility.

WARNING The deployment space between the front passengers and the airbags must not in any case be occupied by other passenger, pets and objects. The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have deployed. It is also important not to attach any ob- jects such as cup holders or telephone mountings to the surfaces covering the air- bag units.

26

Airbag system

Activate and deactivate front pas- senger front airbag*

Fig. 16 Switch for activating and deactivating the front passenger airbag.

Fig. 17 Dash panel: control lamp for the deac- tivation of the front passenger front airbag.

Deactivate the front passenger front airbag only if you have to use a rear-facing child seat in the front passenger seat.

SEAT recommends fitting the child seat in the rear seat to avoid having to deactivate the front passenger airbag.

When the front passenger airbag is deacti- vated, this means that only the front passen- ger front airbag is deactivated. All the other airbags in the vehicle remain activated.

Deactivate and activate the front passen- ger front airbag Switch the ignition off. Open the door on the front passenger side. Insert the key into the slot of the switch for deactivating the front passenger airbag Fig. 16. About 3/4 of the key should enter; this is as far as it will go. Turn the key gently to change its position to (deactivate) or to (activate). If you have difficulty, ensure that you have inserted the key as far as it will go. Close the front passenger door. When deactivating the airbag, switch the ignition on and check that the control lamp with the lettering re- mains lit in the middle of the dash panel Fig. 17. When reactivating the airbag, check that when the ignition is switched on, the control lamp does not light up and the lamp lights up for 60 seconds and then turns off.

WARNING The driver of the vehicle is responsible for disabling or switching on the airbag. Always switch off the ignition before dis- abling the front passenger airbag! Failure to do so could result in a fault in the airbag deactivation system. Never leave the key in the airbag disa- bling switch as it could get damaged or en- able or disable the airbag during driving. If for any reason an airbag is deactivated, reactivate it as soon as possible so that it can fulfil its protective function.

27

Safety

Knee airbag*

Fig. 18 On the driver side: location of the knee airbag

Fig. 19 On the driver side: airbag action radius for the knees.

The knee airbag is located on the driver side below the dash panel Fig. 18. Airbags are identified by the word AIRBAG.

The area framed in red (deployment area) Fig. 19 is covered by the knee airbag when

it is deployed. Objects should never be placed or mounted in this area.

WARNING The knee airbag is deployed in front of the driver's knees. Always keep the deploy- ment areas of the knee airbags free. Never not fix objects to the cover or in the deployment area of the knee airbag. Adjust the driver's seat so that there is a distance of at least 10 cm (4 inches) be- tween your knees and the location of the this airbag. If your physical constitution prevents you from meeting these require- ments, make sure you contact a special- ised workshop.

Side airbags*

Fig. 20 Side airbag in driver's seat.

Fig. 21 Illustration of completely inflated side airbags on the left side of the vehicle.

The side airbags are located in the driver's seat and front passenger seat backrests Fig. 20.

The locations are identified by the text AIR- BAG in the upper region of the backrests.

In conjunction with the seat belts, the side air- bag system provides additional protection for the upper body in the event of a severe side collision .

In a side collision, the side airbags reduce the risk of injury to passengers to the areas of the body facing the impact. In addition to their normal protection, the seat belts also hold the passengers in the event of a side collision; this is how these airbags provide maximum protection.

28

Airbag system

WARNING If you do not wear a seat belt, if you lean forward, or are not seated correctly while the vehicle is in motion, you are at a greater risk of injury if the side airbag system is triggered in an accident. In order for the side airbags to provide their maximum protection, the prescribed sitting position must always be maintained with seat belts fastened while travelling. In a side-on collision the side airbags will not work if the sensors do not correctly measure the pressure increase on the inte- rior of the doors, due to air escaping through the areas with holes or openings in the door panel. Never drive if the interior door panels have been removed or if the panels have not been correctly fitted. Never drive the vehicle if the loudspeak- ers in the door panels have been removed, unless the holes left by the loudspeakers have been closed properly. Always check that the openings are closed or covered if loudspeakers or other equipment are fitted inside the door pan- els. Occupants of the outer seats must never carry any objects or pets in the deploy- ment space between them and the airbags, or allow children or other passengers to travel in this position. It is also important not to attach any accessories (such as cup

holders) to the doors. This would impair the protection offered by the side airbags. The built-in coat hooks should be used only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets. Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks, must not be exerted upon the backrest bol- ster because the system may be damaged. In this case, the side airbags would not be triggered. Under no circumstances should protec- tive covers be fitted over seats with side airbags unless the covers have been ap- proved for use in your vehicle. Because the airbag deploys from the side of the back- rest, the use of conventional seat covers would obstruct the side airbag, seriously reducing the airbag's effectiveness. Any damage to the original seat uphols- tery or around the seams of the side airbag units must be repaired immediately by a specialised workshop. The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have deployed. Any work on the side airbag system or re- moval and installation of the airbag com- ponents for other repairs (such as removal of the front seat) should only be performed by a specialised workshop. Otherwise, faults may occur during the airbag system operation.

Head-protection airbags*

Fig. 22 Location of head-protection airbags.

The head-protection airbags are located on both sides in the interior above the doors Fig. 22 and are identified with the text AIR- BAG.

In conjunction with the seat belts, the head- protection airbag system gives the vehicle occupants additional protection for the head and upper body in the event of a severe side collision .

The area framed in red is covered by the head-protection airbag when it is deployed Fig. 22 (deployment area). Therefore, ob- jects should never be placed or mounted in this area .

In the event of a side collision the head-pro- tection airbag is triggered on the impact side of the vehicle.

29

Safety

The head-protection airbags reduce the risk of injury to passengers in the front and rear side seats facing the impact.

WARNING In order for the head-protection airbags to provide their maximum protection, the prescribed sitting position must always be maintained with seat belts fastened while travelling. For safety reasons, the head-protection airbag must be disabled in those vehicles fitted with a screen dividing the interior of the vehicle. See your technical service to make this adjustment. There must be no other persons, animals or objects between the occupants of the outer seats and the deployment space of the head-protection airbags so that the head-protection airbag can deploy com- pletely without restriction and provide the greatest possible protection. Therefore, sun blinds which have not been expressly approved for use in your vehicle may not be attached to the side windows. The built-in coat hooks should be used only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets. Please, do not hang the clothes on coat hangers. The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have deployed.

Any work on the head-protection airbag system or removal and installation of the airbag components for other repairs (such as removal of the roof lining) should only be performed by a specialised workshop. Otherwise, faults may occur during the air- bag system operation. The side and head airbags are managed through sensors located in the interior of the front doors. To ensure the correct oper- ation of the side and head-protection air- bags neither the doors nor the door panels should be modified in any way (e.g. fitting loudspeakers). If the front door is dam- aged, the airbag system may not work cor- rectly. All work carried out on the front door must be done in a specialised workshop.

Transporting children safely

Child safety

Introduction

For safety reasons, as we have learned from accident statistics, we recommend that chil- dren under 12 years of age travel in the rear seats. Depending on their age, height and weight, children travelling in rear seats must use a child seat or a seat belt. For safety rea- sons, the child seat should be installed in the rear seat, behind the front passenger seat or in the centre back seat.

The physical laws involved and the forces acting in a collision apply also to children page 18. But unlike adults, children do not have fully developed muscle and bone struc- tures. This means that children are subject to a greater risk of injury.

To reduce the risk of injuries, children must al- ways use special child restraint systems when travelling in the vehicle.

These systems have been especially de- signed and approved, complying with the ECE-R44. regulation.

SEAT recommends securing the child seats shown on the website as described below:

30

Transporting children safely

Child seats in the opposite direction of trav- el (group 0+): ISOFIX and support bracket (Peke G0 Plus + ISOFIX Base (RWF)). Child seats in the direction of travel (group 1): ISOFIX and Top Tether (Peke G1 ISOFIX DUO Plus). Child seats directed towards the front of the vehicle (group 2): safety belt and ISOFIX (ROMER BRITAX KIDFIX2 S). Child seats facing in the direction of travel (group 3): with safety belt (ROMER BRITAX KIDFIX2 S).

Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory requirements when in- stalling and using child seats. Always read and note page 32.

We recommend you always carry the manu- facturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual to- gether with the on-board documentation.

Child seats group classification

Fig. 23 Examples of child seats.

Use only child seats that are officially ap- proved and suitable for the child.

These seats are subject to the ECE-R44 or ECE-R129 standards. ECE-R stands for: Eco- nomic Commission for Europe Regulation.

Child seats by weight group The child seats are grouped into 5 catego- ries:

Age group Weight of the child

Group 0 Up to 10 kg

Group 0+ Up to 13 kg

Group 1 From 9 to 18 kg

Group 2 From 15 to 25 kg

Group 3 From 22 to 36 kg

Child seats that have been tested and ap- proved under the ECE R44 or ECE-R129 standards bear the ECE-R44 or ECE-R129 test marks on the seat (the letter E in a circle with the test number below it).

Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory requirements when in- stalling and using child seats.

We recommend you to always include the manufacturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual together with the on-board documentation.

SEAT recommends you use child seats from the Original Accessories Catalogue. These child seats have been designed and tested for use in SEAT vehicles. You can find the right child seat for your model and age group at SEAT dealers.

Child seats by approval category Child seats may have the approval category of universal, semi-universal, vehicle specific (all according to the ECE-R44 standard) or i- Size (according to the ECE-R129 standard).

Universal: child seats with universal appro- val can be installed in all vehicles. There is no need to consult any list of models. In the case of universal approval for ISOFIX, the child seat is additionally provided with a Top Tether belt. Semi-universal: semi-universal approval, in addition to the standard requirements of

31

Safety

universal approval, requires safety devices to lock the child seat, which require additional testing. Child seats with semi-universal ap- proval include a list of vehicle models for which they can be installed. Vehicle-specific: vehicle-specific approval requires a dynamic test of the child seat for each vehicle model separately. Child seats with vehicle-specific approval also include a list of vehicle models for which they can be installed. i-Size: child seats with i-Size approval must meet the requirements set out in the ECE- R129 standard in relation to installation and safety. Child seat manufacturers can tell you which seats have i-Size approval for this vehi- cle.

Fitting and using child seats

Fig. 24 Airbag sticker: on the passengers sun visor

Fig. 25 Airbag sticker: on the rear frame of the passenger side door

Warnings about fitting a child seat Take the following general warnings into ac- count if you are going to fit a child seat. They are valid for all child seats regardless of their attachment system.

Please read and follow the child seat man- ufacturer's operating instructions. The child seat should preferably be fitted to the rear seat behind the front passenger seat so that the child can exit the vehicle on the pavement side. Set the height of the seat belt such that it adapts to the child seat naturally, without twisting. The lowest position of the seat belt height regulator must be used with rear-fac- ing child seats. To correctly use a child seat in the back, the front backrest must be adjusted so that there is no contact with the child seat in the back in the case that it goes opposite to the direction of the car. In the case of front facing restraint systems, the front backrest must be adjusted so that there is no contact with the child's feet. If a semi-universal type chair is to be instal- led, in which the method of attachment to the car is through the seat belt and support

32

Transporting children safely

bracket, it should never be installed in the central rear seat as the ground clearance is lower than in other places and the support bracket will not allow the seat to remain suffi- ciently stable. When fitting a child seat on the front pas- senger seat, the seat must be moved back- wards as far as possible and placed in the highest position. The backrest must also be put in a vertical position1).

Important information about the front pas- senger front airbag A sticker with important information about the passenger airbag is located on the passeng- er's sun visor and/or on the passenger side door frame Fig. 24.

Read and always observe the safety informa- tion included in the following chapters:

Safety distance with respect to the passen- ger airbag page 23. Objects between the passenger and the passenger side airbag in Front airbags on page 26.

The passenger side front airbag, when ena- bled, is a serious risk for a child that is facing backward since the airbag can strike the seat

with such force that it can cause serious or fatal injuries. Children up to 12 years old should always travel on the rear seat.

Therefore we strongly recommend you to transport children on the rear seats. This is the safest location in the vehicle. Alternative- ly, the front passenger airbag can be disa- bled with a key-operated switch page 27. When transporting children, use a child seat suitable for the age and size of each child page 31.

WARNING If a child seat is secured to the front pas- senger seat, the risk to the child of sustain- ing critical or fatal injuries in the event of an accident increases. An inflating front passenger airbag can strike the rear-facing child seat and project it with great force against the door, the roof or the backrest. Never install a child seat facing back- wards on the front passenger seat unless the front passenger front airbag has been disabled. Risk of potentially fatal injuries to the child! However, if necessary, the front passenger front airbag must be deactiva- ted page 27. If the passenger seat has a height adjustment option, move it to the

highest, most upright position. If you have a fixed seat, do not install any child restraint system in this location. For those vehicles that do not include a key lock switch to deactivate the airbag, the vehicle must be taken to a technical service. Do not forget to reconnect the air- bag when an adult wants to sit in the front passenger seat. Never allow a child to be transported in a vehicle without being properly secured, or to stand up or kneel on a seat while travel- ling. In an accident, the child could be flung through the vehicle, causing possibly fatal injuries to themselves and to the other vehi- cle occupants. Never leave a child alone in the child seat or in the vehicle. Children who are less than 1.5 metres tall must not wear a normal seat belt without a child seat, as this could cause injuries to the abdominal and neck areas during a sudden braking manoeuvre or in an acci- dent. When a child seat is mounted in the rear seats, the door child-proof lock should be activated page 110.

1) Compliance with current national legislation and the manufacturer's instructions is required when using or installing child seats.

33

Safety

Attachment systems

Depending on the country, different attach- ment systems are used for safely installing child seats.

Attachment systems overview ISOFIX: ISOFIX is a standardised attach- ment system allowing quick and safe attach- ment of child seats in the vehicle. ISOFIX at- tachment establishes a rigid connection be- tween the child seat and the car body.

The child seat has two rigid attachment clips, called connectors. These connectors are fit- ted into the ISOFIX attachment rings found between the seat cushion and the backrest of the vehicle's back seat (on the sides). ISO- FIX attachment systems are used mainly in Europe page 35. If necessary, ISOFIX at- tachment may have to be supplemented with a Top Tether belt or a support bracket.

Automatic three-point seat belt. When- ever possible, it is preferable to attach the child seats with the ISOFIX system rather than attaching them with an automatic three-point seat belt page 38.

Additional attachment:

Top Tether: the Top Tether belt is guided over the back of the rear seat and attached to an anchor point with a hook. Anchor points are located at the back of the rear seat back- rest on the boot side page 37. The rings for retaining the Top Tether belt are marked with an anchor symbol. Support bracket: some child seats rest on the floor of the vehicle with a support bracket. The support bracket prevents the child seat from tipping forward in the event of impact. Child seats fitted with a support bracket should only be used in the passenger seat and side rear seats . For the assembly of

this type of seat you should also consult the list of approved vehicles for this assembly, available in the instructions for child restraint systems.

Recommended systems for attaching child seats SEAT recommends attaching child seats as follows:

Baby carriers or child seats in the oppo- site direction of travel: ISOFIX and support bracket or i-Size. Child seats in the direction of travel: ISO- FIX and Top Tether.

WARNING Incorrect use of the support bracket can cause serious or fatal injury. Make sure the support bracket is correct- ly and safely installed.

34

Transporting children safely

Fit a child seat with the ISOFIX / i-Size and Top Tether* system

Fig. 26 Rear seat: ISOFIX/i-Size securing rings. Fig. 27 Rear seats: fitting a child seat with the ISOFIX system.

Child seats can be secured quickly, easily and safely on the rear side seats with the ISOFIX and Top Tether* system.

Two ISOFIX retaining rings are fitted on each rear side seat. In some vehicles, the rings are

secured to the seat frame and, in others, they are secured to the rear floor. The ISOFIX rings are located between the rear seat backrest and the seat cushioning Fig. 26. The Top Tether* rings are located on the rear part of the backrests of the rear seats (be-

hind the seat backrest or in the boot) page 37.

To understand the compatibility of the ISO- FIX systems in the vehicle, check the table below.

Vehicle ISOFIX positions

Weight group Size classa) Electrical equipment

Front passenger seat Rear side seat Rear central

seatairbag enabled airbag disabled

Baby carrier F ISO/L1 X X X X

G ISO/L2 X X X X

IUF: Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX universal child restraint systems approved for use in this weight group. IL: It is suitable for certain ISOFIX child restraint systems (CRS) that can be for the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal categories. Take the child seat manufacturer's vehicle list into account. X: ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems for this weight group or size class.

35

Safety

Weight group Size classa) Electrical equipment

Front passenger seat Rear side seat Rear central

seatairbag enabled airbag disabled

Group 0 to 10 kg E ISO/R1 X X IL X

Group 0+ to 13 kg

E ISO/R1 X X IL X

D ISO/R2 X X IL X

C ISO/R3 X X IL X

Group I 9 to 18 kg

D ISO/R2 X X IL X

C ISO/R3 X X IL X

B ISO/F2 X X IUF/IL X

B1 ISO/F2X X X IUF/IL X

A ISO/F3 X X IUF/IL X

Group II 15 to 25 kg --- --- X X --- X

Group III 22 to 36 kg --- --- X X --- X

IUF: Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX universal child restraint systems approved for use in this weight group. IL: It is suitable for certain ISOFIX child restraint systems (CRS) that can be for the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal categories. Take the child seat manufacturer's vehicle list into account. X: ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems for this weight group or size class.

a) The indication of class according to size corresponds to the authorised bodyweight for the child seat. In child seats with universal or semi-universal approval, the class according to size is indicated on the ECE approval label. The indication of class according to size is stated on the corresponding child seat.

36

Transporting children safely

Vehicle i-Size positions

Front passenger seat Rear side seat Rear central seat

airbag enabled airbag disabled

X X i-U X

i-U: Position suitable for forward- or rear-facing i-Size child restraint systems with universal certification. X: Position not suitable for i-Size child restraint systems.

Securing the child seat with the ISOFIX/i- Size system You must follow the child seat manufacturer's instructions.

Press the child seat onto the ISOFIX/iSize retaining rings until the child seat is heard to engage securely Fig. 27. If the child seat is equipped with Top Tether* anchor points, se- cure it to the correspondent ring page 37. Follow the child seat manufac- turers instructions. Pull on both sides of the child seat to ensure that it is properly anchored.

Child seats with the ISOFIX and Top Tether* attachment system are available from Tech- nical Services.

WARNING The retaining rings are designed only for use with ISOFIX and Top Tether* system child seats.

Never secure other child seats that do not have the ISOFIX or Top Tether* sys- tem, or retaining belts or objects to the fas- tening rings - this can result in potentially fatal injuries to the child. Ensure that the child seat is secured cor- rectly using the ISOFIX and Top Tether* securing rings.

Top Tether* securing belts

Fig. 28 Rear seats: adjustment and assembly according to the Top Tether belt.

37

Safety

Fig. 29 Back of the rear seats: Top Tether se- curing rings.

Child seats with the Top Tether system come with a strap for securing the seat to the vehi- cle anchor point, located at the back of the rear seat backrest and provide greater re- straint.

The objective of this strap is to reduce for- ward movements of the child seat in a crash, to reduce the risk of injuries to the head from hitting the inside of the vehicle.

Using the Top Tether in rear-facing moun- ted seats Currently, there are very few rear-facing child safety seats that have Top Tether. Please carefully read and follow the seat manufac- turer instructions to learn the proper way to install the Top Tether strap.

Securing the retainer strap Follow the manufacturer's instructions to deploy the child seat Top Tether retaining strap. Place the belt under the head restraint of the back seat Fig. 28 (depending on the instructions of the chair itself, lift or remove the head restraint if necessary). Slide the strap and secure it properly with the anchorage of the backrest Fig. 29. Firmly tighten the strap following the manu- facturer's instructions.

Releasing the retaining strap Loosen the strap following the manufactur- er's instructions. Push the lock and release it from the an- choring support.

WARNING An undue installation of the safety seat will increase the risk of injury in the event of a crash. Never tie the retainer strap to a hook in the luggage compartment. Never secure or tie luggage or other items to the lower anchorages (ISOFIX) or the upper ones (Top Tether).

Fitting a child seat using the seat belt

If you want to fit a universal approval catego- ry (U) child seat in your vehicle, you must check that the seat is approved for your vehi-

cle. You will find any necessary information on the child seats orange ECE approval la-

bel. The following table shows the different fitting options.

38

Transporting children safely

Weight group Front passenger seata)

Rear side seat Rear central seatb)

Airbag enabled airbag disabledc)

Group 0 to 10 kg X U U U

Group 0+ to 13 kg X U U U

Group I 9 to 18 kg X U U U

Group II 15 to 25 kg X UF UF UF

Group III 22 to 36 kg X UF UF UF

X: Not compatible for the installation of seats install chairs in this configuration. U: Suitable for universal restraint systems for use in this weight group. UF: Acceptable for front-facing universal-category child restraint systems approved for this mass group.

a) Compliance with current national legislation and the manufacturer's instructions is required when using or installing child seats. b) For semi-universal chairs where the securing system is the car safety belt and the support bracket, do not use them in the centre rear seat. c) Seats without height adjustment should be placed in their rearmost position. Seats with height adjustment should be placed in their rearmost and highest position.

Fitting a child seat using the seat belt Set the height of the seat belt such that it adapts to the child seat naturally, without twisting. The lowest position of the seat belt height regulator must be used with rear-fac- ing child seats. Put the seat belt in place and pass it through the child seat according to the in- structions of the child seat manufacturer. Make sure that the seat belt is not twisted. Insert the latch plate into the seat's buckle until you hear the engagement click.

WARNING When travelling, children must be secured in the vehicle with a restraint system suita- ble for age, weight and size. Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of child seats page 32.

39

Emergencies

Emergencies

Self-help

Information, assistance and emergency call service*

How it works

Fig. 30 On the roof console: voice service controls

Depending on the equipment, there is a con- trol on the roof console.

By pressing the buttons , and Fig. 30, you can run the following voice services:

information call assistance call emergency call service.

A built-in control unit establishes the connec- tion.

When a voice service is activated, a connec- tion is established with a phone line.

Control lamp The control has a warning lamp Fig. 30 (arrow). It shows the following statuses:

Off: the eCall service is not available. Flashes red, approx. 20 seconds after switching on the ignition: the eCall service is off. Lights up red: system failure. The eCall service is available with certain restrictions. SEAT suggests going to a specialised work- shop. Lights up green: the eCall service is avail- able. The system works correctly. Flashes green: There is an ongoing voice connection.

Information call1)

With the information call, a call is made to SEAT, S.A. customer service.

Assistance call1)

With the assistance call you can directly re- quest specialised help in the event of a breakdown.

Parallel to the voice call, some vehicle data is transmitted, e.g. your current location.

Emergency call service1)

If an emergency call is conducted manually or activated automatically in the event of an accident with an airbag triggering, informa- tion relevant to the emergency is broadcast, e.g. the current location of the vehicle page 347.

If the call is public, the person on the other end of the line uses the language of the country in which you are located.

If the call is private, the person on the other end of the line will assist you in the language you have configured in the Infotainment sys- tem. If the configured language is not availa- ble, English will be used.

Diversion to 112 emergency number In some situations where the emergency call service is limited or cannot be carried out, an emergency call is made to 112.

1) Only available in certain countries. 40

Self-help

The following conditions may cause the emergency call service to function in a limi- ted manner or the call to be diverted to the 112 emergency number:

The emergency call is made from an area with weak or no mobile and GPS signal, as well as e.g. tunnels, between very tall build- ings, garages, underground walkways, moun- tains and valleys. In areas with sufficient mobile telephone and GPS coverage, the mobile telephone network of the telecommunications operator in question may not be available. In some countries, the emergency call serv- ice may not be available due to legal rea- sons. There is no valid license for the use of the emergency call service. The components of the vehicle required for the emergency phone call are damaged or do not get enough power. In some countries, the emergency call serv- ice may not be available and depending on the location of the vehicle, the control lamp LEDs, and even the operation of the different types of calls, could have a specific behav- iour.

Note Breakdown service and information calls can incur an additional cost on your tele- phone bill.

Emergency equipment

Vehicle tool kit

Fig. 31 Underneath the floor panel of the lug- gage compartment: vehicle tool kit.

The vehicle tool kit is located under the floor panel in the luggage compartment. To ac- cess the vehicle tools page 141.

The tool kit includes:

Adapter for the anti-theft bolt* Towing eye, removable Wheel spanner* Crank handle for jack Jack* Hook for extracting the central wheel trims* Clip for removing the wheel bolt caps

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Some of the items listed are only provided in certain model versions, or are optional extras.

WARNING When the vehicle tool kit, tyre mobility set and spare wheel are loose in the interior they can be violently thrown in case of a sudden manoeuvre or braking and espe- cially in accidents, causing serious injury. Ensure that the vehicle tool kit, the tyre mobility set and the spare wheel or tempo- rary spare wheel are safely secured in the luggage compartment.

WARNING Unsuitable or damaged vehicle tools can cause injury or accidents. Never work with inappropriate or dam- aged tools.

Note The jack does not generally require any maintenance. If required, it should be greased using universal type grease.

41

Emergencies

Tyre repairs

TMS (Tyre Mobility System)*

The Anti-puncture kit* (Tyre Mobility System) will reliably seal punctures caused by the penetration of a foreign body of up to about 4 mm in diameter. Do not remove foreign objects, e.g. screws or nails, from the tyre.

After inserting the sealant residue in the tyre, you must again check the tyre pressure about 10 minutes after starting the engine.

You should only use the tyre mobility set if the vehicle is parked in a safe place, you are fa- miliar with the procedure and you have the necessary tyre mobility set! Otherwise, you should seek professional assistance.

Do not use the tyre sealant in the following cases: If the wheel rim has been damaged. In outside temperatures below -20C (-4F). In the event of cuts or perforations in the tyre greater than 4 mm. If you have been driving with very low pres- sure or a completely flat tyre. If the sealant bottle has passed its use by date.

WARNING Using the tyre mobility system can be dan- gerous, especially when filling the tyre at the roadside. Please observe the following rules to minimise the risk of injury: Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi- ble. Park it at a safe distance from sur- rounding traffic to fill the tyre. Ensure the ground on which you park is flat and solid. All passengers and particularly children must keep a safe distance from the work area. Turn on the hazard warning lights to warn other road users. Use the tyre mobility system only if you are familiar with the necessary procedures. Otherwise, you should seek professional assistance. The tyre mobility set is intended for tem- porary emergency use only until you can reach the nearest specialised workshop. Replace the repaired tyre with the tyre mobility set as soon as possible. The sealant is a health hazard and must be cleaned immediately if it comes into contact with the skin. Always keep the tyre mobility set out of the reach of small children. Always stop the engine, apply the elec- tronic parking brake and put it in gear when using a manual gearbox, in order to reduce

the risk of involuntary movement of the ve- hicle .

WARNING A tyre filled with sealant does not have the same performance properties as a conven- tional tyre. Never drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph). Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and fast cornering. Drive for only 10 minutes at a maximum speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and then check the tyre.

For the sake of the environment Dispose of used or expired sealant observ- ing any legal requirements.

Note A new bottle of sealant can be purchased at SEAT dealerships.

Note Take into account the separate instruction manual of the tyre mobility set* manufac- turer.

42

Self-help

Anti-puncture kit contents*

Fig. 32 Standard representation: anti-punc- ture kit contents.

The anti-puncture kit is located underneath the floor covering in the luggage compart- ment. It includes the following components Fig. 32:

Valve insert remover A sticker to be adhered to the instrument cluster, within the driver's visual field, to remind that the maximum advisable speed max. 80 km/h or max. 50 mph Filler tube with cap Air compressor (depending on the ver- sion, the model may vary). ON/OFF switch

1

2

3

4

5

Air bleed screw (it can also be integrated in the inflator tube). Warning provided by tyre pressure moni- toring system (it can also be integrated in the inflator tube). Tube for inflating tyres 12 volt connector Bottle of sealant Spare tyre valve

The valve insert remover 1 has a gap at the lower end for a valve insert. The valve in- sert can only be screwed or unscrewed in this way. This also applies to its replacement part 11 .

Sealing and inflating a tyre

Sealing the tyre Unscrew the tyre valve cap and insert. Use the Fig. 32 1 tool to remove the insert. Place it on a clean surface. Shake the tyre sealant bottle vigorously Fig. 32 10 . Screw the inflator tube Fig. 32 3 into the sealant bottle. The bottle's seal will break automatically. Remove the lid from the filling tube Fig. 32 3 and screw the open end of the tube into the tyre valve.

6

7

8

9

10

11

With the bottle upside down, empty all of the contents into the tyre. Remove the bottle from the valve. Place the insert back into the tyre valve us- ing the tool Fig. 32 1 .

Inflating the tyre Screw the compressor tyre inflator tube Fig. 32 8 into the tyre valve. Check that the air bleed screw is closed Fig. 32 6 . Start the engine and leave it running. Insert the connector Fig. 32 9 into the vehicle's 12-volt socket page 151. Turn the air compressor on with the ON/OFF switch Fig. 32 5 . Keep the air compressor running until it rea- ches 2.0 to 2.5 bar (29-36 psi/200-250 kPa). A maximum of 8 minutes. Disconnect the air compressor. If it does not reach the pressure indicated, unscrew the tyre inflator tube from the valve. Move the vehicle 10m so that the sealant is distributed throughout the tyre. Screw the compressor tyre inflator into the valve. Repeat the inflation process. If the indicated pressure still cannot be reached, the tyre is too badly damaged. Stop

43

Emergencies

and request assistance from an authorised technician. Disconnect the air compressor. Unscrew the tyre inflator tube from the tyre valve. When the tyre pressure is between 2.5 and 2.0 bars, continue driving without exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph). Attach the sticker Fig. 32 2 to the instru- ment cluster, within the driver's visual field. Check the pressure again after 10 minutes page 44.

WARNING When inflating the wheel, the air compres- sor and the inflator tube may become hot. Protect hands and skin from hot parts. Do not place the hot flexible inflator tube or hot air compressor on flammable mate- rial. Allow them to cool before storing the de- vice. If it is not possible to inflate the tyre to at least 2.0 bars (29 psi / 200 kPa), the tyre is too badly damaged. The sealant is not in a good condition to seal the tyre. Do not con- tinue driving. Seek specialist assistance.

CAUTION Switch off the air compressor after a maxi- mum of 8 operational minutes to avoid overheating! Before switching on the air

compressor again, let it cool for several mi- nutes.

Check after 10 minutes of driving

Screw the inflator tube Fig. 32 5 again and check the pressure on the gauge 6 .

1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower: Stop the vehicle! The tyre cannot be sealed sufficiently with the tyre mobility set. You should obtain professional assistance .

1.4 bar (20 psi / 140 kPa) and higher: Set the tyre pressure to the correct value again. Carefully resume your journey until you reach the nearest specialised workshop with- out exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph). Have the damaged tyre replaced.

WARNING Driving with an unsealed tyre is dangerous and can cause accidents and serious in- jury. Do not continue driving if the tyre pres- sure is 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower. Seek specialist assistance.

Changing a wheel

What to do first

Park the vehicle on a horizontal surface and in a safe place as far away from traffic as possible. Apply the electronic parking brake. Switch on the hazard warning lights. Manual transmission: select the 1st gear. Automatic transmission: Move the selector lever to position P. If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it from your vehicle. Have the vehicle tool kit page 41 and the spare wheel* ready page 334. Observe the applicable legislation for each country (reflective vest, warning triangles, etc.). All occupants should leave the vehicle and wait in a safe place (for instance behind the roadside crash barrier).

WARNING Always observe the above steps and pro- tect yourself and other road users. If you change the wheel on a slope, block the wheel on the opposite side of the car with a stone or similar to prevent the vehi- cle from moving.

44

Self-help

Wheel central trim*

Fig. 33 Correct positioning of the central wheel trim for steel rims.

The central trims must be removed for access to the wheel nuts.

Removing Attach the wire hook (vehicle tools page 41) to one of the recesses of the central wheel trim and remove it.

Fitting Fit the central wheel trim onto the rim. The bottom of the S of the SEAT badge should align with the inflation valve Fig. 33 1 . Press the central trim firmly until it locks in with an audible click.

Note There is also a valve mark on the back of the central wheel trim that indicates the correct alignment.

Wheel bolt caps*

Fig. 34 Wheel: wheel nuts with caps.

Removal Fit the plastic clip (vehicle tools Fig. 31) over the cap until it clicks into place Fig. 34. Remove the cap with the plastic clip.

The caps protect the wheel nuts and should be remounted after changing the tyre.

The anti-theft wheel locking bolt has a special cap. This only fits on anti-theft locking bolts and is not for use with standard wheel nuts.

Anti-theft wheel nuts

Fig. 35 Anti-theft wheel bolt with cap and adapter.

Loosening the anti-theft wheel bolt Remove the wheel cover* or the cap*. Insert the special adapter Fig. 35 1 (ve- hicle tools page 41) onto the anti-theft wheel bolt and push it on as far as it will go. Insert the wheel brace (vehicle tools) onto the adapter as far as it will go. Remove the wheel bolt page 46.

Note Make a note of the code number of the an- ti-theft wheel bolt and keep it in a safe place, but not in your vehicle. If you need a new adapter, you can obtain it from the SEAT Official Service, indicating the code number.

45

Emergencies

Loosening wheel nuts

Fig. 36 Wheel change: loosen the wheel nuts.

Fig. 37 Wheel change: tyre valve 1 and the correct position for the anti-theft wheel locking bolt 2 or 3 .

Use only the wheel wrench belonging to the car to loosen the wheel nuts.

Loosen the wheel nuts only about one turn before raising the vehicle with the jack.

If the wheel bolt is very tight, carefully push on the end of the wheel wrench with your foot. Hold on to the vehicle for support and take care not to slip during this operation.

Loosening wheel nuts Fit the wheel wrench on as far as it will go Fig. 36. Hold the wrench at the end and rotate the bolt approximately one turn anticlock- wise .

Important information about wheel nuts Factory-fitted rims and wheel nuts are spe- cially matched during construction. There- fore, if different rims are fitted, the correct wheel nuts with the right length and heads must be used. This ensures that wheels are fitted securely and that the brake system functions correctly.

In certain circumstances, you should not even use wheel nuts from vehicles of the same model.

In wheels with full hubcaps, the anti-theft locking bolt must be threaded onto positions Fig. 37 2 or 3 , taking the tyre valves po- sition as reference 1 . Otherwise it will not be possible to mount the hubcap.

WARNING If the wheel nuts are not properly tight- ened, they could come loose while driving

and cause an accident, serious injury and loss of vehicle control. Use only wheel nuts which correspond to the rim in question. Never use different wheel nuts. Wheel nuts and threads should be clean, free of oil and grease, and it should be pos- sible to screw them easily. To loosen and tighten wheel nuts, only use the wheel wrench that came with the car from the factory. The wheel nuts should only be loosened slightly (about one turn) before raising the vehicle with the jack. Risk of accident! Never apply grease or oil to wheel nuts or to the wheel hub threads. Even if the bolts have been tightened to the prescribed tor- que, they could come loose while driving. Never loosen the screwed joints of wheel rims with bolted ring trims. If wheel nuts are tightened below the prescribed torque, the bolts and rims could come loose while driving. If tightening tor- que is too high, the wheel nuts or threads can be damaged.

46

Self-help

Raise the vehicle

Fig. 38 Jack position points.

Fig. 39 Cross member: positioning the jack on the vehicle.

Place the jack* (vehicle tools) on firm ground. If necessary use a large, strong board or similar support. If the surface is slip- pery (for example tiles) place the jack on a rubber mat or similar to prevent it from slip- ping .

Find the support point on the strut (sunken area) closest to the wheel to be changed Fig. 38. Turn the jack* crank handle, located below the strut support point, to raise it until the tab 1 Fig. 39 is below the housing provi- ded. Align the jack* so that tab 1 grips onto the housing provided on the strut and the mo- bile base 2 is resting on the ground. The base plate 2 should fall vertically with re- spect to the support point 1 . Continue turning the jack* until the wheel is slightly lifted off the ground.

WARNING The factory-supplied jack* is only de- signed for changing wheels on this model. On no account attempt to use it for lifting heavier vehicles or other loads. Risk of in- jury. Make sure that the jack* remains stable. If the surface is slippery or soft, the jack* could slip or sink, respectively, with the re- sultant risk of injury. Only raise the vehicle with the jack* sup- plied by the manufacturer. Other jacks, even those approved for other SEAT mod- els could slip, with the consequent risk of injury. Only mount the jack* on the support points designed for this purpose on the strut, and always align the jack correctly. If

you do not, the jack* could slip as it does not have an adequate grip on the vehicle: risk of injury! You should never place a body limb such as an arm or leg under a raised vehicle that is solely supported by the jack. If you have to work underneath the vehi- cle, you must use suitable stands addition- ally to support the vehicle, there is a risk of accident!. Never raise the vehicle if it is tilting to one side or the engine is running. Never start the engine when the vehicle is raised. The vehicle may come loose from the jack due to the engine vibrations.

CAUTION The vehicle must not be raised on the crossbar. Only place the jack* on the points designed for this purpose on the strut. Otherwise, the vehicle may be dam- aged.

Removing and installing a wheel

Change the wheel after loosening the wheel nuts and raising the vehicle with the jack.

When removing/fitting the wheel, the rim may hit and damage the brake disc. For this rea- son, please take care and get a second per- son to assist you.

47

Emergencies

Taking off the wheel Unscrew the wheel nuts using the box spanner and place them on a clean surface. Take off the wheel.

Putting on the spare wheel Check the direction of rotation of the tyre page 48.

Place the spare wheel or temporary spare wheel into position. Screw on the wheel nuts in position and tighten them loosely with a box spanner. To tighten the anti-theft locking wheel nuts use the corresponding adaptor. Carefully lower the vehicle using the jack*. Use the wheel spanner to tighten all of the wheel nuts clockwise. Tighten the bolts in di- agonal pairs (not in a circle). Put the caps, trim or full hubcap back on .

The wheel nuts should be clean and turn easily. Before fitting the spare wheel, inspect the wheel condition and hub mounting surfa- ces. These surfaces must be clean before fit- ting the wheel.

Tightening torque of the wheel nuts The prescribed tightening torque for wheel bolts for steel and alloy wheels is 140 Nm. Af- ter changing a wheel, have the tightening tor-

que checked immediately with a torque wrench that is working perfectly.

Before checking tightening torque, have any rusty wheel nuts that are difficult to screw re- placed and clean the wheel hub threads.

Never apply grease or oil to wheel nuts or to the wheel hub threads. Even if the bolts have been tightened to the prescribed torque, they could come loose while driving.

Tyres with directional tread pattern

Tyres with directional tread pattern have been designed to operate best when rotating in only one direction. An arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the direction of rotation on tyres with directional tread. Always observe the indicated direction of rotation in order to guarantee optimum grip and help avoid aquaplaning, excessive noise and wear.

If the tyre is mounted in the opposite direction of rotation, drive with extreme caution, as the tyre is no longer being used correctly. This is of particular importance when the road sur- face is wet. Change the tyre as soon as pos- sible or remount it with the correct direction of rotation.

Works after changing a wheel

Alloy wheels: replace the wheel bolt caps. Plate wheels: replace the wheel hubcap . Return all tools to their proper storing loca- tion. If the replaced wheel does not fit in the spare wheel housing, store it safely in the lug- gage compartment page 139. Check the tyre pressure of the newly moun- ted tyre as soon as possible. In vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure indica- tor, adjust the pressure and store it in memory page 332. Have the tightening torque of the wheel nuts checked as soon as possible with a tor- que wrench page 48. Meanwhile, drive carefully. Have the flat tyre replaced as quickly as possible.

48

Self-help

Changing the windscreen wiper blades

Wiper service position

Fig. 40 Wipers in service position.

Ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen.

The wiper arms can be raised when the wip- ers are in service position Fig. 40.

Close the bonnet page 312. Switch the ignition on and off. Press the windscreen wiper lever down- wards briefly page 128 4 .

Before driving, always lower the wiper arms. Using the windscreen wiper lever, the wind- screen wiper arms return to their initial posi- tion.

Note The windscreen wiper arms can be moved to the service position only when the bonnet is properly closed. You can also use the service position, for example, if you want to fix a cover over the windscreen in the winter to keep it clear of ice.

Changing the wiper rear wiper blades

Fig. 41 Changing the windscreen wiper blades

Fig. 42 Changing the rear wiper blade

The windscreen wiper blades are supplied as standard with a layer of graphite. This layer is responsible for ensuring that the wipe is silent. If the graphite layer is damaged, the noise of the water as it is wiped across the windscreen will be louder.

Check the condition of the wiper blades reg- ularly. If the wipers scrape across the glass, they should be changed if they are damaged, or cleaned if they are dirty .

If this does not produce the desired results, the setting angle of the windscreen wiper arms might be incorrect. They should be checked by a specialised workshop and cor- rected if necessary.

Damaged windscreen wiper blades should be replaced immediately. These are availa- ble from qualified workshops.

49

Emergencies

Raising and lowering windscreen wiper arms Place the windscreen wipers in the service position page 49. Grip the wiper arms only by the blade's fastening point.

Cleaning windscreen wiper blades Raise the wiper arms. Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt from the windscreen wiper blades. If the blades are very dirty, a sponge or damp cloth may be used .

Changing the windscreen wiper blades Lift and unfold the wiper arms. Press and hold release button Fig. 41 1 and pull gently on the wiper blade in the di- rection of the arrow. Fit a new wiper blade of the same length and design on to the wiper arm and hook it into place. Rest the wiper arms back onto the wind- screen.

Changing the rear window wiper blade Lift and fold the wiper arm. Turn the blade slightly Fig. 42 (arrow A ).

Hold down the release button 1 while gen- tly pulling the blade in the direction of arrow B . Insert a new blade of the same length and type in the rear wiper arm in the opposite di- rection to the arrow B and hook into place button 1 . Replace the wiper arm on the rear window.

WARNING Worn or dirty windscreen wiper blades re- duce visibility and increase the risk of acci- dent and serious injury. Always replace damaged or worn wind- screen wiper blades or blades that no lon- ger clean the windscreen properly.

CAUTION Damaged or dirty windscreen wipers could scratch the glass. If products containing solvents, rough sponges or sharp objects are used to clean the blades, the graphite layer will be dam- aged. Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint thinner or similar products to clean the win- dows. In icy conditions, always check that the wiper blades are not frozen to the glass be- fore using the wipers. In cold weather, it may help to leave the vehicle parked with the wipers in service position page 49.

CAUTION To prevent damage to the bonnet and the wiper arms, only leave them in the service position. Before driving, always lower the wiper arms.

Jump start

Jump leads

The jump lead must have a sufficient wire cross section.

If the engine fails to start because of a dis- charged battery, the battery can be connec- ted to the battery of another vehicle to start the engine.

Jump leads must comply with standard DIN 72553 (see cable manufacturer's instruc- tions). The wire cross section must be at least 25 mm2 for petrol engines and at least 35 mm2 for diesel engines.

Note The vehicles must not touch each other, otherwise electricity could flow as soon as the positive terminals are connected. The discharged battery must be properly connected to the on-board network.

50

Self-help

Jump start: description

Fig. 43 Diagram of connections for vehicles without Start-Stop system.

Fig. 44 Diagram of connections for vehicles with Start-Stop system.

Jump lead terminal connections Switch off the ignition of both vehicles .

1.

Connect one end of the red jump lead to the positive + terminal of the vehicle with the flat battery A Fig. 43. Connect the other end of the red jump lead to the positive terminal + in the ve- hicle providing assistance B . In vehicles without a Start-Stop system: connect one end of the black jump lead to the negative terminal of the vehicle providing the current B Fig. 43. In vehicles with a Start-stop system: connect one end of the black jump lead X to a suitable ground terminal, to a sol-

id piece of metal in the engine block, or to the engine block itself Fig. 44. Connect the other end of the black jump lead X to a solid metal component bol- ted to the engine block or to the engine block itself of the vehicle with the flat battery. Do not connect it to a point near the battery A . Position the leads in such a way that they cannot come into contact with any moving parts in the engine compart- ment.

Starting Start the engine of the vehicle with the boosting battery and let it run at idling speed.

2.

3.

4a.

4b.

5.

6.

7.

Start the engine of the vehicle with the flat battery and wait for 2 or 3 minutes until the engine is running.

Removing the jump leads Before you remove the jump leads, switch off the dipped beam headlights if they are switched on. Turn on the heater blower and heated rear window in the vehicle with the flat battery. This helps minimise voltage peaks which are generated when the leads are disconnected. When the engine is running, disconnect the leads in reverse order to the details given above.

Make sure the battery clamps have sufficient metal-to-metal contact with the battery ter- minals.

If the engine fails to start after about 10 sec- onds, switch off the starter and try again after about 1 minute.

WARNING Please note the safety warnings referring to working in the engine compartment page 312. The battery providing assistance must have the same voltage as the flat battery

8.

9.

10.

11.

51

Emergencies

(12V) and approximately the same capaci- ty (see imprint on battery). Failure to com- ply could result in an explosion. Never use jump leads when one of the batteries is frozen. Danger of explosion! Even after the battery has thawed, battery acid could leak and cause chemical burns. If a battery freezes, it should be replaced. Keep sparks, flames and lighted ciga- rettes away from batteries, danger of ex- plosion. Failure to comply could result in an explosion. Observe the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the jump leads. Do not connect the negative cable from the other vehicle directly to the negative terminal of the flat battery. The gas emit- ted from the battery could be ignited by sparks. Danger of explosion. Never attach the negative cable to fuel system components or the brake lines in the other vehicle. The non-insulated parts of the battery clamps must not be allowed to touch. The jump lead attached to the positive battery terminal must not touch metal parts of the vehicle, this can cause a short circuit. Position the leads in such a way that they cannot come into contact with any moving parts in the engine compartment. Do not lean on the batteries. This could result in chemical burns.

Note The vehicles must not touch each other, otherwise electricity could flow as soon as the positive terminals are connected.

Tow start and towing

Introduction

Tow-starting means starting the engine of the vehicle while another pulls it.

Towing means one vehicle pulling another that is not roadworthy.

Always consider the legal provisions relating to tow-starting and towing.

For technical reasons, towing a vehicle with a discharged battery is not allowed. The jump start should be used instead page 50.

If the vehicle comes with the Keyless Access system, towing is only allowed with the igni- tion on!

The 12-volt vehicle battery drains if the vehi- cle is towed with the engine switched off and the ignition connected. Depending on the battery charge status, the drop in voltage may be so large, even after just a few mi- nutes, that no electrical device in the vehicle may work e.g. the hazard warning lights. In

vehicles with the Keyless Access system, the steering wheel could lock .

WARNING A vehicle with no power should never be towed. When towing, never remove the ignition key or disconnect the ignition with the start button. Otherwise, the electronic lock of the steering column could suddenly be- come blocked and it would be impossible to steer the vehicle. This could cause an accident, serious injury and loss of control of the vehicle. If during towing the vehicle runs out of power, stop towing immediately and re- quest the assistance of specialist person- nel.

WARNING Vehicle handling and braking capacity change considerably during towing. Please observe the following instructions to mini- mise the risk of serious accidents and in- jury: As the driver of the vehicle being towed: You should depress the brake much

harder as the brake servo does not op- erate. Pay the utmost attention to avoid crashing into the towing vehicle.

More strength is required at the steer- ing wheel as the power steering does

52

Self-help

not operate when the engine is switch- ed off.

As the driver of the towing vehicle: Accelerate with particular care and

caution. Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres. Brake earlier than usual and more

smoothly.

CAUTION To avoid damaging the vehicle, for exam- ple the paint, remove and replace the lid and towing eye carefully. Unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it during towing.

Instructions for tow-starting

Vehicle's should not generally be tow- started. The jump start should be used in- stead page 50.

For technical reasons, towing the following vehicles is not allowed:

Vehicles with an automatic gearbox. If the 12-volt vehicle battery is discharged, because in vehicles with the Keyless Access locking and ignition system the steering re- mains locked and the electronic parking brake cannot be deactivated nor can the

electronic lock of the steering column be re- leased if they are activated. If the battery is flat, it is possible that the engine control units may not operate correct- ly.

However, if the vehicle must absolutely be tow-started (in the case of manual gear- boxes): Engage the 2nd or 3rd gear. Keep the clutch pressed down. Switch on the ignition and the hazard warn- ing lights of both vehicles. Once both vehicles are moving, release the clutch. Once the engine starts, press the clutch and disengage the gear to avoid colliding with the towing vehicle.

CAUTION When tow-starting, unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it. Do not tow a vehicle for more than 50 m in attempt to start it. There is risk of dam- age to the catalytic converter.

Note The vehicle can only be jump-started if the electronic parking brake and, if appropri- ate, the electronic lock of the steering col-

umn are deactivated. If the vehicle has no power supply or there is an electric system fault, the engine must be jump-started to deactivate the electronic parking brake and the electronic lock of the steering col- umn.

Towing instructions

Towing requires some expertise and experi- ence, especially when using a tow rope. Both drivers should be familiar with the difficulties involved in towing. For this reason, inexper- ienced drivers should abstain from towing.

During towing, it should be ensured that no impermissible tractive forces or shocks are generated. When towing on an unpaved road, there is always a risk of overloading and damaging the anchorage points.

During towing, the towing vehicle can signal the change of direction even with the hazard warning lights turned on. To do so, at the same time, the turn signal lever must be oper- ated with ignition switched on. Meanwhile, the hazard warning lights will go off. When the turn signal lever is returned to the rest posi- tion, the hazard warning lights will be auto- matically reactivated.

53

Emergencies

Notes for the driver of the towed vehicle Leave the ignition on, so that the steering is not blocked, and the electronic parking brake may be deactivated and the turn signals and wash/wipe operated. More strength is required at the steering wheel as the power steering does not oper- ate when the engine is switched off. You should depress the brake much harder as the brake servo does not operate. Avoid hitting the towing vehicle. Bear in mind the information and instruc- tions in the manual of the vehicle to be towed.

Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle Accelerate with particular care and cau- tion. Avoid sharp manoeuvres. Brake earlier than usual and smoothly. Bear in mind the information and instruc- tions in the manual of the towed vehicle.

Tow rope or tow bar It is safer for the vehicle to be towed using a tow bar, avoiding damage to the vehicle. A tow rope should only be used if a tow bar is not available.

A tow rope should be slightly elastic to avoid damage to both vehicles. It is advisable to use a tow rope made of synthetic fibre or sim- ilarly elastic material.

Only attach the tow rope or the tow bar to the towing eyes provided or a towing bracket.

If the vehicle has a factory-fitted towing de- vice, towing with a tow bar is only permitted if it has been specially designed to be instal- led on a tow hitch page 294.

When the vehicle has to be towed: Check whether the vehicle may be towed page 54, Cases where towing the ve- hicle is not permitted.

The vehicle can be towed using a tow bar or tow rope in the normal way, with all four wheels on the road; it can also be towed with either the front or rear wheels lifted off the road.

Switch the ignition on. Put the gearbox lever in neutral or the se- lector lever in the N page 218 position. Do not allow the vehicle to be towed at speeds of over 50 km/h (30 mph). The vehicle must not be towed further than 50 km (30 miles). If a breakdown lorry is used, vehicles with automatic transmission are only allowed to be towed with the front wheels suspended.

Towing vehicles with four-wheel drive (4Drive) Four-wheel drive vehicles (4Drive) can be towed using a tow bar or tow rope. If the vehi- cle is towed with the front or rear axle sus- pended, the engine must be switched off, otherwise the transmission may be damaged.

Cases where towing the vehicle is not per- mitted If, due to a fault, the gearbox is out of lubri- cant. If the vehicle battery is discharged, be- cause the steering remains locked and, if ap- propriate, the electronic parking brake can- not be deactivated or the electronic lock of the steering column released. If a distance above 50 km needs to be trav- elled. When, for example, after an accident, the smooth rotation of the wheels or the steering operation cannot be guaranteed.

When the vehicle is to tow another vehicle: Observe legal requirements. Keep in mind the instructions in the manual on towing vehicles.

CAUTION If there is no oil in the gearbox or no lubri- cant in the automatic transmission the car

54

Self-help

may only be towed with the driven wheels lifted clear of the road, or transported on a special car transporter or trailer.

Note The vehicle can only be towed if the elec- tronic parking brake and the electronic lock of the steering column are deactiva- ted. If the vehicle has no power supply or there is an electric system fault, the engine must be jump-started page 50 to deacti- vate the electronic parking brake and the electronic lock of the steering column.

Front towline anchorage

Fig. 45 On the right side of the front bumper: remove the cover.

Fig. 46 On the right side of the front bumper: towline anchorage in position.

The housing of the removable towline an- chorage is on the right side of the front bump- er underneath a cover Fig. 45.

The towing eye should always be kept in the vehicle.

Bear in mind the instructions for towing page 53.

Fitting the towline anchorage Remove the towing eye from the vehicle tool kit in the luggage compartment page 41. Remove the cover by pressing down on its base and leave it hanging from the vehicle Fig. 45. Screw the towing eye in the housing by turning it as far as it will go anticlock- wise Fig. 46 . Use a suitable object

that can completely and securely tighten the towing eye in its housing. After towing, unscrew the towing eye clockwise with a suitable object. Replace the cover and press until the tab catches onto the bumper. Clean the towing eye if necessary and then store it in the luggage compartment along with the other vehicle tools.

CAUTION The towing eye must always be completely and firmly tightened. Otherwise, it could be released while towing and tow-starting.

55

Emergencies

Rear towline anchorage

Fig. 47 On the right side of the rear bumper: remove the cover.

Fig. 48 On the right side of the rear bumper: towline anchorage in position.

The housing of the screw towing eye is on the right side of the rear bumper behind a lid Fig. 47.

Vehicles equipped as standard with a towing bracket do not have any housing for the

screw towing eye behind the lid. In this case, the tow hitch needs to be extracted or instal- led and used for towing page 294, .

Bear in mind the instructions for towing page 53.

Assemble the rear towing eye (cars with- out a factory-equipped towing bracket) Remove the towing eye from the vehicle tool kit in the luggage compartment page 41. Press the upper side of the lid Fig. 47 to unclip it. Remove the lid and let it hang from the ve- hicle. Screw the towline anchorage into the hous- ing by turning it as far as it will go anticlock- wise Fig. 48 . Use a suitable object that can completely and securely tighten the towing eye in its housing. After towing, unscrew the towing eye clockwise with a suitable object. Insert the upper flange of the lid into the opening of the bumper and press the lower side of the lid until the upper flange is inserted into the bumper. Clean the towing eye if necessary and then store it in the luggage compartment along with the other vehicle tools.

CAUTION The towing eye must always be com- pletely and firmly tightened. Otherwise, it could be released while towing and tow- starting. If the vehicle is factory-equipped with a towing bracket, it is only allowed to tow with a tow bar if this has been specially de- signed to be installed with a tow hitch. If an unsuitable tow bar is used, both the tow hitch and the vehicle may be damaged. In- stead, a tow rope should be used.

56

Fuses and bulbs

Fuses and bulbs

Fuses

Introduction

In general, a fuse can be assigned to various electrical components. Likewise, an electrical component can be protected by several fuses.

Only replace fuses when the cause of the problem has been solved. If a newly inserted fuse blows after a short time, you must have the electrical system checked by a special- ised workshop as soon as possible.

WARNING The high voltages in the electrical system can give serious electrical shocks, causing burns and even death! Never touch the electrical wiring of the ignition system. Take care not to cause short circuits in the electrical system.

WARNING Using unsuitable fuses, repairing fuses or bridging a current circuit without fuses can cause a fire and serious injury. Never use a fuse with a higher value. Only replace fuses with a fuse of the same am-

perage (same colour and markings) and size. Never replace a fuse by a metal strip, sta- ple or similar.

CAUTION To prevent damage to the vehicle's elec- tric system, before replacing a fuse always turn off the ignition, the lights and all elec- trical elements and remove the key from the ignition. Protect the fuse boxes when open to pre- vent the entry of dust or humidity as they can damage the electrical system.

Note One component may have more than one fuse. Several components may run on a single fuse. In the vehicle, there are more fuses than those indicated in this chapter.

Fuses inside the vehicle

Fig. 49 Left hand drive vehicles: fuse box cover under the driver's side dashboard

57

Emergencies

Fig. 50 glove compartment (right hand drive): fuse box access.

Opening and closing the fuse box situated below the dash panel (left-hand steering wheel) Open: fold the cover down Fig. 49. Close: push back the cover it in until it clicks into place.

Fuses behind the glove compartment (right-hand steering wheel) Open the glove compartment and, if nec- essary, empty it. Undo the opening limiter Fig. 50 A in two steps: first, unlock the limiter by pulling back on it (arrow 1 ) and then move it gently to the right (arrow 2 ). Remove the guide when the cover is in the normal opening posi- tion (30). Free the side pivots B to release the cover to its second opening position (60). Follow the same procedure in reverse order to return the glove compartment to its normal position.

Identifying fuses below the dashboard by colours

Colour Amp rating

Light brown 5

Brown 7.5

Red 10

Blue 15

Yellow 20

White or transparent 25

Green 30

Orange 40

CAUTION Always carefully remove the fuse box covers and refit them correctly to avoid problems with your vehicle. Protect the fuse boxes when open to avoid the entry of dust or humidity. Dirt and humidity inside fuse boxes can cause dam- age to the electrical system.

Fuses in the engine compartment

Fig. 51 In the engine compartment: fuse box cover.

To open the engine compartment fuse box Open the bonnet page 312. Press the locking tabs to release the fuse box cover Fig. 51. Then lift the cover out.

58

Fuses and bulbs

To fit the cover, place it on the fuse box. Push the locking tabs down until they click audibly into place.

Replace a blown fuse

Fig. 52 Image of a blown fuse.

Preparations Switch off the ignition, lights and all electri- cal equipment. Open the corresponding fuse box page 57, page 58.

Recognise a blown fuse A fuse is blown if its metal strip is ruptured Fig. 52.

Point a lamp at the fuse to see if it has blown.

To replace a fuse Remove the fuse. Replace the blown fuse by one with an identical amperage rating (same colour and markings) and identical size. Replace the cover again or close the fuse box lid.

Fuse placement

Only replace fuses with a fuse of the same amperage (same colour and markings) and size.

Fuses in the vehicle interior

No. Consumers/Amps

1 Adblue (SCR) 20

4 Alarm horn 7.5

5 Gateway 7.5

6 Automatic gearbox lever 7.5

7 Air conditioning and heating control panel, back window heating, auxiliary heating.

10

8

Diagnosis, electronic parking brake switch, light switch, re- versing light, interior lighting, driving mode, lit-up door sill, rain sensor

7.5

No. Consumers/Amps

9 Steering column, coolant pump (T2C) 7.5

10 Radio display 7.5

11 Left lights 40

12 Radio 20

13 Driver and passenger seat belt pre-tensioner 25

14 Air conditioner fan 40

15 Steering column release 10

16 Connectivity Box 7.5

17 Instrument panel, OCU 7.5

18 Rear camera and surroundings camera 7.5

19 Kessy 7.5

20 SCR, engine relay, 1.5 10/15

21 4x4 Haldex Control Unit 15

22 Trailer 15

23 Electric sunroof 30

24 Right lights 40

25 Left door 30

26 Heated seats 30

27 Interior light 30

59

Emergencies

No. Consumers/Amps

28 Trailer 25

31 Rear lid control unit 30

32 Control unit for parking aid, front camera and radar 7.5/10

33 Airbag 7.5

34 Reverse switch, climate sensor, electrochromic mirror, rear power sockets (USB)

7.5

35 Diagnosis, headlight control unit, headlight adjuster 7.5

38 Trailer 25

39 Right door 30

40 12V socket 20

41 Driver and passenger seat belt pre-tensioner 25

42 Central locking 40

43 Beats Audio CAN and MOST. 40

44 Trailer 15

45 Electric driver's seat 15

46 USB socket 7.5

47 Rear window wiper 15

49 Starter motor; clutch sensor 7.5

52 Driving mode. 15

No. Consumers/Amps

53 Heated rear window 30

In-line fuse/Amps

230 V rear power sockets 30

Fuse arrangement in engine compartment

No. Consumers/Amps

1 ESP control unit 25

2 ESP control unit 40/60

3 Engine control unit (diesel/pet- rol) 30/15

4 Engine sensors 7.5/10

5 Engine sensors 10

6 Brake light sensor 7.5

7 Engine power supply 10

8 Lambda probe 10

9 Engine 20

10 Fuel pump control unit 15/20

11 PTC 40

12 PTC 40

13 Gearbox pump 15/30

14 Heated windscreen 50

15 Horn 15

No. Consumers/Amps

16 Petrol pump 20

17 Engine control unit 7.5

18 Terminal 30 (positive reference) 7.5

19 Front windscreen washer 30

21 Automatic gearbox control unit 15/30

22 Engine control unit 7.5

23 Starter motor 30

24 PTC 40

36 Left LED headlight 15

37 Parking heating 20

38 Right LED headlight 15

Note In the vehicle, there are more fuses than those indicated in this chapter. These should only be changed by a specialised workshop. Positions not containing a fuse do not ap- pear in the following tables. Some of the equipment listed in the ta- bles below pertain only to certain versions of the model or are optional extras. Please note that the above lists, while correct at the time of printing, are subject to change.

60

Fuses and bulbs

Changing bulbs

Introduction

Changing bulbs requires a certain degree of practical skill. If you are unsure, SEAT recom- mends that you consult a technical service or request assistance from a specialist. In gen- eral a specialist is needed if, in addition to the bulbs, other vehicle components require re- moval.

If you choose to change the engine compart- ment lamps yourself, remember that it is a dangerous area in Working in the en- gine compartment on page 312.

Always use identical bulbs with the same designation. The name can be found on the base of the bulb holder.

Depending on how equipped the vehicle is, there are different sets of headlights and tail lights:

Halogen headlights. Full-LED main headlights* Rear bulb light LED rear light*

Full-LED headlight system* Full-LED headlights handle all light functions (daylight, side light, turn signal, dipped beam

and route light) with light emitting diodes (LEDs) as a light source.

Full-LED headlights are designed to last the lifetime of the car and light bulbs cannot be replaced. In case of headlight failure, go to an authorised workshop to have it replaced.

Bulbs (12 V) Depending on the level of equipment fitted in the vehicle, LEDs may be used for part or all of the interior and/or exterior lighting. LEDs have an estimated life that exceeds that of the vehicle. If an LED light fails, go to an au- thorised workshop for its replacement.

Light source used for each function

Halogen headlights. Type

Daytime running light/side light

LED (it cannot be replaced)

Dipped beam headlights H7 LL

Main beam headlights H7 LL

Turn signal PY21W

Full-LED main headlights

No bulbs may be replaced. All functions are with LEDs

Front fog light Type

Fog/cornering lights* H8

Rear lights Type

Brake light/tail light P21W LL

Side lights P21W LL

Turn signal PY21W LL

Retro fog light P21W LL

Reverse lights W16W

LED rear lights Type

Turn signal PY21W LL

Reverse lights W16W

The remaining functions work with LEDs

WARNING Take particular care when working on components in the engine compartment if the engine is warm. Risk of burns. Bulbs are highly sensitive to pressure. The glass can break when you touch the bulb, causing injury. When changing bulbs, please take care not to injure yourself on sharp edges, in particular on the headlight housing.

CAUTION Remove the ignition key before working on the electric system. Otherwise, a short circuit could occur.

61

Emergencies

Switch off the lights and the parking light before changing a bulb. Take good care to avoid damaging any components.

For the sake of the environment Please ask your specialist retailer how to dispose of used bulbs in the proper manner.

Note Please check at regular intervals that all lighting (especially the exterior lighting) on your vehicle is functioning properly. This is not only in the interest of your own safety, but also that of all other road users. Before changing a bulb, make sure you have the correct new bulb. Do not touch the glass part of the bulb with your bare hands, use a cloth or paper towel instead, since the fingerprints left on the glass will vaporise as a result of the heat generated by the bulb, they will be deposited on the reflector and will impair its surface. Depending on the level of equipment fit- ted in the vehicle, LEDs may be used for part or all of the interior and/or exterior lighting. LEDs have an estimated life that exceeds than that of the car. If an LED light fails, go to an authorised workshop for its replacement.

Dipped beam headlight bulb

Fig. 53 In the engine compartment: remove the cover.

Fig. 54 In the engine compartment: dipped beam headlight bulb.

Raise the bonnet.

Move the loops Fig. 53 1 in the direction of the arrow and remove the cover.

Remove connector Fig. 54 2 from the bulb.

Unclip the retainer spring Fig. 54 3 pressing clockwise and inwards.

Extract the bulb and fit the replacement so that the lug on the base fits into the recess on the reflector.

Installation involves all of the above steps in reverse sequence.

62

Fuses and bulbs

Main beam headlight bulb and turn signal bulb

Fig. 55 In the engine compartment: remove the cover.

Fig. 56 In the engine compartment: main beam headlight bulb 2 and turn signal bulb 3 .

Main beam headlight bulb Raise the bonnet.

Move the loop Fig. 55 1 in the direction of the arrow and remove the cover.

Slide connector Fig. 56 2 to the left or right and pull.

Remove the bulb by disconnecting the con- nector.

Installation involves all of the above steps in reverse sequence.

Turn signal bulb Raise the bonnet.

Move the loop Fig. 55 1 in the direction of the arrow and remove the cover.

Turn the bulb holder Fig. 56 3 anti- clockwise and pull.

Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulb holder and turning it anticlockwise at the same time.

Installation involves all of the above steps in reverse sequence.

63

Emergencies

Front fog light bulb*

Fig. 57 Front fog light: remove the grille.

Fig. 58 Front fog light: remove the bulb holder

Remove the screw Fig. 57 1 from the fog light grille using a screwdriver and ex- tract the grille.

Remove the 3 screws Fig. 57 2 .

Remove the metal clip situated on the up- per part of the fog light by pulling away from the vehicle 3 and extract the fog light.

Remove connector Fig. 58 1 from the bulb.

Turn the bulb holder Fig. 58 2 anti- clockwise and pull.

Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulb holder and turning it anticlockwise at the same time.

Installation involves all of the above steps in reverse sequence.

Check that the bulb works properly.

Note Due to the difficulty of accessing fog light bulbs, have them replaced at a Technical Service or specialised workshop.

64

Fuses and bulbs

Tail light bulbs located in the body- work

Fig. 59 Luggage compartment: access to the bolt securing the tail light unit.

Fig. 60 Retaining tabs on reverse side of tail light.

Check which of the bulbs is defective.

Open the rear lid.

Remove the lid, levering it with the flat side of a screwdriver into the recess Fig. 59

1 .

Remove the bulb connector.

Unscrew the light securing bolt by hand or using a screwdriver Fig. 59 2 .

Remove the light from the body, gently pull- ing it toward you, and place on a clean, smooth surface.

Disassemble the bulb holder unlocking the securing tabs Fig. 60 1 .

Change the damaged bulb.

To refit follow the steps in reverse order, tak- ing special care when fitting the bulb hold- er. The securing tabs must click into place.

CAUTION Take care when removing the rear light unit to make sure there is no damage to the paintwork or any of its components.

Note Make sure you have a soft cloth ready to place under the glass on the rear light unit, to avoid any scratches. In the case of LED lights, change only the turn signal bulb.

Tail lights bulbs located in the rear lid

Fig. 61 Rear lid open: remove the cover.

Fig. 62 Remove the bulb holder.

The rear lid must be open to change the bulbs.

Remove the rear lid cover in the direction indicated Fig. 61.

65

Emergencies

Unlock the securing tabs from the bulb holder Fig. 62 1 or turn the bulb holder to the left 2 and 3 .

Remove the bulb holder from its location.

Lightly press the defective bulb into the bulb holder, then turn it to the left and re- move it.

Fit the new bulb, pressing it into the bulb holder and turn it to the right as far as it will go.

Use a cloth to remove any fingerprints from the glass part of the bulb.

Check that the new bulb works properly.

Carry out the same actions in reverse order for assembly and pay special attention to placing the bulb holder, ensuring that the tabs are properly secured.

Note For LED pilots, you can only change the re- verse bulb.

Changing the number plate bulbs

Fig. 63 In the rear bumper: Number plate light.

Fig. 64 number plate light: remove the bulb holder.

Follow the steps indicated:

Press the number plate light in the direction of the arrow Fig. 63.

Detach the number plate light.

Turn the connector lock Fig. 64 in the di- rection of arrow 1 and pull on the connec- tor.

Rotate the bulb holder in the direction of the arrow Fig. 64 2 and extract it to- gether with the bulb.

Replace the faulty bulb with a new identical bulb.

Insert the bulb holder into the number plate light and rotate all the way in the opposite direction to the arrow Fig. 64 2 .

Plug the connector into the bulb holder.

Insert the number plate light carefully into the opening on the bumper. Ensure that the number plate light is in the correct position.

Insert the number plate light into the bump- er until it audibly clicks into place.

66

Fuses and bulbs

Side turn signals

Fig. 65 Turn signal integrated in the rear view mirror

The side turn signals are LEDS and are inte- grated in the rear view mirrors.

In case of failure, go to an authorised work- shop to have it replaced.

Additional brake light

Taking into account that it consists of LED bulbs, the change should be made at a tech- nical service centre.

67

Operation

Fig. 66 Instruments and controls.

68

Controls and displays

Operation

Controls and displays

Interior view

Overview

Door handle Central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Control for the electric adjustment of the exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Control lever for: Turn signals and main beam

headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Cruise control system (GRA) and

speed limiter* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238, 240 Driver assistance systems . . . . . . . . . 88 Steering wheel with horn and Driver airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 On-board computer controls . . . . . 86 Controls for radio, telephone,

navigation and speech dialogue system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Paddle levers for tiptronic gear- shift (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . 221

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Control lever for: Windscreen wipers and washer . . . 128 Wipe and wash system . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 On-board computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Infotainment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Depending on the equipment, but- tons for: Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Park assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Tyre pressure switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Airbag off display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Depending on the equipment, glove compartment with: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 CD player* and/or SD card* Front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Front passenger airbag switch . . . . . . 27 Front passenger seat heating con- trol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Depending on the equipment, con- trols for: Heating and ventilation system or

manual air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Automatic air conditioner . . . . . . . . . 154 Depending on the equipment: USB type-C port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Lighter/power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Connectivity Box* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Gear lever for: Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Rotating control (Driving Experience button) for driving profiles . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Auto Hold switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Electronic parking brake switch . . . . . 266 Start-up push button (Keyless Ac- cess closing and start-up sys- tem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Driver's seat heating control . . . . . . . . 158 Steering column adjustment lev- er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Knee airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Bonnet lock release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Headlight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Note Some of the equipment listed in this sec- tion is only fitted on certain models or are optional extras. The arrangement of switches and con- trols on right-hand drive models* may be slightly different from the layout shown in page 68. However, the symbols used to identify the controls are the same.

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

69

Operation

Instruments and warn- ing/control lamps

Instrument panel

Introduction

The vehicle can be fitted with a instrument panel digital lap timer or one Digital (SEAT Cockpit).

After switching the engine on with a 12-volt battery that is heavily discharged or newly changed some system settings (such as the time, the date, the personalised comfort set- tings and the programming) might be altered or deleted. Check and correct these settings once the battery is sufficiently charged.

WARNING Any distraction may lead to an accident, with the risk of injury. Do not operate the instrument panel con- trols when driving. To reduce the risk of accident and injury, only make adjustments to the instructions on the screen of the instrument panel and to the instructions on the screen of the Info- tainment system when the vehicle is sta- tionary.

70

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Analogue instrument panel

Fig. 67 Instrument panel, on dash panel.

Details of the instruments Fig. 67:

Revolution counter (with the engine run- ning, in hundreds of revolutions per mi- nute) page 82. Engine coolant temperature indicator page 84. Displays on the screen page 73. Adjuster button and display. Speedometer. Fuel gauge page 83.

1

2

3

4

5

6

71

Operation

Digital dashboard (SEAT Digital Cockpit)

Fig. 68 SEAT Digital Cockpit on the instrument panel (classic view).

Details of the instruments: Engine coolant temperature display page 84 Revolution counter. Revolutions per mi- nute the engine is running page 82. Gear engaged or position of the selec- tor lever currently selected Screen display page 73 Speedometer Digital speed display Fuel gauge page 83. Information Profile page 72.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

The Digital SEAT Cockpit is an instrument panel digital with monochrome screen in col- our high resolution. It has a 3 views accessi- ble using the button of the multifunction steering wheel. By selecting different infor- mation profiles, indications other than the classic circular instruments can be displayed, such as navigation data, multimedia informa- tion or travel data.

The 3 views are: Classic Dynamic Navigation (without information profiles)

All views will display information on the screen about audio, phone, travel data, vehi- cle status, navigation1) and driving aids1).

In the Classic and Navigation views it is pos- sible to customise the information displayed under Information profiles Fig. 68 8 .

Information profiles The INSTRUMENT CLUSTER option (infotain- ment button > View > Instrument cluster) can be used to choose between the different options for viewing information to be displayed in the SEAT Digital Cockpit.

1) Depending on the version. 72

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Classic View The revolutions per minute and speedometer needles appear along the entire length Fig. 68.

View 1, 2, 3 or AUTOMATIC*1)

Personalisation of the information that ap- pears in the Digital SEAT Cockpit. Only 2 of these items of information can be displayed at the same time, but the user chooses which to display, and in what order, by moving the finger vertically over the dials.

Depending on the version, the Views can be memorised by exiting the menu or keeping the View button pressed.

Consumption. Graphic representation of the current consumption and digital display of the average consumption. Audio. Digital display of the current audio playback. Altitude. Digital display of the current alti- tude above sea level. Compass. Digital display of the compass. Information about the final destination. Digital display of the remaining travelling time, distance to the destination and the esti- mated time of arrival.

Operating range. Digital display of the re- maining range. Travel time. Route guidance. Journey. Digital display of the distance travelled. Assist systems. Graphic representation of different assistance systems. Traffic signs. Display of traffic signs detec- ted. Navigation. Graphical representation of the navigation with arrows.

It may vary based on the features, the num- ber and the contents of the selectable infor- mation profiles.

Navigation map in the SEAT Digital Cockpit*

Depending on the features, the SEAT Digital Cockpit can display a detailed map. To do this, select the Navigation option in the menu on the instrument panel page 75.

Depending on the features or the navigation map, it can be shown in the SEAT Digital Cockpit or on the infotainment system or on

both at the same time. If it is displayed only in the infotainment system, the SEAT Digital Cockpit will only display the arrows for ma- noeuvres.

Transfer of navigation map The map is transferred from the infotainment system to the SEAT Digital Cockpit and vice versa using the map transfer button.

Using the right thumbwheel of the multifunc- tion steering wheel, in the Navigation menu, you can transfer the map back to the info- tainment system.

Status display

Possible indications on the instrument panel display Different pieces of information can be dis- played on the screen of the instrument panel, depending on the features of the vehicle. Doors, bonnet and rear lid open Warning and information messages Odometer Time page 82 Indications of the radio and navigation sys- tem

1) Pre-set information depending on the selected Driving mode.

73

Operation

Indications of the phone Outside temperature Indications of the compass Selector lever positions Gear-change recommendation page 226 Display of travel data (multifunction dis- play) and menus for different settings page 75 Service interval display page 85 Speed warning page 76 Speed warning for winter tyres Start-Stop system status display page 216 Signs detected by the traffic signal detec- tion system page 79 Active cylinder management (ACT) status indication page 232 Low consumption driving Identifying letters on engine (LDM) Driver assistance system display page 234 Copyright

Doors, bonnet and rear lid open When the vehicle is unlocked and while driv- ing, the instrument panel display shows if any of the doors, the bonnet or rear lid are opened and, in some cases, it is also indica-

ted by an audible warning. The display may vary according to the type of instrument pan- el fitted.

Selector lever positions (DSG dual clutch gearbox) The current position of the selector lever is shown on the side of the lever and on the in- strument panel display. When the lever is in the D/S position or in the Tiptronic position, in some cases, the gear engaged in each case is shown on the instrument panel display .

Outside temperature indicator If the outside temperature is lower than ap- proximately +4 C (+39 F), the ice crystal symbol on the outside temperature dis- play also lights up. This symbol remains lit un- til the outside temperature exceeds +6 C (+43 F) .

When the vehicle is stationary, when the aux- iliary heater is switched on or when driving at very low speeds, the outside temperature in- dicated may be higher than the actual tem- perature due to the heat produced by the en- gine.

The margin of measurement ranges from -45 C (-49 F) to +76 C (+169 F).

Gear-change recommendation While driving, the instrument panel of certain vehicles may indicate a gear recommenda- tion for saving fuel page 226.

Odometer The odometer registers the total distance travelled by the car.

The partial odometer (trip) shows the dis- tance travelled since the last time it was reset to zero.

Vehicles with analogue instrument panel: Briefly press the button Fig. 67 4 to reset the trip recorder to 0. Keep the button 4 pressed for about 3 seconds and the previous value will be displayed.

Vehicles with digital instrument panel: Set the odometer to zero via the Infotain- ment system or the multifunction steering wheel page 76.

Speed warning for winter tyres If the maximum speed set is exceeded, this is displayed on the instrument panel page 75.

The speed warning can be set in the Infotain- ment system, by using the function button > SETTINGS > Driver assistance page 95.

74

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Indications of the compass Depending on the equipment, when the igni- tion is on, the instrument panel display indi- cates the direction in which you are driving with a symbol, e.g. NW for Northwest.

When the Infotainment system is on and there is no route guidance active, the graphic rep- resentation of a compass is also shown.

Low consumption driving * Depending on the equipment, when the vehi- cle is moving is displayed on the instru- ment cluster display when the vehicle is in an economical consumption status due to active cylinder management (ACT)* page 232.

Identifying letters on engine (LDM) Vehicles with analogue instrument panel: Switch the ignition on, but do not start the engine. Hold the button Fig. 67 4 down for more than 15 seconds to display the iden- tifying letters of the vehicle engine (MKB).

Copyright Legal text about the property rights and copyrights of the instrument cluster.

WARNING Even when the outside temperature is high- er than freezing temperature, some roads and bridges could be frozen. The ice crystal symbol indicates that there may be a risk of freezing. At outside temperatures above +4 C (+39 F), there may be ice even when the ice crystal symbol is not on. The outside temperature sensor takes a guideline measurement.

Note There are different instrument panels and therefore the versions and instructions on the display may vary. In the case of dis- plays without warning or information texts, faults are indicated exclusively by the con- trol warning lamps. Some indications on the instrument panel screen may be concealed by a sudden event, e.g. an incoming call. Depending on the equipment, some set- tings and instructions can be carried out or displayed on the infotainment system as well. If there are several warnings at the same time, the symbols will be displayed one af- ter the other for a few seconds. The sym- bols will stay on until you remove the cause.

If when switching on the ignition warnings are shown about existing faults, it might not be possible to change the settings or show the information as described. In this case, go to a specialised workshop and request a repair.

Instrument panel menus

The number of menus and information items available will depend on the vehicles elec- tronics and features.

A specialised workshop can programme or modify additional functions, according to the vehicle equipment. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.

Some menu options can only be read when the vehicle is stationary. Driving data page 76 Assist systems. Front Assist On/Off page 242 ACC (only display) page 245 Lane Assist On/Off page 253 Travel Assist On/Off page 255 Side Assist On/Off page 259

Navigation. Audio. Telephone. Vehicle status. page 77

75

Operation

Service Menu 3 Applies to vehicles with Active Info Display (Digital SEAT Cockpit)

In the Service menu various settings can be adjusted depending on the features.

Open the Service menu To open up the Service menu, select the Range information profile while in the Driv- ing data menu, and keep the key press- ed on the multifunction steering wheel for ap- proximately 4 seconds. When it is released, the Service menu will be displayed. Now you can browse through the menu using the keys on the multifunction steering wheel as usual.

Restart the service interval display Select the Service menu and follow the in- structions on the screen of the instrument panel.

Restart the oil service Select the Restore Oil service menu and follow the instructions on the instrument pan- el display.

Restart journey data Select the Reset trip menu and follow the instructions on the instrument panel display to reset the value.

Identifying letters on engine (LDM) Select the menu Engine code. The identify- ing letters of the engine will be shown on the instrument cluster display at the bottom left.

Setting the clock Select the Time menu and set the correct time by turning the right thumbwheel of the multifunction steering wheel.

Driving data indicator (multifunc- tion display)

The display of the travel data (multifunction display) shows different values about the journey and the consumption.

Change from one display to another Vehicles without multifunction steering wheel: Press the rocker switch on the wiper lev- er page 87.

Vehicles with multifunction steering wheel: Turn the right thumbwheel of the multifunc- tion steering wheel page 86.

Changing memory Vehicles with analogue instrument panel: Press the button on the windscreen wiper lever or the button of the multifunc- tion steering wheel.

Vehicles with digital instrument panel: While in Travel data > General infor- mation press on the multi-function steer- ing wheel to switch between the 3 memo- ries1):

Since start: The memory is deleted if the journey is interrupted for more than 2 hours. Since refuelling: Display and stor- age of the journey data and the con- sumption values collected. When refuel- ling, the memory is deleted. Long-term: This memory contains trav- el data up to a maximum of 19 hours and 59 minutes or 99 hours and 59 minutes, or up to a maximum of 1999.9 km or 9999.9 km. When one of these values is

1) This will show all data on the display at the same time: distance travelled, average con- sumption, average speed and autonomy.

76

Instruments and warning/control lamps

exceeded (varies depending on the ver- sion of the instrument panel), the memo- ry is deleted.

Delete journey data presets Select the memory that you wish to erase. Hold the button of the multifunction steering wheel or the button of the multi- function wheel pressed down for about 2 seconds.

Select the instructions In the Infotainment system, in the menu Vehi- cle settings, you can display different travel data page 95.

Current consumption: The current fuel consumption display operates throughout the journey, in litres/100 km; and with the engine running and the ve- hicle stopped, in litres/hour. Average consumption: The average fuel consumption is displayed after driv- ing for approximately 300 metres. Travelling time: This indicates the hours (h) and minutes (min) since the ig- nition was switched on. Range: Approximate distance in km that can still be travelled if the same driving style is maintained.

AdBlue range or : Approximate distance in km that can still be travelled with the current level of the AdBlue tank with the same driving style. The in- dication appears from a range of less than 2,400 km and cannot be deactiva- ted.1)

Distance: Distance covered in km (m) after switching on the ignition. Average speed: The average speed will be shown after driving for approxi- mately 100 metres. Digital speed display: Current speed displayed in digital format.

Setting a speed warning Select the display Warning at --- km/h or Speed warning at --- mph. Press the button on the windscreen wiper lever or the button on the multifunc- tion steering wheel to store the current speed and activate the warning. Activate: adjust to the desired speed within 5 seconds using the rocker switch on the windscreen wiper lever or by turning the thumbwheel on the multifunction steering wheel. Next, press the button or again or wait several seconds. The speed is stored and the warning activated.

Deactivate: press button or button . The stored speed is deleted.

The warning can be adjusted for speeds be- tween 30 km/h (18 mph) and 250 km/h (155 mph).

Display Oil temperature The engine reaches its operating tempera- ture when, under normal driving conditions, the oil temperature is between 80C (176F) and 120C (248F). If a great effort is required from the engine and the outside temperature is high, the engine oil temperature may in- crease. This does not present any problem as long as the warning lamps or page 316 do not appear on the display.

Warning and information messages (Vehicle status)

The system runs a check on certain compo- nents and functions when the ignition is switched on and while the vehicle is moving. Faults are displayed on the instrument cluster display as red and yellow warning symbols accompanied by messages and, depending on the case, even an audible warning

1) Not available in all countries. 77

Operation

page 88. The representation of the mes- sages and symbols may vary depending on the version of the instrument panel.

Existing faults can also be checked manually. To do so, open the menu Vehicle status or Vehicle page 75.

Priority 1 warning (red) The symbol lights up or flashes (in part ac- companied by audible warnings). Stop driving! Danger! Check the fault and elimi- nate the cause. If necessary, seek professio- nal assistance.

Priority 2 warning (yellow) The symbol lights up or flashes (in part ac- companied by audible warnings). Operating faults or the lack of operating fluids can cause damage to the vehicle or a fault. Check the faulty function as soon as possible. If necessary, seek professional assistance.

Information message It provides information about processes in the vehicle.

Driver alert system (break recom- mendation)*

Fig. 69 On the instrument panel display: driver alert system symbol.

The Fatigue detection informs the driver when their driving behaviour shows signs of fatigue.

Function and operation Fatigue detection determines the driving be- haviour of the driver when starting a journey, making a calculation of tiredness. This is con- stantly compared with the current driving be- haviour. If the system detects that the driver is tired, an audible warning is given with a sound and an optic warning is shown with a symbol and complementary message on the instrument panel display Fig. 69. The mes- sage on the instrument panel display is shown for approximately 5 seconds, and de- pending on the case, is repeated. The system stores the last message displayed.

The message on the instrument panel display can be switched off by pressing the button on the multi-function steering wheel page 86.

The message can be recalled to the instru- ment panel display using the multifunction display page 76.

Conditions of operation Driving behaviour is only calculated on speeds above about 65 km/h (40 mph) up to around 200 km/h (125 mph).

Switching on and off Fatigue detection can be activated or deacti- vated in the infotainment system using the function button > Driver assistance > Driver Alert System page 95. A mark in- dicates that the adjustment has been activa- ted.

System limitations The Fatigue detection has certain limitations inherent to the system. The following condi- tions can limit the Fatigue detection or pre- vent it from functioning.

At speeds below 65 km/h (40 mph) At speeds above 200 km/h (125 mph) When cornering On roads in poor condition

78

Instruments and warning/control lamps

In unfavourable weather conditions When a sporty driving style is employed In the event of a serious distraction to the driver

Fatigue detection will be restored when the vehicle is stopped for more than 15 minutes, when the ignition is switched off or when the driver has unbuckled their seat belt and opened the door.

In the event of slow driving during a long peri- od of time (below 65 km/h, 40 mph) the sys- tem automatically re-establishes the tired- ness calculation. When driving at a faster speed the driving behaviour will be recalcula- ted.

WARNING Do not let the comfort afforded by the Fati- gue detection system tempt you into taking any risks when driving. Take regular breaks, sufficient in length when making long jour- neys. The driver always assumes the responsi- bility of driving to their full capacity. Never drive if you are tired. The system does not detect the tiredness of the driver in all circumstances. Consult the information in the section page 78, System limitations.

In some situations, the system may incor- rectly interpret an intended driving ma- noeuvre as driver tiredness. No warning is given in the event of the ef- fect called microsleep! Please observe the indications on the in- strument panel and act as is necessary.

Note Fatigue detection has been developed for driving on motorways and well paved roads only. If there is a fault in the system, have it checked by a specialised workshop.

Road signs detection system*1)

Fig. 70 On the instrument panel display: ex- amples of speed limits or overtaking prohibi- tions with their respective additional signs.

The traffic sign detection system records the standard traffic signs in front of the vehicle with a camera located on the base of the in- terior mirror and provides information about speed limits and overtaking prohibitions.

1) System available depending on the country. 79

Operation

Within its limitations, the system also displays additional signals, such as time-specific pro- hibitions, signs for vehicles towing trailers page 294 or limitations that only apply in the event of rain. Even on journeys without signs, the system may display any applicable speed limits.

The traffic sign detection system does not work in all countries. Keep this in mind when travelling abroad.

Shown on the display In Germany, on motorways and vehicle roads, besides speed limits and overtaking provisions the system also displays the end of prohibition signs. The valid speed limit at the time in other countries is always shown.

The traffic signs detected by the system are displayed on the dash panel display Fig. 70 and, depending on the navigation system fitted in the vehicle, on the infotain- ment system as well page 91.

Road sign detection system messages: There are no traffic signs available The system is in its start-up phase. OR: the camera has not recognized any mandatory or prohibitive sign.

Error: Dynamic Road Sign Display There is a fault in the system. Have the sys- tem checked by a specialised workshop.

Speed warning currently unavailable The speed warning function of the road sign detection system is faulty. Have the sys- tem checked by a specialised workshop.

Dynamic Road Sign Display: please clean the windscreen. The windscreen is dirty in the camera area. Clean the windscreen.

Dynamic Road Sign Display currently restricted. The navigation system is not transmitting data. Check if the navigation system has up- dated maps. OR: the vehicle is in a region not included on the navigation system's map.

No data available The traffic sign detection system does not work in the current country.

Activate and deactivate the road sign dis- play on the instrument panel The permanent traffic sign view on the instru- ment cluster can be switched on or off in the infotainment system using the function button > SETTINGS > Driver assistance.

Display of traffic signs When the traffic sign detection system is con- nected, a camera located on the base of the interior rear-view mirror records the traffic

signs in front of the vehicle. After checking and evaluating the information from the cam- era, the navigation system and the current vehicle data, up to three valid road signs are displayed, Fig. 70 with their additional signs.

First: The sign that is currently valid for the driver is shown in the left side of the screen For example, a maximum speed limit of 130 km/h (100 mph) Fig. 70 . Second: A sign valid only in certain circum- stances, e.g. 100 km/h (60 mph) is shown sec- ond, together with the additional rain sign. Additional sign: If the windscreen wiper is working while you are driving, the signal with the additional rain sign will be shown first, on the left, as it is the one that is applicable at the time. Third: A sign valid only with restrictions, e.g. No overtaking at certain times, will be dis- played in third place Fig. 70 .

Speed warning If the system detects that the permitted speed is exceeded, it may warn the driver with a gong and visually with a message on the dash panel display.

The speed warning can be set or completely switched off in the infotainment system using the function button > SETTINGS > Driv- er assistance page 91. The speed is adjusted in steps of 5 km/h (3 mph) within a

80

Instruments and warning/control lamps

range of between 0 km/h (mph) and 20 km/h (12 mph) above the maximum speed permit- ted.

Trailer mode In vehicles equipped with a towing bracket device from the factory and a trailer that is electrically connected to the vehicle, it is possible to activate or deactivate the display of specific traffic signs for vehicles with trailer, such as speed limits or overtaking prohibi- tions. It is switched on or off in the infotain- ment system, using the function button > SETTINGS > Driver assistance page 91.

For trailer mode, the display of speed limits applicable to the type of trailer or to the legal provisions can be adjusted. The speed is ad- justed in steps of 10 km/h (5 mph) within a range of between 60 km/h (40 mph) and 130 km/h (80 mph). If it is adjusted to a speed greater than that which is permitted in the country in question for driving with a trailer, the system automatically displays the usual speed limits, e.g. in Germany 80 km/h (50 mph).

If the speed warning for the trailer is deacti- vated, the system displays the speed limits as if there were no trailer hitched.

Limited operation The traffic sign detection system has certain limitations. The following cases may lead the system to operate with limitations or not at all:

In the case of poor visibility, e.g. in snow, rain, fog or intense mist. In cases of dazzling, e.g. caused by head- on traffic or by the sun. When driving at high speeds. If the camera is covered or dirty. If the traffic signs are out of the camera's field of vision. If the traffic signs are partially or totally covered, e.g. by trees, snow, dirt or other vehi- cles. In the case of traffic signs that do not fulfil the regulations. In the case of damaged or bent traffic signs. In the case of variable messages on over- head or gantry signs (LED-based variable traffic signs or other lighting units). If the maps on the navigation system are not up-to-date. In the case of adhesives affixed to vehicles that depict traffic signs, e.g. speed limits on lorries.

WARNING The technology in the traffic sign detection system cannot change the limits imposed by the laws of physics and only works with- in the system's limits. Do not let the extra convenience afforded by the traffic sign detection system tempt you into taking any risks when driving. The system is not a re- placement for driver awareness. Adapt your speed and driving style to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic condi- tions. Poor visibility, darkness, snow, rain and fog may lead to the system failing to dis- play traffic signs or not displaying them correctly. If the camera's field of vision is dirty, cov- ered or damaged, system operation may be impaired.

WARNING The driving recommendations and traffic indications shown on the traffic sign detec- tion system may differ from the actual cur- rent traffic situation. The system may not detect or correctly show all the traffic signs. Traffic signs and traffic regulations have priority over the recommendations and dis- plays provided by the system.

81

Operation

WARNING If messages are ignored, the vehicle may stall in traffic and cause accidents and se- vere injuries. Never ignore the messages displayed. Stop the vehicle at the next opportunity and in a safe place.

Note To avoid affecting the correct operation of the system, take the following points into consideration: Regularly clean the area of vision of the camera and keep it in a clean state, without snow or ice. Do not cover the field of vision of the camera. Always replace damaged or worn blades when required to avoid lines on the cam- era's field of vision. Check that the windscreen is not dam- aged in the area of the camera's field of vi- sion. The use of outdated maps on the naviga- tion system may cause the system to show traffic signs incorrectly. In the waypoints mode of the navigation system, the traffic sign detection system is only partly available. Failure to heed the control lamps and corresponding text messages when they

light up may result in damage to the vehi- cle.

Time

Setting the time on the infotainment sys- tem Press the function button > SETTINGS > Time and date to set the time page 91.

Setting the time on analogue the instru- ment panel To set the time (for all vehicle clocks), press and hold the button on the instrument panel until the Time is displayed. Release the button . The time is dis- played on the instrument panel display and the hours field is highlighted. Afterwards, press the button until the desired time is displayed. To scroll quickly, hold the button . When they have finished setting the hour, wait until the minute field is marked on the in- strument panel display. Afterwards, press the button until the desired time is displayed. To scroll quickly, hold the button . Release the button in order to finish setting the time.

Adjusting the time in the SEAT Digital Cockpit In the Driving data menu, select the Range function (function button > View > Driving data > Range). Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel until the Service menu is dis- played on the instrument panel display page 76. Select the menu Time. Adjust the correct time by turning the right thumbwheel of the multifunction steering wheel.

Revolution counter

The rev counter indicates the number of en- gine revolutions per minute.

Together with the gear-change indicator, the rev counter offers you the possibility of using the engine of your vehicle at a suitable speed.

The beginning of the red zone of the rev counter indicates the maximum speed in any gear after running-in and with the engine hot. However, it is advisable to change up a gear or move the selector lever to D (or lift your foot off the accelerator) before the needle reaches the red zone .

82

Instruments and warning/control lamps

We recommend that you avoid high revs and that you follow the recommendations on the gear-change indicator. Consult the addition- al information in page 226, Selecting the optimal gear.

CAUTION To prevent damage to the engine, the rev counter needle should only remain in the red zone for a short period of time. When the engine is cold, avoid high revs and heavy acceleration and do not make the engine work hard.

For the sake of the environment Changing up a gear early will help you to save fuel and minimise emissions and en- gine noise.

Fuel gauge

Fig. 71 Analogue instrument panel: fuel gauge

Fig. 72 Digital instrument panel: fuel gauge.

Control lamps

It lights up, and in addition, the lower diode lights up in red

Fuel tank almost empty. The fuel reserve level has been reached . Refuel as soon as you have the opportunity. When the fuel level is very low, the lower diode flash- es red.

It lights up yellow

Presence of water in diesel. Turn off the engine and seek professional assistance.

The display only works when the ignition is switched on.

The fuel range is displayed on the instrument panel.

You can consult the tank capacity of your ve- hicle in the page 352 section.

WARNING When driving with low fuel, the vehicle may stall in traffic and cause accidents and se- vere injuries. If the fuel tank level is too low, fuel could reach the engine irregularly, particularly when driving up or down slopes. The steering system and the driver assis- tance systems and brakes do not work when the engine is running irregularly or

83

Operation

switches off due to lack of fuel or an irregu- lar supply thereof. Always refuel when there is only one quarter of fuel in tank to prevent the vehicle to stop due to lack of fuel.

CAUTION Never run the fuel tank completely dry. An irregular fuel supply can cause misfiring and unburnt fuel could enter the exhaust system. The catalytic converter or the par- ticulate filter may get damaged!

Note The small arrow on the fuel gauge next to the fuel pump symbol points out towards the side of the vehicle with the fuel tank flap.

Engine coolant temperature indica- tor.

Fig. 73 Analogue instrument panel: engine coolant temperature indicator.

Fig. 74 Digital instrument panel: engine cool- ant temperature indicator.

Cool zone. The engine has not reached operating temperature yet. Avoid high speeds and stressing the engine if it has not reached operating temperature.

A

Normal zone. At high outside tempera- tures and when making the engine work hard, the diodes may continue lighting up and reach the upper zone. This is no cause for concern, provided the control lamp does not light up Warning area. When the engine is work- ing hard, especially at high outside tem- peratures, the diodes may light up in the warning area.

The coolant temperature gauge only works when the ignition is switched on.

Control and warning lamp

It lights up red

Do not carry on driving! Engine coolant level too low, coolant temperature too high.

Flashes red

Fault in the engine coolant system.

Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and let it cool down. Check the engine coolant level page 318. If the warning lamp does not switch off even if the coolant level is correct, request assis- tance from specialised personnel.

B

C

84

Instruments and warning/control lamps

CAUTION To ensure a long useful life for the engine, avoid high revs, driving at high speed and making the engine work hard for approxi- mately the first 15 minutes when the engine is cold. The phase until the engine is warm also depends on the outside temperature. If necessary, use the engine oil temperature page 77 as a guide. Additional lights and other accessories in front of the air inlet reduce the cooling ef- fect of the coolant. At high outside temper- atures and high engine loads, there is a risk of the engine overheating. The front spoiler also ensures proper dis- tribution of the cooling air when the vehicle is moving. If the spoiler is damaged this can reduce the cooling effect, which could cause the engine to overheat. Seek spe- cialist assistance.

Service intervals

The service interval display appears on the instrument cluster screen and in the infotain- ment system.

There are different versions of instrument panels and infotainment systems, so the ver- sions and instructions on the screens may vary.

SEAT distinguishes between services with en- gine oil change (e.g. Oil change service) and

services without engine oil change (e.g. In- spection).

In vehicles with Services established by time or mileage, the service intervals are al- ready pre-defined.

In vehicles with LongLife Service, the inter- vals are determined individually. Thanks to technological progress, maintenance work has been greatly reduced. Because of the technology used by SEAT, with this service you only need to change the oil when the ve- hicle so requires. To calculate this variation (max. 2 years), the vehicle's conditions of use and individual driving styles are considered. The advance warning first appears 20 days before the date established for the corre- sponding service. The kilometres (miles) re- maining until the next service are always rounded up to the nearest 100 km (miles) and the time is given in complete days. The cur- rent service message cannot be viewed until 500 km after the last service. Prior to this, on- ly lines are visible on the display.

Inspection reminder If a service or an inspection has to be carried out soon, a service reminder will be dis- played when the ignition is switched on.

The figure displayed are the kilometres that can still be travelled or the time until the next service.

Service due When the time for a service or an inspec- tion comes, an audible warning will be emit- ted when the ignition is switched on and the fixed key symbol may appear on the in- strument panel for a few seconds, along with one of the following messages:

Service now! Please have your vehicle inspec- ted. Oil change service due! Oil change service and inspection due!

Consult a service notification With the ignition switched on, the engine off and the vehicle at a standstill, the current service notification can be read:

Check the date of the current service on the infotainment system Press the > SETTINGS page 91 function button. Select the Service menu option to display information about the services.

Vehicles with analogue instrument panel Press and hold the button Fig. 67 4 for more than 5 seconds to con- sult the service message

85

Operation

Vehicles with digital instrument panel The date of the service can only be read through the Service menu page 76.

Resetting service interval display If the service was not carried out by a SEAT dealership, the display can be reset as fol- lows:

Vehicles with analogue instrument panel Switch off the ignition, press and hold but- ton Fig. 67 4 . Switch ignition back on. Release the button and press it again for the next 20 seconds.

Vehicles with digital instrument panel The service interval display can only be re- set through the Service menu page 76.

Do not restart the indicator between the service intervals, otherwise the information displayed will be incorrect.

If the oil change service is reset manually, the service interval display changes to a fixed service interval, also in vehicles with Flexible oil change service.

Note The service message disappears after a few seconds, when the engine is started or when button is pressed on the wiper

lever, or the button on the multifunction steering wheel. In vehicles with the LongLife system in which the battery has been disconnected for a long period of time, it is not possible to calculate the date of the next service. Therefore the service interval display may not be correct. In this case, bear in mind the maximum service intervals permitted page 336. If you reset the display manually, the next service interval will be indicated as in vehi- cles with fixed service intervals. For this reason we recommend that the service in- terval display be reset by a SEAT author- ised Dealer.

Using the instrument panel

Introduction

With the ignition switched on, it is possible to read the different functions of the display by scrolling through the menus.

In vehicles with multifunction steering wheel, the multifunction display can only be operat- ed with the steering wheel buttons.

Some menu options can only be read when the vehicle is at a standstill.

WARNING Distracting the driver in any way can lead to an accident and cause injuries. Never use the menus on the instrument panel display while the vehicle is in motion.

Note After loading or changing the 12-volt bat- tery, check the system settings. If the pow- er supply is interrupted, the system settings might be incorrect or deleted.

Operation using the multifunction steering wheel

Fig. 75 Right side of the multifunction steering wheel: buttons to the menus and information displays on the instrument panel.

As long as a priority 1 page 77 warning is active, it will not be possible to access any

86

Instruments and warning/control lamps

menu. Some warnings can be confirmed and hidden with the button of the multifunction steering wheel Fig. 75.

Select a menu or an informative display Switch the ignition on. If a message or vehicle symbol is displayed, press the button Fig. 75; if necessary, several times. To change menus, use buttons or Fig. 75. To open the menu or the information dis- played, press the button Fig. 75 or wait a few seconds until the menu or the informa- tive display opens automatically.

Changing menu settings In the menu displayed, turn the right thumb- wheel of the multifunction steering wheel Fig. 75 until the desired option of the menu is highlighted. The option appears framed. Press the button Fig. 75 to make the required modifications. A mark indicates that the system or function is activated.

Back to menu selection Press the button or .

Operation with the wiper lever

Fig. 76 Wiper lever: control keys.

As long as a priority 1 page 77 warning is active, it will not be possible to access any menu. Some warnings can be confirmed and hidden with the button Fig. 76 1 .

Select a menu or an informative display Switch the ignition on. If a message or vehicle symbol is displayed, press button 1 ; if necessary, several times. To display the menus page 75 or to re- turn to the selection of menus from a menu or from an informative display, hold down the rocker button 2 . To change from one menu to another, press the upper or lower part of the rocker switch. To open the menu or the informative display shown, press button 1 or wait a few seconds

until the menu or the informative display opens automatically.

Changing menu settings In the menu displayed, press the upper or lower part of the rocker switch 2 until the re- quired menu option is checked. The option appears framed. Press button 1 to make the required modi- fications. A mark indicates that the system or function is activated.

Back to menu selection Select Back on the corresponding menu to exit.

Note If when switching on the ignition warnings are shown about existing faults, it might not be possible to change the settings or show the information as described. In this case, go to a specialised workshop and request a repair.

87

Operation

Button for the driver assistance systems*

Fig. 77 On the turn signal and main beam lev- er: button for driver assistance systems (de- pending on versions).

Fig. 78 Left side of the multifunction steering wheel: button for driver assistance systems (depending on versions).

With the turn signal and main beam headlight lever button, you can activate or deactivate

the driver assistance systems displayed in the Assistance systems menu .

Activating or deactivating a driver assis- tance system using the turn signal lever and main beam headlight Briefly press the Fig. 77 1 button to open the Assistants menu. Select the driver assistance system and ac- tivate or deactivate it page 86. A mark in- dicates that driver assistance system is switched on. Afterwards, mark or confirm the selection with button on the windscreen wiper lever or button on the multifunction steer- ing wheel .

Activating or deactivating a driver assis- tance system using the multifunction steering wheel* Press the button Fig. 78 to open the Aids menu. Select the driver assistance system and ac- tivate or deactivate it. A mark indicates that driver assistance system is switched on. Next, confirm the selection by pressing the button on the multifunction steering wheel.

The driver assistance systems can also be switched on and off in the infotainment sys- tem, in the menu Vehicle settings page 95.

Control lamps

Control and warning lamps

The control and warning lamps are indicators of warnings , faults or certain functions. Some control and warning lamps come on when the ignition is switched on, and switch off when the engine starts running, or while driving.

Depending on the model, additional text messages may be viewed on the instrument panel display. These may be purely informa- tive or they may be advising of the need for action page 70, Instrument panel.

Depending upon the equipment fitted in the vehicle, instead of a warning lamp, some- times a symbol may be displayed on the in- strument panel.

When certain control and warning lamps are lit, an audible warning is also heard.

Red warning lamps

Notification central lamp: additional infor- mation on the instrument panel display

Parking brake on page 264.

Fault in the brake system page 264.

Fault in the steering system page 228.

88

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Driver or passenger has not fastened seat belt page 16.

Engine cooling fluid page 84.

Engine oil pressure page 316.

Alternator anomaly page 323.

Press the foot brake page 246.

AdBlue level too low, OR fault in the SCR system page 308 .

Yellow warning lamps

Notification central lamp: additional infor- mation on the instrument panel display

Front brake pads worn page 264.

Fault in the ESC or the system caused it to switch off; OR ESC or ASR operating page 269.

ASR switched off manually; OR ESC in Sport mode page 269.

Fault in the ABS page 269.

Rear fog light switched on page 119.

Fault in the emission control system page 310.

Pre-heating of the diesel engine; OR fault in the management of the diesel engine page 310.

Fault in the petrol engine management page 310.

Particulate filter blocked page 310.

Fault in the steering system page 228.

Tyre pressure monitor system page 332.

Fuel tank almost empty page 83.

Adblue level low, OR fault in the SCR sys- tem page 308.

Fault in airbag system and seat belt ten- sioners page 25.

Front passenger front airbag disabled page 25.

Front passenger airbag switched on page 25.

Defective active cruise control (ACC) page 251

Lane Assist (lane keeping system) page 254.

Error in the lane assist warning system page 254.

Lane Assist switched off page 254.

Fault in the lighting of the vehicle page 119.

Low engine oil level page 316.

Fault in the gearbox page 225.

Windscreen cleaning fluid too low page 128.

Green indicator lamps

Turn lights or emergency lights on page 119.

Trailer turn signals page 119.

Auto Hold activated page 268.

Press the foot brake page 219.

Cruise control system (GRA) page 238; OR speed limiter page 240.

Adaptive cruise control (ACC) page 247.

Lane assist active (Lane Assist) warning page 254.

Blue indicator lamps

Main beam on or flasher on page 119.

89

Operation

Other warning lamps

Door(s), rear lid or bonnet open or not properly closed page 74.

Main beam assist (Light Assist) page 119.

Hill descent control (HDC) page 227.

Service interval display page 85.

Mobile phone connected by Bluetooth .

Mobile telephone battery charge status.

Risk of freezing page 74.

Start-Stop system activated page 216.

Start-Stop system unavailable page 216.

Low consumption driving status page 75.

WARNING If the warning lamps and messages are ig- nored, faults may occur in the vehicle, it may stall in traffic, or accidents and seri- ous injuries may occur. Never ignore the warning lamps or text messages. Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi- ble. A faulty vehicle represents a risk of acci- dent for the driver and for other road users. If necessary, switch on the hazard warning

lamps and put out the warning triangle to advise other drivers. Before opening the bonnet, switch off the engine and allow it to cool. In any vehicle, the engine compartment is a hazardous area and could cause severe injuries page 312.

90

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Infotainment system

Introduction

The infotainment system brings together im- portant vehicle functions and systems into a single central control unit, e.g. air condition- ing, menu settings, radio equipment and the navigation system.

The actual number of menus available and the name of the various options will depend on the vehicles electronics and equipment.

General operating information General information on the operation of the infotainment system, as well as on the warn- ing and safety instructions that must be taken into account, is found in page 166.

How to move through the different menus and select them Switch the ignition on. If the infotainment system is off, switch it on. The different menus are selected directly on the touch screen using texts, icons or but- tons.

If the box is checked , the function is activa- ted.

Pressing the menu button will always take you to the last menu used.

Any changes made using the settings menus are automatically saved on closing those menus.

Scroll bar: Some menus and functions show more content above or below those dis- played on the screen at that time, for exam-

ple, long lists of settings. Press on the scroll bar and pull up or down.

Tutorial The first time you connect the infotainment system, a system tutorial will open with a brief description of the main functions and how to use it.

Help In the Help menu can be found more informa- tion and tips for using the infotainment sys- tem.

WARNING Any distraction may lead to an accident, with the risk of injury. Operating the Info- tainment system while driving could dis- tract you from traffic.

91

Operation

Explanation of the function buttons

Fig. 79 Schematic representation: Overview of the possible function buttons on the screen

Top part of the screen Current time Driving profile and navigation informa- tion. If the user has an active route, both the time and the distance to the destina- tion are displayed. If there is no active route, the driving profile is displayed. On vehicles with no available driving profile, the current address is displayed whenev- er there is no active route. Air conditioning information. In vehicles with heated steering wheels or wind- screen heating, the corresponding icon is

A

B

C

displayed when these functions are ena- bled. If not, the current outside tempera- ture is displayed. Telephone information. Information re- garding your mobile device is displayed: available network signal strength, estab- lished Bluetooth connection, unanswered calls, new messages, battery status, etc. Number of notifications and customi- zation of the system depending on the user and connectivity.

Bottom part of the screen Main menu display mode:

D

E

F

: main menu with the 6 main functions divided into 2 screens (3 + 3, customisa- ble by the user by pressing on the func- tion). : main menu in mosaic mode (all func- tions of the Infotainment system) Direct accesses to the functions of the In- fotainment system (up to 10 functions, 5 + 5, customisable by the user). By pressing on the icon, you can select/deselect the functions in question.

G

92

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Initial configuration wizard

Fig. 80 Schematic representation: Initial configu- ration wizard

The initial configuration wizard will help you to set up your Infotainment system the first time you switch it on.

Every time you switch on the Infotainment system, the initial setup screen will be dis- played Fig. 80 if any parameters have not been set (marked with ) or if the Don't show again function button has not been pressed.

Function button: Function

Closes the Configuration Wizard.

Function button: Function

A Press to set day and time.

B Press to search and store to memory the radio stations that have the best reception at that moment.

C Press to link your mobile phone to the Infotainment system.

D Press to select your home address using your current position or by manually entering an address.

Function button: Function

Don't show again

Disables the possibility of changing the settings of the Infotainment sys- tem. If you wish to perform the initial configuration, you must access through Help.

Start Starts up the Configuration Wizard.

End Once one or more settings have been applied, press to finalise the setup in the main menu of the wizard.

93

Operation

Vehicle information

Fig. 81 Schematic representation: Vehicle infor- mation and status

Pressing on > Selection and then on Vehicle info opens the Vehicle information menu with the following submenus:

Driving data. The average consump- tion, average speed, distance travelled, trip duration and autonomy are shown. It has 3 memories: From departure, To- tal calculation and From refuelling page 76. Vehicle status. The warnings regarding faults, incidents, memorisation of the tyre pressure or information of the next inspection service are displayed.

94

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Assist systems and vehicle settings

Fig. 82 Schematic representation: Assist systems and vehicle settings

The number of assist systems and settings depend on the version and the country in question. Driver assistance Automatic parking brake activation

page 266. Park assist page 273. Activate / deactivate ESC, stabilisation

systems and brake assist page 269. Activate / deactivate the Start-Stop sys-

tem page 216. Adaptive cruise control (ACC)

page 245. Lane Assist (lane keeping system)

page 253.

Emergency brake assistance system (Front Assist) page 242.

Fatigue detection page 78. Traffic sign recognition page 79. Lane assist page 259. Emergency Assist page 258.

95

Operation

Multifunction steering wheel*

Functions

Fig. 83 Controls on the steering wheel.

Fig. 84 Controls on the steering wheel.

The steering wheel includes multifunction modules from where it is possible to control the audio, telephone, navigation, voice con-

trol and assist functions without the driver needing to be distracted from the road.

Buttons available depending on the version

Symbol Function

1 Turn: Turn volume up/down Press: Mute volume

2

Turn: Search in the instrument panel menu. In Navigation mode, turn to in- crease/decrease map size in SEAT Digital Cockpit Press: Select the highlighted option in the instrument panel

Radio: Search for the previous/next station. Media: Short press: previous/next track; long press: fast forward/rewind

Activate phone menu (answer call, end call)

Switch between media and radio sources

Change the instrument panel menu (previous/next)

Enable/disable voice control

Analogue Panel: No function Digital Panel (SEAT Digital Cockpit): Change digital panel views page 72

Activate or deactivate steering wheel heating page 159

Symbol Function

Connect/disconnect the Cruise con- trol system page 238 / ACC page 245 / Speed limiter page 240

: Activate ACC / Cruise control sys- tem / Limiter : Reset programmed ACC speed or cruise control system

: Increase programmed speed : Decrease programmed speed

Open the drive assist menu in the in- strument panel

Modify the programmed ACC dis- tance

96

Opening and closing

Opening and closing

Set of vehicle keys

Vehicle key

Fig. 85 Vehicle key

Key to the Fig. 85 Unlock the vehicle Lock the vehicle Unlock only the rear lid. Press the button until all the turn signals on the vehicle flash briefly. You have 2 minutes to open the rear lid. Once this time has passed, it will lock again. In addition, the lamp on the key flashes. Control lamp

With the vehicle key the vehicle may be locked or unlocked remotely page 99.

1

2

3

4

The vehicle key includes an emitter and bat- tery. The receiver is in the interior of the vehi- cle. The range of the vehicle key with remote control and new battery is several metres around the vehicle.

If it is not possible to open or close the vehicle using the remote control key, this should be re-synchronised page 99 or the battery changed page 98.

Different keys belonging to the vehicle may be used.

Control lamp on the vehicle key When a button on the vehicle key is briefly pressed, the indicator lamp flashes 4 Fig. 85 once briefly, but if the button is held down for a longer period it will flash sev- eral times, such as for convenience opening.

If the vehicle key control lamp does not light up when the button is pressed, replace the key's battery page 98.

Spare key To obtain a spare key and other vehicle keys, the vehicle ID number is required.

Each new key contains a microchip which must be coded with the data from the vehicle electronic immobiliser. A vehicle key will not work if it does not contain a microchip or the microchip has not been encoded. This is also

true for keys which are specially cut for the vehicle.

The vehicle keys or new spare keys can be obtained from a SEAT Official Service, a spe- cialised workshop or an approved key service qualified to create this kind of key.

New keys or spare keys must be synchronised before use page 99.

WARNING Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle. In case of emergency, they may not be able to leave the vehicle or manage on their own. An uncontrolled use of the key could start the engine or activate any electric equip- ment (e.g. electric windows), causing risk of accident. The doors can be locked using the remote control key. This could become an obstacle for assistance in an emergen- cy situation. Never forget the keys inside the vehicle. An unauthorised use of your vehicle could result in injury, damage or theft. Therefore always take the key with you when you leave the vehicle. Never remove the key from the ignition if the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the steering could suddenly block and it would be impossible to steer the vehicle.

97

Operation

CAUTION All of the vehicle keys contain electronic components. Protect them from damage, impacts and humidity.

Note Only use the key button when you require the corresponding function. Pushing the button unnecessarily could accidentally unlock the vehicle or trigger the alarm. It is also possible even when you are outside the radius of action. Key operation can be greatly influenced by overlapping radio signals close to the vehicle working in the same range of fre- quencies, for example, radio transmitters or mobile telephones. Obstacles between the remote control and the vehicle, bad weather conditions and discharged batteries can considerably reduce the range of the remote control. If the buttons of the vehicle key are pressed or one of the central locking but- tons page 102 is pressed repeatedly in short succession, the central locking brief- ly disconnects as protection against over- loading. The vehicle is then unlocked. Lock it if necessary. Spare remote control keys are available at your Technical Service, where they must be matched to the locking system. Up to five remote control keys can be used.

Emergency key

Fig. 86 Vehicle key: remove the emergency key.

Inside the vehicle key is an emergency key for manually locking and unlocking the vehicle Fig. 86.

Slightly move the lock in the direction of the arrow. Remove the emergency key in the direc- tion of the arrow. Unlock or lock the vehicle with the emer- gency key.

Possible functions:

Deactivating and activating the front pas- senger airbag page 27. Manually unlocking and locking the vehicle page 109. Manual release mechanism for the rear lid page 114.

1

2

3

To change the battery

Fig. 87 Vehicle key: opening the battery com- partment cover.

Fig. 88 Vehicle key: removing the battery.

SEAT recommends you ask a specialised workshop to replace the battery.

The battery is located to the rear of the vehi- cle key, under a cover.

98

Opening and closing

Changing the battery Remove the emergency key page 98 . Insert a flat blade screwdriver into the vehi- cle key, through the outer guide of the emer- gency key, approx. 1 cm in the direction of the arrow Fig. 87 1 . Turn the screwdriver clockwise until the cover opens Fig. 87 2 . Open the cover in the direction indicated by the arrow Fig. 87 3 and remove it . Lever the battery out of its compartment Fig. 88. Fit a new button battery into the compart- ment . Put on the cover and press it into the hous- ing until it clicks into place. Stow the emergency key.

WARNING Swallowing a battery with a 20 mm diame- ter or any other button battery can cause serious and even fatal injuries within a very short time. Keep the vehicle key and key fobs with batteries out of reach of children. If you suspect that someone may have swallowed a battery, seek immediate med- ical attention.

CAUTION If the battery is not changed correctly, the vehicle key may be damaged. Use of unsuitable batteries may damage the vehicle key. For this reason, always re- place the dead battery with another of the same voltage, size and specifications. When fitting the battery, check that the polarity is correct.

For the sake of the environment Please dispose of your used batteries cor- rectly and with respect for the environ- ment.

Synchronize the vehicle key

If the button is pressed frequently outside of the vehicle range, it is possible that the ve- hicle can no longer be locked or unlocked us- ing the key. In this case, the key must be re- synchronised as described below:

Unfold the vehicle key blade page 97. If necessary, remove the cover from the driver door lever page 109. Press the button on the vehicle key. For this, it must remain with the vehicle. Open the vehicle within one minute using the key blade. The key has been synchron- ised.

If necessary, fit the cap.

Central locking

Introduction

Central locking functions correctly when all the doors and the rear lid are correctly shut. If the driver door is open, the vehicle cannot be locked with the key.

If the vehicle has the Keyless Access locking and ignition system, it may only be locked with the ignition off and the driver's door closed.

The battery of an unlocked vehicle parked for a long period (e.g. in a private garage) may run down and fail to start the motor.

WARNING The incorrect use of the central locking system may cause serious injuries. The central locking system will lock all doors. A vehicle locked from the inside can prevent any non-authorised individual from opening the doors and accessing the vehi- cle. Nevertheless, in case of emergency or accident, locked doors will complicate ac- cess to the vehicle interior to help the pas- sengers. Never leave children or disabled people alone in the vehicle. The central locking

99

Operation

button can be used to lock all the doors from within. Therefore, passengers will be locked inside the vehicle. Individuals locked in the vehicle can be exposed to very high or very low temperatures. Depending on the time of the year, tem- peratures inside a locked and closed vehi- cle can be extremely high or extremely low resulting in serious injuries and illness or even death, particularly for young children. Never leave individuals locked in a closed and locked vehicle. In case of emergency, they may not be able to exit the vehicle by themselves or get help.

Description

Central locking allows all doors, the rear lid and the tank flap to be unlocked centrally:

From outside, using the vehicle key page 101. From outside with the Keyless Access page 102 system, From inside, by pushing the central locking button page 102.

Various functions are available to improve the vehicle safety:

Security system Safe page 105 Self-locking system to prevent involuntary unlocking

Selective unlocking system Automatic speed dependent locking and unlocking system (Auto Lock) Emergency unlocking system

Self-locking system to prevent involuntary unlocking It is an anti-theft system and prevents the un- intentional unlocking of the vehicle. If the ve- hicle is unlocked and none of the doors (in- cluding the boot) are opened within 30 sec- onds, it re-locks automatically.

Unlocking one side of the vehicle only When you lock the vehicle with the key, the doors and the rear lid are locked. When you open the door, you can either unlock only the driver door, or all the vehicle doors. To select the required option, use the Infotainment sys- tem setting page 101.

Automatic locking (Auto Lock)* The Auto Lock function locks the doors and the rear lid when the vehicle exceeds a speed of about 15 km/h (9 mph).

The vehicle is unlocked again when the igni- tion key is removed. Alternatively, the vehicle can also be unlocked via the central locking switch or by pulling one of the inside door handles.

In the event of an accident in which the air- bags inflate, the doors will be automatically unlocked to facilitate access and assistance.

Turn signals The turn signals will flash twice when the ve- hicle is unlocked and once when the vehicle is locked.

If it does not flash, this indicates that one of the doors, the rear lid or the bonnet is not closed correctly.

Accidental lock-out The central locking system prevents you from being locked out of the vehicle in the follow- ing situations:

If the driver door is open, the vehicle cannot be locked with the central locking switch page 102.

Lock the vehicle with the remote control key, when all the doors and the rear lid have been closed. This prevents the accidental locking of the vehicle.

Note Never leave any valuable items in the ve- hicle unattended. Even a locked vehicle is not a safe. If the LED on the driver door sill lights up for about 30 seconds when the vehicle is

100

Opening and closing

locked, the central locking system or anti- theft alarm* is not working properly. You should have the fault repaired at a SEAT Official Service or specialised workshop. The vehicle interior monitoring of the an- ti-theft alarm* system will only function as intended if the windows and the sunroof* are closed.

Central locking settings

Central locking settings can be changed in the Infotainment system.

Unlocking doors Press the function button > SETTINGS > Opening and closing > Central locking > Door unlocking.

You can choose to unlock all the doors or on- ly the driver door when you unlock the vehi- cle. In all the options, the fuel tank flap is also unlocked.

With the Driver setting, when you press the button on the remote control key once, only the driver door is unlocked. If that button is pressed twice, the rest of the doors and the rear lid will be unlocked.

If the button is pressed, all the vehicle doors are locked. At the same time, a confir- mation signal* is heard.

Unlock and lock from the outside

Fig. 89 Remote control key: buttons.

Lock: press the Fig. 89 button. Locking the vehicle without the Safe se- curity system: push the button again and hold for 2 seconds. Unlock: press the button. Unlocking the rear lid: hold down the button for at least 1 second.

The vehicle will be locked again automatical- ly if you do not open one of the doors or the rear lid within 30 seconds after unlocking the car. This function prevents the vehicle from remaining unlocked if the unlocking button is pressed by mistake. This does not apply if you press the button for at least one second.

Selective unlocking system The selective unlocking system allows you to only unlock the driver door and the fuel tank

flap. All other doors and the rear lid remain locked.

Unlocking the driver's door and tank flap: Press (once) the button on the remote control key or turn the key once in the open- ing direction.

Unlocking all the doors, the rear lid and the tank flap simultaneously: Within 5 seconds, press (twice) the but- ton on the remote control key, or turn the key twice within 5 seconds in the opening direc- tion.

The Safe* security system and the anti-theft alarm* deactivate immediately when only the driver door is opened.

In vehicles with Infotainment system, you can programme the security central locking sys- tem directly page 101.

WARNING Observe the safety warnings in Lock- ing system Safe on page 106.

Note Do not use the remote control key until the vehicle is visible. Other functions of the remote control key page 115, Convenience open/close function.

101

Operation

Unlocking and locking from the in- side

Fig. 90 Driver's door: central locking switch.

Lock: press the Fig. 90 button. Unlock: press the Fig. 90 button.

Please note the following when using the central locking switch to lock your vehicle:

It is not possible to open the doors or the rear lid from the outside (for safety reasons, e.g. when stopped at traffic lights). The LED in the central locking switch lights up when all the doors are closed and locked. You can open the doors individually from the inside by pulling the inside door handle. In the event of an accident in which the air- bags inflate, doors locked from the inside will be automatically unlocked to facilitate ac- cess and assistance.

WARNING The central locking switch also works with the ignition switched off, except when the safe system is activated. The central locking switch does not oper- ate if the vehicle is locked from the outside and the security system is switched on. Locked doors could delay assistance in an emergency. Do not leave anyone, espe- cially children, in the vehicle.

Note Your vehicle will lock automatically when it reaches a speed of about 15 km/h (9 mph) (Auto Lock) page 100. You can unlock the vehicle again using the button on the central locking switch.

Unlock and lock the vehicle with Keyless Access*

Fig. 91 Keyless Access: proximity zones.

Fig. 92 Door handle: sensor surfaces

Fig. 92 Unlocking sensor surface on the inside of the door handle. Locking sensor surface on the outside of the door handle.

A

B

102

Opening and closing

Depending on the equipment, the vehicle may have the Keyless Access system.

Keyless Access is a key-free locking and igni- tion system to unlock and lock the vehicle without actively using its key. To do this, all that is required is to have a valid vehicle key in the detection area where you are attempting to access the vehicle Fig. 91 and to touch one of the sensor surfaces on the door han- dles Fig. 92 or operate the softtouch/han- dle on the rear lid page 110 .

Automatic vehicle unlock The vehicle can be unlocked and locked via the front doors only. When doing so, the re- mote control key must be no further than ap- prox. 1.5 m away from the door handle.

It does not matter where you carry the key, e.g. in your jacket pocket.

Once the doors have been locked, they can- not be opened again immediately. This will enable you to check that the doors are prop- erly closed.

If you wish you may unlock only the corre- sponding door or the entire vehicle. The nec- essary adjustments can be performed in ve- hicles with a driver information system page 95.

General information If a valid key is in the proximity of the car, Fig. 91 the Keyless Access locking and starting system gives the key entry as soon as one of the sensor surfaces on the door han- dles is touched or the softtouch/handle on the rear lid is operated.

The following features are then available without having to use the vehicle key actively:

Keyless Entry: unlocking the vehicle using the handles of the front doors or the soft- touch/handle on the rear lid. Keyless Exit: locking the vehicle using the sensor of the driver or passenger door han- dle. Easy Open: opening the rear lid moving one foot below the rear bumper page 113. Press & Drive: keyless starting of the engine with the starter button page 212.

The central locking and locking systems op- erate in the same way as a normal locking and unlocking system. Only the controls change.

Unlocking the vehicle is confirmed with a double flash of the indicator lights; locking by a single flash.

If the vehicle is locked and then all doors and the rear lid are closed leaving the last key used inside the vehicle and none outside, the vehicle will not lock immediately. All the ve-

hicle's indicator lights will flash four times. The vehicle will lock after a few seconds if you do not open any door or the rear lid.

The vehicle will lock again after a few sec- onds if you unlock the vehicle but fail to open any door or boot hatch.

Unlocking and opening the doors (Keyless-Entry) Grip one of the front door handles. When you do this, you touch the sensor surface Fig. 92 A (arrow) of the handle and the vehicle unlocks. Open the door.

On vehicles with selective opening or info- tainment system configuration, pulling the door handle twice will unlock all doors.

In vehicles without the Safe security sys- tem: closing and locking the doors (Keyless-Exit) Switch the ignition off. Close the driver's door. Touch (once) the locking sensor surface Fig. 92 B (arrow) on one of the front door handles. The door that is used must be closed.

103

Operation

In vehicles with the Safe security sys- tem: closing and locking the doors (Keyless-Exit) Switch the ignition off. Close the driver's door. Touch (once) the sensor surface Fig. 92 B (arrow) on one of the front door handles.

The vehicle locks with the Safe security sys- tem page 105. The door that is used must be closed. Touch (twice) the sensor surface Fig. 92 B (arrow) of one of the front door handles to

lock the vehicle without activating the Safelock security system page 105.

Unlocking and locking the boot hatch When the vehicle is locked, the rear lid auto- matically unlocks on opening if there is a val- id vehicle key in the proximity zone Fig. 91.

Open or close the rear lid normally.

After closing, the hatch locks automatically. If the complete vehicle is unlocked, the rear lid will not lock automatically after closing it.

What happens when locking the vehicle with a second key If there is a vehicle key inside the vehicle and it is locked from the outside with a second ve- hicle key, the key inside the vehicle is blocked for engine ignition page 212. In order to

enable engine ignition, press the button on the key inside the vehicle.

Automatically disabling sensors If the vehicle is not locked or unlocked for a long period of time, the proximity sensors on the passenger doors are automatically disa- bled.

If one of the sensor surfaces on the door han- dles is often activated in an unusual manner with the vehicle locked (e.g. by the branches of a bush rubbing against it), all proximity sensors are disabled for a certain period of time.

Sensors will again be enabled:

After a time. OR: if the vehicle is unlocked with the but- ton on the key. OR: if the boot is opened. OR: if the vehicle is unlocked manually with the key.

Keyless Access temporary disconnection function* You can deactivate the vehicle's Keyless Access unlocking for one locking and unlock- ing cycle.

Move the gear lever to position P (if the ve- hicle has automatic gearbox), since other- wise the vehicle cannot be locked.

Close the door. Push the central locking button on the re- mote control and touch the locking sensor surface of the driver door handle Fig. 92 B within the following 5 seconds. Do not grasp the door handle; otherwise the vehicle will not unlock. Deactivation is also possible if the vehicle is locked through the drivers door lock. To check that the function has been deacti- vated, wait at least 10 seconds, grip and pull on the door handle. The door should not open.

The next time the door can only be unlocked via the remote control or the lock cylinder. The next time the door is locked/unlocked, Keyless Access will be active again.

Convenience functions To close all the electric windows and the sun- roof using the comfort function, keep a fin- ger for a few seconds on the locking sensor surface Fig. 92 B (arrow) of the door han- dle until the windows and roof have closed.

How the doors open when touching the sen- sor surface on the door handle will depend on the settings that have been activated in the infotainment system, using the function button > SETTINGS > Opening and closing.

104

Opening and closing

CAUTION The sensor surfaces on the door handles could engage if hit with a water jet or high pressure steam if there is a valid vehicle key in the proximity. If at least one of the electric windows is open and the sensor surface Fig. 92 B (arrow) on one of the handles is activated continuously, all win- dows will close.

Note If the 12-volt vehicle battery has little or no charge, or the vehicle key battery is al- most or entirely out of charge, you will probably not be able to lock or unlock the vehicle with the Keyless Access system. The vehicle can be unlocked or locked manually page 109. To control the proper locking of the vehi- cle, the release function is disabled for ap- prox. 2 seconds. If the message Keyless access system faulty is displayed on the screen of the dash panel, abnormalities may occur in the operation of the Keyless Access system. Contact a specialised workshop. SEAT rec- ommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this. Depending on the function set on the in- fotainment system for the mirrors, the exte-

rior mirrors will unfold and the surround lighting will come on when unlocking the vehicle using the sensor surface on the driver and passenger door handles page 130. If there is no valid key inside the vehicle or the system fails to detect one, a warning will display on the dash panel screen. This could happen if any other radio frequency signal interferes with the key signal (e.g. from a mobile device accessory) or if the key is covered by another object (e.g. an aluminium case). If the sensors are very dirty, e.g. have a layer of salt, the correct functioning of the sensors on the door handles may be affec- ted. In this case, clean the vehicle. If the vehicle is equipped with an auto- matic gearbox, it may only be locked in the gear stick is in position P. To improve the safety of your vehicle, the remote control of the system is equipped with a position sensor. If this remote control does not detect movement for a certain length of time, the system will conclude that the vehicle cannot be opened (e.g. on a night table) so it will be disabled.

Locking system Safe1)

When the vehicle is blocked, the Safe se- curity system puts the door handles out of operation and prevents unauthorised persons for entering. The doors cannot be opened from inside .

Depending on the vehicle, when switching the ignition off, a warning may be displayed on the control panel screen stating that the Safe security system is activated.

Lock the vehicle and activate the Safe security system. Press the locking button once on the ve- hicle key.

Lock the vehicle without activating the Safe system. Press the locking button on the vehicle key twice. On vehicles with the Keyless Access locking and ignition system: touch the sensor surface on the outside part of the door handle twice.

1) Available depending on market and version. 105

Operation

When the Safe security system is disa- bled, the following needs to be taken into account: The vehicle can be unlocked and opened from the inside using an door handle. The anti-theft alarm is activated. The vehicle interior monitoring system and the anti-tow system are disabled.

Safe status The flashing frequency of the diode in the door sill immediately confirms the process. Initially, the diode flashes in a fast sequence for a brief period, then it stops for approxi- mately 30 seconds and, lastly continues flashing slowly.

WARNING Do not leave anyone (especially children) in the vehicle if it is locked from the outside and the Safe security system* is activa- ted, as the doors and windows cannot then be opened from the inside. Locked doors could delay assistance in an emergency.

Anti-theft alarm system*

Description

The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficult to break into the vehicle or steal it. The system

will initiate acoustic and optical warning sig- nals when your vehicle is tried to be forced.

The anti-theft alarm is automatically turned on when the vehicle is locked with the key. The system is immediately activated and the turn signal light located on the driver door will flash along with the turn signals, indicating that the alarm and the locking security sys- tem (double lock) have been turned on.

If any of the doors or the bonnet are open, they will not be included in the protection zones of the vehicle when the alarm is con- nected. If the door or the bonnet are subse- quently closed, they will be automatically in- cluded in the protection areas of the vehicle and the turn signals will flash accordingly when the doors close.

The turn signal light will flash twice on opening and deactivating the alarm. The turn signal light will flash once on clos- ing and activating the alarm.

When does the system trigger an alarm? The anti-theft alarm siren will be triggered for about 30 seconds alongside a sound and optical (flashing) warning signals and will be repeated about ten times when the vehicle is locked and the following unauthorised ac- tions are attempted:

Opening a door that is mechanically un- locked using the vehicle key without switching

on the ignition in the next 15 seconds (in cer- tain markets, such as the Netherlands, there is no 15 second waiting time and the alarm is activated immediately on opening the door). A door is opened. Opening the bonnet. The rear lid is opened. When the ignition is switched on with a non- authorised key. Undue manipulation of the alarm. Switching off the 12 volt battery. Movement inside the vehicle (in vehicles with interior monitoring page 107). When the vehicle is towed (in vehicles with anti-tow system page 107). When the vehicle is raised (in vehicles with anti-tow system page 107). When the vehicle is transported on a ferry or by rail (vehicles with an anti-tow system or vehicle interior monitoring page 107). When a trailer connected to the anti-theft alarm system is disconnected.

How to turn OFF the alarm Unlock the vehicle with the unlock button of the key. OR: turn the ignition on with a valid key.

106

Opening and closing

If the drivers door is unlocked mechanically using the key, the ignition must be turned on within 15 seconds of opening the door.

Otherwise, the alarm will trigger for 30 sec. and the ignition will be blocked.

CAUTION If the anti-theft security system is switched off, the vehicle interior monitoring and the tow-away protection are automatically disconnected.

Note After 28 days, the indicator light will be switched off to prevent the battery from ex- hausting if the vehicle has been left parked for a long period of time. The alarm system remains activated. If, after the audible warning goes off, an- other monitored area is accessed (e.g. the rear lid is opened after a door has been opened), the alarm is triggered again. The anti-theft alarm is not activated when the vehicle is locked from within using the central locking button . If the driver door is unlocked mechanical- ly with the key, only the driver door is un- locked, the rest of the doors remain locked. Only when the ignition has been turned on will the other doors be available - but not unlocked - and the central locking button will be activated.

If the 12-volt vehicle battery is run down or flat then the anti-theft alarm will not op- erate correctly. Vehicle monitoring remains active even if the battery is disconnected or not working for any reason. The alarm is triggered immediately if one of the battery cables is disconnected while the alarm system is active.

Interior monitoring and the anti- tow system*

It is a monitoring or control function incorpo- rated in the anti-theft alarm* which detects unauthorised vehicle entry by means of ultra- sound.

The vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow sensor (tilt sensor) are automatically switch- ed on when the anti-theft alarm is switched on. In order to activate it, all the doors and the rear lid must be closed.

If the Safe security system* page 105 is switched off, the vehicle interior monitoring and the tow-away protection are automati- cally disconnected.

Activation It is automatically switched on when the anti-theft alarm is activated.

Deactivation Open the vehicle with the key, either me- chanically or by pressing the button on the remote control. The time period from when the door is opened until the ignition is turned on should not exceed 15 seconds, otherwise the alarm will be triggered. Press the button on the remote control twice. The volumetric sensor and tilt sensors will be deactivated. The alarm system re- mains activated.

The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti- tow system are automatically switched on again next time the vehicle is locked.

If you wish to switch off the vehicle interior monitoring and the anti-tow system, it must be done each time that the vehicle is locked; if not, they will be automatically switched on.

The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti- tow system should be switched off if animals are left inside the locked vehicle (otherwise, their movements will trigger the alarm) or when, for example, the vehicle is transported or has to be towed with only one axle on the ground.

Deactivation through the infotainment system Switch off the contact and select: > SETTINGS > Opening and closing >

107

Operation

Central locking > Interior monitor- ing. When the vehicle is locked now, the vehicle interior monitoring and the tow-away protec- tion are switched off until the next time the door is opened.

False alarms Interior monitoring will only operate correctly if the vehicle is completely closed. Please ob- serve related legal requirements.

The following cases may cause a false alarm: Open windows (partially or fully). Panoramic/tilting sunroof open (partially or completely). Movement of objects inside the vehicle, such as loose papers, items hanging from the rear vision mirror (air fresheners), etc.

Note If the vehicle is relocked and the alarm is activated without the volumetric sensor function, relocking will activate the alarm with all its functions, except the volumetric sensor. This function is reactivated when the alarm is switched on again, unless it is deliberately switched off. If the alarm has been triggered by the volumetric sensor, this will be indicated by a flashing of the warning lamp on the driver

door when the vehicle is opened. The flash is different to the flash indicating the alarm is activated. The vibration of a mobile phone left in- side the vehicle may cause the vehicle in- terior monitoring alarm to trigger, as both sensors react to movements and shakes in- side the vehicle. If on activating the alarm, any door or the rear lid is open, only the alarm will be acti- vated. The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti-tow system will only be activated once all the doors are closed (including the rear lid).

Doors

Introduction

The doors and rear lid can be locked man- ually and partially opened, for example if the key or the central locking is damaged.

WARNING Opening and closing doors carelessly can cause serious injury. If the vehicle is locked from outside, the doors and windows cannot be opened from the inside. Never leave children or disabled people alone in the car. They could be trapped in

the car in an emergency and will not be able to get themselves to safety. Depending on the time of the year, tem- peratures inside a locked and closed vehi- cle can be extremely high or extremely low resulting in serious injuries and illness or even death, particularly for young children.

WARNING Getting in the way of the doors and the rear lid is dangerous and can lead to serious in- jury. Open and close the doors and the rear lid only when there is nobody in the way.

CAUTION When opening and closing in an emergen- cy, carefully disassemble components and then reassemble them carefully to avoid damage to the vehicle.

108

Opening and closing

Emergency unlocking or locking of the drivers door

Fig. 93 Driver door handle: Concealed lock cylinder.

Fig. 94 Driver door handle: lever the cover off

If the central locking system should fail to op- erate, the driver door can still be locked and unlocked by turning the key in the lock.

As a general rule, when the driver door is locked manually all other doors are locked. When it is unlocked manually, only the driver door opens. Please observe the instructions relating to the anti-theft alarm system page 106.

Remove the emergency key from the vehi- cle key page 98. Insert the emergency key into the lower opening in the cover on the driver door han- dle Fig. 94 then lift the bottom cover up- wards. Insert the key blade into the lock cylinder to unlock or lock the vehicle.

Special characteristics The anti-theft alarm will remain active when vehicles are unlocked. However, the alarm will not be triggered page 106. After the driver door is opened, you have 15 seconds to switch on the ignition. Once this time has elapsed, the alarm is triggered. Switch the ignition on. The electronic immo- bilizer recognises a valid vehicle key and de- activates the anti-theft alarm system.

Note The anti-theft alarm is not activated when the vehicle is locked manually using the key shaft page 99.

Emergency lock of doors without lock cylinders

Fig. 95 Locking the door manually.

If the central locking system should fail to work at any time, doors with no lock cylinder will have to be locked separately.

The emergency lock is located on the front of the front passenger's door and the rear doors. It can only be seen if the door is open.

Pull the cap out of the opening. Insert the key in the inside slot and turn it to the right as far as it will go (if the door is on the right side) or to the left (if the door is on the left side). Replace the cap.

Once the door has been closed it can no lon- ger be opened from the outside. Pull the inte- rior door handle once to unlock and open the door.

109

Operation

Childproof locks

Fig. 96 Childproof lock on the left hand side door.

The childproof lock prevents the rear doors from being opened from the inside. This sys- tem prevents minors from opening a door ac- cidentally while the vehicle is running.

This function is independent of the vehicle electronic opening and locking systems. It only affects rear doors. It can only be activa- ted and deactivated manually, as described below:

Activating the childproof lock Unlock the vehicle and open the door in

which you wish to activate the childproof lock.

With the door open, rotate the groove in the door using the ignition key, clockwise for the left hand side doors Fig. 96 and anti- clockwise for the right hand side doors.

Deactivating the childproof lock Unlock the vehicle and open the door

whose childproof lock you want to deacti- vate.

With the door open, rotate the groove in the door using the ignition key, anti-clockwise for the left hand side doors Fig. 96 and clockwise for the right hand side doors.

Once the childproof lock is activated, the door can only be opened from the outside.

Rear lid

Introduction

WARNING Careless and unsuitable locking, opening and closing of the rear lid can cause acci- dents and serious injury. The rear lid must not be opened when the reverse or rear fog lights are lit. This may damage the tail lights. Do not close the rear lid by pushing it down with your hand on the rear window. The glass could smash. Risk of injury! Ensure the rear lid is locked after closing it. If not, it may open unexpectedly while driving.

Closing the rear lid without observing and ensuring it is clear could cause serious injury to you and to third parties. Make sure that no one is in the path of the rear lid. Never drive with the rear lid open or half- closed, exhaust gases may penetrate into the interior of the vehicle. Danger of poi- soning! Never leave the vehicle unattended or al- low children to play inside or next to it, es- pecially if the rear lid is open. Children could enter the luggage compartment, close the rear lid and become trapped. A locked vehicle can reach extremely high and low temperatures, depending on the time of year, thus causing serious injuries, illness or even death.

CAUTION Before opening or closing the rear lid, make sure that there is enough space to open or close it, e.g. when pulling a trailer or in a garage.

Note Before closing the rear lid, make sure that the key has not been left inside the luggage compartment.

110

Opening and closing

Opening and closing the rear lid

Fig. 97 Rear lid: handle

The rear lid opening system operates electri- cally. It is activated by exerting slight pressure on the handle Fig. 97.

To lock or unlock the rear lid, press the or buttons of the vehicle key.

A warning appears on the instrument panel display if the rear lid is open or not properly closed.* An audible warning is also given if it is opened while the vehicle is moving faster than 6 km/h (4 mph)*.

Opening and closing To open: place slight pressure on the han- dle. The rear lid opens automatically. To close: hold one of the handles on the in- ner trim and close it by moving it downwards, or press the button on the rear lid* Fig. 98.

If the doors are locked, the rear lid is also locked.

Rear lid with electric opening and closing*

Fig. 98 Rear lid: button to close the rear lid.

Fig. 99 Centre console: button to open and close the rear lid.

Opening the rear lid Unlock the vehicle and briefly press the handle of the rear lid. On vehicles with Keyless Access you can directly press the handle of the rear lid. The rear lid is unlocked if an authorised key is recognised in the prox- imity of the vehicle. OR: press the button on the centre console for at least one second Fig. 99. The button also works when the ignition is switched off. OR: press and hold the button of the ve- hicle key for approx. 1 second. If the vehicle is locked, only the rear lid is unlocked (the doors remain locked). OR: on vehicles with Keyless Access and sensor-controlled opening you can open the rear lid by moving one foot in the area of the sensors located below the rear bumper (Easy Open page 113). The rear lid will be auto- matically opened.

Closing the rear lid Briefly press the button on the rear lid Fig. 98 in Introduction on page 110. OR: press the button located on the centre console until the rear lid is closed Fig. 99. OR: on vehicles with Keyless Access, press and hold the vehicle key button until the rear lid is closed, or move one foot into the area of the sensors located below the rear bumper (Easy Open) page 113. The key of

111

Operation

the vehicle must not be further away than 1.5 m from the boot or inside the vehicle. OR: manually move the rear lid in the direc- tion of closing until it closes automatically. The rear lid goes down automatically to the final position and also closes automatically in Introduction on page 110.

Interrupting opening or closing After beginning to open or close the rear lid, the action can be halted by pressing one of the buttons.

Continue opening or closing the rear lid by hand. To do this, some force will have to be used.

If you press one of the buttons again, the rear lid will move again in the original direc- tion.

If the rear lid is met with resistance or an ob- stacle during the automatic opening or clos- ing, opening or closing will be interrupted im- mediately. For the closing process, the rear lid opens again slightly.

Check why it has not been possible to open or close the rear lid. Try to open or close the rear lid again. If necessary, the rear lid can be opened or closed by hand using reasonable force.

Particular features if towing a trailer If the factory-fitted towing bracket is electri- cally connected to a trailer page 294, the electric rear lid can only be opened or closed with the buttons on the rear lid itself.

Acoustic warnings Throughout the process of opening or closing the rear lid, acoustic warnings can be heard. Exception: when the rear lid is opened man- ually using the handle or the Easy Open func- tion with the movement of the foot or closed using the button on the rear lid itself Fig. 98.

Modifying and memorising the opening angle If the space behind or above the vehicle is less than the travel area of the rear lid, you can change the opening angle of the rear lid.

To memorise a new opening angle, the rear lid must be open at least halfway.

Interrupt the opening process in the desired position. Press the button Fig. 98 on the rear lid for at least 3 seconds.

The opening angle is memorised. Memorisa- tion is indicated by blinking of the hazard warning lights and an audible warning.

Resetting and memorising the opening an- gle For the rear lid to reopen completely, the opening angle must be reset and memorised again.

Release the rear lid and open it to the memorised height. Lift the rear lid by hand as far as it goes. To do this, some force will have to be used. Press the button Fig. 98 on the rear lid for at least 3 seconds. This resets and memorises the factory-set opening angle. Memorisation is indicated by blinking of the hazard warning lights and an audible warning.

Automatic protection against overheating If the system is operated repeatedly in a short space of time, it automatically switches off to prevent overheating.

Once the system is cool again, the function can be reused. Until then, the rear lid can only be opened and closed by hand using reason- able force.

If the 12-volt battery is disconnected or the corresponding page 57 fuse burns out while the rear lid is open, the system will have to be reset. This requires closing the rear lid completely once.

112

Opening and closing

Emergency unlocking page 114

WARNING If a lot of snow builds up on the rear lid or it is heavily loaded, the rear lid may not open or, after opening, it may lower by itself due to the extra weight and cause serious in- jury. Do not open the rear lid when there is a lot of snow on it or when carrying a load (e.g. on a rack). Before opening the rear lid, remove the snow or the load.

Rear lid with sensor-controlled opening and closing (Easy Open)

Fig. 100 Rear lid with sensor-controlled open- ing (Easy Open).

If there is a valid vehicle key in the proximity of the rear lid, it is possible to unlock and open or close it moving one foot in the area of the sensors located under the rear bumper.

Switch the ignition off. Stand in front of the rear bumper, in the middle. With a brisk movement, bring your foot and lower leg as close as you can to the bumper. The lower part of the leg needs to be close to the upper sensor area and your foot must be close to the lower sensor area Fig. 100 1 . Quickly remove your foot and lower leg from the sensor areas Fig. 100 2 . The rear lid will be automatically opened. If the rear lid fails to open, repeat the pro- cedure after a few seconds.

The third brake light flashes once to show the boot has opened with the Easy Open func- tion.

The rear lid can be closed with another foot movement similar to the opening one (provi- ded a valid vehicle key is in the proximity of the rear lid).

When closed, the rear lid automatically locks if the vehicle has been locked beforehand and there is no valid key inside.

While the rear lid is in motion (either opening or closing), it can be stopped with another foot movement similar to the opening one

(provided a valid vehicle key is in the proximi- ty of the rear lid).

The Easy Open feature is not available or on- ly has limited availability in the following sit- uations (examples):

If the rear bumper is very dirty. If the rear bumper is wet with salt water, e.g. after having driven on gritted roads. If the electrical unlocking tow hitch is not covered. If the vehicle has been equipped at a later time with a tow bracket.

In the event of heavy rain, the Easy Open fea- ture may take a little longer to open the boot or may deactivate automatically, to avoid the boot opening by accident, e.g. because of the running water.

The Easy Open function can be connected and disconnected permanently in the info- tainment system using the function button > SETTINGS > Opening and closing page 95.

WARNING If there is a valid key in the proximity of the rear lid, in some cases the Easy Open func- tion may be accidentally activated and the rear lid will open, for example, when sweeping under the rear bumper, when di- recting a water jet or high pressure steam to the area or when carrying out

113

Operation

maintenance work or repairs in that area. If accidentally opened, the rear lid could in- jure somebody situated in its area of oper- ation or cause material damage. Therefore, always make sure that there is no unsupervised valid key in the area near the rear lid. Before carrying out any maintenance or repair work on the vehicle, always disable the Easy Open feature via the infotainment system. Before washing the vehicle, always disa- ble the Easy Open feature via the infotain- ment system. Before attaching a bicycle rack or a trail- er, page 294, always disable the Easy Open feature via the infotainment system.

Emergency unlocking of the rear lid

Fig. 101 Detail of the luggage compartment: access to emergency unlocking.

Fig. 102 Detail of the luggage compartment: emergency unlocking

The rear lid can be unlocked from inside in the event of an emergency (e.g. no battery).

There is a groove in the luggage compart- ment allowing access to the emergency opening mechanism.

Unlocking the rear lid from inside the lug- gage compartment Lever the cover off with the emergency key Fig. 101. Insert the emergency key into the slot and move it in the direction of the arrow until the lock unlocks Fig. 101, Fig. 102.

Window controls

Electrically opening and closing the windows

Fig. 103 Detail of the driver's door: window controls.

Opening the window: press the button . Closing the window: pull the button .

Buttons on the driver door Window on the front left door Window on the front right door Window on the rear left door Window on the rear right door Safety switch for deactivating the electric window buttons in the rear doors.

1

2

3

4

5

114

Opening and closing

The front and rear electric windows can be operated by using the controls on the driver door. The other doors each have a switch for their own window.

Always close the windows fully if you park the vehicle or leave it unattended .

You can use the electric windows for approx. 10 minutes after switching off the ignition if neither the driver door nor the front passen- ger door has been opened and the key has not been removed from the ignition.

Safety switch * The safety control Fig. 103 5 on the driver door can be used to disable the electric win- dow buttons on the rear doors.

Safety switch not pressed: buttons on rear doors are activated.

Safety switch pressed: buttons on rear doors are deactivated.

The safety control symbol lights up in yel- low if the buttons on the rear doors are switched off.

Convenience open/close function The electric windows can be opened or closed from outside using the vehicle key:

Convenience opening: Press and hold the button on the remote control key until all the windows and the sun- roof* have reached the desired position. OR: First unlock the vehicle using the but- ton on the remote control key and then keep the key in the driver door lock until all the win- dows and the sunroof* have reached the re- quired position.

Convenience closing: Press and hold button on the remote control key until all the windows and the sun- roof* are closed . OR: Keep the key in the driver door in the "lock" position until all the windows and the sunroof* are closed.

During convenience closing, first the windows and then the sliding sunroof will be closed.

Different settings can be changed using the infotainment system. Select: > SETTINGS > Opening and closing > Windows > Convenience opening.

One-touch opening and closing The one-touch automatic opening and clos- ing is used to open or close the windows completely. It will not be necessary to hold the button of the corresponding electric win- dow.

For the automatic raising function: pull the button for the corresponding window up- wards until it reaches the second position.

For the automatic lowering function: push the button for the corresponding window up- wards until it reaches the second position.

Stop automatic movement: push or pull on the button of the corresponding window.

Resetting one-touch opening and closing The one-touch opening and closing function is not active after the vehicle battery has been disconnected or is flat and will have to be reset.

Pull the button of the corresponding win- dow and hold it for one second in this posi- tion. Release the button and pull upwards and hold again. The one-touch function is now ready for operation.

The automatic one-touch electric windows can be reinitialised individually or several at a time.

WARNING Observe the safety warnings in Intro- duction on page 108. Incorrect use of the electric windows can result in injury.

115

Operation

Never close the rear lid without observing and ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise could cause serious injury to you and third parties. Make sure that no one is in the path of a window. If the ignition is switched on, the electric equipment could be activated with risk of injury, for example, in the electric windows. The doors can be locked using the re- mote control key. This could become an obstacle for assistance in an emergency situation. Therefore always take the key with you when you leave the vehicle. The electric windows will work until the ignition has been switched off and one of the front doors has been opened. If necessary, use the safety switch to dis- able the rear electric windows. Make sure that they have been disabled. For safety reasons, you should only use the remote control open and close func- tions within about 2 metres of the vehicle. To avoid injuries, always keep an eye on the windows when pressing the button to close them. The windows stop moving as soon as the button is released.

Note If the window is not able to close because it is stiff or because of an obstruction, the window will automatically open again page 116. If this happens, check why the

window could not be closed before at- tempting to close it again.

Window anti-trap function

The roll-back function reduces the risk of in- jury when the electric windows close.

If a window is obstructed when closing au- tomatically, the window stops at this point and lowers immediately . Next, check why the window does not close before attempting it again. If you try within the following 10 seconds and the window closes again with difficulty or there is an obstruction, the automatic closing will stop working for 10 seconds. If the window is still obstructed, the window will stop at this point. If there is no obvious reason why the win- dow cannot be closed, try to close it again by pulling the tab within ten seconds. The win- dow closes with maximum force. The roll- back function is now deactivated. If more than 10 seconds pass, the window will open fully when you operate one of the buttons. One-touch closing is reactivated.

WARNING Observe the safety warnings in Elec- trically opening and closing the windows on page 115. The roll-back function does not prevent fingers or other parts of the body getting pinched against the window frame. Risk of accident.

Sunroof*

Introduction

The sunroof consists of two glass parts. The rear part is fixed and cannot be opened. It al- so has a sun blind.

The sunroof only works when the ignition is switched on. Once the ignition has been switched off, you can still open or close the sunroof for a few minutes provided the driver door and the front passenger door are not opened.

WARNING If the sunroof is used negligently or without paying due attention, it can cause serious injury. Open or close the sunroof and the sun blind only when no one is in their path of movement.

116

Opening and closing

Never leave any key inside the vehicle when exiting. Never leave a child or any other person who may need help in the vehicle, espe- cially if they have access to the vehicle key. If using they key unattended, they could lock the vehicle, start the engine, switch on the ignition and activate the sun- roof. After switching off, it is still possible to open or close the sunroof during a short space of time provided that neither the driver nor passenger door is opened.

CAUTION To prevent damage, during winter tem- peratures remove any ice or snow that might be on the car roof before opening the sunroof or adjusting the tilt position. Before leaving the vehicle or in case of rainfall, always close the sunroof. With the sunroof open or in a tilted position, water can enter the interior and can cause con- siderable damage to the electrical system. As a result, other damage can occur in the vehicle.

Note Leaves and other loose objects that ac- cumulate on the sunroof rails should be regularly cleaned away either by hand or with a vacuum.

If the sunroof does not work correctly, the anti-trap function will not work either. Con- tact a specialised workshop.

Opening and closing the sunroof

Fig. 104 On the interior roof lining: sunroof button.

The sun blind automatically opens along with the sunroof if completely closed or if in front of the sunroof. The sun blind remains in the previous position and does not automatically close with the sunroof. The sun blind can only be closed completely once the sunroof has been closed.

The button Fig. 104 has two levels. The first level switches the sunroof to the tilted po- sition, opening or closing it fully or partially.

On the second level, the sunroof automati- cally moves to the corresponding final posi-

tion after briefly pressing the button. Activat- ing the button again stops the automatic function.

Adjusting the tilt position of the sunroof Press the rear part of the button B to the first level. Automatic function: briefly press the rear part of button B to the second level.

Closing the sunroof from a tilted position Press the front part of the button A to the first level. Automatic function: briefly press the front part of the button A to the second level.

Stopping the automatic operation by ad- justing the tilted position of the sunroof or by closing the sunroof Press button A or B again.

Opening the sunroof Press button C backwards to the first level. Automatic function to the comfort position: briefly press button C backwards to the sec- ond level.

Closing the sunroof Press button D forwards to the first level. Automatic function: briefly press button D forwards to the second level.

117

Operation

Stopping the automatic operation during the opening or closing Press button C or D again.

Opening and closing the sunshade blind

Fig. 105 On the interior roof lining: sunshade blind buttons.

The electrical sun blind works when the igni- tion is switched on.

When the sunroof is in its most tilted position, the sun blind automatically goes into a venti- lation position. The sun blind remains in this position also with the sunroof closed.

Buttons Fig. 105 1 and 2 have two lev- els. The first level opens or closes the sun blind fully or partially.

By briefly pressing the button to the second level, the sun blind automatically moves to

the corresponding final position. Activating the button again stops the automatic func- tion.

Once the ignition has been switched off, you can still open or close the sun blind for a few minutes provided the driver door and the front passenger door are not opened.

Opening the sun blind Press button 1 to the first level. Automatic function: briefly press button 1 to the second level.

Closing the sun blind Press button 2 to the first level. Automatic function: briefly press button 2 to the second level.

Stopping the automatic operation during the opening or closing Press button 1 or 2 again.

Note When the sunroof is open, the electric sun blind can only be closed to the front edge of the sunroof.

Convenience function to open or close the sunroof*

Fig. 106 Door handle: sensor surface.

The sunroof can be opened and closed with the convenience function, just like the win- dows.

Using the door lock* Hold the key in the door lock of the driver door in either the unlocking or locking posi- tion to open or close the roof in the tilted po- sition. Release the key to interrupt this func- tion.

Using the remote control Keep the locking or unlocking button press- ed to open or close the roof. If you release the button is the opening or closing will stop.

118

Lights

Using the Keyless Access* system (only closing) Press and hold the locking sensor surface Fig. 106 (arrow) on the door handle to close the sunroof. If you release the sensor surface, the closing movement stops.

Anti-trap function of the panoramic sunroof and sunshade

The anti-trap function can reduce the risk of injury when closing the sunroof and the sun blind . If the sunroof or sun blind encoun- ter resistance or an obstacle when closing, they reopen immediately.

Check why the sunroof or sun blind do not close. Try to close the sunroof or sun blind again. If the sunroof or sun blind cannot be closed due to an obstacle or some resistance, it stops at the corresponding position and then opens. For automatic closing, a new closing attempt might take place. If the sunroof or sun blind is still unable to close, close it without the anti-trap function.

Closing the sunroof or sun blind without the anti-trap function Sunroof: within approximately 5 seconds of having activated the roll-back function, press

the button Fig. 104 to the second level in the direction of arrow Fig. 104 D until the sunroof closes completely. Sun blind: within approximately 5 seconds of activating the roll-back function, press and hold button Fig. 105 2 until the blind is fully closed. The sunroof or sun blind close without the anti-trap function intervening! If the sunroof or sun blind will still not close, visit a specialised workshop.

WARNING Closing the sunroof or sun blind without the anti-trap function can cause serious inju- ries. Always be careful when closing the sun- roof and sun blind. No person should ever remain in the way of the sunroof or sun blind, especially when closing without the anti-trap function. The anti-trap function does not prevent fingers or other parts of the body from be- coming trapped against the roof frame and injuries occurring.

Lights

Vehicle lighting

Control lamps

It lights up

Driving light totally or partially faulty.

Fault in the cornering light system.

It lights up

Rear fog light switched on page 121.

It lights up

Left or right turn signal. The control lamp flashes twice as fast when a turn signal is faulty.

Hazard warning lights on page 125.

It lights up

Trailer turn signals

It lights up

Main beam on or flasher on page 122.

It lights up

The Light Assist system is on page 123. 119

Operation

Several warning and control lamps light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- ed on, signalling that the function is being verified. They will switch off after a few sec- onds.

WARNING Observe the safety warnings in Con- trol and warning lamps on page 90.

Headlight switch

Fig. 107 Dash panel: lights control.

Turn the switch to the required position Fig. 107.

Sym- bol

Ignition switch- ed off

Ignition is switched on

Fog lights, dipped beam and side lights off.

Daylight running lights switched on.

Sym- bol

Ignition switch- ed off

Ignition is switched on

The Coming home, Leaving home and Wel- come lights may be switched on.

Automatic control of dipped beam and daytime run- ning light.

Side light on. Daylight running lights switched on.

Dipped beam head- light off

Dipped beam switched on.

The driver is personally responsible for the correct use and adjustment of the lights in all situations.

Automatic dipped beam headlight control * The automatic dipped beam control is merely intended as an aid and is not able to recog- nise all driving situations.

When the light switch is in position , the vehicle lights and the instrument panel and switch lighting switch on automatically in the following situations :

The photo sensor detects darkness, for ex- ample, when driving through a tunnel. They switch off when adequate lighting is detec- ted.

The rain sensor detects rain and activates the wipers. They switch off when the wipers have not been activated for a few minutes.

Daytime running lights The daytime running lights consist of individu- al lights, integrated in the front headlights. These lights come on when the daytime run- ning lights are switched on. On vehicles equipped with LED tail lights, the rear side light is switched on as well .

The daytime running lights turn on every time the ignition is switched on, if the switch is in position or , according to the level of ex- terior lighting.

When the light switch is in position , a light sensor automatically switches dipped beam on and off (including the control and instru- ment lighting) or the daytime running lights depending on the level of exterior lighting.

Motorway light* The motorway light is available on vehicles equipped with full-LED lights.

The function is connected and disconnected via the corresponding Infotainment system menu.

Activation: when going above 110 km/h (68 mph) for more than 10 seconds, the dip- ped beam raises slightly to increase the driv- er's visibility distance.

120

Lights

Deactivation: when reducing the speed of the vehicle below 100 km/h (62 mph), the dipped beam immediately returns to its nor- mal position.

Audible warnings to advise the driver that the lights have not been switched off If the ignition is not connected and the driver door is open, an audible warning signal is heard in the following cases: this will remind you to turn the light off.

When the parking light is on page 122. When the light switch is in position or .

WARNING If the road is not well lit and other road users cannot see the vehicle well enough or at all, accidents may occur. The automatic dipped beam control ( ) only switches on the dipped beam when there are changes in light conditions but not, for example, when it is foggy.

WARNING The side lights or daytime running lights are not bright enough to illuminate the road ahead and to ensure that other road users are able to see you. Always use your dipped beam head lights if it is raining or if visibility is poor.

Never drive with daytime lights if the road is not well lit due to weather or lighting conditions. On vehicles with rear lights with bulbs, when activating the daytime running light the rear lights are not switched on. A vehi- cle which does not have the rear lights on may not be visible to other drivers in the darkness, in the case of heavy rain or in conditions of poor visibility.

WARNING If the headlights are set too high and not used correctly, there is a risk of dazzling or distracting other road users. This could re- sult in a serious accident. Always make sure that the headlights are correctly adjusted.

Note The legal requirements regarding the use of vehicle lights in each country must be observed. The dipped beam headlights will only work with the ignition on. The side lights come on automatically when the ignition is turned off.

Fog lights

Fig. 108 Dash panel: lights control.

The warning lamps or also show, on the light switch or instrument panel, when the front fog lights are on.

Turning on the front fog lights* : pull the light switch out to its first click position Fig. 108 1 , from positions , or . Turning on the rear fog light : pull the light switch fully out 2 from position , or . To switch off the fog lights, press the light switch or turn it to position .

Note The rear fog light can dazzle drivers behind you. You should use the rear fog light only when visibility is very poor.

121

Operation

Turn signal and main beam lever

Fig. 109 Turn signal and main beam lever.

More the lever to the required position:

Right turn light or right-hand parking light (ignition switched off). Left turn light or left-hand parking light (ignition switched off). Turning main beam headlights on: control lamp lit up on the instrument panel. The headlight flasher comes on while we pull the lever. Control lamp lit up.

Place the lever in rest position to turn off the corresponding function.

Convenience turn signals When the ignition is switched on, move the lever as far as possible upwards or down- wards and release the lever. The turn signal will flash three times.

1

2

3

4

The convenience turn signals are switched on and off in the infotainment system by means of the function button > SETTINGS > Light > Light Assist > Convenience turn signals page 95.

In vehicles that do not have the correspond- ing menu, this function can be deactivated in a specialised workshop.

Parking light The parking lights will only work with the igni- tion off. If said light is on, an audible warning will sound while the driver door is open.

Switch the ignition off. Move the turn signal lever up or down.

When the parking light is switched on, the front side light and the tail light on the corre- sponding side of the vehicle turn on.

Parking light on both sides Switch the ignition off. Place the light switch in position . Lock the vehicle from the outside.

In doing so, only the side lights of both head- lights light up, and additionally the tail lights will do so partially.

WARNING Improper or lack of use of the turn signals, or forgetting to deactivate them can con- fuse other road users. This could result in a serious accident. Always give warning when you are going to change lane, overtake or when turning, activating the turn signal in good time. As soon as you have finished changing lane, overtaking or turning, switch the turn signal off.

WARNING Incorrect use of the headlights may cause accidents and serious injury, as the main beam may distract or dazzle other drivers.

Note When you turn the ignition off without having turned the turn signals off, an acoustic signal sounds while the driver door is open. This is intended as a reminder to switch off the turn signal, unless you wish to leave the parking light on. If the convenience turn signals are oper- ating (three flashes) and the other conven- ience turn signals are switched on, the ac- tive part stops flashing and only flashes once in the new part selected. The turn signal only works when the igni- tion is switched on. The hazard warning

122

Lights

lights also work when the ignition is switch- ed off. If a trailer turn signal malfunctions, the control lamp will stop flashing (trailer turn signals) and the vehicle turn signal will flash at double speed. The main beam headlights can only be switched on if the dipped beam headlights are already on. In cold or damp weather conditions, the headlights, tail lights and turn signals may mist up inside temporarily. This is normal and in no way effects the useful life of the vehicle lighting system. The parking light does not activate auto- matically if the left- or right-hand turn sig- nal is left on and the ignition is disconnec- ted.

Main beam assist (Light Assist)*

The main beam assist acts within the limits of the system and depending on environmental and traffic conditions. Once switched on, the system is activated as of a speed of about 60 km/h (37 mph) and is deactivated below about 30 km/h (18 mph) .

When the system is activated and the cam- era detects other vehicles that may be daz- zled, the main beam is automatically switch- ed off. Otherwise, the main beam is automati- cally switched on.

The main beam assist generally detects illu- minated areas and deactivates the main beam when passing through a town, for ex- ample.

Switching the main beam assist on Turn on the ignition and turn the light switch to the position . From the base position, press the turn signal and main beam headlights lever forwards Fig. 109 3 When the lamp is displayed on the instrument panel display, the main beam assist is switched on.

Switching the main beam assist off Turn the light switch to a position other than page 120. OR: while the main beam is on, pull the turn signal light and main beam headlights lever forwards Fig. 109 4 . OR: push the turn signal and main beam headlight lever forwards to manually turn on the main beam. The main beam assist will then be deactivated.

System limitations In the following cases, the main beam head- light must be switched off manually because the main beam assist will not disconnect it on time or disconnect it at all:

On roads with insufficient lighting with very reflective signs If road users are insufficiently lit up, e.g. pe- destrians or cyclists. On closed curves, when the traffic in the opposite direction is partially hidden, on pro- nounced slopes or inclinations. On roads with traffic in the opposite direc- tion and with a central reservation barrier where the driver can see over it e.g. lorry driv- ers. In the event of fog, snow or heavy rain In the event of dust or sand storms If the windscreen is damaged in the cam- era's field of vision. If the camera's field of vision is misted up, dirty or covered by a sticker, snow or ice. If the camera is damaged or if the power supply has been cut off.

WARNING The convenience features of the main beam assist should not encourage the tak- ing of risks. The system is not a replace- ment for driver concentration. You are always in control of the main beam and adapting it to the light, visibility and traffic conditions. It is possible that the main beam head- light control does not recognise all driving

123

Operation

situations and is limited under certain cir- cumstances. When the field of vision of the camera is dirty, covered or damaged, operation of the main beam control may be affected. This also applies when changes are made to the vehicle lighting system, for example, if additional headlights are installed.

CAUTION To avoid affecting the operation of the sys- tem, take the following points into consid- eration: Clean the field of vision of the camera regularly and make sure it is free of snow and ice. Do not cover the field of vision of the camera. Check that the windscreen is not dam- aged in the area of the field of vision of the camera.

Note The headlight flasher can be turned on and off manually at any time with the turn signal and main beam lever page 122. If there are objects that radiate light in the camera's area of influence, e.g. a port- able navigation system, this may affect the operation of the main beam assist system.

Fog lights with cornering light func- tion*

The cornering light function is an additional function to the dipped beam headlights to improve lighting of the side of the road when taking a sharp turn at low speed.

The cornering light function works when the dipped beam headlights are already on and it is activated when driving at speeds below approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).

If the steering wheel is turned or the turn signal is switched on, the front fog light grad- ually turns on. After the turn, the cornering light function is gradually switched off. When engaging reverse gear, both front fog lights turn on.

Coming home and Leav- ing home function

The Coming home and Leaving home function lights up the vehicles immediate proximity when getting into and out of it in the dark. When switched on, the front position and dipped beam lights, tail lights and li- cense plate light come on.

The Leaving Home is controlled by a photo- sensor.

In the vehicle settings menu of the infotain- ment system you can adjust the duration of the light switch-off delay, and activate and deactivate the function.

Activating the Coming Home function For vehicles with light and rain sensors. Switch off the engine and remove the key from the ignition with the light switch in posi- tion page 120. The automatic Coming Home function is only active when the light sensor detects darkness.

For vehicles without light and rain sensors. Switch the ignition off. Activate the headlight flashers for approxi- mately 1 second.

When the driver door is opened, the Coming Home lighting comes on. The headlight turn- ing off time counts from when the last door or rear lid are closed.

The Coming Home lighting turns off in the following cases: Automatically, once the headlight turning off time has elapsed. Automatically, when a vehicle door or the rear lid is still open 30 seconds after starting the engine.

124

Lights

When the rotary light switch is turned to po- sition page 120. With the ignition is switched on.

Activating the Leaving Home function Unlock the vehicle using the remote control. The Leaving Home function is only activa- ted when the light switch is in position and the light sensor detects darkness.

The Leaving Home lighting switches off in the following cases: Automatically, when the Leaving Home switch-on time ends (default 30 sec). When the vehicle is locked using the remote control. When the light switch is turned to position . With the ignition is switched on.

Welcome light*1)

The welcome light is a light located on the exterior mirrors, focused on the ground, which activates or deactivates if the light switch is in the position and the Coming Home or Leaving Home function is turned on or off.

Note To activate the Coming Home and Leav- ing Home function, the rotary light switch must be in position and the light sensor must detect darkness.

Hazard warning lights

Fig. 110 Dash panel: hazard warning lights switch

The hazard warning lights are used to draw the attention of other road users to your vehi- cle in emergencies.

If your vehicle breaks down:

1. Park your vehicle at a safe distance from moving traffic.

2. Press the button to switch on the hazard warning lights .

3. Switch the ignition off.

4. Apply the electronic parking brake.

5. For a manual gearbox, engage 1st gear; for an automatic gearbox, move the gear lever to P.

6. Use the warning triangle to draw the at- tention of other road users to your vehicle.

7. Always take the vehicle key with you when you leave the vehicle.

All turn signals flash simultaneously when the hazard warning lights are switched on. The two turn signal turn signal lamps and the turn signal lamp in the switch will flash at the same time. The simultaneous hazard warning lights also work when the ignition is switched off.

Emergency braking warning If the vehicle brakes suddenly and continu- ously at a speed of more than 80 km/h (50 mph), the brake light flashes several times per second to warn the vehicles driving behind. If you continue braking, the hazard warning lights will come on automatically when the vehicle comes to a standstill. They switch off

1) Valid for vehicles with a light and rain sensor and full-LED headlights.

125

Operation

automatically when the vehicle starts to move again.

WARNING The risk of an accident increases if your vehicle breaks down. Always use the haz- ard warning lights and a warning triangle to draw the attention of other road users to your stationary vehicle. Due to the high temperatures that the catalytic converter can reach, never park in an area where the catalytic converter could come into contact with highly inflam- mable materials, for example dry grass or spilt petrol. This could start a fire.

Note The 12-volt vehicle battery will run down if the hazard warning lights are left on for a long time, even if the ignition is switched off. The use of the hazard warning lights de- scribed here is subject to the relevant stat- utory requirements.

Dynamic headlight range control

The headlight range is automatically adjus- ted according to the vehicle load status when they are switched on.

WARNING Heavy objects in the vehicle may mean that the headlights dazzle and distract oth- er drivers. This could result in a serious ac- cident.

Driving abroad

The light beam of the dipped beam lights is asymmetric: the side of the road on which you are driving is lit more intensely.

When a car that is manufactured in a country that drives on the right travels to a country that drives on the left (or vice versa), it is nor- mally necessary to cover part of the head- light bulbs with stickers or to change the ad- justment of the headlights to avoid dazzling other drivers.

In such cases, the regulations specify certain light values that must be complied with for designated points of the light distribution. This is known as Tourist light.

The light distribution of the halogen and full- LED headlights allows the specific tourist light values to be met without the need for stickers or changes in the settings.

Note Tourist light is only allowed temporarily. If you are planning a long stay in a country

that drives on the other side, you should take the vehicle to an Authorised Technical Service to change the headlights.

Interior lights

Lighting of the instrument panel, displays and switches

Depending on the model, the lighting of the instrument cluster and switches can be ad- justed in the infotainment system, using the > SETTINGS > Light > Interior light- ing page 95 function button.

With the ignition on and without light activa- tion, the analogue instrument panel lighting remains activated in daytime light conditions. The lighting is reduced as the exterior light di- minishes. In some cases, e.g. when driving through a tunnel without the function ac- tive, the instrument panel lighting may even switch off. The objective of this function is to provide the driver with a visual indication that he or she should activate the dipped beam.

If your vehicle is equipped with a digital in- strument panel (Digital SEAT Cockpit), the following message will appear Turn on the lights on the instrument panel.

126

Lights

Interior and reading lights

Fig. 111 Detail of roof lining: front lighting of the passenger compartment.

Knob Function

Turns off the interior lights.

Turning the interior lights on or off.

Central po- sition

or

a)

The interior lights come on automati- cally when you unlock the vehicle, open a door or remove the key from the ignition. The light goes out a few seconds after closing all the doors, when locking the vehicle or connecting the ignition.

/ Turning the reading light on and off

a) Depending on version.

Glove compartment and luggage com- partment lighting* When opening and closing the glove com- partment on the front passenger side and the rear lid, the respective light will automatically switch on and off.

Footwell lighting* The lights in the footwell area below the dash (driver and front passenger sides) will switch on when the doors are opened and will de- crease in intensity while driving. This intensity can be adjusted through the infotainment system menu using the function button > SETTINGS > Light > Interior lighting page 95.

Ambient light* The ambient light lights up the area of the centre console and the footwell area and, depending on the version, the front door pan- els as well.

The intensity of the background light can be adjusted through the infotainment menu. The colour can also be changed in versions with lighting on the front door panel using the > SETTINGS > Background lighting page 91 function button.

Note Depending on the features fitted in the vehicle, LEDs can be used for the following

interior lights: front vanity mirror light, rear vanity mirror light, footwell light, sun blind and glove compartment light. The reading lights go out when the vehi- cle is closed and locked or after a few mi- nutes of turning the ignition off. This pre- vents the 12-volt vehicle battery from dis- charging.

127

Operation

Visibility

Windscreen wiper and rear window wiper systems

Window washer lever

Fig. 112 Operating the windscreen wiper and rear wiper.

More the lever to the required position:

0 Windscreen wipers off.

1

Wiper intervals. Use control Fig. 112 A to set the in- terval (vehicles without rain sensor), or the sensitivity of the rain sensor.

2 Slow sweep adjustable by using con- trol Fig. 112 A .

3 Fast sweep adjustable by using control Fig. 112 A .

More the lever to the required position:

4 Short wipe. Brief press, short clean. Hold the lever down for more time to in- crease the wipe frequency.

5

Windscreen washer. The windscreen washer function is activated by push- ing the lever towards the steering wheel, and the wipers operate simulta- neously.

6 Interval wipe for rear window. The wip- er will wipe the window approximately every six seconds.

7 The rear window wash function is acti- vated by pressing the lever, and the rear wiper starts simultaneously.

WARNING In cold conditions you should not use the wash/wipe system unless you have warmed the windscreen with the heating and ventilation system. The windscreen washer fluid could otherwise freeze on the windscreen and obscure your view of the road.

CAUTION If the ignition is switched off while the wind- screen wipers are switched on, they com- plete their wipe and return to the rest posi- tion. When the ignition is switched back on, the windscreen wiper will continue to oper- ate at the same wiping level. Ice, snow and

other obstacles on the windscreen may damage the wiper and the windscreen wip- er motor. If necessary, remove snow and ice from the windscreen wipers before starting your journey. Do not switch on the windscreen wipers if the windscreen is dry. Cleaning with the windscreen wipers while dry can cause damage. In icy conditions, always check that the wiper blades are not frozen to the glass be- fore using the wipers. In cold weather, it may help to leave the vehicle parked with the wipers in service position page 49.

Note The windscreen and window wipers only function when the ignition is switched on and the bonnet or rear lid, respectively, are closed. The rear wiper is automatically switched on when the windscreen wiper is on and the car is in reverse gear.

Wiper functions

Windscreen wipers performance in differ- ent situations If you stop the vehicle with the windscreen wiper in position 1 or 2, it will automatically

128

Visibility

change to a lower position speed. The set speed will be resumed when the vehicle pulls away. The air conditioner comes on for approxi- mately 30 seconds in air recirculation mode when the windscreen washer is activated, to prevent the smell of the windscreen wash- er fluid entering the inside the vehicle. When wiping at intervals, the intervals vary according to the speed. The higher the vehi- cle speed the shorter the intervals.

Heated windscreen washer jets* The heating only thaws the frozen jets, it does not thaw the water in the washer hoses. When the ignition is switched on the heated windscreen washer jets automatically adjust the heat depending on the ambient tempera- ture.

Note The wiper will try to wipe away any ob- stacles that are on the windscreen. The wiper will stop moving if the obstacle blocks its path. Remove the obstacle and switch the wiper back on again. The windscreen will be wiped again ap- proximately 5 seconds after the wind- screen washer has been activated, provi- ded the vehicle is moving (drip function). If you activate the wipers less than 3 sec- onds after the drip function, a new wash sequence will begin without performing the

last wipe. For the drip function to work again, you have to turn the ignition off and then on again.

Rain sensor*

Fig. 113 Wiper lever: adjust the rain sensor A.

Fig. 114 Rain sensor sensitive surface

The rain sensor controls the frequency of the windscreen wiper intervals, depending on the

amount of rain . The sensitivity of the rain sensor can be adjusted manually. Manual wipe page 128.

Move the lever to the required position Fig. 113:

Rain sensor off. Rain sensor on; automatic wipe if neces- sary. Setting sensitivity level of rain sensor Set control to the right: high sensitivity. Set control to the left: low sensitivity.

When the ignition is switched off and then back on, the rain sensor remains active and starts operating again when the windscreen wipers are in position 1 and the vehicle is travelling at more than 16 km/h (10 mph).

Modified behaviour of the rain sensor Possible causes of faults and mistaken read- ings on the sensitive surface Fig. 114 of the rain sensor include:

Damaged wipers: a film of water on the damaged blades may lengthen the activa- tion time, reduce the washing intervals or re- sult in a fast and continuous wipe. Insects: insects on the sensor may trigger the windscreen wiper.

0

1

A

129

Operation

Salt on the road: in winter, salt spread on the roads may cause an excessively long wipe when the windscreen is almost dry. Dirt: dry dust, wax, coating on glass (Lotus effect) or traces of detergent (car wash) may reduce the effectiveness of the rain sensor or make it react more slowly, later or not at all. Windscreen crack: the impact of a stone will trigger a single wipe cycle with the rain sensor on. Next the rain sensor detects the re- duction in the sensitive surface area and adapts accordingly. The behaviour of the sensor will vary with the size of the damage caused by the stone.

WARNING The rain sensor may not detect enough rain to switch on the wipers. If necessary, switch on the wipers man- ually when water on the windscreen ob- structs visibility.

Note Regularly clean the sensitive surface of the rain sensor Fig. 114 (arrow) and check for possible damage to the wiper blades. To remove wax and coatings, we recom- mend a window cleaner containing alco- hol.

Do not put stickers on the windscreen in front of the rain sensor*. This may cause sensor disruption or faults.

Mirrors

Interior mirror anti-dazzle function

Rear view mirror with automatic anti-daz- zle function* The anti-dazzle function is activated every time the ignition is switched on.

When the anti-dazzle function is enabled, the interior rear vision mirror will darken auto- matically according to the amount of light it receives. The anti-dazzle function is cancel- led if reverse gear is engaged.

WARNING In the event that an automatic anti-dazzle rear vision mirror breaks, an electrolyte flu- id may leak. This could cause irritation to the skin, eyes and respiratory organs. If you come into contact with this liquid, it must be rinsed with large quantities of water. If necessary, get medial help.

CAUTION In the event that an automatic anti-dazzle rear vision mirror breaks, an electrolyte flu-

id may leak. This liquid attacks plastic sur- faces. Clean it with a wet sponge as soon as possible.

Note If the light incident in the interior rear vi- sion mirror is obstructed (e.g. with the sun blind*), the anti-dazzle rear vision mirror with automatic setting will not operate per- fectly. When the interior lights are on or reverse gear engaged, the mirrors do not darken with automatic adjustment for anti-dazzle position. If you have to stick any type of sticker on the windscreen, do not do so in front of the sensors. Doing so could prevent the anti- dazzle function from working well or even from working at all.

130

Visibility

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

Fig. 115 Detail of the driver's door: control for the exterior mirror.

Turn the control to the corresponding posi- tion:

Turning the knob to the desired position, adjust the mirrors on the driver side (L, left) and the passenger side (R, right) to the direction desired. Depending on the equipment fitted on the vehicle, the mirrors may be heated according to the outside temperature. Folding in mirrors.

L/R

Synchronized regulation of the exterior mirrors In the infotainment system, using the function button > Settings > Mirrors and wipers > Mirrors, the exterior rear view mirrors can be selected to adjust in a synchronised manner.

Turn the knob to position L1). Adjust the left-hand exterior mirror. The right exterior mirror will be adjusted at the same time (synchronised). If necessary, correct the right-hand rear- view mirror: rotate the control to position R1).

Tilt function for front passenger exterior mirror* When parking backwards, and in order to be able to see the kerb, the passenger side mir- ror can be automatically tilted towards the passenger to provide a better view of the kerb. The control must be in the position R1)

for this feature to be operational.

The mirror returns to its original position as soon as you drive forward at over 15 km/h (9 mph) or switch off the ignition. It also re- turns to its original position if the position of the control is adjusted.

Storing the rear view mirror settings for the tilt function Switch the ignition on. In the infotainment system, select > SETTINGS > Mirrors and wipers > Mir- rors > Lower in reverse gear page 91. Select the R1) position on the control. Select reverse gear. Adjust the front passenger exterior mirror so that you can see, for example, the kerb area well. Release the reverse gear. The adjusted position for the rear view mir- ror is stored.

Fold the rearview mirrors when locking the vehicle* In the infotainment system, using the function button > SETTINGS > Mirrors and wipers > Mirrors, the exterior rear view mirrors can be selected to fold in when the vehicle is parked and locked page 91.

When the vehicle is locked with the remote control, the exterior mirrors are retracted au- tomatically. When the vehicle is opened with

1) Regulation in right-hand drive vehicles is sym- metrical.

131

Operation

the remote control, the exterior mirrors are deployed automatically.

WARNING Convex or wide-angle* exterior mirrors give a larger field of vision. However, they make objects look smaller and further away than they really are. If you use these mirrors to estimate the distance to vehicles behind you when changing lane, you could misjudge the distance. Risk of accident!

WARNING Fold and unfold the exterior mirror, taking care to avoid injuries. Only fold or unfold the exterior mirror when there is no-one in the way of the mir- ror. When moving the mirror, take care not to trap fingers between the mirror and the mirror bracket.

CAUTION If for any reason (e.g. a bump when ma- noeuvring) one of the rear view mirrors is knocked out of position, the mirrors must first be fully retracted with the electric control. The rear view mirror must not be placed by hand in the starting position, as the folding mechanism can be damaged. Before washing the vehicle in an auto- matic car wash, please make sure to fold

the exterior mirrors in to prevent them from being damaged. Electrically retractable exterior mirrors must not be folded in or out by hand, always use the electrical power control.

Note If the electrical adjustment should fail to operate, both of the mirrors can be adjus- ted by hand by lightly pressing the edge of the mirror glass. The fold-in function on the exterior mir- rors will not activate at speeds over 40 km/h (25 mph).

Sun protection

sun blind

Fig. 116 Sun visor

Options for adjusting driver and front pas- senger sun visors Lower the sun visor towards the wind- screen. The sun visor can be pulled out of its mounting and turned towards the door Fig. 116 1 . Swing the sun visor towards the door, longi- tudinally backwards.

There is a vanity mirror on the sun visor, with a cover. When the cover is opened 2 a light* comes on.

The lamp goes out when the vanity mirror cover is closed or the sun visor is pushed back up.

WARNING Folded sun blinds can reduce visibility. Always store sun blinds and visors in their housing when not in use.

Note The light* above the sun visor automatical- ly switches off after a few minutes in cer- tain conditions. This prevents the 12-volt vehicle battery from discharging.

132

Seats and headrests

Seats and headrests

Adjusting seats

Manual adjustment of the front seats

Fig. 117 Front seats: manual seat settings.

Forwards/backwards: pull the lever and move the seat. The seat must engage when the lever is released! Raise/lower: pull the lever up or push down (several times if necessary) from its home position. Tilting the backrest: turn the hand wheel. Lumbar support: move the lever until the required position is achieved.

1

2

3

4

WARNING Incorrect seat adjustment may lead to ac- cidents and severe injuries. Only adjust the seats when the vehicle is stationary, as the seats could move unex- pectedly while the vehicle is in motion and you could lose control of the vehicle. Fur- thermore, an incorrect position is adopted when adjusting the seat. Adjust the height, position and inclination of the front seats only when their move- ment area is empty. Make sure there are no objects in that area. Make sure that the movement and lock- ing areas of the seats are clean.

WARNING Incorrectly using upholstery and seat cov- ers might cause an accidental activation of the electrical seat adjustment system and make it move unexpectedly while driving. This might cause loss of control of the vehi- cle and thus accidents or injuries. More- over, the electrical components of the front seats might be damaged. Never attach or place seat upholstery or covers on the electric controls. Never use upholstery or seat covers that have not been explicitly authorised for the seats of the vehicle.

Electric driver's seat adjustment*

Fig. 118 Driver's seat: electric seat settings.

Adjust the lumbar support: press the but- ton according to the desired position. Seat forwards/backwards: press the but- ton forwards/backwards. Seat up/down: Press the rear part of the button up/down. To adjust the angle of the seat cushion, press the front of the button up/down. Backrest further upright/further reclined: press the button forwards/backwards.

A

B

C

133

Operation

The position will be saved automatically in the SEAT Connect Active user when the igni- tion is switched off1).

WARNING If the electric front seats are used negli- gently or without paying due attention, it can cause serious injury. The front seats can also be electrically adjusted when the ignition is switched off. Never leave a child or any other person who may need help in the vehicle. In the event of an emergency, electrical adjustment can be stopped by pressing any control.

CAUTION To avoid damaging the electrical compo- nents of the front seats, please refrain from kneeling on the seat or applying sharp pressure at a single point to the seat cush- ion and backrest.

Note It may not be possible to electrically ad- just the seat if the charge of the 12-volt ve- hicle battery is very low.

If the engine is started while the seats are being electrically adjusted, the adjustment will stop. When changing user a warning will be shown on the infotainment system's screen during the time that the seat is moving to the saved position. This movement can be stopped by pressing the stop button on the screen.

Headrest

Introduction

The possibilities for the adjustment and disas- sembly of the headrests are described below. Always make sure that the seats are correctly adjusted page 13.

All seats are equipped with a headrest. The central rear headrest is only intended for the central seat of the rear bench. Therefore, do not install it on any other seat.

Correct adjustment of headrest Adjust the headrest so that its upper edge is at the same level as the top of your head and under no circumstances below eye level.

Keep the back of your head always as close to the headrest as possible.

Adjusting the headrest for short people Lower the headrest completely, even if your head is below its upper edge. In the lowest position, there may be a small distance be- tween the headrest and the backrest.

Adjusting the headrest for tall people Push the headrest up as far as it will go.

WARNING If travelling with the headrests removed or improperly adjusted, the risk of severe or fatal injuries in the event of accidents and sudden braking or manoeuvres increases. Always travel with the headrest correctly installed and adjusted. To decrease the risk of cervical injuries in the event of an accident, adjust the head- rest correctly based on your height, always making sure that its upper edge is at the same height as the top of the head, but never below eye level. Keep the back of your head always as close to the headrest as possible and centred. Never adjust the headrest while the vehi- cle is in motion.

1) Valid for vehicles fitted with the Infotainment Connect System.

134

Seats and headrests

Under no circumstances should the rear passengers travel while the headrests are in the non-use position.

CAUTION When assembling and disassembling the headrests, do not let them meet the top lin- ing of the vehicle, the back rest of the front seat or other parts of the vehicles. If not, this could damage the vehicle.

Adjusting the headrests

Fig. 119 Front seat: headrest adjustment.

Fig. 120 Rear headrest: headrest adjustment.

Adjusting the height of the headrests Grab the sides of the headrests with both hands and push upwards to the desired posi- tion. To lower it, repeat the same action, pressing the 1 Fig. 119 Fig. 120 button on the side. The headrest must lock correctly in one po- sition.

Removing and fitting the headrests

Fig. 121 Rear headrest: removal.

Removing and fitting the front headrests Move the headrest upwards until it arrives to the top. Press the side button Fig. 119 1 and re- move the headrest. To refit, insert the headrest into the holes in the backrest, pushing it down until it engages.

Removing the rear headrests To remove the headrest, the corresponding backrest must be partially folded forward.

Unlock the backrest page 138. Move the headrest upwards until it arrives to the top. Press button Fig. 121 1 , while simultane- ously pressing on the security hole 2 with a

135

Operation

flat screwdriver a maximum of 5 mm wide, and remove the headrest. Move the backrest until it engages properly in Folding down and raising the rear seat backrest on page 138.

Fitting the rear headrests To mount the external headrests, the corre- sponding backrest must be partially folded forward.

Unlock the backrest page 138. Insert the headrest bars into the guides until they perceptibly engage. It should not be possible to remove the headrest from the backrest. Move the backrest until it engages properly in Folding down and raising the rear seat backrest on page 138.

WARNING Remove the rear headrests only when it is necessary to fit a child seat. After removing a child seat, refit the headrest immediately.

Seat functions

Memory function*

Fig. 122 On the outer side of the driver's seat: memory buttons.

Memory buttons The memory buttons can be used to save and turn on settings for the driver seat and the exterior mirrors.

Save the settings of the driver seat and the exterior mirrors while driving forward Apply the electronic parking brake. Move the gearshift to the neutral position. Switch the ignition on. Adjust the driver seat and the exterior mir- rors. Press for longer than 1 second Fig. 122. Press the memory button in which to store the settings within approx. 10 seconds. A

warning sound will confirm they have been stored.

Storing the passenger rear view mirror settings while driving in reverse Apply the electronic parking brake. Move the gearshift to the neutral position. Switch the ignition on. Press the required memory button. Select reverse gear. Adjust the front passenger exterior mirror so that you can see, for example, the kerb area well. The new position of the mirror will be stored automatically and allocated to the vehicle key that was used to unlock the vehicle.

Activating settings With the vehicle stopped and the ignition switched on, press and hold the correspond- ing memory button until the saved position is reached. OR: With the ignition switched off and the driver's door open, briefly press the corre- sponding button. The front passenger side exterior mirror au- tomatically changes from the position stored for reversing as soon as the vehicle moves forward at a speed of at least 15 km/h (10 mph) or when the gear selection lever is

136

Seats and headrests

changed to a position other than R page 130.

To activate the memory function of the ve- hicle key Condition: a position must be memorised in the memory.

Open the driver-side door. Press and hold any memory button. Within three seconds of the move being completed, push the open button on the vehicle key. An audible warning confirms the settings have been activated.

Adjusting the wing mirrors for driving and assigning driver seat settings to a vehicle key Activate the memory function of the vehicle key With the ignition switched on, adjust the ex- terior mirrors and the seat. An audible warning confirms the saved po- sition, both when turning off the ignition and locking the vehicle. The settings are assigned to the vehicle key.

To deactivate the memory function of the vehicle key Condition: a position must be memorised in the memory.

Press and hold the button Fig. 122. Within the following 10 seconds, push the open button on the vehicle key. An audible warning confirms the settings have been de- activated.

Initialising the seat position memory The position memory system must be restar- ted if, for example, the driver seat has been changed.

Restarting deletes all memories and assign- ments for the seat with position memory. The memory buttons can then be reprogrammed and the vehicle keys re-assigned.

Open the driver door and do not get into the vehicle. Operating the seat settings from outside the vehicle. Move the angle of the seat backrest com- pletely forwards. Release the control to set the angle and then press again until an audible warning is heard.

WARNING Adjust the memory function only when the vehicle is stationary.

Note If the driver door is opened approx. 10 mi- nutes after the vehicle was unlocked or lat- er, the driver seat and the exterior mirrors do not move automatically.

137

Operation

Folding down and raising the rear seat backrest

Fig. 123 Rear seat: folding the backrest.

Fig. 124 In the luggage compartment: levers for the backrest remote release mechanism* of the left 1 and right 2 parts of the rear back- rest.

The rear seat backrest is split and each part can be lowered forward separately to extend the luggage compartment.

Lowering the rear seat backrest with the unlock button Push the headrest down as far as it will go page 134. Pull the unlock button Fig. 123 1 for- ward and lift the backrest at the same time. The rear seat backrest is not engaged when the red marking of the button 2 is visible.

Folding down the backrest from the boot with the unlocking levers* Push the headrest down as far as it will go page 134. Open the rear lid page 110. Pull the unlocking lever Fig. 124 of the part of the backrest to fold down. The corresponding part of the backrest will be unlocked or will be folded forward. If necessary, close the rear lid page 110.

Folding up the rear seat backrest Lift the backrest and press it firmly into the lock until it engages . It should not be possible to see the red mark of the unlock button 2 . Make sure that the seat belt is not trapped. The backrest must be properly engaged. If necessary, adjust the headrest.

WARNING Serious injuries can be caused if the rear seat backrest is lowered or lifted without due care and attention. When folding down the rear seat, always make sure there are no people or animals in the backrest area. Never lower or lift the rear seat backrest while driving. Do no trap or damage the seat belt when raising the rear seat backrest. When lowering or lifting the rear seat backrest, keep your hands, fingers, feet and other body parts out of its path. For the rear seat belts to offer the neces- sary protection all the parts of the rear backrest must be properly engaged. This is particularly important in the case of the centre rear seat. If someone is seated in a seat whose backrest is not properly engag- ed they will be thrown forwards, along with the backrest, during an accident or a sud- den driving or braking manoeuvre. When the rear seat backrest is lowered or is not properly engaged nobody else can travel in the corresponding seats (not even a child).

138

Transport and practical equipment

CAUTION Serious damage can be caused to the vehi- cle and other objects if the rear seat back- rest is lowered or lifted without due care and attention. Before folding the rear seat backrest for- ward, always adjust the front seats so that neither the headrests nor the cushions of the rear backrest can hit them. Before folding the rear seat backrest, al- ways make sure there are no objects in the movement area of the backrest.

Front centre armrest

Fig. 125 Front centre armrest

To raise the armrest, pull it fully up in the di- rection of the arrow Fig. 125 up or step by step depending on the desired opening.

To lower the armrest, first lift it to its highest position. Then lower it down.

To move the armrest horizontally, move it for- ward Fig. 125 or backward as much as possible in the direction of the corresponding arrow.

WARNING The front centre armrest may obstruct the driver's arm movements, which could cause an accident and severe injuries. Keep the storage compartments of the centre armrest closed at all times while the vehicle is in motion. Never let anyone sit on the centre arm- rest while the vehicle is in motion, not even a child. This position is incorrect and may cause severe injuries.

Transport and practical equipment

Storing objects

Positioning the luggage and cargo

It is possible to carry objects and luggage in the vehicle, in a trailer page 294 and on the roof page 146. When doing so, please consider all legal provisions.

Placing luggage inside the vehicle safely Distribute the load in the vehicle as evenly as possible. Always place equipment and heavy ob- jects in the boot . Position heavy items in the boot as far for- ward as possible. Take into account the maximum authorised weight per axle, as well as the maximum au- thorised weight of the vehicle page 352. Secure the objects to the fastening rings of the boot using appropriate chains or belts page 143. Also place small objects safely. Adapt tyre pressure to the load. Take into account the pressure adhesive of the tyres page 328.

139

Operation

In vehicles equipped with tyre pressure control system, adjust to the new load status if necessary page 332.

WARNING Loose or unsecured objects can cause seri- ous injury in case of sudden manoeuvring or braking or in case of an accident. Partic- ularly if the airbag hits them when deploy- ing and they are thrown across the inside of the vehicle. Please observe the following rules to minimise the risk of injury: Place all objects inside the vehicle safe- ly. Secure all objects, little and large. Place the objects in the cabin in such a way that they can never reach the airbag deployment areas while the vehicle is in motion. Keep the storage compartments closed at all times while the vehicle is in motion. Place the objects in such a way that they never force any occupant of the vehicle to sit in an incorrect position. When transporting objects that take up a seat, never let anyone use that seat. Never leave hard, sharp or heavy objects loose in open storage compartment of the vehicle, on the cover behind the rear seat or on the dashboard. Remove all hard, sharp or heavy objects from the fabrics and bags inside the cabin and store them safely.

WARNING The transport of heavy object changes ve- hicle handling and increases braking dis- tance. Heavy objects that are not properly placed or secured may cause loss of con- trol of the vehicle and thus severe injuries. Never put too much load in the vehicle. Both the carrying capacity as well as the distribution of the load in the vehicle have effects on the driving behaviour and brak- ing ability. When transporting heavy objects, the driving behaviour of the vehicle varies due to the displacement of the centre of gravi- ty. Always distribute the load in the vehicle as evenly and horizontally as possible. Always place heavy objects in the boot before the rear axle and as far away from it as possible. Objects in the luggage compartment that are unsecured could move suddenly and modify the handling of the vehicle. Adapt your speed and driving style at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. Accelerate with particular care and cau- tion. Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres. Brake earlier than usual.

WARNING Never leave your vehicle unattended, es- pecially when the rear lid is open. Children could climb into the luggage compartment, closing the door behind them; they will be trapped and run the risk of death. Close and lock all the doors and the rear lid when you leave the vehicle. Before you lock the vehicle, make sure that there are no adults or children in the vehicle.

CAUTION Electrical wires or, depending on the fea- tures, the antenna embedded into the rear windows could be damaged, even irrepara- bly, if they are in contact with objects.

Note Straps for securing the load to the fasten- ing rings are commercially available from accessory shops.

140

Transport and practical equipment

Luggage compartment

Luggage compartment shelf

Fig. 126 In the luggage compartment: remov- ing and fitting the shelf.

Fig. 127 In the luggage compartment: remov- ing and fitting the shelf.

Removing Detach the cord loops Fig. 126 B from their hooks A .

Remove the rear shelf from the side sup- ports Fig. 127 by pulling it upwards and then take it out.

If necessary, the rear shelf can be stored un- der the luggage compartment double floor page 141.

Fitting Insert the cover horizontally so that the re- cess fits onto the axis of the supports Fig. 127 and press down until it engages. Hook the loops Fig. 126 B to the rear lid.

WARNING Animals, loose or unsecured or objects car- ried on the rear shelf can cause serious in- jury in case of sudden manoeuvring or braking or in case of an accident. Do not leave hard, sharp or heavy ob- jects or in bags on the rear shelf. Never transport animals on the rear shelf.

CAUTION Before closing the rear lid, ensure that the rear shelf is correctly fitted. An overloaded luggage compartment could mean that the rear shelf is not cor- rectly seated and it may be bent or dam- aged. If the luggage compartment is overloa- ded, remove the tray.

Note Ensure that, when placing items of clothing on the luggage compartment cover, rear visibility is not reduced.

Store the rear shelf

Fig. 128 In the luggage compartment: covers for storing the rear shelf.

Fig. 129 In the luggage compartment: fitting the rear shelf.

141

Operation

Depending on the equipment, once the lug- gage compartment shelf has been removed, it can be stored under the boot floor.

Remove the left and right covers Fig. 128. Place the rear shelf in the corresponding housing Fig. 129. Put the left and right covers in their original position.

Variable luggage compartment floor

Fig. 130 Variable luggage compartment floor: raised position; lowered position.

Fig. 131 Variable luggage compartment floor: inclined position.

Variable floor in high position To move from the low position to the high position, lift the floor using the handle Fig. 130 1 , and pull it back until the front of the floor has fully passed the supports Fig. 130 2 . Move the floor forward over the supports as far as the rear seat backrest and then lower the floor with the handle 1 .

Variable floor in low position To move from the high position to the low position, lift the floor using the handle Fig. 130 1 , and pull it back until the front of the floor has fully passed the supports Fig. 130 2 . Now let the front part fall to the floor and slide the floor forwards as far as the rear seat backrest; lower the floor at the same time with the handle 1 .

142

Transport and practical equipment

Variable floor in the tilted position When the variable floor is tilted you can ac- cess the spare wheel or anti-puncture kit area.

Lift the variable floor in the high position us- ing handle Fig. 130 1 , pull it up and push it towards the backrest of the rear seats until it folds along the hinge line and the movable part of the floor is resting on itself. Rest the floor on its housings Fig. 131 (ar- rows).

Variable floor with folded seats To move from the high position to the low position, lift the floor using the handle Fig. 130 1 and pull it back a little. Push the variable floor towards the folded rear seats with the handle 1 using some downward pressure so that the moving part of the floor is flush with the backs of the rear seats.

WARNING Always secure objects, even when the luggage compartment floor is properly lif- ted. Only objects that do not protrude more than 2/3 the height of the floor may be car- ried between the rear seat and the raised luggage compartment floor.

Only objects that do not weigh than ap- proximately 7.5 kg may be carried between the rear seat and the raised luggage com- partment floor.

CAUTION The maximum weight that can be loaded on the luggage compartment variable floor in the top position is 100 kg. Do not let the luggage compartment floor fall when closing it. Always carefully guide it downwards in a controlled manner. Otherwise, the lining and the floor of the luggage compartment could be damaged.

Fastening rings*

Fig. 132 In the luggage compartment: fasten- ing rings.

There are fastening rings Fig. 132 on the front and rear of the boot to secure loose ob-

jects and luggage with fastening belts and cords.

In order to use the fastening rings, they must be lifted beforehand.

WARNING If unsuitable or damaged belts or retaining straps are used, they could break in the event of braking or an accident. Objects could then be launched across the passen- ger compartment and cause serious or fa- tal injuries. Always use belts or straps that are suita- ble and in good condition. Tighten the belts and straps in a cross layout over the load placed on the boot floor and secure them to the fastening rings safely. Never exceed the maximum tensile load of the fastening rings when securing ob- jects. Make sure that, particularly for flat ob- jects, the upper edge of the load is higher than the fastening rings. Depending on the features, take into ac- count the instruction panels on the boot on how to place the load. Never secure a child seat to the fastening rings.

143

Operation

Note The maximum tensile load that the fas- tening rings can support is approx. 3.5 kN. Belts, straps and securing systems for the appropriate load can be obtained from specialised dealerships. SEAT recom- mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this. The fastening rings are rendered unusa- ble for versions with a spare wheel.

Net bag*

Fig. 133 In the luggage compartment: net bag hooked up at floor level.

Fig. 134 In the luggage compartment: rings 1 and hooks 2 for attaching the net bag.

The luggage compartment prevents light luggage from moving. The net bag has a zip and can be used to store small objects.

The net bag can be hooked up to the lug- gage compartment in different ways.

Hooking the net bag into the luggage compartment floor If necessary, the front eyes must be unfolded first page 143.

Secure the net hooks to the fastening rings 1 and 2 Fig. 133 . The bag zip

should be facing upwards.

Hook the net bag next to the load thresh- old Secure the short net hooks to the fastening rings Fig. 134 1 . The bag zip should be facing upwards.

Secure the straps in the bag hooks 2 .

Removing the net bag The hooked up net bag is taut .

Release the net bag from the fastening rings. Store the net bag in the luggage compart- ment.

WARNING To secure the elastic net bag on the fasten- ing rings of the boot it must be stretched out. Once hooked up it is taut. If the net bag is hooked up or unhooked incorrectly the hooks could cause injuries. Always secure the bag hooks properly so that they do not suddenly release from the fastening rings when hooking or unhooking them. On hooking or unhooking them, protect your eyes and face in case the hooks are released suddenly. Always hook up the net bag hooks in the described order. If a hook is unfastened suddenly, this may cause injuries.

144

Transport and practical equipment

Bag hooks

Fig. 135 In the luggage compartment: bag hooks.

There may be hooks for hanging bags on both sides of the luggage compartment Fig. 135.

The retaining hooks have been designed to secure light shopping bags.

WARNING Never use the hooks to hang luggage or other objects. In case of sudden braking or an accident, the hooks could break.

CAUTION Each hook is designed for a maximum load of 2.5 kg.

Trapdoor for transporting long ob- jects*

Fig. 136 In the rear seat backrest: opening the trapdoor.

Fig. 137 In the luggage compartment: opening the trapdoor.

On the rear seat, behind the central armrest, there is a tailboard for transporting long items in the interior, such as skis.

To avoid soiling the interior, dirty objects should be wrapped (e.g. in a blanket) before they are inserted through the tailboard.

When the armrest is down, nobody may trav- el in the centre rear seat.

Opening the tailboard Lower the centre armrest. Pull the release lever in the direction of the arrow and push the tailboard cover Fig. 136 1 down and forwards. Open the rear lid. Insert the long objects through the gap from the luggage compartment. Secure the objects with the seat belt. Close the rear lid.

Closing the tailboard Lift the tailboard cover until it engages. The red mark on the luggage compartment side should never be visible. Close the rear lid. Lift the centre armrest if necessary.

Note The tailboard can also be opened from the luggage compartment. To do so, press the release lever down, in the direction of the arrow, and the cover upwards Fig. 137.

145

Operation

Net partition*

Fig. 138 Net partition fitted.

The purpose of the net partition is to prevent the items in the boot from moving into the cabin, e.g. in the event of sudden braking.

Fitting the net partition The partition net can be fitted behind the rear seat or, depending on the features, behind the front seats with the second row of seats lowered.

If required, remove the rear shelf page 141. Secure the net partition in the left housing of the roof Fig. 138 A . Make sure to move the cross rod down beyond the upper posi- tion.

Hook in the net partition on the rear right- hand side roof housing by pressing on the rod Fig. 138 A . Secure two hooks of the partition net to the fastening rings of the boot Fig. 138 B and tighten the straps firmly.

To remove it proceed in reverse order.

WARNING During a sudden driving or braking ma- noeuvre, or in the event of an accident, ob- jects could be flung though the interior and cause serious or fatal injuries. Check whether the cross rods are cor- rectly engaged. Always secure objects, even when the net partition is properly assembled. There should be nobody behind the net partition when the vehicle is moving.

CAUTION If the net partition is secured incorrectly or to incorrect points, this may damage the vehicle.

Roof carrier*

Introduction

The vehicle roof has been designed to opti- mise aerodynamics. For this reason, cross bars or conventional roof carrier systems cannot be secured to the roof water drains.

As the roof water drains are integrated in the roof to reduce air resistance, only SEAT-ap- proved cross bars and roof carrier systems can be used.

Cases in which cross bars and the roof carrier system should be disassembled. When they are not used. When the vehicle is washed in a car wash. When the vehicle height exceeds the maxi- mum height, for example, in some garages.

WARNING Always secure the load properly using belts or retaining straps that are suitable and in a good condition. Bulky, heavy, long or flat loads have a negative effect on aerodynamics, the cen- tre of gravity and driving performance. Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres. Adapt your speed and driving style at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions.

146

Transport and practical equipment

CAUTION Remove the cross bars and the roof carri- er system before entering a car wash. Vehicle height is increased by the instal- lation of cross bars or a roof carrier system and the load secured on them. For this pur- pose, check that your vehicle's height does not surpass the headspace limit, for exam- ple, for underpasses or for entering garage doors. Cross bars, the roof carrier system and the load secured on them should not inter- fere with the roof aerial or hamper the path of the panoramic sun roof and the rear lid. On opening the rear lid make sure that it does not knock into the roof load.

For the sake of the environment When cross bars and a roof carrier system are installed, the increased air resistance means that the vehicle uses more fuel.

Securing the crossbars and the roof carrier system

Fig. 139 Attachment points for the roof railings for the roof carrier system.

The crossbars are the basis of a series of special roof carrier systems. For safety rea- sons, special fixtures must be used to safely transport luggage, bicycles, skis, surf boards or boats on the roof. Suitable accessories can be acquired at SEAT dealerships.

Always secure the crossbars and the roof carrier system properly. Always take the as- sembly instructions that come with the cross- bars and the roof carrier system in question into account.

The crossbars are assembled on the roof rail- ings. The distance between crossbars Fig. 139 A should be between 70 and 90 cm and the distance between the crossbars

and the brackets of the roof railings B must be 15 cm.

WARNING Incorrect attachment and use of the cross- bars and the roof carrier system may cause the whole system to detach from the roof and cause an accident and injuries. Always take the manufacturer assembly instructions into account. Check threaded joints and attachments travelling and if necessary tighten them af- ter you have travelled a short distance. When making long trips, check the threa- ded joints whenever you stop for a rest. Do not modify or repair the crossbars or roof carrier system.

Note Always read the assembly instructions that come with the crossbars and the roof carri- er system carefully and keep them in the vehicle.

Loading the roof carrier system

The load can only be secured if the crossbars and the roof carrier system are properly in- stalled .

147

Operation

Maximum authorised cargo on the roof The maximum permissible roof load is 75 kg. This figure comes from the combined weight of the roof carrier, the cross bars and the load itself on the roof .

Always check the weight of the roof carrier system, the cross bars and the weight of the load to be transported and weigh them if necessary. Never exceed the maximum au- thorised roof load.

If you are using cross bars and a roof carrier with a lower weight rating, you will not be able to carry the maximum authorised roof load. In this case, do not exceed the maxi- mum weight limit for the roof carrier which is listed in the fitting instructions.

Distributing a load Distribute loads uniformly and secure them correctly .

Check attachments Once the cross bars and roof carrier system have been installed, check the bolted con- nections and attachments after a short jour- ney and subsequently with a certain frequen- cy.

WARNING Never exceed the maximum authorised load on the roof and on the axles or the ve- hicle's maximum authorised weight.

Never exceed the load capacity of the cross bars and the roof carrier system, even if the maximum authorised roof load has not been reached. Secure heavy items as far forward as possible and distribute the vehicle load uniformly.

WARNING If the load is loose or not secured, it could fall from the roof carrier system or cause accidents and injuries. Always use belts or retaining straps that are suitable and in a good condition.

Storage compartment

Introduction

Use the storage compartments only for small or light items.

WARNING Objects inside the vehicle that are not se- cured could be thrown across the cabin in the event of sudden braking or manoeu- vring. This may cause severe injuries as well as loss of control of the vehicle. Do not carry animals or sharp, hard or heavy items in open storage compartments of the vehicle, on the dashboard or on the

cover behind the rear seats, or inside pieces of clothing or bags inside the vehi- cle. Keep the storage compartments closed at all times while the vehicle is in motion.

WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell could diffi- cult the use of the pedals. This may cause loss of control of the vehicle and increases the risk of severe injuries. Make sure that nothing prevents you from using the pedals at any time. Always secure the mat in the footwell. Never place other mats or other type of covers on the factory-fitted mat. Ensure that no objects can fall into the driver's footwell while the vehicle is in mo- tion. When the vehicle is stationary, remove the objects in the footwell.

WARNING If you leave lighters inside the vehicle, they might be damaged or lit inadvertently. This could lead to severe burns and damage to the vehicle. Before moving a seat, make sure there are no lighters in the moving part area of the vehicle.

148

Transport and practical equipment

Before closing a storage compartment, make sure there are no lighters in the clos- ing area. Never leave a lighter inside a storage compartment or any other surface of the vehicle as it could ignite due to the high temperatures on such surfaces, particular- ly during the summer.

CAUTION Do not store heat- or cold-sensitive ob- jects, food or medicines in the cabin. Heat and cold could damage them or render them useless. Objects made from transparent materi- als left inside the vehicle, such as glasses, magnifying glasses or transparent suction pads stuck to the windows can concentrate sunlight and damage the vehicle.

Glove compartment

Fig. 140 On the front passenger side: glove compartment.

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the CD player and SD card reader are located in the glove compartment.

Opening and closing the glove compart- ment Opening: Pull the handle Fig. 140 and open the glove compartment.

Closing: Press the glove compartment up- wards.

WARNING If the glove compartment is left open, the risk of causing severe injuries in the event of an accident, sudden braking or manoeu- vring increases.

Always keep the glove compartment closed while the vehicle is in motion.

Storage compartment under front seats*

Fig. 141 Drawer under the front seat

Opening: Press the tab on the drawer handle and take the drawer out.

Closing: Push the drawer under the seat until it engages.

WARNING If the drawer is left open, it could prevent use of the pedals. This may cause serious accidents and injuries. Always keep the drawer closed while the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the drawer and any objects in it could fall into the driv- er's footwell and obstruct the pedals.

149

Operation

CAUTION The drawer can contain 1.5 kg at most.

Drink holder

Fig. 142 Centre console: front drinks holders.

The storage compartments of the driver and passenger doors contain a bottle holder.

Front drink holders There are two cup holders in the centre con- sole .

WARNING Incorrect use of the bottle holders may cause injuries. Never put hot drinks in the drink holders. In the event of sudden braking or an acci- dent while driving, hot beverages in the bottle holders might spill and cause burns.

Ensure that no bottles or other objects are dropped in the driver footwell while driving, as they could get under the pedals and obstruct their working. Never place glasses, food or other heavy objects drink holders. These heavy objects may be thrown across the cabin in the event of an accident and cause serious in- juries.

WARNING Closed bottles may explode inside the ve- hicle due to cold or heat. Never leave closed bottles in the vehicle if the temperature inside is very high or very low.

CAUTION Do not leave open cans in the drink holders when the vehicle is in motion. If the drink is spilled (e.g. due to sudden braking) it may damage the vehicle and its electrical sys- tem.

Note The inside elements of the drink holders can be extracted for cleaning.

Other object holders

You will find more object holders, compart- ments and supports in other parts of the vehi- cle:

In the centre console. In the top of the glove compartment in vehi- cles that do not have a CD reader. The load of the compartment should not exceed 1.2 kg. Other storage compartments are found in the rear seat, to the left and the right of the seats.

There are hangers on the struts of the doors and the rear.

WARNING Hanging clothes may decrease the driver's visibility, which may cause serious acci- dents and injuries. Always hang clothes from hangers in such a way that the driver's visibility is not affected. Only hang light pieces of clothing from the hangers of the vehicle. Never leave heavy, hard or sharp objects in the pockets of these pieces of clothing. Do not use clothes hangers to hang up the clothing, as this could interfere with the function of the head-protection airbags.

150

Transport and practical equipment

Power sockets

Vehicle power sockets

Fig. 143 12 volt power socket: 1 in the centre console, 2 in the luggage compartment. The USB power socket is located at the rear of the centre console 3 .

Fig. 144 On the left side of the luggage com- partment: 230 volt power socket.

In the centre console Remove the cover from the socket, located on the centre console Fig. 143 1 . Insert the plug of the electrical appliance into the power socket.

In the luggage compartment* Lift the power socket cover Fig. 143 2 . Insert the plug of the electrical appliance into the power socket.

Maximum power consumption

Power socket Maximum power con- sumption

12 Volts 120 Watts

230 Volts 150 watts (300 watt peaks)

Electrical equipment can be connected to the 12 volt power socket.

Make sure that the maximum power con- sumption displayed on each outlet is not ex- ceeded. The power consumption of devices is shown on the model plate.

When connecting two or more electrical de- vices at the same time, make sure that their total consumption never exceeds 190 watts .

USB power sockets Depending on the equipment and the coun- try, the vehicle may also have USB connec- tions exclusively for charging or as a power socket.

These USB ports are located in the rear part of the centre console, between the front seats Fig. 143 3 . These connectors can work at a maximum power of up to 10.5 W per port.

They are not intended for file playback.

230 volt power socket* With the engine running, the power socket Fig. 144 activates automatically as soon as a connector is plugged in. If there is enough power available, the socket can still be used while the engine is off Connect an electrical device: Open the cov- er and insert the plug into the power socket as far as possible to unlock the built-in child lock. The socket only supplies power once the child lock is unlocked.

LED on the power socket

Steady green light:

The childproof lock is unlocked. The socket is ready to operate.

151

Operation

LED on the power socket

Flashing green light:

The ignition is switched off, but there is enough power available to continue supplying the socket with current for a maximum of 10 minutes. If the connector is un- plugged before this time elap- ses, the socket is disconnected and cannot be used again until the ignition is switched on again.

Flashing red light:

There is an anomaly, e.g. dis- connection due to a current surge or overheating.

Disconnection due to overheating When the temperature exceeds a certain val- ue, the 230 volt socket inverter is automati- cally disconnected. The disconnection pre- vents overheating when the power consump- tion of the connected devices is excessive or the ambient temperature is very high. The 230-volt power supply can be used once again after a cooling time. First unplug the connector of the connected device and then plug it back in again. This prevents the elec- trical device from being switched on again if this is not wanted.

WARNING The electrical system is under high voltage! Do not spill liquids onto the socket. Do not plug adapters or extension cords into the 230 volt power socket. Otherwise,

the integrated child lock will be unlocked and the power socket will operate. Do not insert conductive objects (a knit- ting needle, for example) into the 230 volt power socket.

WARNING The power socket works only when the igni- tion is on. Improper use may cause serious injury or even fire. Children should there- fore not be left in the vehicle unattended if the button is also left behind. Otherwise there is a possibility that they may be in- jured.

CAUTION Always use the correct type of plugs to avoid damaging the sockets.

CAUTION 230 volt power socket: Do not leave devices or connectors

that are too heavy (e.g. a transformer) hanging directly from the power sock- et.

Do not connect neon lamps. Only connect devices to the socket if

the device and socket voltage match. The built-in overload disconnect func-

tion prevents any electrical devices that require a high start-up current

from turning on. In this case, unplug the electrical device's power supply and re-try the connection after about 10 seconds.

Note The use of electrical appliances with the engine switched off will cause a battery discharge. Should the connected appliance over- heat, immediately switch it off and discon- nect it from the socket. Before switching the ignition on or off, un- plug the appliances from the USB ports to protect them from any damage caused by fluctuations in voltage. Some appliances may not work properly when connected to the 230 volt sockets due to a lack of power (watts).

152

Air conditioning

Air conditioning

Heating, ventilation and cooling

Introduction

Depending on the vehicles equipment, sever- al systems may have been fitted:

The manual air conditioning system heats, cools and dehumidifies the air. The Climatronic is an automatic air condi- tioner that heats, cools and dehumidifies the air.

With the Climatronics automatic mode it is possible to automatically regulate the air temperature, distribution and flow.

The air conditioning system is more effective if the vehicle's interior is kept closed. When a lot of heat builds up inside the vehicle, venti- lation can speed up the cooling process.

To switch a specific function on, press the ap- propriate button. Press the button again to switch off the function.

The illuminated LEDs next to the buttons indi- cate that the function is switched on.

In the air conditioning settings in the infotain- ment system, the yellow function buttons in-

dicate that the function is switched on page 157.

Dust and pollen filter The dust and pollen filter with its activated charcoal cartridge serves as a barrier against impurities in the air taken into the ve- hicle interior.

The dust and pollen filter must be changed regularly so that air conditioner performance is not adversely affected.

If the filter loses efficiency prematurely due to use in areas with very high levels of air pollu- tion, the filter must be changed more fre- quently than stated in the Service Schedule.

Economic use of the air conditioning When the air conditioning is switched on, the compressor consumes engine power and has influence on fuel consumption.

The air conditioner operates most effectively with the windows and the panoramic sliding sunroof closed. However, if the vehicle has heated up after standing in the sun for some time, the air inside can be cooled more quick- ly by opening the windows and the panoram- ic sliding sunroof briefly.

WARNING Reduced visibility through the windows in- creases the risk of serious accidents.

Always ensure that all windows are free of ice and snow, and that they are not fog- ged, so as to maintain good visibility of ev- erything outside. Only drive when you have good visibility. Always ensure that you use the air condi- tioning, heater or rear window heating to maintain good visibility to the outside. Never leave the air recirculation on for a long period of time. If the cooling system is switched off and air recirculation mode switched on, the windows can mist over very quickly, considerably limiting visibility. Switch air recirculation mode off when it is not required.

CAUTION To replace the pollen filter, always visit a service centre. Switch the climate control or air condi- tioner off if you think it may be broken. This will avoid additional damage. Have the cli- mate control or air conditioning checked by a specialised workshop. Repairs to the climate control or air con- ditioning require specialist knowledge and special tools. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT Official Service.

Note When the cooling system is turned off, air coming from the outside will not be dried.

153

Operation

To prevent fogging of the windows, SEAT recommends leaving the cooling system (compressor) turned on. To do this, press the button. The button lamp should light up. The maximum heat output required to de- frost windows as quickly as possible is only available when the engine has reached its normal running temperature. Keep the air intake slots in front of the windscreen free of snow, ice and leaves to

ensure heating and cooling are not im- paired, and to prevent the windows from misting over. The air from the vents flows through the vehicle interior and is extracted by slots in the luggage compartment designed for this purpose. Therefore, you should avoid ob- structing these slots with any kind of ob- ject. Do not smoke while air recirculation mode is on, as smoke drawn into the air conditioning system leaves residue on the

evaporator, producing a permanent un- pleasant odour. It is advisable to turn on the air condition- ing at least once a month, to lubricate the system gaskets and prevent leaks. If a de- crease in the cooling capacity is detected, a Technical Service should be consulted to check the system. When the engine is under extreme strain, switch off the compressor for a moment.

Climatronic* controls and functions

Fig. 145 In the centre console: Climatronic con- trols.

Temperature 1 / 2

The temperature of the right and left sides can be adjusted separately using the adjust- ers. The selected temperature is shown on the display of the climate control panel.

Synchronisation: press button so that settings on the driver's side apply to the pas- senger side. Use the temperature regulator for the passenger side to set a different tem- perature.

The set air temperature is kept constant. Tem- perature and the amount and distribution of air are controlled automatically. Automatic mode is switched off when the fan power is changed manually.

154

Air conditioning

Cooling mode Press the button to switch on or off the cool- ing system.

The cooling mode cools and dehumidifies the air.

Blower Adjust the fan power.

Air distribution / / The airflow adjusts automatically for comfort. It can also be manually distributed to the de- sired zone by pressing the corresponding button:

The airflow is directed towards the chest

The airflow is directed towards the foot- well. The airflow is directed at the windscreen.

Maximum cooling power The recirculation of air and the cooling sys- tem turn on automatically and air distribution adjusts automatically to the position .

Defrost/demist function The Climatronics defrost function removes ice and fog from the windscreen. The air is dehumidified and the fan is set high.

Infotainment System Open the air conditioning settings in the info- tainment system page 157.

The climate control operation and settings menu will be displayed in the infotainment system screen.

Heated rear window Switches the heated rear window on and off.

This only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after a maxi- mum of 10 minutes.

It should be switched off as soon as the glass is demisted. By saving electrical power you can also save fuel.

To avoid possible damage to the battery, an automatic temporary disconnection of this function is possible, coming back on when normal operating conditions are re-establish- ed.

Air recirculation Switches the air recirculation mode on and off page 157

Seat heating Switches seat heating on and off page 158

Switching off Switch off the air conditioning system. If the fan is manually set to , it also switches off.

Auxiliary heating Switch the auxiliary heater on or off page 161.

Air Conditioning settings in Infotainment Open the auxiliary heater menu in the air conditioning settings in the infotainment sys- tem page 161.

The Air Care Climatronic allergen filter can reduce the amount of harmful substances that get inside, including allergens page 158.

Windscreen heating Switches the heated windscreen on and off with the engine running page 160.

Steering wheel heating Activate or deactivate steering wheel heating page 159.

155

Operation

Manual air conditioning controls

Fig. 146 In the centre console: Manual air condi- tioning controls.

Cooling mode Press the button to switch on or off the cool- ing system.

Temperature 1

Turn the control to adjust the temperature.

Blower Turning the regulator 2 sets the fan power.

At level 0 the fan and manual air conditioning are disconnected. Level 6 is the maximum.

Air distribution / / / / Turning regulator 3 distributes the air to the desired zone:

The airflow is directed towards the chest

The airflow is directed towards the chest and the footwell area.

The airflow is directed towards the foot- well. The airflow is directed towards the wind- screen and the footwell area.

Defrost/demist function When control 3 is in position the air flow is directed at the windscreen and air recircula- tion is disconnected automatically or not ac- tivated. Increase the fan power to clear the windscreen of condensation as soon as pos- sible. To dehumidify the air, the cooling sys- tem will automatically switch on.

Maximum cooling power When the control is in position air re- circulation and the cooling system are con- nected automatically and the air flow is auto- matically adjusted to position .

Heated rear window This only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after a maxi- mum of 10 minutes.

It should be switched off as soon as the glass is demisted. By saving electrical power you can also save fuel.

To avoid possible damage to the battery, an automatic temporary disconnection of this function is possible, coming back on when normal operating conditions are re-establish- ed.

Air recirculation page 157

Seat heating page 158

156

Air conditioning

Setting the temperature on the in- fotainment system

The air conditioning settings in the infotain- ment system are available in the Climatronic. Depending on the vehicle equipment.

Open the air conditioner menu Press the button of the Climatronic control panel.

The current air conditioning settings are dis- played at the top of the screen. The current air conditioning settings are displayed at the top of the screen.

Air conditioning operating modes The air conditioning operating modes are colour coded:

Blue: Cooling. Red: Heating.

General settings submenu Sets the following functions:

Automatic air recirculation mode page 157. Supplementary heater page 162. Automatic heated windscreen page 160.

Presets submenu Sets the automatic or manual mode of the cooling system or switches the air condition- ing off.

Air conditioning profile Adjust fan power in automatic mode.

Air vents

To ensure proper heating, cooling and venti- lation in the vehicle interior, the air vents must remain open.

Turn the corresponding thumbwheel in the required direction to open and close the air vents. When the thumbwheel is in the posi- tion, the corresponding air vent is closed. Change the air direction using the ventila- tion grille lever.

There are other additional, non-adjustable air vents in the dash panel, in the footwells and in the rear area of the passenger compartment.

Note Food, medicine and other heat or cold sen- sitive objects should never be placed in front of the air outlets as they may be dam- aged or made unsuitable for use by the air.

Air recirculation

Air recirculation mode prevents the ambient air from entering the interior.

For safety reasons, air recirculation is switch- ed off in the following situations:

When the button is pressed or the air distributor is turned to . When a sensor detects that the vehicle's windows could mist up.

Switching the manual air recirculation mode on and off Press the button to connect or discon- nect manual air recirculation.

Climatronic automatic air recirculation mode With the automatic air recirculation mode ac- tivated, the entry of fresh air into the cabin in- terior is enabled. If the system detects a high concentration of hazardous substances in the ambient air, air recirculation mode is switched on automatically. When the level of impurities drops to within a normal range, recirculation mode is switched off.

The system is unable to detect unpleasant smells.

The air recirculation will not connect auto- matically in versions without humidity sensor and in the following external conditions:

157

Operation

The outside temperature is lower than +3C (+38F). The cooling system is switched off and the outside temperature is below +10C (+50F). The cooling system is switched off, the out- side temperature is below +15C (+59F) and the windscreen wipers are switched on.

Air Care Climatronic with allergen filter The Air Care Climatronic allergen filter can reduce the amount of harmful substances, in- cluding allergens, that get inside.

If the Air Care option is switched on, the air conditionings air recirculation mode is maxi- mised until there is a risk of the windows mist- ing up due to humidity inside the vehicle and the outside temperature. The air recirculation mode is automatically regulated and incor- porates an automatic setting to prevent the vehicle occupants suffering from fatigue.

Open the air conditioning settings in the in- fotainment system page 157. Switch the Air Care function on or off using active Air Care.

WARNING Stuffy or used air will increase fatigue and reduce driver concentration possibly re- sulting in a serious accident. Never leave the fresh air fan turned off or use the air recirculation for long periods of

time; the air in the vehicle interior will not be refreshed. If the cooling system is switched off and air recirculation mode switched on, the windows can mist over very quickly, con- siderably limiting visibility.

CAUTION Do not smoke when air recirculation is switched on in vehicles with an air condi- tioner. The smoke taken in could lie on the cooling system vaporiser and on the acti- vated charcoal cartridge of the dust and pollen filter, leading to a permanently un- pleasant smell.

Note Climatronic: air recirculation mode is ac- tivated to prevent exhaust gas or unpleas- ant odours from entering the vehicle interi- or when it is in reverse and while the auto- matic windscreen wiper is working. When the outside temperature is very high, selecting manual air recirculation mode for a short period refreshes the vehi- cle interior more quickly.

Seat heating*

With the engine running, the front seats and side rear seats can be electrically heated to three power levels.

Seat heating power levels Seat heating operating modes are colour co- ded. At the highest heating level, all three LEDs light up.

Control seat heating Press buttons or on the control panel to turn on the seat heating as high as possi- ble. Press buttons or repeatedly to adjust it to the required level. To turn off the seat heating, press button or repeatedly until no LEDs are lit.

When the engine is started again within ap- proximately 10 minutes, the most recently set heating level for the driver's seat is switched on automatically.

Cases in which the heat seating should not be switched on Do not switch the seat heating on if any of the following conditions are met:

If the seat is occupied by a person with limi- ted pain or temperature perceptions .

158

Air conditioning

The seat is not occupied. The seat has a cover. A child seat has been installed on the seat. The seat cushion is wet or damp. The outdoor or indoor temperature is great- er than +25C (77F).

WARNING People who cannot perceive pain or tem- perature because of medications, paralysis or chronic diseases (e.g. diabetes) or have a limited perception of these, may suffer burns to the back, buttocks or legs when using seat heating. People with limited pain and temperature thresholds must never use seat heating. If an abnormality in the device's temper- ature control is detected, have it checked by a specialist workshop.

WARNING If the fabric of the cushion is wet, this can adversely affect the operation of the seat heating, increasing the risk of burns. Make sure the seat cushion is dry prior to using the seat heater. Do not sit on the seat with clothing that is wet or damp. Do not leave clothing that is wet or damp on the seat. Do not spill liquid on the seat.

CAUTION To avoid damaging the heating elements of the seat heaters, please do not kneel on the seat or apply sharp pressure to a single point on the seat cushion or backrest. Liquids, sharps objects and insulating materials (e.g. covers or child seats) can damage the seat heating. If the seat heating generates any kind of odour, it must be switched off immediately and it should be checked by a specialist service centre. If you have replaced the original uphols- tery with another material, the seat heating may overheat or its operation may be limi- ted.

For the sake of the environment To save fuel, turn off the seat heating as soon as possible.

Steering wheel heating*

Steering wheel heating works only with the engine running.

Steering wheel heating levels The selected flywheel heating level will be displayed on the instrument panel display.

Level control is carried out using the button on the multifunction steering wheel:

Brief press (less than 1 second): the heating is switched on at maximum level. Press the steering wheel button repeatedly until the desired level is adjusted. To switch off steer- ing wheel heating, press the steering wheel button repeatedly until the heated steering wheel OFF icon is displayed on the instru- ment cluster. Long press (more than 1 second): the heat- ing is switched off directly from the level that is currently operating. If the steering wheel button is pressed again for a long period, the heating is switched on directly at the last lev- el saved before switching off.

Automatic off The steering wheel heating will be switched off automatically when any of the following conditions are met:

Power consumption is too high. The steering wheel heating system is faulty. If the ignition is switched off.

159

Operation

Windscreen heating*

Fig. 147 Windscreen humidity and tempera- ture sensor.

The brake servo works only when the engine is running.

The heated windscreen is comprised of a set of heated wires placed between the layers of the windscreen which, when electric current is supplied to them, heat up and cause the temperature of the glass to rise.

Its function is to assist the air-conditioning system to prevent the windscreen from mist- ing up or to demist it faster if it does mist up.

The system can be switched on manually or automatically.

Manual activation Press the button in the air conditioning settings in the infotainment system.

The heated windscreen is switched off based on the outside temperature and, in any case, after approximately 8 minutes.

Automatic activation The heated windscreen switches on automat- ically when a window is at risk of misting up.

Open the air conditioning settings in the in- fotainment system page 157. Switch the automatic heated windscreen on or off.

The automatic heated windscreen is switch- ed on, even when the air conditioning is switched off.

Thermal windscreen using the defrost function If the defrost function is switched on and a sensor detects that the windscreen could mist up, the heated windscreen switches on.

When does the heated windscreen switch off? The heated windscreen switches off when one of the following conditions is met:

Power consumption is too high. The air conditioner fuse is faulty. If the preset time has elapsed.

Troubleshooting

The cooling mode cannot be switched on or operates in a limited way The cooling mode works only with the engine running and if the ambient temperature is above +3 C (+38 F). When the engine is very hot, the cooling mode is deactivated.

Switch on the fan. Check the air conditioning fuse page 57. Dust and pollen filter If the fault continues, consult a specialised workshop.

The heating and fresh air system cannot be switched on or operates in a limited way The heating and fresh air system and the defrost function operate best when the en- gine is hot. If the fault continues, consult a specialised workshop.

The windows are misted up Windows mist up when they are cooler than the ambient temperature and the air is very damp. Cold air can absorb less moisture than hot air, so the windows mist up more often in cold weather.

160

Air conditioning

The air vent in front of the windscreen keeps it free of ice, snow and leaves, which improves the performance of the heating and cooling systems. The air grooves located at the rear of the luggage compartment must be kept clear to allow the air to circulate through the vehicle from front to back. Switch on the demist function page 155, page 156.

The temperature unit is not correct Use the infotainment system to change the units for all of the vehicle's temperature dis- plays.

Water or water vapour under the vehicle When the outside air is very humid and the ambient temperature is high, condensation may drip from the evaporator of the cooling system, which can form a puddle under the vehicle. This is completely normal and is no indication of a leak.

If the outside air is very humid and the ambi- ent temperature is low, the auxiliary heating can evaporate the condensation. In this case, steam may come out from under the vehicle. This does not mean that the vehicle has bro- ken down.

Auxiliary heating and venti- lation*

Introduction

With the auxiliary heating and ventilation, it is possible to heat the vehicle interior in winter and ventilate it in summer. It can also be used to demist the windscreen and remove ice or even a thin layer of snow. The auxiliary heat- ing is powered by fuel from the vehicles tank and can even continue to operate when the ignition is switched off. The auxiliary ventila- tion is powered by the 12-volt vehicle battery.

The auxiliary heating can be controlled by the SEAT CONNECT mobile app or through the MySEAT website.

The auxiliary heater can be switched on using the fast heating button of the air conditioning controls, with the remote control or by previ- ously programming a departure time in the auxiliary heater menu of the infotainment sys- tem.

If the outside temperature is very high, the ve- hicle interior can be ventilated with the en- gine off using the auxiliary heater.

Auxiliary heating exhaust system The exhaust gases generated by the auxiliary heater are removed via an exhaust pipe fitted underneath the vehicle. This exhaust pipe

must not be blocked by snow, mud or any- thing else.

WARNING The auxiliary heater exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, an odourless and colour- less toxic gas. Carbon monoxide can cause people to lose consciousness. It can also cause death. Never switch on the auxiliary heater or leave it running in enclosed spaces or areas with no ventilation. Never programme the auxiliary heater so that it switches itself on and is running in an enclosed space or an area with no ventila- tion.

WARNING The components of the auxiliary heater are extremely hot and could cause a fire. Always park your vehicle so that no part of the exhaust system can come in contact with easily flammable materials that might be below the vehicle, such as dried grass.

CAUTION Never place food, medicines or other tem- perature-sensitive objects close to the air vents. Food, medicines and other objects sensitive to heat or cold may be damaged or made unsuitable for use by the air com- ing from the vents.

161

Operation

Switching the auxiliary heater and ventilation on and off

The auxiliary heating can operate with the ig- nition switched on and off.

Open the Auxiliary heater menu Open the air conditioning settings in the in- fotainment system. Press the function button.

Switching on the auxiliary heater The auxiliary heating can be switched off in the following ways:

Press the immediate heat button on the air conditioning controls. OR: Press button on the remote control page 163. OR: Set the departure time page 163. OR: Using the App or MySEAT website.

If the 12-volt vehicle battery is low on charge or the tank is empty, the auxiliary heating cannot be switched on.

Switch off the auxiliary heating manually The auxiliary heater can be switched off manually in the following ways:

Press the immediate heat button on the air conditioning controls.

OR: Press button on the remote control. OR: Using the SEAT CONNECT mobile app or the MySEAT website.

The auxiliary heater switches off automat- ically At the scheduled departure time or the end of the set operating period page 163. If the yellow indicator lamp (fuel gauge) lights up. If the 12-volt battery's charge level drops sharply. The auxiliary heating can be turned off im- mediately with the on/off button.

To burn the remaining fuel in the auxiliary heating, it continues to operate briefly once it has been turned off manually or automatical- ly.

Using the auxiliary heating as a supple- mentary heater If the engine has been started, the auxiliary heating can continue to operate as a supple- mentary heating system. The following condi- tion must be met for this to happen:

The Automatic supplementary heater function can be switched on in the infotain- ment system's air conditioning settings. The outside temperature is lower than +5 C (+41 F).

The supplementary heating system switches off again automatically after a while.

Note Noises will be heard while the auxiliary heater is running. When the air humidity is high and the in- side temperature low, condensation from the heating and ventilating system may evaporate when the auxiliary heater is switched on. In this case, steam may be re- leased from underneath the vehicle. This does not mean that there is a vehicle mal- function. If the vehicle is tilted, e.g. if parked on a slope, the operation of the auxiliary heater may be restricted if the fuel tank level is low (just above the reserve level). If the auxiliary heater is used a number of times for a long period of time, the 12-volt battery will lose its charge. To recharge the battery, the vehicle must be driven for a number of kilometres from time to time. As a guideline: the journey should last approx- imately as long as the heater was connec- ted. At temperatures below +5 C (+41 F), the auxiliary heater may switch itself on auto- matically when the engine is switched on. The auxiliary heater is switched off again after a certain time.

162

Air conditioning

While the vehicle is stopped, the auxiliary heating can be switched on up to a maxi- mum of three consecutive times in a row with the maximum operating duration.

Programming the auxiliary heater*

Before programming it, check that the vehi- cle's date and time are set correctly .

The auxiliary heater is programmed in the Auxiliary heater menu of the infotainment system.

Set the operating duration of the auxiliary heating Open the Auxiliary heater menu. Press the Set function button. To set the operating time, press the Oper- ating duration button.

The set operating duration is taken into ac- count when the auxiliary heating is switched on using the immediate heat button or the remote control.

The maximum duration of the auxiliary heat- ing is 60 minutes.

Set the departure time Activating this function only affects the heat- ing or ventilation. The departure time must be reactivated whenever the vehicle is started.

Open the Auxiliary heater menu. Press the Set function button. Select one of the memory spaces for a De- parture time. Press the Activate function button.

Manual air conditioning: The scheduled de- parture time determines when the auxiliary heating or ventilation will be switched off. The start of the heating or ventilation process de- pends on the programmed duration of opera- tion.

Climatronic: The vehicle uses the program- med departure time to automatically calcu- late the time at which the heating or ventila- tion process should begin to attain the set temperature.

A departure time can be scheduled in the App or on the MySEAT website.

Checking the programming If a departure time is activated, the yellow LED on the immediate heat button lights up on the Climatronic control panel, approxi- mately ten seconds after the ignition is switched off.

WARNING Never programme the auxiliary heater so that it switches itself on and is running in an enclosed space or an area with no ventila- tion. The auxiliary heater exhaust fumes

contain carbon monoxide, an odourless and colourless toxic gas. Carbon monoxide can cause people to lose consciousness. It can also cause death.

Radio-operated remote control

Fig. 148 Auxiliary heating: radio-operated re- mote control.

Switch on: Press the button for about one second Switch off: Press the button for about one second

If the buttons of the remote control are press- ed unnecessarily, it could switch on the auxili- ary heater involuntarily, even when it is out of range or when the control lamp is flashing.

163

Operation

Remote control LED When the buttons are pressed, the LED of re- mote control Fig. 148 2 gives the user a range of information:

It lights up for approx. 2 seconds In green: The auxiliary heater has been

switched on using the button. In red: The auxiliary heater has been switched off con with button .

Flashes slowly for approx. 2 seconds In green: No on signal has been received. The remote control is out of range. Move closer to the vehicle. In red: No off signal has been received. The remote control is out of range. Move closer to the vehicle.

It flashes irregularly In green: The independent heating is blocked. Possible causes: the fuel tank is al- most empty, the 12-volt battery charge is very low or there is a fault.

It lights up or flashes steadily In orange (then in green or in red): The re- mote control battery is almost flat. However, the on or off signal has been received. In orange (then flashes green or red): The remote control battery is almost flat. No on or off signal has been received.

Flashes for around 5 seconds In orange: The remote control battery is flat. No on or off signal has been received.

Range The range of the remote control is a few hun- dred meters when the battery is fully charged and under optimal conditions.

A distance of at least 2 m must be left be- tween the remote control and the vehicle. There should be no obstacle between the remote control and the vehicle. Secure the remote control with the chrome pin Fig. 148 1 vertically facing upwards. Do not cover the antenna.

The range of the control is considerably less in poor weather conditions, if there are build- ings in the vicinity or if the battery is low.

Changing the remote control battery If the indicator lamp does not come on, the remote control's battery must be replaced.

Insert a suitable tool, e.g. a screwdriver, into the indentation in the remote control housing, in the direction of the arrow Fig. 148. With the help of the same tool, lift the lid until the housing locking element is released. Slightly move the cover in the direction of the arrow.

Remove the cover. To remove the battery, carefully insert a tool like a screwdriver into the indentation next to the battery. Use the screwdriver to lift up the battery un- til it releases from its housing. Remove the old battery. Insert a new battery of the same type and make sure it clicks into place. When inserting the battery, make sure that the polarity is cor- rect. Fit the cover onto the remote control hous- ing. Slide the cover in the direction opposite to the arrow until it clicks into place Fig. 148.

WARNING Swallowing a battery with a 20 mm diame- ter or any other button battery can cause serious and even fatal injuries within a very short time. Always keep the remote control, keyrings with batteries, the spare batteries, button batteries and all other batteries over 20 mm out of reach of children. If you suspect that someone may have swallowed a battery, seek immediate med- ical attention.

164

Air conditioning

CAUTION The radio frequency remote control con- tains electronic components. Therefore, avoid getting it wet and exposing it to knocks or direct sunlight. The use of inappropriate batteries may damage the radio frequency remote con- trol. For this reason, always replace the used battery with another of the same volt- age, size and specifications.

For the sake of the environment Please dispose of your used batteries correctly and with respect for the environ- ment. The remote control battery may contain perchlorate. Observe the legal provisions regarding disposal. Care should be taken so as not to oper- ate the remote control unintentionally so as to prevent the auxiliary heater being switched on accidentally.

165

Infotainment system

Infotainment system

Introduction

First steps

Introduction

Infotainment functions and settings depend on the country and equipment

Before first use Before the first use, bear in mind the following points, to take full advantage of the functions and settings offered:

Observe the basic safety warnings page 166. Reset the Infotainment factory settings. Search and store favourite radio stations on the preset buttons so you can tune them quickly. Use only suitable audio sources and data media. Pair a mobile phone to use phone manage- ment through the Infotainment system. Use current maps for navigation. Register in SEAT CONNECT to run the cor- responding services.

Current documentation attached For using infotainment and its components, take into account, together with this instruc- tion manual, the following documentation:

Supplements to your vehicles on-board documentation. Instruction Manual of the mobile phone de- vice or audio sources. Operating instructions for data media and external players. Manuals for the Infotainment accessories subsequently installed or used additionally. Description of services when running SEAT CONNECT services.

Safety instructions

Some function areas may include links to third-party websites. SEAT, S.A. is not the owner of the third-party websites accessible through the links, and assumes no liability for their content.

Some function areas may include outside in- formation from third-party providers. SEAT, S.A. is not responsible for such information being correct, up-to-date or complete, or for ensuring it does not infringe the rights of third parties.

Radio stations and owners of data media and audio sources are responsible for the infor- mation they transmit.

Bear in mind that parking lots, tunnels, tall buildings, mountains or due to the operation of other electrical devices, such as chargers, can also interfere with the reception of the ra- dio signal.

Foils or adhesives with metallic layers on the antenna and on the window panes can inter- fere with radio reception.

WARNING The infotainment central computer is inter- connected with the control units mounted on the vehicle. Therefore, there is a serious danger of accident and injury if the central computer is repaired or disassembled and reassembled incorrectly. Never replace the central computer with another used, recycled or from another ve- hicle at the end of its useful life. The repair or disassembly and reassem- bly of the central computer should only be carried out at specialised workshops. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.

WARNING The factory assembled radio with integra- ted software is interconnected with the control units mounted on the vehicle.

166

Introduction

Therefore, there is a serious danger of acci- dent and injury if the radio is repaired or disassembled and reassembled incorrect- ly. Never replace the radio with another ra- dio that is used, recycled or from another vehicle at the end of its useful life. The repair or disassembly and reassem- bly of the radio should only be carried out at specialised workshops. SEAT recom- mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.

WARNING Any distraction affecting the driver in any way can lead to an accident and cause in- juries. Reading the information on the screen and managing the infotainment sys- tem can distract your attention from traffic and cause an accident. Always drive as carefully and responsibly as possible.

WARNING Connecting, inserting or removing an audio source or data media while driving can dis- tract your attention from the traffic and cause an accident.

WARNING Select volume settings that allow you to easily hear signals from outside the vehicle

at all times (e.g. emergency services si- rens). Hearing may be impaired if using too high a volume setting, even if only for short peri- ods of time.

WARNING The following circumstances may result in an emergency call, phone call or data transmission not being made or being inter- rupted: When in areas with zero or insufficient mobile telephony or GPS signal. Also in tunnels, confined areas between very tall buildings, garages, underpasses, moun- tains and valleys. When in areas with sufficient mobile phone or GPS signal, the telephony net- work of the telecommunications provider has interference or is not available. When the vehicle components necessary to make emergency calls, phone calls and to transmit data are damaged, do not work or do not have sufficient electrical power. When the battery of the mobile phone device is discharged or its charge level is insufficient.

WARNING In some countries and some telephone net- works it is only possible to make an emer- gency call, if a mobile telephone device is

connected to the telephone interface of the vehicle, inside it there is an unlocked SIM card with sufficient balance to make calls and with sufficient network signal coverage.

WARNING Read and observe the operating instruc- tions provided by the manufacturer in question when using mobile phone devices, data media, external devices, external au- dio and multimedia sources.

WARNING Position the connection cables of the audio sources and external devices so that they do not interfere with the driver.

WARNING When changing or connecting an audio or multimedia source may cause sudden changes in the volume. Lower the volume before connecting or switching to audio or multimedia sources.

WARNING If mobile phone and radiocommunication devices are used without connection to an external antenna, the maximum electro- magnetic radiation levels inside the vehicle might be surpassed, thus posing a risk to the health of the driver and passengers.

167

Infotainment system

This is also the case if the external antenna has not been correctly installed. Keep a distance of at least 20 centime- tres between the antennas of the mobile phone device and an active medical de- vice, such as a pacemaker, as mobile phones might alter the functioning of these devices. Do not carry a mobile phone switched on very close or directly on top of an active medical device, for instance in a chest pocket. Immediately turn off the mobile phone if you suspect it is causing interferences in an active medical device or any other medical device.

WARNING Mobile phones, external devices and ac- cessories that are loose or not properly se- cured could move around the passenger compartment during a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre or an accident and cause damage or injury. Set mobile phone devices, external devi- ces and their accessories outside the air- bag deployment areas or store them se- curely.

WARNING The centre armrest may obstruct the driv- er's arm movements, which could cause an accident and severe injuries. Keep the storage compartments of the centre armrest closed at all times while the vehicle is in motion.

WARNING If the light conditions are not good and the screen is damaged or dirty, the indications and information displayed on the screen may not be read or be read incorrectly. The indications and information dis- played on the screen should never induce to take any risk that compromises safety. The screen is not a replacement for driver awareness.

WARNING Radio stations can transmit disaster or haz- ard announcements. The following condi- tions prevent such notices from being re- ceived or issued: When in areas with zero or insufficient ra- dio signal. Also in tunnels, confined areas between very tall buildings, garages, un- derpasses, mountains and valleys. When the frequency bands of the radio station have interference or are not availa- ble in areas with sufficient radio signal re- ception.

When the speakers and the vehicle com- ponents necessary for radio reception are damaged, do not work or do not have suffi- cient electrical power. When the infotainment is switched off.

WARNING Switch off mobile phone devices in areas with a risk of explosion!

WARNING The driving recommendations and traffic indications shown on the navigation system may differ from the current traffic situation. Traffic signs, signalling systems, traffic regulations and local circumstances pre- vail over driving recommendations and navigation system indications. Adapt your speed and driving style to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic condi- tions. Certain circumstances can significantly initially planned lengthen both the duration of the trip and the route to the destination, or even temporarily prevent navigation to it, for example, if a road is closed to traffic.

Note In areas where special regulations apply or the use of mobile phones is forbidden, the mobile device in question must be switched off at all times. The radiation produced by

168

Introduction

a mobile phone device when switched on may interfere with sensitive technical and medical equipment, possibly resulting in malfunction or damage to the equipment.

Note If the playback volume is excessive or dis- torted, the speakers may be damaged.

169

Infotainment system

Overview and controls

Connect System

Fig. 149 Overview: control unit and indication in the 9.2-inch version

Touch screen. The infotainment functions can be used through the screen. Navigation Menu Full Link menu Turn volume up Turn volume down Turn the infotainment on/off

1

2

3

4

5

6

HOME button. : main menu with widget views. : main menu in mosaic mode.

7

170

Introduction

General instructions for use

Operating indications

The infotainment needs a few seconds for the complete start-up of the system and dur- ing that time it does not react to inputs. Only the image of the rear view camera* system can be displayed during system start-up. The display of all indications and the exe- cution of functions only takes place once the infotainment system has finished booting. The duration of the system booting depends on the number of infotainment functions and may take longer than normal in the event of very high or very low temperatures. When using the infotainment system and corresponding accessories, e.g., head- phones, bear in mind country-specific regu- lations and legal provisions. Some functions of the infotainment system require an active SEAT CONNECT user ac- count and an Internet connection for the ve- hicle. The data transmission must not be limi- ted to perform the functions. To use the infotainment system, simply lightly press a button or touch the screen. For the correct operation of the infotain- ment system it is important that it is switched on and that, if necessary, the time and date of the vehicle are set correctly.

If a function button is missing on the screen, it is not a device defect, but corresponds to the specific equipment of the country or ver- sion. Some infotainment functions can only be selected when the vehicle is at a standstill. In some countries, the selector lever must also be in the parking position P or in neutral posi- tion N. It is not a malfunction, but is due to compliance with legal provisions. Restrictions on the use of devices using Bluetooth technology may apply in some countries. For further information, contact the local authorities. If you disconnect the 12-volt battery, turn on the ignition before restarting the infotain- ment system. If the setup is changed, this may change the display on the screen and in some cases, the infotainment system may behave in a manner different to that described in this in- struction manual. Ensure that any repairs or modifications that need to be carried out on the infotain- ment system are carried out by a specialised workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this. Using a mobile phone device inside the ve- hicle may cause noise in the speakers. In some countries, the infotainment system automatically shuts off when the engine is

switched off and the vehicle's 12-volt battery charge level is low. On vehicles with park assist, the audio source volume is automatically lowered when reverse gear is selected. The volume reduc- tion can be adjusted. Information about the included software and the license conditions can be found in Settings > Copyright. When selling or lending the vehicle, make sure that all saved data, files and settings have been deleted and, if necessary, external audio sources and data media have been re- moved.

Note You will find more information and tips for using the infotainment system in the Help menu.

HOME screen

In the control and display unit you can set up the views and representation on the home screen or use the factory setting templates.

If an icon is missing on the screen, it is not a device defect, but corresponds to the specific equipment of the country or version.

The following menus can be included as an icon on the home screen:

171

Infotainment system

Main menus on the home screen

Navigation page 198

Radio/Multimedia page 191

Telephone page 205

Full Link page 182

Setup page 173

Vehicle page 95

Data page 94

Air conditioning page 153

Sound

Users

a) Privacy mode page 181

Store

Legal

Help

a) Depends on the selected privacy mode.

Managing the infotainment system

Execute the functions and settings with the in- fotainment controls.

Depending on the equipment, the infotain- ment system has different controls: Touch screen. Off-screen sensor fields.

Opening the Quick Guide You will find more information and tips for handling in the Quick Guide of the infotain- ment system.

Press HOME > .

Connecting and disconnecting the info- tainment system The infotainment system turns on when the ignition is switched on, unless it has been manually turned off beforehand.

The infotainment system starts-up with the last set volume, provided that this does not exceed the preset maximum start-up volume.

The infotainment system automatically turns off when the driver's door is opened, provided the ignition has been switched off before- hand.

Moving objects and adjusting volume Move objects on the screen to adapt settings, for example, with scrollable buttons or to move the areas of a menu.

Depending on the equipment, customise me- nus and views.

Increasing and reducing images or map sizes Tip: use your thumb and index finger. Press on the map with both fingers at the same time and leave them on the screen. To enlarge views, slowly separate one fin- ger from the other. To reduce views, slowly bring one finger towards the other.

Note If you turn on the infotainment system man- ually with the ignition off, it will automati- cally turn off after about 30 minutes.

Customising the infotainment sys- tem

Customise the menus and infotainment views to quickly access your favourite or most fre- quently used functions.

The main menu contains function buttons for accessing all of the Infotainment apps.

Customise shortcuts At the bottom of the screen you will find shortcuts to customisable system functions. Use the settings to delete or replace them, or change their order.

172

Introduction

Press and hold one of the icons (or press + of an empty position) to display an additional window. Select one of the icons from the apps bar. Press to delete an icon. Click on an icon in the additional window to replace the value. Hold your finger on one of the icons and drag it to the desired position. To close the edit mode, press in the addi- tional window, or press .

Note The shortcut bar cannot be edited when the vehicle is moving.

Settings (system and sound)

The selection of possible settings varies de- pending on the country, the equipment in question and the equipment of the vehicle.

Modifying settings The meaning of the following symbols are valid for all system and sound settings.

All changes are automatically applied when the menus are closed.

Symbol and its meaning

The setting is selected and activated or connected.

The setting is not selected, disabled or disconnected.

To open a drop-down list.

To increase a setting value.

To increase a setting value.

To go back step by step.

To go forward step by step.

To change a setting value with the scrollable button without adjusting.

Sound settings Access the sound settings: HOME >

In the sound settings there may be the follow- ing functions, information and setting options:

Equaliser Position. Settings.

System settings Access the system settings: HOME > .

In the system settings there may be the fol- lowing functions, information and setting op- tions:

Screen. Time and date. Language. Additional keypad languages. Units. Voice control. Wi-Fi. Applications and services Manage mobile devices. Reset factory settings. System information. Copyright. Configuration wizard.

Adjust the volume of external audio sour- ces If you need to increase the playback volume for the external audio source, first lower the volume on the infotainment system.

If the sound from the connected audio source is very low, increase the output volume on the external audio source. If this is not enough, change the input volume to medi- um or high.

If the sound from the connected external au- dio source is too loud or distorted, lower the output volume on the external audio source. If this is not enough, change the input vol- ume to medium or low.

173

Infotainment system

Clean the screen

Remove persistent dirt carefully and without using aggressive cleaning products. To clean the screen we recommend that:

The infotainment system is switched off. Use a clean, soft cloth dampened with wa- ter page 339. In case of persistent dirt: soften the dirt by moistening with a little water. Then carefully remove with a clean, soft cloth.

CAUTION Cleaning the screen with inappropriate cleaning products or when dry, may dam- age it. When cleaning, only press lightly. Do not use aggressive cleaning products or that contain solvents. Such products may damage the equipment and darken the screen.

Trademarks, licenses and copy- rights

Registered trademarks and licenses Certain terms in this manual bear the symbol or . These symbols indicate that it is a

trademark or a registered trademark. The ab- sence of this symbol, however, does not nec- essarily mean that the term in question can be used freely.

Other product names are registered trade- marks or trademarks of the respective rights holders.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D sym- bol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D sym- bol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Android Auto is a trademark of Google Inc. Apple CarPlay is a trademark of Apple Inc. Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.iPod, iPad and iPhone are trademarks of Apple Inc. MirrorLink and MirrorLink Logo are certi- fied trademarks of Car Connectivity Consor- tium LLC. Windows is a registered trademark of Mi- crosoft Corporation, Redmond, USA. MPEG-4 HE-AAC audio coding technology and patents are licensed by Fraunhofer IIS. This product is protected by certain Micro- soft Corporation industrial and intellectual

property rights. The use or commercialization of technology of this type outside the config- uration of this product, without a licence from Microsoft or an authorised Microsoft branch is prohibited.

Copyright As a general rule, audio and video files stored on data media and audio sources are subject to intellectual property protection in accord- ance with the national and international pro- visions applicable in each case. Please bear in mind all legal provisions!

Technical data

Radio with integrated hardware (8.25 ")1)

The factory-mounted radio in the vehicle with integrated hardware includes country-specif- ic components and software for connectivity and for the execution of vehicle, comfort and infotainment functions.

The corresponding indications are shown on the radio screen and partly on the instrument panel. Capacitive colour screen: 8.25 inch version, TFT, WVGA: 1082 x 480

pixels.

1) Equipment name: Media System 174

Introduction

Touch operation via the device screen, ro- tary push-button, menu button and buttons on the multifunction steering wheel.

Central computer with control and display unit (9,2)1)

The factory-mounted central computer in the vehicle includes country-specific compo- nents and software for connectivity and for the execution of vehicle, comfort and infotain- ment functions.

The corresponding indications are shown on the control and display unit screen and partly on the instrument panel. Capacitive colour screen: Using the equipment with: Touch zones Touch operation. Buttons on the multifunction steering

wheel. Approach sensors (driver and passenger

side recognition, gesture control).

Vehicle and comfort functions Driver assistance system settings. Heating and air conditioning settings. Lights and visibility function settings. Vehicle comfort settings. Parking and manoeuvring settings.

Sound system

Basic equipment: The infotainment system that is supplied from the factory is equipped as follows: Speakers in different locations and with dif-

ferent power levels (watts). Internal amplifier depending on the system: 4 speakers: 2 x 20 W 9 speakers: 5 x 20 W

Setting options: Equaliser, depending on the system: 4 speakers: treble, mid and bass. 9 speakers: 5 frequency bands or pre-

defined settings. Sound distribution, depending on the sys-

tem: 4 speakers: Balance (left / right) 9 speakers: Balance + Fader (left /

right / front / rear). Sound optimisation by zones (valid for 9

speaker system): Manual (Driver and All) Automatic depending on the seats oc-

cupied.

Optional sound system The infotainment system can be extended with an optional sound system as follows: 10 speakers in different locations and with

different power levels (watts). External amplifier (340 W Ethernet), which

processes the audio signals sent by the central computer.

Excitation of speaker channels through class AB final stages.

Audio signal processing in digital internal signal processor (DSP).

Independent subwoofer in the luggage compartment.

Setting options: User equaliser: 5 bands. Sound distribution: Balance + Fader (left /

right / front / rear). Sound optimisation by zones: Manual (Driver, Front and All)

Subwoofer volume.

Connectivity

Wi-Fi Wi-Fi conforming to IEEE 802.11 b/g/n. Transfer in 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz.

1) Equipment name: Connect System. 175

Infotainment system

Three Wi-Fi modes at the same time: Tethering (2.4 GHz). 2.4 GHz access point.

Connect System: Simultaneous connection of up to 8 Wi-Fi

devices. Media System: Simultaneous connection of up to 2 Wi-Fi

devices. Connect System: Internet connection via Wi-Fi: Tethering through the customer's

phone. Customer access point (clients) in the

vehicle. Media System: Internet connection via Wi-Fi: Apple CarPlay wireless.

Apple CarPlay and Android Auto over Wi-Fi. Pairing process simplified by WPS or QR

code.

Bluetooth profiles There can be a maximum of two mobile devi- ces connected to the Bluetooth hands-free and a third device connected to the Blue- tooth as a music player.

When a mobile phone is connected to the tel- ephone management system, a data ex-

change takes place via one of the Bluetooth profiles.

Hands-free telephone profile (HFP): the HFP can be used to manage calls through the infotainment system. Audio profile (A2DP): This profile allows audio to be transmitted with stereo quality. It may require connecting other profiles for managing and controlling playback. Phone book access profile (PBAP): Allows phone book contents to be downloaded from the mobile telephone. Message profile (MAP): It allows short messages (SMS) to be downloaded and synchronised.

176

Data transfer

Data transfer

SEAT CONNECT

Introduction

To use it, SEAT CONNECT must first be activa- ted online by entering into a SEAT CONNECT contract with SEAT, S.A. and is subject to a temporary use limitation depending on the country.

Both the SEAT CONNECT service portfolios offered by SEAT and individual services can be modified, cancelled, deactivated, reacti- vated, renamed and extended, even without prior notification.

In https://my.seat you can create the user account, see the description of services and more information.

The execution and availability of the SEAT CONNECT services and service portfolios may vary depending on the country, as well as the vehicle, its equipment and connectivi- ty.

Connectivity statuses

(white) Full connectivity, all services active

(grey) Limited connectivity, some services may not be available.

no icon No connectivity, no services availa- ble.

SEAT CONNECT's voice recognition or search technology does not recognise or offer re- sults for all words.

There are SEAT CONNECT services for which registration is mandatory and others for which it is not mandatory.

Description of services Before running SEAT CONNECT services, read and take into account the description of the corresponding services. Descriptions are updated non-periodically and are available online at https://my.seat.

Always use the most up-to-date version of the corresponding service description.

WARNING In areas with insufficient mobile phone and GPS coverage, neither emergency calls or phone calls can be made, and data cannot be transmitted. Change location if possi- ble.

CAUTION The vehicle may be damaged by factors outside the control of SEAT, S.A. These damaged can include: Misuse of mobile terminals Data loss during transmission. Unsuitable or defective third party appli- cations. Malicious software on data storage devi- ces, computers, tablets or mobile phones.

Services portfolio

The initial service allocation shown here cor- responds to the third generation of SEAT CONNECT services and represents the maxi- mum services portfolio. The maximum possi- ble portfolio is only available on some vehicle models. During the useful life of the vehicle, you can change the assignment shown here.

After activating the services management in the infotainment system you can check if the vehicle has services and what they are.

In some countries and in the event of a con- tract renewal, the services offered may be combined differently than indicated here. They may also vary depending on the year of production of the vehicle. The services men- tioned correspond to the third generation of SEAT CONNECT.

177

Infotainment system

SEAT CONNECT services and functions that do not require activation The following services also work without the activation of SEAT CONNECT:

Public emergency call service. Privacy mode. Legal.

SEAT CONNECT services The SEAT CONNECT services are: Private emergency call Public emergency call Roadside assistance call Customer support Service appointment planning Online system update Customisation Activating SEAT CONNECT Private mode (deactivation of services) Delete user / Reset factory settings Remote independent heating Remote opening Horn and turn signals Vehicle status incl. doors and lights Driving data Vehicle status report Anti-theft alarm warning

Zone warning Speed warning Online map update Search for points of interest Petrol stations Online traffic information Parking lots Online infotainment system update Online route calculation Information on risks Dictation Natural voice control for destinations and addresses Online radio Online media Online route import Online destination import Remote auxiliary ventilation Parking position Privacy mode Legal

SEAT CONNECT services for hybrid vehi- cles Available only in electric and hybrid vehicles.

Remote air conditioning Electrical power manager

Departure times plus all SEAT CONNECT services in the pre- vious section page 178.

SEAT CONNECT individual options In-Car Applications. These applications can be purchased and installed directly in the infotainment system through the In-Car store. Full Link. Data package. Pay per use data rates for the use of online functions, for example, 2 GB per month.

Note The public emergency call service is available regardless of whether the info- tainment system is logged in. Customisation and purchase of In-Car applications require logging into infotain- ment system, but the activation of the vehi- cle in a SEAT CONNECT account is not nec- essary.

Activation of SEAT CONNECT and S- PIN

Activating SEAT CONNECT The following steps are necessary for the ac- tivation of SEAT CONNECT (including regis- tration):

178

Data transfer

Create a user account at https://my.seat or directly through the infotainment system in the User Management menu. Place the SEAT CONNECT order and acti- vate it. Add the vehicle to your user account. Prove ownership. Prove your identity. It is only necessary if you are to run SEAT CONNECT services rele- vant to security. You can activate it at https://my.seat or di- rectly through the infotainment system. To activate it through the infotainment system, proceed as follows:

HOME > Manage users > Become pri- mary user. MENU > Settings > SEAT Connect > Register

Follow the rest of the indications and the in- formation shown in the infotainment system. During activation, you may be asked to cre- ate an S-PIN.

Update option

9.2 Infotainment yes

6.5" Infotainment yes

SEAT CONNECT portal yes

SEAT CONNECT application yes

9.2"

6.5"

More information at https://my.seat/faqs.

S-PIN The S-PIN is a sequence of several digits, which can be selected when completed the SEAT CONNECT registration.

When creating the S-PIN, avoid easy-to- guess number sequences and known dates of birth. You can change the S-PIN in the SEAT CONNECT user account in Account set- tings.

The S-PIN is necessary, for example, to pro- tect your user profile or to run a SEAT CON- NECT service relevant to the security of your vehicle.

You must manage this S-PIN with absolute confidentiality. If you reveal the S-PIN to third parties, for security reasons you must change it immediately.

Ownership and identity accredita- tion

Depending on the Infotainment system, the ownership accreditation method will be the 2-key method or the registration code meth- od.

9.2 Infotainment system To become a main user and thus prove own- ership of the vehicle, you need both of the ve- hicles physical keys. Ownership accredita- tion takes place in the vehicle during registra- tion or, if you already have a SEAT CONNECT user account, you must log in through the in- fotainment system and then go to Manage users

Switch on the ignition and the infotainment system. In the infotainment system, register in SEAT CONNECT. Or: open the menu Manage users > Set- tings > Become primary user and follow the instructions. Press the unlock button on the first vehicle key. Press the unlock button on the second vehi- cle key.

6.5" Infotainment System To become the main user and therefore ac- credit ownership of the vehicle, you will need the registration code found on the SEAT Web Portal and in the APP after linking the vehicle to your account (My Garage > Add Vehicle > Accept terms and conditions and SEAT privacy policy). Ownership is accredited in- side the vehicle. Go to Vehicle settings > SEAT CONNECT > Registration and enter

179

Infotainment system

the registration code shown on the Web Por- tal or in the App.

Once the infotainment system has processed the orders by radiofrequency, the accredita- tion of the ownership will have been comple- ted. You can control the current status in the SEAT CONNECT portal.

How is ownership accredited?

9.2 Infotainment 2-Key method.

6.5" Infotainment Registration code

SEAT CONNECT portal No, it is not possible

SEAT CONNECT appli- cation

No, it is not possible

Identity accreditation (SEAT Ident) Identity accreditation must be done before you can use SEAT CONNECT services that are relevant to security, such as the Remote Opening service. Identity accreditation can be done in two ways:

In person at the SEAT dealership. You can find more information about SEAT Ident on the SEAT CONNECT portal at https://my.seat.

Legal provisions

During the use of SEAT CONNECT services, information is transferred and processed on- line through the vehicle. Such data can also provide (at least indirectly) information about the driver in question, for example, driving be- haviour and location. As a contracting party in the SEAT CONNECT contract with SEAT, S.A., you must ensure that when your vehicle is used by other drivers (for example, family or friends), data protection and personal rights are respected. Therefore, you must inform drivers in advance that the vehicle transfers and receives data online, and that you can access such data.

Not taking into account this obligation to in- form, can infringe certain rights of the occu- pants.

Users can manage data sending and trans- fers through the privacy mode at any time. More information at: https://my.seat/faq.

Follow-up services: ask all occupants The follow-up services need geographical and vehicle data to determine whether the vehicle is being used within defined speed ranges, where it has been parked or if it is be- ing used in an established geographical area. This information is displayed on the SEAT CONNECT portal and in the SEAT CONNECT app.

Therefore, before moving off, ask all the vehi- cle occupants if they agree with the activa- ted services. If they do not, deactivate the service in question (if possible) or do not al- low the occupants to use the vehicle.

GPS tracking: marking If the vehicle has a factory-assembled con- trol unit that transmits the its current geo- graphical position and speed, the vehicle usually has this GPS marking (e.g., on the roof console). The absence of the marking on the vehicle does not guarantee that the control unit does not transmit the vehicles current geographical position and speed.

Personal information SEAT protects your personal data and only uses them, as long as the law allows it or you have given your consent on the occasion of a use. You will find detailed information on data processing in relation to SEAT CONNECT services in the Privacy Policy, which you can access in its corresponding current version on the SEAT website.

Permanent transfer of the vehicle If another person has left you the vehicle for permanent use (for example, if you buy a used vehicle), SEAT CONNECT may already be activated and the previous user still has

180

Data transfer

the possibility of accessing the data regis- tered through SEAT CONNECT and control certain functions of your vehicle.

In the infotainment system you can check if your vehicle is assigned to a person as the main user. In this case, you can register your- self as the main user of the vehicle and thus automatically delete the previous main user. Alternatively, through the infotainment sys- tem you can directly and permanently delete the previous user as the main user, as well as put the vehicle in offline mode and thus limit both the communication of your vehicle with the SEAT, S.A. data server and the processing of personal and vehicle data.

Deactivating SEAT CONNECT serv- ices

The following functions are available in the infotainment system to deactivate and acti- vate SEAT CONNECT services:

Central deactivation or activation Individual deactivation or activation

You can rerun the corresponding services af- ter cancelling their deactivation in the info- tainment system.

Note The services required by law and their data transmission, such as the public emergen- cy call system, cannot be disconnected or deactivated.

Faults

Even if the prerequisites for the use of SEAT CONNECT services are met, there may be factors beyond the control of SEAT, S.A. that interfere with the execution of such services or prevent them. These may be specifically:

Maintenance, repair, deactivation, software update and technical expansion of telecom- munication equipment, satellites, servers and data banks. Change of the mobile telephony standard for the transmission of mobile data by the tel- ecommunications service provider, for exam- ple, from UMTS to EDGE or GPRS. Disconnection of an existing mobile phone standard by the telecommunications service provider. Interference, disturbance or interruption in the reception of the mobile phone and GPS signal due to aspects such as high-speed driving, solar storms, meteorological influen- ces, topography, blocking equipment and the intensive use of mobile phones in the radio cells in question.

When in areas with zero or insufficient mo- bile telephony or GPS signal. Also, for exam- ple, in tunnels, confined areas between very tall buildings, garages, underpasses, moun- tains and valleys. External information from third party sup- plies available with limitations, incomplete or incorrect, e.g. representations of maps. Countries and regions where SEAT CON- NECT is not offered.

Service management

Open the settings in Users and go to Privacy settings and services. In vehicles equipped with the 9.2 Infotainment, it is accessed from Users > Settings > Private Mode (deactiva- tion of services). In vehicles equipped with the 8.25 Infotainment it is accessed from Settings > SEAT Connect > Privacy set- tings and services.

Check which SEAT CONNECT services are currently available in the vehicle. The number of SEAT CONNECT services that are enabled or disabled. Activate or deactivate SEAT CONNECT services.

More information at https://my.seat.

181

Infotainment system

Privacy and Services Settings SEAT CONNECT services can be activated and deactivated individually. To do this, just check the box corresponding to the service you want to activate or deactivate. Use the privacy mode option if you want to deacti- vate all of the services at the same time.

Privacy mode Allows you to deactivate or activate the serv- ices depending on the selected privacy level.

Tracking

Share location. Main users and co- users can view position data on the SEAT CONNECT portal or app.

Location

Use location. Position, vehicle, and user data are used for services.

Personal

No location. Only the vehicle data and user data are used for services.

Incognito

Maximum privacy. Your services are disabled. Only services required for legal reasons use data.

Setting options are not available in all mar- kets or in all vehicle models.

Note If you deactivate each and every SEAT CONNECT service, the OCU may continue to transmit data.

Full Link

Introduction

With Full Link it is possible to view and use the contents and functions that are shown on the mobile phone device on the infotainment screen.

To do this, the mobile phone device must be connected with the infotainment system through a USB interface.

Some technologies can also be used by Wireless Full Link through the Bluetooth in- terface and a Wi-Fi connection.

The following technologies may be availa- ble: Apple CarPlay Apple CarPlay Wireless Android Auto Android Auto Wireless MirrorLink

The availability of the technologies that Full Link includes depends on the country and the mobile phone device used.

You will find more information on the SEAT website (www.seat.com).

Access the Full Link main menu Browsing the Full Link main menu depends on the infotainment system used.

View : click on Full link View : click on Menu > Full Link OR: press APP.

Configure Wireless Full Link In order to use Wireless Full Link, you must first pair the mobile phone device with the info- tainment system. To do this, proceed as fol- lows:

Connect a mobile phone device for the first time. Unlock the mobile phone device. Enable Wi-Fi reception and Bluetooth on the mobile phone device. Connect the mobile phone device to the in- fotainment system using a USB cable or via Bluetooth. Access the Full Link main menu, unless it appears automatically. Select the mobile phone device and the technology you want. Confirm authorisation inquiries on the mo- bile phone device to grant the necessary au- thorisations to the infotainment system. Disconnect the USB connection and con- nect with the infotainment system again via

182

Data transfer

Wi-Fi or Bluetooth. Wireless Full Link is now configured.

The pairing has concluded. The connected mobile phone device can also use Wireless Full Link from now on without the USB con- nection.

If pop-up menus are rejected during the con- nection process, Wireless Full Link will not be available. In this case, SEAT recommends re- moving the devices in both the iPhone set- tings and the infotainment system, and re- starting the connection process.

WARNING The use of applications while driving can distract your attention from the traffic. Any distraction affecting the driver in any way can lead to an accident and cause injuries. Always drive as carefully and responsibly as possible.

WARNING Any applications that are not suitable or execute incorrectly may cause damage to the vehicle, accidents and serious injuries. Protect the mobile phone device and its applications from inappropriate use. Never carry out modifications to the ap- plications. Follow instructions in the instruction manual for the mobile phone device.

CAUTION SEAT cannot be held liable for any damage caused to the vehicle as a result of the use of applications that are of poor quality or are defective, the inadequate program- ming of the applications, the insufficient coverage of the network, the loss of data during transmission or the improper use of mobile phone devices.

Note Wireless Full Link may not be compatible with all technologies. Wireless Full Link (Android Auto and Ap- ple CarPlay ) is disabled in countries whose radio frequency regulations do not allow it to operate.

Applications (apps)

With SEAT Full Link, the display of the con- tents of SEAT applications and other provid- ers installed on mobile phone devices can be transferred to the infotainment screen.

In the case of third-party applications, there may be compatibility problems.

Applications, their use and the necessary mobile phone connection may be pay per use.

The offer of applications can be varied and designed for a vehicle or a specific country. The content and volume of applications, as well as the companies that offer them, may vary. Some applications also depend on the availability of third-party services.

It cannot be guaranteed that all the applica- tions offered will work on all mobile phone devices or with all their operating systems.

The applications offered by SEAT can be modified, cancelled, deactivated, reactivated and extended without prior notification.

To avoid distracting the driver while driving, only certified applications can be used.

Full Link symbols and settings

To show more information To open the Full Link settings menu

Apple CarPlay

In order to use Apple CarPlay, the following requirements must be met: The iPhone must be compatible with Ap- ple CarPlay. Voice control (Siri ) must be active on the iPhone.

183

Infotainment system

Apple CarPlay must be active without limitations in the iPhone settings. The iPhone must be connected to the in- fotainment system via a USB connection. On- ly USB connections with data transmission are suitable for the use of Apple CarPlay. The USB cable used must be an original Apple cable.

Apple CarPlay Wireless: Bluetooth and Wi-Fi must also be activate on the iPhone.

Establish connection When you first connect an iPhone, follow the instructions on the infotainment system screen and on the iPhone .

The requirements must be met to use Apple CarPlay.

Launch Apple CarPlay: Press HOME > Full Link to access the Full Link main menu. OR: press APP to access the Full Link main menu. Press Apple CarPlay to establish a con- nection with the iPhone.

Disconnecting On the Apple CarPlay mode, press the SEAT icon to access the Full Link main menu. Press to interrupt the active connection.

The representation of function buttons on the screen may vary.

Special characteristics During an active Apple CarPlay connection, the following characteristics are applicable: Bluetooth connections between the iPhone and the infotainment system are not possible. If there is an active Bluetooth connection, it is automatically interrupted. The phone functions are only available through Apple CarPlay. The functions de- scribed for the Infotainment system are not available. The connected iPhone cannot be used as a multimedia device in the Media main menu. It is not possible to use the built-in naviga- tion system and the Apple CarPlay naviga- tion system at the same time. The last route started interrupts the one that was previously active. Depending on the infotainment system you use, on the instrument panel screen you can view data from the Telephone mode. The instrument panel screen does not dis- play any indication to turn. With the multifunction steering wheel you can accept or reject incoming calls, as well as end an ongoing telephone conversation.

Voice control Press briefly to start voice control using the infotainment system. Press this button for a long time to start voice control (Siri) of the connected iPhone.

Note The availability of technologies depends on the country and may vary. You will find information about technical requirements, compatible iPhones, certi- fied applications and their availability on the SEAT (www.seat.com) and Apple Car- Play websites, or at SEAT dealerships.

Android Auto

Requirements for Android Auto In order to use Android Auto, the following requirements must be met: The mobile phone device, called smart- phone from here on, has to be compatible with Android Auto. The smartphone must have an Android Au- to application installed. The smartphone has to be connected through the USB connection with data trans- mission with the infotainment system.

184

Data transfer

The USB cable used must be an original ca- ble provided by the smartphone manufactur- er.

Android Auto Wireless: Bluetooth and Wi-Fi also have to be activated on the device.

Establish connection When you first connect a smartphone, follow the instructions on the infotainment system screen and on the smartphone.

The requirements must be met to use Android Auto.

Launch Android Auto: Press HOME > Full Link to access the Full Link main menu OR: press APP to access the Full Link main menu. Press Android Auto to establish a connec- tion with the smartphone.

Disconnecting In Android Auto mode, press Exit to access the Full Link main menu. Press to interrupt the active connection.

Special characteristics During an active Android Auto connection, the following characteristics are applicable: An active Android Auto device can be connected at the same time via Bluetooth (HFP profile) with the infotainment system. It is possible to use the phones functions through Android Auto. If the Android Auto device is connected at the same time via Bluetooth with the infotainment system, the telephone function of the infotainment can also be used. An active Android Auto device cannot be used as a multimedia device in the Media main menu. It is not possible to use the built-in naviga- tion system and the Android Auto navigation system at the same time. The last route star- ted interrupts the one that was previously ac- tive. On the instrument panel screen you can view data from the Telephone mode. The instrument panel screen does not dis- play any indication to turn or the Media mode. With the multifunction steering wheel you can accept or reject incoming calls, as well as end an ongoing telephone conversation.

voice control Press briefly to start voice control using the infotainment system. Press this button for a long time to start voice control on the connected smartphone.

Note The availability of technologies depends on the country and may vary. You will find information about technical requirements, compatible mobile phone devices, certified applications and their availability on the SEAT (www.seat.com) and Android Auto websites, or at SEAT dealerships.

MirrorLink

Requirements for MirrorLink In order to use MirrorLink, the following re- quirements must be met: The mobile device must be compatible with MirrorLink. The mobile phone device must be connec- ted to the infotainment system via a USB con- nection that is suitable for data transmission. The USB cable used must be an original ca- ble provided by the mobile phone device manufacturer.

185

Infotainment system

Depending on the mobile phone device used, a Car-Mode application that is suitable for using MirrorLink must be installed.

Establish connection When you first connect a mobile phone de- vice, follow the instructions on the infotain- ment system screen and on the mobile phone device.

The requirements must be met to use Mirror- Link.

Launch MirrorLink: Press HOME > Full Link to access the Full Link main menu. OR: press APP to access the Full Link main menu. Press to establish the connection with the mobile phone device.

Disconnecting In the MirrorLink mode, press the APP icon to access the Full Link main menu. OR: press to access the MirrorLink main menu. Press to interrupt the active connection.

Special characteristics During an active MirrorLink connection, the following characteristics are applicable: An active MirrorLink device can be con- nected to the infotainment system at the same time via Bluetooth. If the MirrorLink device is connected to the infotainment system via Bluetooth, the tele- phone function of the infotainment system can be used. You cannot use an active MirrorLink de- vice as a multimedia device in the Media main menu. On the instrument panel screen you can view data from the Telephone mode. The instrument panel screen does not dis- play any indication to turn or the Media mode. With the multifunction steering wheel you can accept or reject incoming calls, as well as end an ongoing telephone conversation.

Function buttons Function buttons and their function:

Return the Full Link main menu. Here you can end the MirrorLink connection, connect another mobile phone device or select another technology. Press to close the open apps. Then press the apps to be closed or the Close all

APP

function button to close all the open ap- plications. Press to display the mobile phone device screen on the infotainment system screen. To open the MirrorLink settings. Press to return to the MirrorLink main menu.

Note You will find information about technical re- quirements, compatible mobile phone de- vices, certified applications and their avail- ability on the SEAT (www.seat.com) and MirrorLink websites, or at SEAT dealer- ships.

WLAN access point*

Introduction 3 Not available for model: Media System

The infotainment system can be used to share a WLAN connection with up to 8 devi- ces page 187, Configuration for sharing a connection over WLAN.

The infotainment system can also use the WLAN hotspot of an external device to pro- vide Internet to the devices connected to the hotspot (WLAN client) page 187.

186

Data transfer

Note Data transmission may incur charges. Due to the high volume of data exchanged, SEAT recommends the use of a flat rate tar- iff for data transmission. Mobile phone op- erators can provide the relevant informa- tion. The exchange of data packages may generate additional costs, depending on your mobile phone rate, particularly if you are abroad (for example, roaming rates).

Configuration for sharing a con- nection over WLAN

Establishing the connection with the wire- less network (WLAN) Press the HOME > button. Activate the wireless network. To do so, press the WLAN function button. Activate the wireless network (WLAN) on the device that is to be connected. If necessary, refer to the manufacturers instruction man- ual. Activate the mobile device assignment in the infotainment system. To do so, press the Enable WLAN connection button and acti- vate the checkbox. Enter and confirm the network key dis- played on the device.

The following settings can also be made on the menu Share connection:

Security level: WPA2 encryption automati- cally generates a network key. Network key: Network key automatically generated. Press the function button to man- ually change the network key. The network key must have a minimum of 8 characters and a maximum of 63. SSID: WLAN Network name (maximum of 32 characters).

The wireless (WLAN) connection is establish- ed. To complete the connection, it may be necessary to enter other data into the device.

Repeat this process to connect other devices.

Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) 3 This depends on the equipment and the coun- try in question.

Wi-Fi Protected Setup can be used to create a ciphered local wireless network quickly and simply.

Establish the connection with the wireless network (WLAN). Press the WPS button on the WLAN router until the warning light on the router starts flashing. If the WLAN router does not support

WPS the network must be configured man- ually. OR: Press and hold the WLAN button on the WLAN router until the WLAN light on the router starts flashing. Press the WPS button on the WLAN device. The wireless (WLAN) connection is establish- ed.

Repeat this process to connect other devices.

Configure Internet access

The infotainment system can use the WLAN hotspot of an external device to establish an Internet connection.

Establishing the connection with the wire- less network (WLAN) Activate and check the wireless hotspot on the external device. If necessary, refer to the manufacturers instruction manual. Press the HOME > button; OR access the Media mode and press the Settings menu. Press on the menu WLAN > Enable WLAN connection and check the verification box. Press the Find function button and select the device you want from the list. If necessary, enter the network key of the device in the infotainment system and con- firm with OK.

187

Infotainment system

Manual settings: To manually enter the network settings of an external (WLAN) device.

The wireless (WLAN) connection is establish- ed. To complete the connection, it may be necessary to enter other data into the device.

Note Due to the large number of devices on the market, it is not possible to guarantee fault- free operation of all functions.

188

Infotainment operation

Infotainment operation

voice control*

Introduction

The voice control works both online* and off- line taking into account what is indicated in page 189, Languages available depend- ing on the market. In online* mode, com- mands are recorded more accurately, as more data is available.

Voice control understands questions and ex- pressions without having to learn commands. Commands can be formulated freely and can be colloquial. You will find proposals for commands in the infotainment system.

Functions are reduced in offline mode.

Loud noises inside or outside the vehicle can cause malfunctions, as well as confusing phrases and answers.

Languages available depending on the market Online* and offline: German, American Eng- lish, British English, French, Italian, Spanish and Czech. These languages have advanced functions such as Online Commands, air con- ditioning control, natural interaction, etc.

The other languages of the infotainment sys- tem do not offer Online Commands, air con- ditioning control or natural interaction.

Requirements Online* and offline: voice control with the corresponding infotainment mounted on the vehicle. Online* current SEAT CONNECT Plus con- tract active.

Note Voice control only recognises commands in the language that is set in the infotain- ment system. Test the voice control with the vehicle stopped before starting to move to famili- arise yourself with its operation.

Activation word and commands

Voice control activation words If you have connected the voice control via the activation word, the connected infotain- ment responds with How can I help you?. It then scans the words spoken in the vehicle after the activation word.

Voice control starts when the infotainment recognises the activation word.

Connect and disconnect the activation word In HOME press Settings > Voice control > Activate/ deactivate activation word.

Activation word: Hola Hola

Commands For voice control to recognise commands re- liably, bear in mind the tips for the commands to work properly.

Tips for the commands to work correctly: Pronounce clearly. Confusing commands are not recognised. Talk in a normal tone of voice. Speak a little louder if you are driving at high speed. Avoid outside noises. Open windows and doors can interfere with voice control. Avoid other secondary noises, such as con- versations in the vehicle. Do not direct the air flow from the outlets towards the microphone or the interior lining of the roof. Do not use a very strong accent or dialec- tal. Do not make long pauses.

Voice control is active and recognises the words pronounced.

189

Infotainment system

Note When the activation word is disconnec- ted, the infotainment system cannot be ac- tivated by means of the activation word. Voice control is still available via the button on the multifunction steering wheel. Availability depends on country and equipment. Depending on the content of the phone book and to ensure reliable recognition of the names of the phone book, it may be useful to change the order of the first and last name of the contact in question.

Start and stop voice control

Depending on the equipment, you can start voice control in different ways.

Start voice control Voice control activation: say the word that activates voice control. Multifunction steering wheel: press the voice control button .

The voice control ends automatically, if you use infotainment functions, if the parking sys- tem is activated or by incoming calls.

In some cases you can also start voice con- trol of the connected mobile phone device, by pressing and holding the voice control button.

Manually ending voice control Voice control can be cancelled with the Can- cel command.

Multifunction steering wheel: press the voice control button twice in a row, or a long press.

190

Infotainment operation

Radio/Multimedia

Radio mode

Fig. 150 Schematic representation: Radio view

In Radio mode you can tune in the available radio stations in different frequency bands and memorise your favourites on the preset buttons to access them quickly.

The types of reception and frequency bands available depend on the equipment and the country. In certain countries, frequency bands may stop broadcasting or not be available again.

Access the RADIO menu Press HOME > Fig. 150.

Access the settings Press HOME > > .

Online* functions in Radio mode Online* functions in Radio mode are only available under the following conditions:

SEAT CONNECT or SEAT CONNECT Plus equipment. You have an active SEAT CONNECT user account. Add the vehicle is assigned to your user ac- count.

You have a corresponding data package acquired from the In-Car store or have a data volume for your own mobile phone device via Wi-Fi access point.

Note For streaming services you need to have an account with the provider in question. Radio stations are responsible for the content of the information they transmit. Additional electrical equipment connected to the vehicle can cause interference in the reception of the radio signal and noise in the speakers.

191

Infotainment system

Foil or metal-coated stickers attached to the windows may affect reception on vehi- cles with a window aerial.

Radio equipment and symbols

The functions, as well as the types of recep- tion and frequency bands available depend on the equipment and the country.

AM* tuner. Dual FM receiver (diversity antenna). Summarised FM station list. Fusion of DAB* and FM stations into one list. Fusion of all stations stored in preset but- tons into one list. Maximum 36 favourite sta- tions. Station logos. DAB presentation (slideshow). Images that are emitted sequentially. Online* radio.

Universal symbols in Radio mode To select the desired AM frequency band.

To select the desired FM/DAB fre- quency band.

To select the type of Online* radio reception.

AM

FM/DAB

Online radio*

Next to the name of the station, monitor- ing of active traffic information stations (TP).

Symbols on the FM/DAB frequency band To display the frequency band for man- ual selection of the FM frequency. Only possible when the summary station list is disconnected. DAB not available. DAB stations support presentations (sli- deshow).

Symbols on the AM frequency band Manually updating the station list. To display the frequency band for man- ual selection of the AM frequency.

Menus in Online* radio mode Show station selection. Open text search. Show the last online radio stations heard. Show the 100 most played radio stations and podcasts. Show available online radio podcasts.

Show online radio stations, grouped by country. Show online radio stations by the de- sired language.

TP

Show online radio stations whose pro- gramme belongs to the desired musical genre.

Selecting, tuning and saving a sta- tion

Select the frequency band Before selecting a station you have to select a frequency band or a type of reception. Dif- ferent stations are available depending on the frequency band selected or the type of reception.

The types of reception and frequency bands available depend on the equipment and the country.

Select the frequency band or type of re- ception: AM*, FM/DAB, FM (for devices that do not have DAB), Online* radio.

Search and select a station You can select radio stations in different ways. The options vary depending on the fre- quency band and the type of reception.

Select via the frequency band (AM and FM) Activate the frequency band.

192

Infotainment operation

Click on the cursor, scroll through the fre- quency band and release it when you reach the frequency band you want. OR: press on a point on the frequency band. The cursor will automatically jump to the corresponding frequency.

The station of the set frequency is tuned.

Select from the station list (AM and FM/DAB) The station list shows the stations that are currently tunable. In the AM frequency band, you may have to update the station list if you are no longer in the area where you last ac- cessed the station list. In the FM/DAB fre- quency band, the station list is automatically updated.

Open the station list Press the station you want.

The selected station is tuned. In the case of FM/DAB and if the station is available, the best quality reception is automatically selec- ted.

Search and filter stations (Online* radio) In Online Radio mode, stations can be filtered by categories and can be searched by text.

Open the station list.

Select the category by which the stations are to be filtered. OR: press to start the text search. The in- put field is displayed. Enter the name of the station you want. The list of the stations found is updated while en- tering the text. Press the station you want.

The selected station is tuned.

Search in SCAN mode (AM and FM/DAB) In SCAN mode the stations are automatically tuned in a sequential manner and each of them is played for approx. 5 seconds.

To start the SCAN mode, under Settings press SCAN.

SCAN mode starts and the station currently tuned in is shown on the screen. Next to it is a SCAN function button.

To select a station press SCAN.

SCAN mode stops and the station is tuned. The SCAN function button is hidden.

Storing the station on the preset buttons You can store up to 36 stations of different frequency bands and reception types as fa- vourites using the preset buttons.

Tune the station you want.

Access the preset buttons. Press the preset button and keep it pressed until the station is stored. OR: press the station on the station list and keep it pressed. The preset buttons are dis- played. Press the preset button.

The station is stored in the selected preset button.

If a station was already stored in the preset button, it is overwritten with the new station.

Special functions in Radio mode

Traffic information (TP) The TP function monitors the announcements of a station with traffic information and auto- matically reproduces them in the Radio mode or in the multimedia playback that is active. To do this, you have to be able to tune into a station with traffic information.

Some stations without their own traffic infor- mation support the TP function by broad- casting traffic information from other stations (EON).

In the AM frequency band or in the Multime- dia mode, a station with traffic information in the background is automatically tuned while

193

Infotainment system

it is possible to tune into a station with traffic information.

If no station with traffic information can be tuned in, the device automatically searches for stations with tunable traffic information.

Stations with traffic information are not avail- able in all countries.

Activating and deactivating the TP func- tion In Radio mode or Multimedia mode, press Settings > Traffic station (TP).

Online* radio Online radio is a type of reception for Internet radio stations and podcasts that are inde- pendent of AM, FM and DAB. Thanks to Inter-

net transmission, reception is not limited to the region.

Online radio is only available through the In- ternet connection of the active infotainment system. The use of online radio can generate expenses due to the transmission of data from the Internet.

In Online radio mode, press and set the au- dio quality to high or low to tune the online ra- dio.

Station logos In the case of some frequency bands, station logos may already be pre-installed in the in- fotainment system.

If in the FM/DAB frequency band settings the automatic selection of station logos is ac- tivated, station logos are automatically as- signed to the stations.

In the Online radio mode, the infotainment system accesses the station logos of the on- line database and automatically assigns them to the stations

Assign station logos manually In FM/DAB mode, press Station logos. Press on the icon and then select the station to which a station logo is to be as- signed. Select the station logo. If desired, repeat the same process with other stations. OR, via the menu Settings > Station logos.

194

Infotainment operation

Media Mode

Fig. 151 Schematic representation: Multimedia view

In Media mode you can play multimedia files from data media and streaming services through the infotainment system.

Depending on the equipment, the following data media can be used:

USB storage support (for example, a USB stick, a mobile phone connected via USB). Bluetooth device (for example, a mobile phone or a tablet).

Depending on the equipment, the following types of multimedia files can be played:

Audio files. Video files (depends on the system).

You can also use streaming services. The availability of streaming services depends on the equipment and the country.

To use streaming services you need to have your own user account in the streaming serv- ice in question.

Access the MEDIA menu Press HOME > Fig. 151.

Access the settings Press HOME > > .

Limitations and indications of data media Data media may not work if they have been exposed to high temperatures or have been

damaged. Please bear in mind the manufac- turers indications.

Quality differences between data media pro- duced by different manufacturers can cause multimedia playback malfunctions.

Incorrect configuration on a data media may cause the data media to be unreadable.

Playlists only specify a playback order and refer to the storage location of the multime- dia files within the folder structure. In a play- list there are no multimedia files saved. To play a playlist, multimedia files have to be found in the storage places of the data media to which the playlist refers.

195

Infotainment system

Equipment features. Audio, multimedia and connectivity: Multimedia playback and control via Blue- tooth. Audio playback in these formats: AAC, ALAC, AVI, FLAC, MP3, MP4, WMA. Video playback in these formats: MPEG-1 and MPEG-2 (.mpg, .mpeg), ISO MPEG4, DivX 3, 4 and 5 Xvid (.avi), ISO MPEG4 H.264 (.mp4, .m4v, .mov), Windows Media Video 10 (.wmv, .asf). Playlists on any type of device. Multimedia streaming (online*). Multimedia search.

Note SEAT assumes no liability for any deteriora- tion or loss of files on data storage devices.

Select and play a multimedia source

Select multimedia source Before playing multimedia files you must first connect a multimedia source.

To use streaming services you must be con- nected to the Internet.

Connect an external multimedia source.

Select the connected media source to be used for playback.

Playing audio and video files You can search and play multimedia files from an available multimedia source in differ- ent ways.

Search in the folder structure Multimedia files can be catalogued by cate- gories (for example, album, artist, title). In My media this category view is always dis- played. The classic folder structure of individ- ual USB data media is also found in My me- dia.

Activate the folder structure. The folder structure of the selected multi- media source is displayed. When My media is selected, the categories (music, videos, playlists) and connected multimedia sources are displayed first. Search for the title you want in the folder structure. Or: press to start the text search. The in- put field is displayed. Enter the name of the desired title. The list of the titles found is updated while entering the text. Press the desired title. If at the beginning of the playback your se- lection is in a folder of a multimedia source,

the multimedia files that are in it are also added to the playback. If a playlist is played, all available titles in the playlist are added to the playback. Close your selection with .

Select favourites In favourites you can save titles, music gen- res, artists and albums individually for play- back.

Access favourites . Press the favourite you want.

Depending on your selection, all the titles be- longing to the favourite are added to the playback.

Configure streaming services Depending on the equipment you can use streaming services directly through the info- tainment system. For this you need to have a premium user account of the streaming serv- ice in question and you have to log in with it in the infotainment system. You also need to be connected to the Internet.

Select Streaming as the multimedia source. A list of available streaming services is dis- played. Select the streaming service you want.

196

Infotainment operation

Follow the steps indicated by the infotain- ment system. The streaming service is added to the list of multimedia sources as a new function button.

Save favourites Only multimedia files in My media of the info- tainment system can be saved as favourites. You can save up to a maximum of 30 titles, al- bums, artists and music genres individually as favourites.

Start playback. Access favourites. Tap a favourite that is not assigned. Or: click on an existing favourite and press and hold for approx. 3 seconds. Select from the selection list: Title, Album, Artist, Musical genres.

Playlist.

The selection is saved instead of the previ- ously selected favourite. If the favourite was already assigned, the previously saved fa- vourite is overwritten.

The selectable options in the selection list depend on the data attached to the multime- dia file. If the music genre is not indicated in the music files, for example, you cannot save the music genre as favourite.

If a video file is playing, only that video can be saved as favourite.

Playing entertainment content in the infotainment system

Depending on the infotainment system, vid- eos can be played.

Video mode When in video mode, a video can be played on the infotainment screen if this is stored on a data media, in My media or is sourced from a streaming service. In this case, the video sound is played through the vehicle's speak- ers.

The image is only displayed if the vehicle is stopped. When the vehicle is in motion, the in- fotainment screen turns off. The sound of the video can still be heard.

A stable Internet connection is required for playback from a streaming service. In this case, telephony costs may be generated.

197

Infotainment system

Navigation*

Introduction

Fig. 152 Schematic representation: Navigation view

A global satellite system determines the cur- rent position of the vehicle and the sensors mounted on the vehicle analyse the routes taken. All measured values and possible traf- fic events are compared with the available maps to allow optimal navigation to the des- tination.

Navigation announcements and graphic rep- resentations will guide you to your destina- tion.

Navigation management is carried out on the screen.

Depending on the country, some functions of the infotainment system will not be available

on the screen when travelling above a certain speed. It is not a malfunction, but is due to compliance with legislation.

Navigation announcements Navigation announcements are acoustic indi- cations for driving referred to the current route.

The type and frequency of navigation an- nouncements depend on the driving situation, for example, starting the guide to the destina- tion, driving on the motorway or on a round- about and the settings.

If the exact destination cannot be reached because, for example, it is in a non-digitised area, indications relating to the address and the distance to the destination are displayed on the screen.

During dynamic route guidance, you will re- ceive information about reported traffic con- gestion on the route. An additional navigation announcement is provided if the route is re- calculated due to traffic congestion.

While a navigation announcement is playing, its volume can be adjusted. The following navigation announcements provided will be played with the newly adjusted volume.

198

Infotainment operation

Limitations during navigation If the infotainment system cannot receive da- ta from GPS satellites, for example, in a tunnel or in an underground garage, navigation con- tinues using the vehicle's sensors.

In areas that are not digitised or are only par- tially digitised on the infotainment memory, the infotainment system will still attempt to provide route guidance.

In the case of missing or incomplete naviga- tion data, it may not be possible to determine the exact position of the vehicle. This may mean that navigation is not as precise as usu- al.

Roads and streets are subject to constant change (e.g. new roads, road works, roads closed to traffic, changes to street names and building numbers). If the navigation data is obsolete, this may lead to errors or inaccur- acies during the route guidance.

Managing the navigation map To allow an optimal view, you can also man- age the navigation map with additional finger movements.

Move the map (tip: use your index finger). Move the map with your finger.

Zoom in the view (tip: use your index finger). To increase the view in a certain position, double-click on the map.

Zoom out the view (tip: use your index and middle fingers). Press on the map with both fingers at the same time.

Change view (tip: use your index finger). Press twice on the map and keep your fin- ger pressed on the screen. To zoom out the view of the map, move your finger upwards. To zoom in the view of the map, move your finger downwards.

Change view (tip: use your index and middle fingers). Press on the map with both fingers at the same time and keep them pressed. To zoom out the view of the map, move one finger towards the other. To zoom in the view of the map, move one finger away from the other.

Tilt the view (tip: use your index and middle fingers). Press on the map with both fingers at the same time and horizontal to each other, keep them pressed. To tilt the view of the map forward, move your fingers upwards. To tilt the view of the map backward, move your fingers down- wards.

Rotate view (tip: use your index and middle fingers). Press on the map with both fingers at the same time and keep them pressed. To rotate the map view, turn your fingers clockwise anticlockwise.

Saved data The infotainment system saves certain data, for example, frequent routes and position da- ta, to make the entry of the destination more agile and optimise the route guidance.

Delete saved data Press Settings > Basic function settings > Delete and then OK

WARNING Select the settings, enter the destination and the modifications for navigation only with the vehicle at a standstill.

Note If a detour is passed during route guid- ance, navigation may recalculate the route. The quality of the navigation recommen- dations given by the Infotainment system depends on the navigation data available and any reported traffic congestions.

199

Infotainment system

Navigation announcements are not emit- ted if the sound is muted in the infotainment system.

Navigation functions and symbols

Navigation Navigation functions depend on the equip- ment and country.

Functions Entering destination and route calculation (offline and online*). Indication of two navigation maps at the same time (screen and instrument panel*). Update of online* maps. Predictive navigation. 3D urban maps. Online* traffic information Dynamic POIs (points of interest)

Symbols on the map The buttons and indications depend on the settings and the current driving situation.

Symbols for traffic events and points of inter- est (POIs) are displayed on the map, for ex- ample, petrol stations, train stations or inter- esting stopovers, provided navigation has such data page 203.

Current position Search for destinations. Destinations along the route. Final destination Home address Work address Favourite destinations Additional window with more options. Additional window with route options.

Centre the map on the current position.

Change view: 2D oriented to the north, or 2D oriented to the direction of travel, or 3D to the direction of travel. Information about the current route guidance. Map scale.

Symbols in the additional window To open the additional window, press .

Repeat the last navigation announce- ment. Volume of navigation announcements. Map lighting in Automatic, Day or Night mode. Offer new guidance routes.

|

Other symbols Entering the detailed destination for an address. Search for destinations. Frequent destinations. Last destinations. Favourite destinations Back

Symbols in the route details Current position. Destination of the current guidance.

POI symbols (points of interest) POIs (points of interest) are shown on the map, provided the navigation has said data.

Click on the desired POI (point of interest) to start a route guidance page 201.

Petrol station. Parking lot. Tourist information offices. Train station. Restaurant.

Traffic information. POIs (points of interest) are shown on the map, provided the navigation has said data page 203.

200

Infotainment operation

Click on a traffic event to open an additional window with further details page 203.

Slow traffic.

Traffic jam.

Accident.

Broken down vehicle.

Slippery surface (ice or snow).

Road closed to traffic.

Slippery road hazard.

Danger.

Road works.

Strong wind.

Reduced visibility.

Navigation data

The Infotainment system is equipped with a built-in navigation data memory. Depending on the country, the necessary navigation da- ta may already be pre-installed.

To provide correct route guidance and make the most of the functions offered, the infotain- ment system should be updated on a regular basis.

Using obsolete data may lead to errors dur- ing navigation. Current routes cannot be traced or the route guidances will lead to mistaken destinations.

Ensure navigation data is updated at all times.

Online* updating of navigation data The navigation data of the regions through which you travel frequently is automatically updated in the background if the Internet connection is established and the privacy settings are valid.

With the ignition switched on, the naviga- tion data is updated automatically.

Manual update of navigation data Current navigation data for large regions, for example Western Europe, can be downloa- ded from www.seat.com and stored on USB data devices. Navigation through USB data devices is not possible.

Download the navigation data to a USB da- ta device. Turn on the ignition of the vehicle. Connect the USB data device to the info- tainment system. Navigation data is automat- ically updated in the background.

The map version is displayed in HOME > > System information.

WARNING If you update the navigation data manually while driving, it may cause accidents with serious injuries. Update the navigation data only with the vehicle at a standstill.

Note Automatic update of the navigation data is subject to the privacy settings. In Incogni- to mode, no update is carried out.

Start route guidance

Depending on the country and equipment, different functions are available to enter des- tinations.

The different functions for entering destina- tions are found in the navigation main menu.

Opening the Navigation main menu Press HOME > .

Select the destination and start naviga- tion

Press . Select the desired destination. You can chose from Frequent destinations, Last destinations and Favourite destinations.

1. 2.

201

Infotainment system

OR: press and enter the address in the input screen. OR: detailed address. Press Start.

Frequent destinations The destination synopsis uses recorded data to propose possible destinations.

Select the destination and start naviga- tion

Press and then . Select the desired destination. The route guidance starts automatically.

Quick start: for a quick start, press and hold the desired destination for a few seconds.

Last destinations Navigation saves the last destinations to make them available for a route guidance.

Select the destination and start naviga- tion

Press and then . Press the desired destination. Press Start.

Quick start: for a quick start, press and hold the desired destination for a few seconds.

3.

1. 2.

1. 2. 3.

Favourite destinations Save up to 20 destinations as favourites.

To save a destination as a favourite press in the split screen when entering the destina- tion.

Select the destination and start naviga- tion

Press and then . Press the desired destination. Press Start.

Note Enter the destination as accurately as pos- sible. If you enter a destination incorrectly, the route guidance will not be able to start or it will guide you to an incorrect destina- tion.

Start route guidance by selecting from the map

The navigation map includes active areas at many points that are suitable for entering the destination. To do this, press the desired posi- tion or place on the map. If there is map data at this point, you can start a route guidance.

Whether it is possible to enter the destination through the navigation map depends on the

1. 2. 3.

state of the data and it is not possible for all positions.

To start offroad navigation, press an empty area without position data.

Start navigation Press . Move the view on the map until the desired position can be selected. The navigation map can be used by means of additional finger movements page 199. Press the desired destination on the map. Press Route.

Offroad navigation* Offroad navigation calculates routes to se- lected destination points using unknown da- ta. When a destination point is outside the known roads or position data, navigation finds the route to the next point of the known road and completes the path to the next des- tination point with a direct connection.

Start navigation Move the view on the map until the desired position can be selected. The navigation map can be used by means of additional finger movements page 199. Press on any point on the map without posi- tion data. Press Route.

202

Infotainment operation

Start route guidance using contact details

Start route guidance with the saved address data of a contact. Contacts saved without address data cannot be used for route guid- ance.

Start navigation Press . Press on the contact you want. Press Route.

Note If the address details of a contact are ob- solete, the route guidance will nevertheless take you to the registered address. Check that the contact address is updated.

Traffic information

The infotainment system receives detailed traffic information automatically if the Inter- net connection is established. This informa- tion is shown with symbols and highlighting the road network in colour on the map.

Traffic incidents Traffic incidents, for example, traffic jams or congested traffic, are shown on the naviga- tion map using symbols.

With an active route guidance, traffic inci- dents that are on the current route are shown in the route details. Such traffic incidents can be avoided page 203.

Hazard information Hazard information is shown on the naviga- tion map with symbols in the same way as traffic incidents. In this case, the source of this information is another vehicle that has detec- ted the hazard and has uploaded the infor- mation to the service provider.

The hazards shown are: accident, broken down vehicle and slippery road surface.

Traffic flow indication The navigation map shows traffic flow ac- cording to current traffic events, highlighting the road network in colour.

Orange: Slow traffic. Red: Traffic jam.

Note Traffic information receipt is subject to the privacy settings. In maximum Privacy mode, no traffic information is received. Tracking or Location level setting is neces- sary.

Function descriptions

Route details The route details contain information on all incidents, for example, the starting point, stopovers, traffic events, POIs and destina- tion, provided the navigation has such data.

If you press on an incident, an additional win- dow opens providing more options. The avail- able options depend on the incident and the current settings.

Open and close the route details To open, press | or swipe it.

To close, press | or swipe it.

Edit route guidance To edit route guidance, move the stopovers to the destination in the TripView view.

Hold the desired destination pressed until it is visibly highlighted. Move the destination to the desired posi- tion. Remove your finger from the screen. The route will recalculate.

Avoid traffic incidents The details of the route show the current traf- fic incidents if the navigation has such data.

203

Infotainment system

Avoid traffic incidents by editing route details page 203.

Press on a traffic event. Press on Avoid. The route will recalculate.

Split screen When handling navigation functions, an addi- tional window with other options may open. Possible options depend on the function be- ing used.

Close the additional screen Press on an empty area outside the addi- tional window. OR: press . OR: press Accept.

Functions in the additional window:

Show on map Show what is selected on the map.

Add stopover Add a stopover to the route guid- ance.

Direct route Starts direct route guidance.

Functions in the additional window:

Delete Delete a stopover from the route guidance.

Avoid Avoid traffic jam. The route will re- calculate.

Stopping route guidance

Ends the current route guidance.

Close the additional window.

Add a destination to favourites.

Learn usage pattern When the vehicle is in motion, navigation saves routes and destinations used to auto- matically generate destination proposals. Destinations are learned based on the time of day and the day of the week.

Navigation can propose up to 5 routes at the same time. The proposed routes may be dif- ferent from the routes of the normal route guidance.

If one of the proposed destinations is selec- ted, the guide to that destination is started.

The route guidance follows the selected route until the vehicle deviates from it. In that case, the route is recalculated and takes you back along the most direct path to the initially se- lected destination.

Important traffic jams are taken into account in the route guidance, and are avoided if al- ternative routes are available, provided navi- gation has such data.

You can activate and deactivate the function whenever you want.

Enable and disable learning usage pattern The setting is in the corresponding navigation menu > Basic function settings.

To activate the function, activate Learn us- age pattern. To disable the function, disable Learn us- age pattern. To delete saved data, press Delete usage pattern.

204

Infotainment operation

Telephone interface

Introduction

Fig. 153 Schematic representation: Phone view

You can use the telephone interface to con- nect your mobile to the infotainment system and operate phone functions through it. The sound is played through the vehicle's speak- ers.

You can connect up to two mobile phone de- vices simultaneously to the infotainment sys- tem.

High speeds, poor weather or road conditions and a noisy ambience (even outside of the vehicle), as well as the quality of reception can all affect the quality of a telephone con- versation in the vehicle.

Note As a general rule, pairing a device (for ex- ample, a mobile phone device) is only nec- essary once. You can restore the device connection via Bluetooth or Wi-Fi with the infotainment system whenever you want without having to pair the device again. The availability of some telephone func- tions will depend on the mobile phone con- nected to the infotainment system.

Telephone interface equipment and symbols

Equipment features Hands-free function. Use up to two phones at the same time. Phone book with a maximum of 5,000 con- tacts. SMS functions via Bluetooth*: reading SMS, writing SMS (including templates), SMS playback, message history. Email functions via Bluetooth*: reading email, writing email.

205

Infotainment system

Connection to wireless charging option. Connection to the microphone mounted on the vehicle.

Symbols in the main menu Contacts. List of incoming and outgoing calls. Enter telephone number.

Text messages (SMS and emails).* Telephone interface settings.

Symbols for calls The symbols may be different depending on the infotainment system.

Start a call or bringing it to the fore- ground. End or reject a call. Open contact list. Enter telephone number.

Mute the sound of the hands-free Hold call. Continue call. Start conference call. Pass call to private mode Make an emergency call. Get help in case of breakdown.

Obtain information on the SEAT brand and selected additional services related to traffic and your travel. Voice mail.

Call list symbols To open the call lists, press .

Incoming call. Outgoing call. Missed call. Telephone number (company). Telephone number (private). Mobile telephone number (company).

Mobile telephone number (private). Fax (private). Fax.

Symbols for text messages* The symbols may be different depending on the infotainment system.

To open the text messages, press .

Activate voice control input page 189. Templates for text messages.

Places with special regulations

Switch off the mobile telephone and the tele- phone interface in places with a risk of explo- sion. These places are not always clearly marked. They include, for example:

the vicinity of chemical pipelines and tanks The lower decks of boats and ferries. In the proximity of vehicles that run on liq- uefied gas (such as propane or butane). places where the air is laden with chemi- cals or particles such as flour, dust or metal powder. All other places where the vehicle engine or telephone must be switched off.

WARNING Switch off the mobile phone in areas with a risk of explosion!

Note In areas where special regulations apply or the use of mobile phones is forbidden, it must be switched off at all times. The radi- ation produced by the mobile phone when switched on may interfere with sensitive technical and medical equipment, possibly resulting in malfunction or damage to the equipment.

206

Infotainment operation

Pair, connect and manage

Requirement for pairing:

Bluetooth is activated on the mobile phone device. Bluetooth is activated on the infotainment system. Depending on the mobile device, it will be necessary to have the Bluetooth menu open or activate the Visibility option so that the device is visible from the infotainment system.

Pair a mobile phone device suitable for tel- ephony with the infotainment system to use the telephone interface functions. On the first connection, the mobile phone device is paired with the infotainment system. Doing so saves a user profile page 207.

The pairing can take a few minutes. The func- tions available depend on the mobile phone device used and its operating system.

Pair a mobile phone device Open the list of available Bluetooth devi- ces on the mobile phone device and select the name of the infotainment system. Please note and, if necessary, confirm the messages that appear on the mobile phone device and on the infotainment system. If the pairing was successful, the phone data is saved in the user profile.

Optional: confirm the data transfer mes- sage on the mobile phone device.

Active and passive connection To use the functions of the telephone inter- face, there must be at least one mobile phone device connected to the infotainment system. If there are several mobile phone de- vices connected to the infotainment system, you can switch between active and passive connections. To use the telephone interface with the desired mobile phone device, estab- lish the active connection with the infotain- ment system.

Difference between connection types

Primary The mobile phone device is paired and connected. The functions of the tele- phone interface are performed with the data of said mobile phone device.

Secon- dary

The mobile phone device is paired and connected. Calls can be managed but the phone book, messages or other functions will not be active.

Paired mobile phone devices are stored in the infotainment system, even if they are not cur- rently connected.

Connect a mobile phone device Requirement: the mobile phone device is paired with the infotainment system. Bluetooth is activated on the mobile phone device.

Establish an active connection Requirement: several mobile phone devices are connected to the infotainment system at the same time. Select the desired mobile phone device from the drop-down menu. All other mobile phone devices are automatically in the pas- sive connection.

User profiles For each of the paired mobile phone devices an individual user profile is automatically cre- ated. In the user profile, data from the mobile phone device is stored, for example, contact details or settings. A maximum of four user profiles can be saved in the infotainment sys- tem at the same time.

WARNING If you perform the pairing while driving, it could cause an accident or injury. Perform pairing only with the vehicle at a standstill.

207

Infotainment system

Note In the pairing of some mobile phone devi- ces, a PIN number is shown on the screen of the mobile phone device. Enter that number in the infotainment system to complete the pairing. While the infotainment system is in the Known mobile phones menu, the wireless charging function is disabled. When you exit this menu, the wireless charging func- tion is activated again.

Basic and Comfort Telephony

Depending on the equipment, two types of telephone interface can be used:

Basic telephone interface. Comfort telephone interface.

Basic telephone interface The Basic telephone interface uses the Blue- tooth HFP profile for transmission. This inter- face allows the use of telephone functions through the infotainment system and play- back through the vehicle's speakers.

Comfort telephone interface Like the Basic telephone interface, the Com- fort telephone interface also uses the Blue- tooth HFP profile.

The Comfort phone interface can be equip- ped with the wireless charging function page 209.

In order to use the functions of the wireless charging function, you have to place a suita- ble mobile phone device correctly in the stor- age compartment. The mobile phone device will then connect to the vehicle antenna. This improves the reception and sound quality of calls.

To call

Open the telephone interface Press HOME > .

Make a call Select a phone number to start a call. Differ- ent functions are available for selecting a phone number:

Contacts If a contact has several registered phone numbers you have to select one.

Press and press a number on the list to start the call. OR: press and enter the contact name in the input field to search for it. Press on the contact to start the call.

OR: press a favourite in the telephone inter- face main menu to start the call.

Calls The telephone interface shows the call list of the mobile telephone device. Start a call from the call list.

Press > All and press a number on the list to start the call. OR: press and filter the call list entries (for example, missed calls or dialled num- bers). In filtered list, press a number to start the call.

Dial Manually enter a phone number to start a call. While entering the phone number, con- tacts that match that number are shown on the infotainment screen.

Press and enter the phone number. Press to start the call

The last call is dialled by pressing and hold- ing the button on the multifunction steering wheel.

Send messages*

Depending on the mobile phone device and the infotainment system used, you can send

208

Infotainment operation

and receive SMS and e-mails through the tel- ephone interface.

Send an SMS Press > Text message > Enter new message and enter the message on the screen. Enter the contact you want in the search bar. To send the message press OK.

Send an e-mail Press > E-mail > Enter new message and enter the message on the screen. Enter the contact you want in the search bar. To send the message press OK.

Phone book, favourites and speed dial buttons

In the first connection of a telephone with the infotainment system, the phone book is saved in the infotainment system. It may be neces- sary to confirm the data transmission on the mobile phone.

Each time the phone is reconnected, the phone book is updated.

If conference calls are supported, the phone book can be accessed during a call. If there is a saved image for a contact, it can be dis- played in the list next to the entry.

Favourites A speed dial button can be assigned to a phone book favourite up to a maximum of six. If there is a registered photo saved to the contact, it is shown on the speed dial button.

All speed dial buttons have to be manually edited and will be assigned to a user profile.

Assign the speed dial button In the Favourites menu, press the + button, then open the phone book to select a con- tact as a favourite. If the contact has several phone numbers, press on the number in the list.

Edit the speed dial button To edit or delete a favourite contact press on the icon in the Favourites menu screen. You can delete one or more favourites.

Call a favourite Press the assigned speed dial button.

Note Favourites are not updated automatically. If you change a contact's phone number, you have to reassign the speed dial button.

Connectivity Box*

Fig. 154 In the centre console: pad for the mo- bile phone connection.

The Connectivity Box includes the Wireless Charger functionality.

209

Infotainment system

(Wireless Charger) The Wireless Charger allows mobile devices with Qi1) technology to be charged without a cable.

To charge your mobile phone wirelessly:

Place your mobile device in the middle of the pad with the screen facing up Fig. 154 .

Make sure there are no objects between the pad and the mobile phone.

The mobile phone will start charging auto- matically. For further information about whether your mobile device uses Qi technol- ogy, check your phone's user manual or visit the SEAT website.

WARNING The mobile phone may heat up due to the wireless charging. Think about this before you pick it up, and take care when removing it. There must be no metallic or other ob- jects between the mobile phone and the housing, to prevent the functionality of the Connectivity Box from being affected.

Note Your mobile device must support the Qi inductive charging interface standard for proper operation. The charging time and the temperature vary in accordance with the device used. The maximum charging capacity is 5 W. Qi technology does not allow you to charge more than one mobile device simul- taneously. You are advised to keep the engine run- ning to guarantee proper wireless charg- ing. When a telephone with Qi technology is connected by USB, it will be charged by the means specified by the manufacturer.

Multimedia

USB port

Fig. 155 Centre console: USB port.

Fig. 156 Rear part of the centre console: USB connectors with power outlet function.

1) Qi technology allows you to charge your mo- bile phone wirelessly.

210

Infotainment operation

The USB port can be found in the storage compartment area of the front centre con- sole Fig. 155.

Depending on the equipment and the coun- try, the vehicle may also have USB connec- tions exclusively for charging or as a power socket.

These USB ports are located at the rear of the console, between the front seats Fig. 156.

211

Driving

Driving

Start and driving

Starting and stopping the engine

Ignition and start button

Fig. 157 In the lower part of the centre con- sole: start button.

The engine can be started with a start button (Press & Drive). To do so, there must be a valid key inside the vehicle in the area of the front or rear seats, or on the centre console.

In vehicles with the Keyless Access page 99system, the engine can also be started with the key in the luggage compart- ment.

Opening the driver's door when exiting the vehicle activates the electronic lock on the steering column if the ignition is disabled.

Switching the ignition on/off If you only want to switch on the ignition (without starting the engine), briefly press the start button once without pressing the brake pedal or the clutch pedal .

The push-button text flashes like a heartbeat when the system is ready for the ignition to be turned on or off.

Automatic ignition disconnection If the driver leaves the vehicle, taking the key with them but leaving the ignition on, the igni- tion does not switch off automatically. The ig- nition is switched off by pressing the lock but- ton on the remote control or by pressing the sensor surface on the door lever Fig. 92.

Automatic deactivation of the ignition on vehicles with the Start-Stop system The ignition is switched off automatically when the vehicle is stopped and the auto- matic engine shutdown is active, if:

The driver's seat belt is not fastened, the driver does not step on any pedal, the driver door is opened.

After automatically turning off the ignition, if the dipped beam is on, the side light re- mains on for approx. 30 minutes (if there is enough charge in the battery). If the driver locks the vehicle or manually turns off the light, the side light goes out.

Engine restart feature If no key is detected inside the vehicle after the engine stops, you will only have 5 sec- onds to restart it. A warning will display on the dash panel screen.

After this interval, it will not be possible to start the engine without a valid key inside the vehicle.

WARNING When switching on the ignition, do not press the brake or clutch pedal, otherwise the engine could start immediately.

WARNING If vehicle keys are used negligently or with- out due care, this may cause accidents and serious injury. Never leave any key inside the vehicle when you leave it. Otherwise, a child or un- authorised person could lock the vehicle, start the engine or connect the ignition and operate any of the electrical equipment.

212

Start and driving

Note Before leaving the vehicle, always dis- connect the ignition and, if appropriate, take into account the instructions on the screen of the dash panel. If the vehicle is stationary for a long time with the engine off and the ignition on, the 12-volt vehicle battery might be dis- charged and it might not be possible to start the engine. In vehicles with diesel engines, wait until the warning light page 213 goes off before starting the engine. If during the STOP phase you press the button, the ignition is switch-

ed off and the push-button flashes. If the indication is displayed on the in- strument panel display Start-Stop system deactivated: Start the engine manually; the button will flash.

Starting the engine

Vehicles with manual transmission: put the gear lever in neutral, press the clutch pedal and keep it pressed in this position until the engine starts. Vehicles with automatic transmission: put the selector lever in P or N, press the brake pedal and keep it pressed in this position until the engine starts.

Press the starter button Fig. 157; do not press the accelerator. There needs to be a valid key inside the vehicle for the engine to start. After starting the engine, the lighting of the button remains fixed indi- cating that the engine is running. Once the engine starts, release the start-up button. If the engine does not start, stop and wait for around 1 minute to try again. If necessary, perform an emergency start page 215.

Diesel engines can take a few seconds longer than usual to start on cold days. During pre- heating, the warning lamp remains lit. To avoid unnecessary discharging of the bat- tery, do not use any other major electrical equipment while the glow plugs are pre- heating.

The preheating time depends on the coolant and exterior temperatures. With the engine at operating temperature, or at outside temper- atures above +8C, the warning lamp will light up for about one second. This means that you can start the engine almost immedi- ately.

Starting a diesel engine after having run out of fuel If the fuel tank of a diesel vehicle was run until completely empty, after refuelling it can last longer than normal to start the engine, even

up to a minute. This is because the fuel sys- tem must eliminate air first.

WARNING Do not keep the engine running in confined spaces, as there is a risk of poisoning. The exhaust gases contain carbon mon- oxide, an odourless and colourless poison- ous gas that can cause loss of conscious- ness and death.

WARNING Do not get out of the vehicle with the en- gine running, especially if a gear is engag- ed. The vehicle could then suddenly move or something strange could happen that would cause damage, fire or serious injury.

WARNING Never use cold start sprays, they could ex- plode or cause the engine to run at high revs. Doing this risks injury.

CAUTION The starter motor or the engine may be damaged if you try to restart the engine im- mediately after switching it off. When the engine is cold, you should avoid high engine speeds, driving at full throttle and over-loading the engine, as this could cause engine damage.

213

Driving

For the sake of the environment Do not warm-up the engine by running the engine with the vehicle stationary. Start off immediately, driving gently. This helps the engine reach operating temperature faster and reduces emissions.

Note Electrical components with a high power consumption are switched off temporarily when the engine starts. When starting with a cold engine, noise levels may briefly increase. This is quite normal, and no cause for concern. When the outside temperature is below +5 C (+41 F), if the engine is diesel, some smoke may appear under the vehicle when the fuel-operated auxiliary heater is on.

Turning off the engine

Bring the vehicle to a full stop . With manual transmission, press the clutch all the way down. If the vehicle is automatic, set the selector lever to the P position. Apply the electronic parking brake. Briefly press the start-up button Fig. 157.

Emergency disconnection If the engine does not switch off after briefly pressing the starter button, an emergency disconnect will be required:

Press the starter button twice within 3 sec- onds or press it once for more than 1 sec- ond in Ignition and start button on page 212.

WARNING Never switch off the engine while the vehi- cle is moving. This could cause loss of con- trol of the vehicle, accidents and serious in- jury. The airbags and belt tensioners do not work when the ignition is switched off. The brake servo does not work with the engine off. Therefore, you need to press the break pedal harder to brake the vehicle. Power steering does not work when the engine is not running. You need more strength to steer when the engine is switch- ed off. If the ignition is switched off, the steering column could be locked, making it impossi- ble to control the vehicle.

WARNING Always take the key with you when you leave the vehicle. This is particularly impor- tant if there are children in the vehicle, as they might otherwise be able to start the

engine or use power-operated equipment (e.g. the electric windows), which could cause injuries.

CAUTION If the vehicle is stopped and the Start- Stop system* switches off the engine, the ignition remains switched on. Make sure that the ignition is switched off before leav- ing the vehicle, otherwise the battery could discharge. If the engine has been driven at high speed for a prolonged period of time, it may overheat when switched off. To avoid damage, allow the engine to run for ap- proximately two minutes in neutral before switching it off.

Note After the engine is switched off the radiator fan may run on for up to 10 minutes, even if the ignition is switched off. It is also possi- ble that the fan turns itself on once more if the coolant temperature increases due to the heat accumulated in the engine com- partment or due to its prolonged exposure to solar radiation.

Electronic immobilizer

The electronic immobiliser prevents unau- thorised persons from driving the vehicle.

214

Start and driving

In the key there is a chip that automatically deactivates the electronic immobiliser.

The electronic immobiliser is automatically activated when the key is outside the vehicle.

If the following message is shown on the in- strument panel display: SAFE, the vehicle cannot be started.

The engine can only be started using a genu- ine SEAT key with its correct code.

Note A perfect operation of the vehicle is ensur- ed if genuine SEAT keys are used.

Emergency starting function

Fig. 158 On the right of the steering column: emergency start.

If no valid key is detected inside the vehicle, an emergency start-up will be required. The

relevant message will appear in the dash panel display. This may happen when, for ex- ample, the vehicle key battery is very low:

Immediately after pushing the starter but- ton, keep the key next to the right trim of the steering column Fig. 158, as close as pos- sible to the Kessy logo. The ignition connects and the engine starts automatically.

Instructions for the driver on the in- strument panel display

Press the clutch This message appears on vehicles with a manual gearbox if the driver tries to start the engine without having the clutch pedal pressed. The engine will only start if you press the clutch pedal.

Press the brake This message appears on vehicles with an automatic gearbox if the driver tries to start the engine without having the brake pedal pressed.

Select N or P This message appears if you try to start or stop the engine when the selector lever of the automatic gearbox is not in position P or N.

The engine can only be started and stopped in those positions.

Engage position P; the vehicle can move; doors can only close in posi- tion P. For safety reasons, this driver message ap- pears and an audible warning sounds if the selector lever of the automatic gearbox is not in position P after you switch off the ignition. Move the selector lever to the P position, oth- erwise the vehicle could move.

Gear change: selector lever in the drive position! This driver message is displayed when the selector lever is not in the position P when the driver door is opened. Additionally, a buzzing sound is emitted. Put the selector lever in po- sition P, otherwise the vehicle could roll away.

Ignition is switched on This driver message is displayed and a buz- zer is sounded when the driver door is opened with the ignition switched on.

My Beat function

For vehicles with a convenience key there is the My Beat function. This feature provides an additional indication of the vehicle ignition system.

215

Driving

When entering the vehicle, the start button Fig. 157 flashes to draw attention to it.

When the ignition is on/off, the engine start button flashes. With the ignition is switched off, the start button goes off after a few sec- onds.

With the engine running, the start button light stays on, indicating that the engine is running. The time elapsed between the moment the user starts the engine with the start button and the lighting changes from flashing to fixed will depend on specific engine size characteristics. When the start button is used to stop the engine, the button starts flashing again.

In vehicles with the Start-Stop system, the My Beat function also offers additional in- formation:

When the engine stops during the Stop phase, the light of the start button stays on, as the Start-Stop system remains active even though the engine is off. When the engine cannot be started again with the Start-Stop system, page 216, and needs to be started manually, the start but- ton flashes to indicate this situation.

Start-Stop system*

Control lamps

It lights up

The Start-Stop system is available, the automatic en- gine shutdown is active.

It lights up

The Start-Stop system is not available or has been disconnected.

Instructions for the driver on the instru- ment panel display Start-Stop system deactivated. Start the engine manually This indication for the driver shows that the Start-Stop system cannot start the engine again.

Start-Stop system: Fault! Function not available There is a fault in the Start-Stop system. Take the vehicle to a workshop to have the fault repaired.

Description and operation

The Start-Stop system helps you to save fuel and reduce CO2 emissions.

In Start-Stop mode, the engine will automati- cally switch off when the vehicle stops or is stopping. The ignition remains switched on. The engine automatically switches back on when required.

In this scenario, the light of the button stays lit1).

When the ignition is switched on, the Start- Stop function is automatically activated.

More information on the Start-Stop system can be found in the Infotainment system: press the function button > View > Ve- hicle status.

Vehicles with a manual gearbox When the vehicle or when it is stopped, put it into neutral and release the clutch pedal. The engine will switch off. The warning lamp will light up. The engine can be stopped before stopping completely (approximately 7 km/h). When the clutch pedal is pressed the en- gine will start up again. The warning lamp will switch off.

1) Only in vehicles with Keyless Access. 216

Start and driving

Vehicles with an automatic gearbox Brake until it is stopped, and keep your foot on the brake pedal or activate the Auto Hold* system so that the vehicle remains braked. The engine will switch off. The warning lamp will appear in the display. The engine can be stopped before stopping completely (ap- proximately 7 or 2 km/h depending on the ve- hicle's gearbox). When you take your foot off the brake ped- al the engine will start up again. The warning lamp will switch off. With the Auto Hold* sys- tem, the engine will not start if you remove your foot from the brake pedal. The car starts when you press the accelerator pedal.

Basic requirements for the Start-Stop mode The driver door must be closed. The driver's seat belt must be fastened. The bonnet must be closed. The engine has reached operating temper- ature. The reverse gear must not be engaged. The vehicle must not be on a very steep slope.

The engine does not turn off for various reasons Before stopping the vehicle, the system veri- fies whether certain conditions are met. The

engine does not switch off, in the following situations for example:

The engine has not yet reached the re- quired temperature for the Start-Stop mode. The temperature selected on the climate control has not been reached. The interior temperature is very high/low. Defrost function button activated page 153. The parking aid* is switched on. The battery is very low. The steering wheel is overly turned or is be- ing turned. If there is a danger of misting. After engaging reverse gear. In case of a very steep gradient.

is displayed on the instrument cluster dis- play unit; it is also displayed in the driver in- formation system*, .

The engine starts by itself When stopped, the normal system mode may be interrupted in the following situations. The engine restarts by itself without involvement from the driver.

The interior temperature differs from the temperature selected on the climate control. Defrost function button activated page 153.

The brake has been pressed several times consecutively. The battery is too low. High power consumption.

Additional information related to the auto- matic gearbox The engine stops when the selector lever is in the positions P, D, N and S in addition to when in Tiptronic mode. With the selector lever in P, the engine will also remain switched off when you take your foot off the brake pedal. In or- der to start the engine up again the accelera- tor must be pressed, or another gear engag- ed or the brake released.

If the selector lever is placed in R while stop- ped, the engine will start up again.

Change from D to P to prevent the engine from accidentally starting when passing through R.

Additional information about vehicles with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) In vehicles with ACC function, the engine will start up again in certain operating conditions if the radar sensor detects that the vehicle ahead drives off again.

WARNING Never switch the engine off until the vehi- cle is stationary. The operation of the brake

217

Driving

and steering will not be fully guaranteed. More force will be needed to turn the steer- ing wheel or to brake. You could suffer an accident and even serious injuries. To avoid injury, make sure that the Start- Stop system is switched off when working in the engine compartment page 218.

CAUTION The Start-Stop system must always be switched off when driving through flooded areas page 233.

Note In vehicles with an automatic gearbox, you can control whether the engine should switch off or not by reducing or increasing the brake force applied. While the vehicle remains stopped, the engine will not stop if the brake pedal is slightly pressed, in traffic jams with frequent stopping and starting for example. As soon as strong pressure is applied to the brake pedal, the engine will stop. When stopped, the brake pedal must be kept pressed to ensure that the vehicle does not move. If the engine stalls with a manual gear- box, it can be directly started up again by immediately pressing the clutch pedal. With an automatic gearbox, if the lever is placed in position D, N or S after engaging

reverse gear, 10 km/h (6 mph) in a forwards direction must be reached for the system to be in a status to stop the engine.

Manually connecting and discon- necting the Start-Stop system

Fig. 159 Centre console: Start-stop system button.

If you do not wish to use the system, you can switch it off manually.

To manually switch on/off the Start-Stop system, press the button Fig. 159.

The button symbol remains lit up yellow when the system is switched off.

Note The system switches on every time the en- gine is turned off voluntarily.

Manual gearbox

Changing gears

Fig. 160 Gear shift pattern of a 5 or 6-speed manual gearbox.

The position of the gears is indicated on the gearbox lever Fig. 160.

Press the clutch pedal and keep your foot right down. Move the gearbox lever to the required po- sition. Release the clutch.

Selecting reverse gear Engage reverse gear only when the vehicle is stopped.

Press the clutch pedal and keep your foot right down.

218

Start and driving

With the gearbox lever in neutral, push it downwards, move it to the left as far as it will go and then forwards to select reverse Fig. 160 R . Release the clutch.

Changing down gears While driving, changing down a gear must al- ways be done gradually, i.e. to the gear di- rectly below and when the engine speed is not too high . Changing down while by- passing one or various gears at high speeds or at high engine speeds can damage the clutch and the gearbox, even if the clutch pedal remains depressed .

WARNING When the engine is running, the vehicle will start to move as soon as a gear is engaged and the clutch released. This also happens if the electronic parking brake is switched on. Never engage reverse gear when the ve- hicle is moving.

WARNING If the gear is changed down inappropriate- ly by selecting a gear that is too low, you may lose control of the vehicle, causing an accident and serious injuries.

CAUTION When travelling at high speeds or at high engine speeds, selecting a gear that is too low can cause considerable damage to the clutch and the gearbox. This can also oc- cur if the clutch pedal is pressed and held and it does not engage.

CAUTION To prevent damage and avoid premature wear, please observe the following: Do not rest your hand on the gear lever while driving. The pressure applied by your hand is transmitted to the gearbox selector forks. Do not leave your foot on the clutch ped- al; although the pressure may seem insig- nificant, it can cause the premature wear of the clutch plate. Use the foot rest when you do not need to change gear. Always ensure that the vehicle is com- pletely stopped before engaging the re- verse gear. Always press the clutch to the floor when changing gears. Never hold the vehicle on the clutch on hills with the engine on.

Automatic gearbox/DSG au- tomatic gearbox*

Introduction

Your vehicle is equipped with an electronical- ly controlled manual gearbox. Torque be- tween the engine and the gearbox is trans- mitted via two independent clutches. They replace the torque converter found on con- ventional automatic gearboxes and allow for smooth, uninterrupted acceleration of the ve- hicle.

The Tiptronic system allows the driver to change gears manually page 221, Changing gear in Tiptronic mode*.

Control lamps

It lights up green

The brake is not pressed. To select a gear range, press the brake pedal.

Flashes green

The selector lever locking button is not engaged. The vehicle is prevented from moving forwards. En- gage the selector lever lock.

219

Driving

Selector lever positions

Fig. 161 Selector lever lock.

The selector lever position is shown when the corresponding sign lights up. With the selec- tor lever in the manual gearbox positions M, D and S, the engaged gear is also shown on the display.

Parking lock When the lever is put in this position, the drive wheels are locked. The lever must only be put in P when the vehicle is stationary .

To put the lever in P or take it out of P , the locking button must be pressed and held and the brake pedal pressed simultaneously.

Reverse gear Reverse gear must be engaged only when the vehicle is stationary and the engine is idling .

To move the lever to position R, the lock but- ton must be pressed and held while pressing the brake pedal at the same time. The reverse lights come on when the lever is in the R posi- tion with the ignition on.

Neutral With the lever in this position, the gear is in neutral.

Press the brake pedal to move the lever from N to D/S when the vehicle is stationary or at speeds below 3 km/h (2 mph) .

Permanent forward drive position The lever in the D/S position enables the gears to be operated in normal mode (D) or sport mode (S). To select Sport mode S, move the lever backwards. Pushing the lever again will select normal mode D. The selec- ted driving mode is shown on the instrument panel display.

In normal mode (D), the gearbox selects the best gear ratio. This depends on the engine load, the road speed and the dynamic gear control programme (DCP).

Sport mode (S) should be selected for a sporty driving style. This setting makes use of the engine's maximum power output. When accelerating the gear shifts will be noticea- ble.

Under certain circumstances (e.g. on moun- tain roads) it can be advantageous to switch tiptronic mode page 221, to adapt the gears to suit the road conditions.

Selector lever lock In P or N, the lever lock prevents a gear range from being engaged, and prevents the vehi- cle from moving off accidentally.

To release the gear lever lock, press and hold the brake pedal with the ignition on. At the same time, press the lever lock in the direc- tion of the arrow Fig. 161.

As a reminder to the driver, when the lever is in positions P or N the following indication will be shown on the screen:

When stationary, apply footbrake while selecting a gear.

The lever is not locked if it is moved quickly through position N (e.g. when shifting from R to D). This makes it possible, for instance, to rock the vehicle backwards and forwards if it is stuck in snow or mud. The lever lock en- gages automatically if the brake pedal is not pressed and the lever is in position N for more than about one second at a speed of less than 5 km/h (3 mph).

Safety interlock for ignition key Once the ignition has been turned off, the key may be removed only if the gear selector is in

220

Start and driving

position P. While the key is not in the ignition, the selector lever is locked in position P.

WARNING Take care not to press the accelerator pedal when the vehicle is stopped. The ve- hicle could start moving immediately (in some cases even if the parking brake is en- gaged) resulting in the risk of an accident. Never move the lever to R or P when driv- ing. Failure to follow this instruction could result in an accident or failure. With lever in any position (except P), the foot brake must be pushed down whenever the engine is running. This is because an automatic gearbox still transmits power even at idling speed. While you are selecting a gear and the vehicle is stopped with the engine running, do not accelerate. Failure to follow this in- struction could result in an accident. As a driver you should never leave your vehicle if the engine is running and a gear is engaged. Switch on the electronic parking brake and select the parking lock (P).

Note If the lever is moved accidentally to N when driving, release the accelerator and let the engine speed drop to idling before selecting gear range D or S again. Should the power supply to the lever be interrupted in position P, it will not be possi-

ble to move the lever. If this should happen the manual release can be used page 226.

Note If the lever lock does not engage, there is a fault. The transmission is interrupted to prevent the vehicle from accidentally mov- ing. Follow the procedure below in order for the lever lock to engage again: With a 6-speed gearbox: press the

brake pedal and release it again. With a 7-speed gearbox: press the

brake pedal. Move the lever to posi- tion P or N and subsequently engage a gear.

Despite a gear being engaged, the vehi- cle does not move forwards or back. Pro- ceed to the next mode: When the vehicle does not move in the

required direction, the system may not have the gear range correctly engag- ed. Press the brake pedal and engage the gear range again.

If the vehicle still does not move in the required direction, there is a system malfunction. Seek specialist assistance and have the system checked.

Changing gear in Tiptronic mode*

Fig. 162 Lever in the Tiptronic position

Fig. 163 Steering wheel: automatic transmis- sion levers

Tiptronic gives the driver the option to change gears manually.

When you change to the Tiptronic pro- gramme, the vehicle remains in the currently selected gear. This is possible as long as the

221

Driving

system is not changing gear automatically due to a traffic situation.

Using Tiptronic with the selector lever It is possible to change to Tiptronic mode, both when the vehicle is stopped and while driving.

Starting from the D/S position, move the lever to the right. The instrument panel will show whether the lever is in manual or Tip- tronic mode (e.g. M4). Push the lever forwards + or backwards to move up or down a gear Fig. 162. To exit Tiptronic mode, move the lever to the left.

Using Tiptronic with the steering wheel paddles* The gearshift paddles can be used when the selector lever is in the D/S or M (Tiptronic) positions.

Press the gearshift paddle + to select a higher gear Fig. 163. Press the gearshift paddle to select a lower gear. To exit the Tiptronic mode, pull the right- hand lever towards the steering wheel for ap- proximately 1 second or move the lever to the left.

If the paddles are not operated for some time and the lever is not in the Tiptronic selection position, it will automatically exit from Tip- tronic mode.

CAUTION When accelerating, if a higher gear is not selected, it will automatically change shortly before reaching the maximum per- mitted RPM. Also, if a lower gear is selected, the sys- tem will not change until it detects that the engine will not reach its maximum RPM.

Driving with an automatic gearbox

The gearbox changes gear ratios automati- cally as the vehicle moves.

The engine can only start with the selector lever in position P or N. At low temperatures, below -10 C (+14 F), the engine can only start with the selector lever in position P.

Driving down hills Under certain circumstances it may be ad- vantageous to use the Tiptronic mode to se- lect the gear manually according to driving conditions .

Stop/Park On level ground, just use the lever to engage position P. On slopes you should first apply the parking brake and then set the lever to P. This makes it easier to remove the lever from position P when starting.

If the driver door is opened and the lever is not in position P, the vehicle could move. The following warning is displayed on the instru- ment panel: Gear change: selector lever in the drive position!. Addi- tionally, a buzzer will sound.

Stopping on a downhill Always apply the brake pedal firmly to pre- vent the vehicle from moving; if necessary, apply the electronic parking brake .

Do not accelerate while a range of gears is engaged to prevent the car from rolling downhill .

Starting off uphill with the Auto Hold func- tion Once you have engaged a gear, take your foot off the brake pedal and gently press the accelerator.

Starting off uphill without the Auto Hold function Pull on the electronic parking brake button.

222

Start and driving

Once you have engaged a gear, gently press the accelerator and pull on the elec- tronic parking brake button.

Back-up programme If all the positions of the lever are shown over a light background on the instrument panel display, there is a system fault and the auto- matic gearbox will operate in with the backup programme. It is still possible to drive the ve- hicle, however, at low speeds and within a se- lected range of gears. Driving in reverse gear may not be possible.

Kick-down The kick-down system provides maximum ac- celeration when the gear selector lever is in the positions D, S or in the Tiptronic mode.

When the accelerator pedal is pressed right down, the automatic gearbox will shift down to a lower gear, depending on road speed and engine speed. This takes advantage of the maximum acceleration of the vehicle .

The upshift to the next higher gear is delayed until the engine reaches maximum rpm.

WARNING Observe the safety warnings in Selec- tor lever positions on page 221. Never allow the brake to rub and do not use the brake pedal too often or for long

periods, as the brakes can overheat. This reduces the braking power, increases the braking distance or even causes a brake system fault. If you have to stop on a hill, keep the vehi- cles brakes applied with the brake pedal or parking brake.

WARNING Please note that if the road surface is slip- pery or wet, the kick-down feature could cause the driving wheels to spin, which could result in skidding.

CAUTION If you stop the vehicle on a gradient, do not attempt to stop it from rolling by de- pressing the accelerator when a gear has been selected. This could cause overheat- ing and damage the automatic gearbox. If you allow the vehicle to roll with the lever in position N and the engine off, the automatic gearbox will be damaged by lack of lubrication. In certain driving situations or traffic con- ditions, the gears could overheat and be damaged! If the warning lamp lights up, stop the vehicle as soon as you can and wait for the gearbox to cool page 225. If the gearbox operates with the backup programme, take the vehicle to a special-

ised workshop and have the fault repaired without delay.

Launch-control program 3 Value for vehicles: diesel with power of more than 125 kW, and petrol of more than 140 kW.

The Launch-control programme enables maximum acceleration from a standstill.

Condition: the engine must have reached op- erating temperature and the steering wheel must not be turned.

The engine speed for Launch-control is differ- ent on petrol and diesel engines.

To use the Launch-control you must discon- nect the anti-slip regulation (ASR) through the infotainment system menu page 91. The warning lamp will stay switched on or will flash slowly depending on whether or not the vehicle has a driver information system*.

On vehicles with the driver information sys- tem, the ESC lamp lights up permanently and the corresponding text message Stability control deactivated (temporary) appears on the instrument panel to indicate the deac- tivation status.

223

Driving

With the engine running, switch off traction control (ASR) page 2711). Press the brake pedal with your left foot and hold it down for at least one second. Turn the selector lever to position S or Tip- tronic, or select the sport driving profile from the SEAT Drive Profile* page 229. With your right foot, press the accelerator down to the full throttle or kick-down position. The engine speed will stabilise at about 3,200 rpm (petrol engine) or about 2,000 rpm (diesel engine). Take your left foot off the brake pedal. The vehicle starts with maximum acceleration.

WARNING Always adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions. Only use the Launch control programme when road and traffic conditions permit, and make sure your manner of driving and accelerating the vehicle does not incon- venience or endanger other road users. Make sure that the ESC remains switched on. Please note that when the ASR and ESC are deactivated, the wheels may start to

spin, causing the vehicle to lose grip. Risk of accident! After moving off, the ESC sport mode should be deactivated by briefly pressing the button.

Note After using the Launch control pro- gramme, the temperature in the gearbox may have increased considerably. In this case, the programme could be disabled for several minutes. The programme can be used again after the cooling phase. Accelerating with the launch control pro- gramme places a heavy load on all parts of the vehicle. This can result in increased wear and tear.

Downhill assistant*

Downhill speed control is activated when the lever is in the D/S position and the brake is applied. An appropriate lower gear is engag- ed.

The assistant attempts to maintain the speed at which the vehicle was travelling when the

brake was applied, within logical limits. It may be necessary to correct the speed by press- ing the brake.

The assistant can only change down as far as 3rd gear. It is possible that on very steep slopes you may have to switch to tiptronic mode and thus manually change down to 2nd or 1st gear to take advantage of engine braking and take the load off the brake sys- tem.

Downhill speed control is deactivated as soon as the road levels out again or you press the accelerator pedal.

On vehicles with cruise control system* page 238, downhill speed control is acti- vated when you set a cruising speed.

WARNING The downhill speed control cannot defy the laws of physics. Therefore, speed cannot be maintained constant in all situations. Al- ways be prepared to use the brakes!

1) Vehicles without a driver information system: the warning lamp flashes slowly. Vehicles with a driver information system: the warning lamp re- mains on.

224

Start and driving

Inertia mode

The inertia mode allows you to travel certain distances without using the accelerator, which saves fuel. Plan ahead and use the in- ertia mode to let the vehicle roll.

Activation of the inertia mode Condition: lever in position D, slopes of less than 12% and speeds between 20 and 130 km / h (12 and 80 mph).

Gently take your foot off the accelerator.

The indication will be shown on the instru- ment cluster , the engaged gear and cur- rent consumption will disappear and the word Inertia will appear.

The gears will automatically disengage and the vehicle will roll freely, without the effect of the engine brake. While the vehicle rolls, the engine runs at idling speed.

Stopping inertia mode Press the brake or the accelerator pedal.

To take advantage of the engine's inertia mode, simply remove your foot from the ac- celerator.

Applying both the inertia mode (= prolonged section with less energy) and inertia discon- nection (= shorter section without the need

for fuel) facilitates improved fuel consumption and emission balance.

If the vehicle has SEAT Drive Profile page 229, the inertia mode can be activa- ted in Normal, Eco and Individual modes. In Eco mode, it is activated whenever the oper- ating conditions are met, regardless of the smoothness with which the foot is removed from the accelerator.

WARNING If the inertia mode has been switched on, take into account, when approaching an obstacle, that the vehicle will not deceler- ate in the usual manner: risk of accident! When using inertia mode while travelling down hills, the vehicle can increase speed: risk of accident! If other users drive your vehicle, warn them about inertia mode.

Note The driver message Inertia is only dis- played with the current consumption. In in- ertia mode the gear will no longer be dis- played (for example D or E will appear instead of D7 or E7). The inertia mode will be automatically disconnected on gradients steeper than 15%.

In the case of the TDI and 2.0l TSI en- gines, the inertia mode will only work in the Eco driving mode.

Indications on the instrument panel display

Clutch Clutch overheating! Please stop! The clutch has overheated and could be damaged. Stop and wait for the gearbox to cool with the engine at idling speed and the selector lever in position P. When the warning lamp and the driver message switch off, have the fault corrected by a specialised work- shop without delay. If they do not turn off, do not continue driving. Seek specialist assis- tance.

Faults in the gearbox Gearbox: Fault! Stop the vehicle and place the lever in the position P. There is a fault in the gearbox. Stop the ve- hicle in a safe place and do not continue driv- ing. Seek specialist assistance.

Gearbox: System fault! You may continue driving. Have the fault corrected by a specialised workshop without delay.

225

Driving

Gearbox: System fault! You can continue driving with restrictions. Reverse gear disabled Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop and have the fault repaired.

Gearbox: System fault! You can continue driving in D until switch- ing off the engine Park the vehicle in a safe place. Seek spe- cialist assistance.

Gearbox: too hot. Adapt your driving accordingly Continue driving at moderate speeds. When the warning lamp switches off, you can continue driving in a normal manner.

Gearbox: press the brake and en- gage a gear again. If the warning was caused by the tempera- ture of the gearbox, this driver message will be displayed when the gearbox has cooled again.

Manual release of the selector lev- er

Fig. 164 Gear selector lever: manual release from the parking position.

In the event of a power failure when starting (e.g. discharged battery), the lever will remain locked in position P. To move it to position N to move the vehicle, there is an emergency re- lease device under the centre console, on the right side. Releasing the selector lever re- quires a certain degree of practical skill.

Removing the cover from the selector lev- er Apply the electronic parking brake . Carefully pull the corners of the selector lever boot and twist it upwards over the lever handle.

Releasing the selector lever Using the flat part of a screwdriver, press the yellow tab sideways and keep it pressed down Fig. 164. Press the lock button on the selector lev- er and move it to position N. After completing the emergency release, reattach the selector lever boot to the gear- box console.

WARNING Do not move the lever from position P if the parking brake is not firmly engaged. If you still think the car could move, press the brake pedal. Danger! The vehicle could move in an unforeseen way and cause an accident or serious injury.

Gear-change recommenda- tion

Selecting the optimal gear

Depending on the equipment on the instru- ment panel screen, a recommendation is shown with the gear that should be engaged to optimise consumption.

On vehicles with automatic transmission, the lever must be in Tiptronic mode page 221.

226

Start and driving

No recommendation will appear if the opti- mal gear is engaged. The current gear will be displayed.

Display Meaning

Optimum gear.

Changing to a higher gear is rec- ommended.

Changing to a lower gear is rec- ommended.

Information regarding the cleanliness of the particulate filter When the exhaust system detects that the particulate filter is close to saturation, this systems self-cleaning function recommends the optimal gear for that function page 311.

WARNING The gear change recommendation is an auxiliary function and in no case should be a substitute for careful driving. Responsibility for selecting the correct gear, depending on the circumstances, rests solely with the driver.

For the sake of the environment Selecting the correct gear can help to save fuel.

Note The recommended gear indication turns off when the clutch pedal is pressed or when the lever is removed from the tiptronic posi- tion.

Hill Descent Control (HDC)

Control lamps 3 Valid for vehicles: 4Drive all-wheel drive

It lights up white

Hill Descent Control is active.

It lights up grey

Hill Descent Control is not active. The system is switched on, but is not adjusting.

Some control and warning lamps will light up briefly when the ignition is switched on to check certain functions. They will switch off after a few seconds.

WARNING Observe the safety warnings in Con- trol and warning lamps on page 90.

Description and operation

Hill Descent Control limits the speed on steep descents by automatically braking all four wheels, both when moving forward and in re- verse. As the anti-lock brake system remains active, it prevents the wheels from locking. In vehicles with manual transmission, the Hill Descent Control adapts the theoretical speed without slowing the engine below its idling speed.

After starting the descent of a slope below 30 km/h (18 mph), speed is limited to a mini- mum of 2 km/h (1 mph) and a maximum of 30 km/h (18 mph). When appropriate, the driver may increase or decrease the speed within the limit by pressing the accelerator or the brake. At this point the function is interrup- ted and, if necessary, it is then reactivated.

Even so, it is imperative that the surface guar- antees sufficient adhesion. For this reason, the Hill Descent Control will not fulfil its func- tion when, for example, descending a slope with a frozen or slippery surface.

Hill Descent Control is available when the dash panel display shows the message .

Hill Descent Control automatically intervenes if the following conditions are met:

The vehicle engine is running. The Offroad driving profile has been selec- ted page 229. Driving at a speed below 30

227

Driving

km/h (18 mph) (the message is shown on the instrument panel). The slope of the descent is at least 10% when driving forward and 9% when driving in reverse. The brake and the accelerator are not pressed.

Hill Descent Control is deactivated on press- ing the brake and the accelerator or if the slope is below 5%. The function can be switched off manually in the infotainment system using the > HDC function button.

WARNING Always be ready to brake. Otherwise, an accident could occur and cause injury. Hill Descent Control is only an auxiliary system that in some situations may not suf- ficiently brake the vehicle when going down a slope. The speed of the vehicle may increase despite the intervention of Hill Descent Control.

Steering

Information relating to different ve- hicle processes.

Electro-mechanical power steering adapts electronically to the speed of the car, torque and steering angle.

Even if the power steering fails or the engine is stopped, it is possible to continue to rotate the steering wheel as long as the key remains in the ignition, but more force must be ap- plied.

Progressive steering Depending on the vehicles features, it may or may not incorporate a progressive steering system.

In city traffic you do not need to turn so much on parking, manoeuvring or in very tight turns.

On the road or on the motorway, progressive steering transmits, for example, in bends, a sportier, more direct and noticeably more dy- namic driving sensation.

Steering assist This help assists the driver in critical situa- tions. It recommends turning the steering wheel to perform a corrective manoeuvre (counter-steering), turning slightly to avoid skidding .

WARNING Steering assist helps the driver in critical situations. The driver is the person who has to control the vehicle's steering at all times.

Control lamp

It lights up red

Faulty steering. Do not continue driving, stop the vehicle as soon as possible and in a safe manner. Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop and have the fault repaired as soon as possible.

It lights up yellow

Limited steering operation. Drive carefully to a specialised workshop to have the steering checked. If the warning light does not come on again after re- starting the engine and driving a short distance, it is not necessary to check the steering.

OR: The 12-volt battery was disconnected and re- connected. Drive a short distance at 15-20 km / h (9-12 mph).

228

Start and driving

It flashes yellow

The steering column is jammed. When stopped, turn the steering wheel in both direc- tions.

OR: The steering column does not unlock or lock. Turn off the ignition and turn it on again. Consider the messages shown on the instrument panel display. Do not continue driving if the steering column re- mains locked after switching on the ignition. Seek specialist assistance.

The control lamp should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on. It should go out once the engine is started.

WARNING Never ignore the warning lamps or messag- es. If the warning lamps and the correspond- ing messages are ignored, the vehicle may stall in traffic, causing serious damage or accidents and injuries. Stop the vehicle at the next opportunity and in a safe place.

SEAT Drive Profiles*

Introduction

The SEAT Drive Profile enables the driver to choose between the Eco, Normal, Sport and

Individual profiles, which modify the behav- iour of several vehicle functions, providing dif- ferent driving experiences.

In addition, the 4Drive version features the Offroad and Snow profiles.

The Individual profile can be configured ac- cording to personal preferences. The other profiles have a fixed configuration.

Description

Depending on the equipment fitted in the ve- hicle, SEAT Drive Profile can operate on the following functions:

Engine Depending on the profile selected, the engine responds more quickly or smoothly to the ac- celerator being pressed. When the Eco pro- file is selected, the Start-stop function is acti- vated.

In vehicles with automatic transmission, the gear change timing is changed to put the changes at higher or lower revolutions. The Eco profile activates the Inertia function, thereby reducing consumption. The rest of the driving profiles will activate the inertia use function when the selector lever is not in the S position, depending on how the accelerator pedal is released page 225. When the ve-

hicle is turned on again, the function is activa- ted by default to reduce consumption.

With manual transmission, the Eco profile changes the gear change recommendations to facilitate more efficient driving.

Dynamic chassis control (DCC)* DCC continuously adapts the shock absorb- ers to the condition of the road and current driving conditions, according to the pre-set programme.

In the event of a fault in the DCC, the follow- ing message is displayed on the instrument screen Fault: shock absorber regula- tion

Steering The power steering varies its driving modes and adapts to the profile selected, thus offer- ing the best behaviour for each situation.

Air conditioning The Climatronic* can operate in Eco mode with particularly limited consumption.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* Depending on the driving profile, the perform- ance of the ACC varies, to allow more sporty acceleration and braking or a more respect- ful fuel consumption.

229

Driving

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) In the Offroad and Snow driving profiles, the electronic stability Control (ESC) page 269 adjusts to adapt to the terrain.

In addition, hill descent control (HDC) is acti- vated in the Offroad profile page 227.

Setting the driving profile

Fig. 165 Centre console: Driving Experience button.

You can select the Eco, Normal, Sport, Indi- vidual, Offroad1) and Snow1).

The desired mode can be selected as follows:

Turn the Driving Experience button as much as necessary to light up the desired profile on

the infotainment system display and on the same driving experience button Fig. 165. OR: select the desired profile in the infotain- ment system from the menu that opens when you rotate the Driving Experience button.

The features of each profile can be seen by pressing the Profile information function button.

In the Individual profile it is possible to con- figure the characteristics of the vehicle using the Profile setup function button.

An icon on the touch screen provides infor- mation about the active profile. The selector displays the selected profile with a red LED.

Driving profiles

Driving pro- file Characteristics

Places the vehicle in a low state of consumption, facilitating a fuel-saving driving style that is respectful to the environment.

Normal

Offers a balanced driving experi- ence, suitable for everyday use.

Driving pro- file Characteristics

Sport

Provides a complete dynamic performance in the vehicle, ena- bling the user a more sporty driv- ing style.

Individual

It allows you to personalise the configuration. The functions that can be adjusted depend on the equipment fitted in the vehicle.

Offroada)

It adjusts the vehicle's parame- ters in order to maintain optimal off-road driving.

Snowa)

It adjusts the vehicle's behaviour for driving on slippery road sur- faces, optimising grip and ma- noeuvrability.

a) Only for 4Drive models.

WARNING When operating SEAT Drive Profile, pay at- tention to all traffic: doing otherwise could cause an accident.

Note When the engine is switched off it will store the driving profile that was selected when the ignition was turned off. When re- started, the engine and the gearbox will

1) Only for 4Drive models. 230

Start and driving

start in their Normal mode. To return the en- gine and gearbox to the desired mode, re- select the corresponding driving profile by turning the Driving Experience button or se- lect from the infotainment display. When the vehicle is restarted after using the Offroad or Snow settings, the system is always activated in the Normal profile. Your speed and driving style must always be adjusted to visibility, weather, and traf- fic conditions. The Eco profile is not recommended when towing a vehicle.

Driving tips

Running in

Please observe the instructions for running-in new components.

Running-in the engine A new engine must be driven through a run-in period during its first 1500 kilometres (1000 miles). During its first few hours of running, the internal friction in the engine is greater than later on when all the moving parts have bed- ded down.

How the vehicle is driven for the first 1500 km (1000 miles) influences the future engine per- formance. Throughout the life of the vehicle, it

should be driven at a moderate speed (espe- cially when the engine is cold) this will reduce engine wear and increase its useful life. Never drive at extremely low engine speeds. Always engage a lower gear when the engine works irregularly. For the first 1000 km or 600 miles, please note:

Do not use full throttle. Do not force the engine above two thirds of its maximum speed. Do not tow a trailer.

Between 1000 and 1500 kilometres (600 to 1000 miles), gradually increase power until reaching the maximum speed and high engine speeds.

Running in new tyres and brake pads Replacement of wheel rims and new tyres page 327. Information about brakes page 265.

For the sake of the environment If the engine is run in gently, the life of the engine will be increased and the engine oil consumption reduced.

Four-wheel drive (4Drive) 3 Valid for vehicles: 4Drive all-wheel drive

On four-wheel drive models, the engine pow- er is distributed to all four wheels

General notes On four-wheel drive vehicles, the engine power is distributed to all four wheels. The distribution of power is controlled automati- cally according to your driving style and the road conditions. Also see page 269.

The four-wheel drive is specially designed to complement the superior engine power. This combination gives the vehicle exceptional handling and performance capabilities, both on normal roads and in more difficult condi- tions, such as snow and ice. Even so (or per- haps especially for this reason), it is important to observe certain safety points .

Winter tyres Thanks to four-wheel drive, your vehicle will have plenty of traction in winter conditions, even with the standard tyres. Nevertheless, we still recommend that winter tyres or all- season tyres be fitted on all four wheels to give even better braking response.

231

Driving

Snow chains On roads where snow chains are mandatory, this also applies to cars with four-wheel drive page 332.

Changing tyres On vehicles with four-wheel drive, all four tyres must have the same rolling circumfer- ence. Also avoid using tyres with varying tread depths page 327.

Off-roader? Your SEAT vehicle is not an off-roader: it does not have enough ground clearance to be used as such. It is therefore best to avoid rough tracks and uneven terrain as much as possible.

WARNING Even with four-wheel drive, you should al- ways adjust your speed to suit the condi- tions. Do not let the extra safety features tempt you into taking any risks when driv- ing. Risk of accident! The braking capability of your vehicle is limited by the tyres' grip. It is therefore no different from a car without four-wheel drive. So do not be tempted to drive too fast on firm or slippery roads just because the vehicle still has good acceleration in these conditions. Risk of accident! On wet roads bear in mind that the front wheels may start to aquaplane and lose

contact with the road if the car is driven too fast. If this should happen, there will be no sudden increase in engine speed to warn the driver, as occurs with a front-wheel drive car. For this reason you should always choose a driving speed suitable for the road conditions. Risk of accident!

Economical and environmentally friendly driving

Fuel consumption, environmental pollution and wear to the engine, brakes and tyres all depend largely on driving style. Consumption can be reduced between 10-15% with an effi- cient driving type. The following section gives you some tips on lessening the impact on the environment and reducing your operating costs at the same time.

Active cylinder management (ACT)* Depending on vehicle equipment, the active cylinder management (ACT) may deacti- vate some of the engine cylinders if the driv- ing situation does not require too much pow- er. The number of active cylinders can be seen on the instrument panel display. page 73.

Foresight when driving If you think ahead when driving, you will need to brake less and thus accelerate less. Take

advantage of the inertia of the vehicle when- ever possible, with a gear engaged. This takes advantage of the engine braking effect, reducing wear on the brakes and tyres. Emis- sions and fuel consumption will drop to zero.

Changing gear to save energy An effective way of saving is to change in ad- vance to a higher gear.

Manual transmission: shift up from first to second gear as soon as possible. Choosing the right gear enables fuel savings. Select the highest possible gear appropriate for the driving situation (the engine should continue functioning with cyclical regularity).

Automatic transmission: accelerate gradu- ally and without reaching the kick-down position.

Avoid driving at high speed Avoid travelling at your vehicles top speed, whenever possible. Fuel consumption, emis- sion of harmful gases and noise pollution multiply as speed is increased. Driving at moderate speeds will help to save fuel.

Reduce idling time In vehicles with the Start-Stop system idling is automatically reduced. In vehicles without the Start-Stop system it is worth switching off the engine, for example, at level crossings and at traffic lights that remain red for long

232

Start and driving

periods of time. When an engine has reached operating temperature, and depending on the cylinder capacity, keeping it switched off for a minimum of about 5 seconds already saves more than the amount of fuel necessa- ry for restarting.

The engine takes a long time to warm up when it is idling. Mechanical wear and pollu- tant emissions are also especially high during this initial warm-up phase. It is therefore best to drive off immediately after starting the en- gine. Avoid running the engine at high speed.

Regular maintenance Regular servicing helps in saving fuel even before the engine is started. A well-serviced engine gives you the benefit of improved fuel efficiency as well as maximum reliability and an enhanced resale value. A badly serviced engine can consume up to 10% more fuel than necessary.

Avoid short journeys The engine and catalytic converter need to reach their optimal operating temperature in order to minimise fuel consumption and emissions.

A cold engine consumes a disproportionate amount of fuel. The engine reaches its work- ing temperature after about four kilometres (2.5 miles), when fuel consumption will return to a normal level.

Check tyre pressure Always make sure the tyres are inflated to the correct pressures page 328 to save fuel. If the pressure is below half bar, fuel consump- tion may increase by 5%. Due to the greater rolling resistance, under-inflation also increa- ses tyre wear and impairs handling.

Do not use winter tyres all year round as they increase fuel consumption by up to 10%.

Avoid carrying unnecessary loads Given that every kilo of extra weight will in- crease the fuel consumption, it is advisable make sure that no unnecessary loads are be- ing transported.

Since the luggage rack increases the aero- dynamic drag of the vehicle, you should re- move it when not needed. At speeds of 100-120 km/h (62-75 mph), this will save 12% of fuel.

Save electrical energy The engine drives the alternator, thereby generating electricity. This implies that any increase in power consumption also increa- ses fuel consumption! For this reason, switch off any unneeded electrical devices. Devices that use a lot of electricity includes the blow- er at a high setting, the rear window heating or the seat heating*.

Note If you have the Start-Stop system, it is recommended that it should not be discon- nected. It is recommended that you close the windows when driving at more than 60 km/h (37 mph). Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal, as the pressure can make the plate slip. This causes wear and can dam- age the clutch plate. Do not ride the clutch on a hill, use the brake. The fuel consumption will be lower and you will prevent the clutch plate from being damaged. Use the engine brake on downhills by changing to the gear that is best suited for the gradient. Fuel consumption will be zero and the brakes will not suffer.

Driving on flooded roads

To prevent damage to the vehicle driving on flooded roads, take the following into ac- count:

The water should never come above the lower edge of the bodywork. Drive at pedestrian speed.

233

Driving

WARNING After driving through flooded zones, brak- ing effectiveness can decrease if the brake discs or pads are damp page 265.

CAUTION Driving through flooded areas may dam- age vehicle components such as the en- gine, transmission or electrical system. Whenever driving through water, the Start-Stop system* must be switched off page 216.

Note Check the depth of the water before en- tering the flooded zone. Do not stop in the water, drive in reverse, or stop the engine. Vehicles travelling in the opposite direc- tion cause waves that could exceed your vehicle's critical height. Avoid driving through salt water (corro- sion) page 339.

Trips abroad

With petrol vehicles, it should be ensured that lead-free petrol is available throughout the journey page 306, Fuel types. Seek

information about service station networks selling unleaded fuel. In some countries, it is possible that your vehicle is not sold and some spare parts may not be available or the technical services may only be able to make limited repairs.

SEAT importers and distributors will provide information about the technical preparation that your vehicle requires and also about necessary maintenance and repair possibili- ties.

CAUTION SEAT does not accept liability for any dam- age to the vehicle due to the use of a lower quality fuel, an inadequate service or the non-availability of genuine spare parts.

Driver assistance systems

General notes

Safety advice

WARNING Responsibility for driving rests with the driver at all times. The drive assist systems are not a replacement for driver attention. Focus all your attention on driving and be prepared to intervene at all times. Use the drive assist systems only when conditions allow. The driving style must al- ways be suitable for the weather, visibility, road and traffic conditions. In order for drive assist systems to react correctly, sensors and cameras must oper- ate without limitations. Please read the notes on sensors and cameras in this chap- ter.

Note Keep in mind the specific rules of each country, especially when it comes to driv- ing, formation of an emergency corridor, braking distance, speed, parking position, wheel position, etc. The driver is solely re- sponsible for always complying with the specific regulations of each country. The area in front of and around the radar sensor should not be covered with

234

Driver assistance systems

adhesives, additional headlights or similar items, as this could have a negative impact on the operation of the assistants. If the ve- hicle is not properly repaired or structural modifications are made to it, the operation of the assistants may be affected. The repair and adjustment of sensors and cameras requires special knowledge and tools. It is recommended to visit a SEAT dealership for this purpose.

System limits

WARNING Drive assist systems can not overcome the laws of physics. Depending on the cir- cumstances, a collision may not be avoida- ble. Warnings, notices and indicator lamps may not be displayed on time, or may be displayed incorrectly, e.g. if a vehicle ap- proaches too quickly. Corrective interventions by drive assist systems (e.g. interventions in the steering or brakes) may be insufficient or may never occur, depending on the circumstances. As a driver, you must be prepared to act at all times.

Note Due to the system's detection limits in the surroundings, the systems may not give warnings or intervene on time, or they might do so even if it is not desired. In addi- tion, the auxiliary systems may incorrectly interpret a manoeuvre and, as a result, warn the driver in an unexpected manner. When the towing mode is selected, some assist systems may react with limitations, in an unusual way or may not be available. Keep in mind the instructions relating to the towing mode.

Drive assist sensors and cameras

Front radar

Fig. 166 On the front bumper: radar sensors.

Fig. 167 Detection area.

A radar sensor may be fitted to the front bumper of the vehicle Fig. 166. The front radar detects any objects in its detection zone Fig. 167 and provides support for the following functions:

Front Assist page 242. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) page 245.

The radar can have a range of up to 120m (400ft) depending on road and weather con- ditions.

WARNING The visibility of the radar sensor can be im- paired by dirt or environmental influences such as rain, fog, snow, mud, dust, insects etc. In this case the Front Assist and ACC functions may stop working. The instrument panel displays the following message: No sensor vision! And the Front Assist

235

Driving

unavailable or ACC unavailable warning lights come on. Clean the sensor area on the bumper as indicated in page 341, Cleaning the ex- terior. When the radar sensor starts cor- rectly detecting again, the message disap- pears from the screen and the functions become available again.

CAUTION If the radar sensor is dirty or poorly ad- justed, the Front Assist system may give un- necessary warnings and apply the brakes inappropriately. The operation of the radar can be affec- ted by strong reflections of the emitted sig- nal. This may occur, for example, in an en- closed car park or due to the presence of metallic objects (e.g. guard rails or sheets used in road works). The sensor may not be adjusted correct- ly if it receives an impact. This may com- promise the system's efficacy or discon- nect it. If you have the feeling that the ra- dar sensor is damaged or adjusted incor- rectly, switch off the Front Assist and ACC functions to avoid any damage. If this oc- curs have it adjusted.

Front camera

Fig. 168 On the windscreen: field of vision of the Lane Assist system.

Depending on the equipment, the vehicle may be fitted with a front camera on the front windscreen Fig. 168. This camera detects lane boundaries (lines) to provide support for the following functions:

Lane Assist page 253. Travel Assist page 255. Emergency assist page 258.

CAUTION To avoid affecting the operation of the sys- tems, take the following points into consid- eration: Clean the field of vision of the camera regularly and make sure it is free of snow and ice.

Do not cover the field of vision of the camera. Check that the windscreen is not dam- aged in the area of the camera's field of vi- sion.

Rear radar

Fig. 169 Rear view of the vehicle: radar sensor zones.

Fig. 170 Sensor detection zones 236

Driver assistance systems

The radar sensors are located on the left and right of the bumper and are not visible from the outside Fig. 169. The sensors monitor both the blind spot and traffic behind the ve- hicle Fig. 170.

They support the following functions:

Lane departure warning (Side Assist) page 261. Rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) page 263.

Automatic deactivation of supported func- tions The rear radar sensors deactivate automati- cally when, among other reasons, one of the sensors is detected to be permanently cov- ered. This may be the case if, for example, there is a layer of snow or ice over one of the sensors.

The relevant text message will appear in the dash panel display.

CAUTION The radar sensors on the rear bumper may be damaged or shifted in the event of a collision, for example, when entering or exiting a parking space. This may result in the system disconnecting itself, or at least possibly having its functionality diminished. In order to ensure that the radar sensors work properly, keep the rear bumper free of snow and ice and do not cover it.

The rear bumper should only be painted with paint authorised by SEAT. The lane de- parture warning's functions may be limited or work incorrectly if other paints are used. The visibility of radar sensors may be af- fected due to leaves, snow, strong haze or dirt, among others. Clean the area in front of the sensors. Never use the lane departure warning, the rear cross traffic alert or the door opening warning if the radar sensors are dirty.

Ultrasound sensors

The bumpers are fitted with ultrasound sen- sors to perform the following functions:

Park Assist page 273. Parking aid Plus page 281. Rear parking aid page 284.

CAUTION Damage to the radiator grille, bumper, wheel arch and vehicle underbody can modify the orientation of the sensors. This can affect the parking aid function. Have the function checked by a specialised workshop. A number plate or number plate holder with dimensions that exceed the space for the number plate, or a cured or deformed

number plate can cause false detections or a loss of visibility for the sensors.

Note In order to guarantee good operation, keep the sensors clean, free of snow and ice, and do not cover them with stickers or other objects. If you use high-pressure or vapour equip- ment for cleaning, do not apply it directly, unless you do so very briefly, and always keep a distance of more than 10 cm away. Fitting certain accessories to the front of the vehicle, such as a plate holder with ad- vertising, may interfere with the operation of the Park Assist.

Area View system

Fig. 171 In the rear lid handle: Area View sys- tem

237

Driving

Depending on your vehicles equipment, it can be fitted with 1 or 4 cameras that provide support to the following functions:

Area View page 288 Rear View Camera page 292.

WARNING The use of a number plate may interfere in the views shown on the screen, since the cameras' field of vision may be reduced.

CAUTION In order to guarantee good system oper- ation, keep the cameras clean, free of snow or ice, and do not cover them with adhe- sives or other objects. The vehicle is fitted with a cleaning sys- tem for the rear camera. To operate it, push the wiper lever away from the steering wheel (the camera will be cleaned at the same time as the rear window). If the cam- era is still dirty after using it, clean it man- ually. Never use abrasive cleaning products to clean the camera lenses. Do not use hot or warm water to remove ice or snow from the camera lenses. Doing so could damage the lenses.

Cruise control system (CCS)*

Control lamp

It lights up green

The Cruise Control System (GRA) is switched on and active.

OR: The Adaptive Cruise Control system (CCS) is switched on and active.

OR: the speed limiter is switched on and active.

The control lamps light up when the ignition is switched on and should turn off after approxi- mately 2 seconds. This is the time taken for the function check.

WARNING Observe the safety warnings in Con- trol and warning lamps on page 90.

Introduction

Fig. 172 Instrument panel display: GRA status indications.

The cruise control system (CCS) is able to maintain the set speed from 20 km/h (15 mph).

The CSS only reduces vehicle speed by ceasing to accelerate, not by actively braking the vehicle .

Status display GRA status Fig. 172

CCS temporarily switched off. The set speed is displayed in small or darkened figures. System error. Contact a specialised workshop.

A

B

238

Driver assistance systems

CCS switched on. The speed memory is empty. The CCS is switched on. The set speed is displayed in large figures.

Changing gear in CCS mode The CCS decelerates as soon as the clutch pedal is pressed, intervening again automati- cally after a gear is engaged.

Travelling down hills with the CCS If the CCS cannot maintain a constant vehi- cle speed downhill, brake and change down a gear if necessary. The GRA is temporarily disabled by pressing the brake.

Automatic off The GRA disconnects automatically or is temporarily interrupted:

If the system detects a fault that could af- fect the working order of the CCS. If you press and maintain the accelerator pedal for a certain time, driving faster than the stored speed. If the dynamic driving control systems inter- vene, ASR, ESC, etc. If the brake pedal is pressed. If the airbag is triggered. If the lever is taken out of the D/S position.

C

D

WARNING Use of GRA could cause accidents and se- vere injuries if it is not possible to drive at a constant speed maintaining the safety dis- tance. Do not use GRA in heavy traffic, if the dis- tance from the vehicle in front is insuffi- cient, on steep roads, with several bends or in slippery circumstances or on flooded roads. Never use the CCS when driving off-road or on unpaved roads. Adapt your speed and the distance to the vehicles ahead in line with visibility, weath- er, the condition of the road and the traffic situation. To avoid unexpected operation of the cruise control system, turn it off every time you finish using it. It is dangerous to use a set speed which is too high for other conditions. If driving down a steep gradient, the GRA cannot maintain a constant speed. The speed can increase. In this case, brake and change down a gear.

Operating the cruise control

Fig. 173 On the turn signal lever: controls for operating the GRA.

Connecting Move the control Fig. 173 1 to .

If no speed has been programmed, the sys- tem will not control it.

Activating the cruise control Press button Fig. 173 2 in area .

The current speed is stored and the cruise control is activated.

Temporarily interrupting Move the control Fig. 173 1 to or step on the brake.

The cruise control system is switched off tem- porarily. The speed is stored.

239

Driving

Reinstating the cruise control Press button Fig. 173 2 in area .

Cruise control is activated at the stored speed.

Adjusting the speed While the GRA is set, the stored speed can be adjusted with button Fig. 173 2 :

To increase in increments of 1 km/h (1 mph) briefly press button Fig. 173 2 in the area . To increase the speed without interruption, keep button Fig. 173 2 pressed down in the area . To reduce in increments of 1 km/h (1 mph) briefly press button Fig. 173 2 in the area . To reduce the speed without interruption, keep button Fig. 173 2 pressed down in the area .

The vehicle adapts the current speed by ac- celerating or stopping accelerating. The vehi- cle does not brake actively.

Switching off Move control Fig. 173 1 to .

The system is disconnected and the memo- rised speed is deleted.

Speed limiter

Control lamp

It lights up green

The speed limiter is switched on and active.

Flashes green

The speed set by the speed limiter has been excee- ded.

It lights up

The adaptive cruise control (ACC) or the speed limit- er is active.

The control lamps light up when the ignition is switched on and should turn off after approxi- mately 2 seconds. This is the time taken for the function check.

WARNING Observe the safety warnings in Con- trol and warning lamps on page 90.

Introduction

Fig. 174 On the instrument panel display: indi- cations of the speed limited status.

The speed limiter helps avoid exceeding a programmed speed, from 30 km/h (19 mph) approx. and faster. Depending on the equipment, the speed lim- iter can be operated using the lever of the turn signals page 242 or from the multi- function steering wheel.

Display messages on the speed limiter Status Fig. 174:

The speed limiter is active. The last speed set is displayed in large figures. The speed limiter is not active. The last speed set is displayed in small or dark- ened figures. The speed limiter is switched off. The total mileage is displayed.

A

B

C

240

Driver assistance systems

Switching between the speed limiter and GRA or ACC (while the speed limiter is connected) To change between the driving assistance systems, press button Fig. 175 2 , then select with the right thumbwheel on the multi- function steering wheel in the instrument panel menu and press the thumbwheel to confirm your selection.

It switches between the speed limiter and cruise control (GRA) or the adaptive cruise control (ACC).

Going down slopes with the speed limiter If the programmed speed is exceeded while driving downhill, after a short time the control warning lamp page 240 flashes and an audible warning may sound. Brake and change down a gear.

Temporarily deactivate by pressing the accelerator down If the accelerator is pressed right down (kick- down) and the set speed is exceeded be- cause driver wishes to do so, the limiter is temporarily disabled.

To confirm it being switched off an acoustic signal sound once. While cruise control is off, the control lamp flashes .

When the accelerator is no longer pressed down and the speed is reduced below the set

value, the limiter switches on again. The con- trol lamp lights up and remains lit.

Automatic off The speed limiter is automatically switched off:

If the system detects a fault that could neg- atively affect the working order of the limiter. If the airbag is triggered.

WARNING After use, switch off the speed limiter to prevent the speed being regulated without it being required. The speed limiter does not relieve the driver of their responsibility to drive at the appropriate speed. Do not drive at high speed if not necessary. Using the speed limiter in adverse weath- er conditions is dangerous and can cause serious accidents. Use the speed limiter only when the condition of the road surface and the weather and traffic conditions al- low it. When driving on a steep gradient, the speed limiter cannot limit the vehicles speed. This can increase. In this case, brake and change down a gear.

CAUTION For automatic switching off due to system failures, for security reasons, the limiter is only completely switched off when the driver stops pressing the accelerator or consciously switches it off.

Note Different versions of the instrument panel are available and therefore the versions and instructions on the display may vary. If the cruise control (GRA), the adaptive cruise control (ACC) or the speed limiter are connected when the ignition is switch- ed off, the assistants will switch it when the ignition is switched on, but only the speed limiter will maintain the last programmed speed.

241

Driving

Operating the speed limiter with the turn signal lever

Fig. 175 On the turn signal lever: buttons to operate the speed limiter.

Connecting Move control Fig. 175 1 to position and press button 2 .

The last programmed speed is stored. It does not take effect yet.

Activating the speed limiter While driving, press button Fig. 175 3 in the area .

The current speed is stored as the maximum speed.

Setting the programmed speed You can set the speed using button Fig. 175 3 :

Briefly press area to increase speed in small increments of 1 km/h (1 mph). Press and hold the area to continu- ously increase speed in increments of 10 km/h (5 mph). Briefly press area to decrease speed in small increments of 1 km/h (1 mph). Press and hold area to continuously decrease speed in increments of 10 km/h (5 mph).

The speed is limited to the set value.

Switching off the speed limiter Move control Fig. 175 1 to position .

The system switches off.

Switching off temporarily If you want to temporarily deactivate the speed limiter, e.g. for overtaking, move the control Fig. 175 1 to position or press button 2 .

After overtaking, the speed limiter can be ac- tivated with the previously programmed speed by pressing button Fig. 175 3 in the area .

Emergency brake assistance system (Front Assist)*

Introduction

Fig. 176 On the instrument panel display: ad- vance warning indications.

The objective of the system is to prevent head-on collisions against objects that may be in the vehicles path or minimise the con- sequences of such impacts.

Depending on several factors and how criti- cal the situation is, the system operates in a staggered manner. First it warns the driver, and if the drivers reaction does not occur or is insufficient, it activates independent emer- gency braking.

The function is intended to prevent collisions with parked vehicles or vehicles in the same lane travelling in the same direction, or with pedestrians crossing the vehicles path or

242

Driver assistance systems

travelling in the same lane and direction. It may not activate in other hazard situations .

Front Assist is enabled between 4 km/h (2.5 mph) and 250 km/h (156 mph). Depending on a range of conditions, some of the func- tions described below are omitted to optimize the behaviour of the system.

Front Assist is a driving assistance function that can never replace the drivers atten- tion.

Safety distance warning If the system detects that you are driving too close to the vehicle in front, it will warn the driver with this indication on the instrument panel display .

The timing of the warning varies according to other factors: driver behaviour and speed.

Advance warning If the system detects a possible collision with the vehicle in front, it alerts the driver by means of an audible warning and an indica- tion on the instrument panel display Fig. 176.

The warning moment varies depending on the traffic situation and driver behaviour. At the same time, the vehicle will prepare for a possible emergency braking .

Critical warning If the driver fails to react to the advance warning, the system may actively intervene in the brakes and generate a brief jolt to warn the driver of the imminent danger of a colli- sion.

Automatic braking If the driver also fails to react to the critical warning, the system may initiate independ- ent emergency braking by progressively in- creasing the braking in accordance with how critical the situation is.

Driver emergency brake assistance sys- tem The system may detect that the driver is not braking hard enough to avoid the collision. In this case, it will increase the braking intensity.

The system cannot prevent a collision, al- though it can significantly minimise the con- sequences by reducing the speed and the force of the impact.

WARNING Observe the safety warnings in Con- trol and warning lamps on page 90.

WARNING Front Assist cannot change the laws of physics or replace the driver in terms of

keeping control of the vehicle and reacting to a possible emergency situation.

WARNING Following a Front Assist emergency warn- ing, pay immediate attention to the situa- tion and try to avoid the collision as appli- cable. If the Front Assist does not work as de- scribed in this chapter (e.g. it repeatedly intervenes unnecessarily), switch it off. Have the system checked by a specialised workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership. Always adapt your speed and distance away from the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. The Front Assist alone cannot avoid acci- dents and serious injuries. In complex driving situations, Front Assist may issue warnings and intervene in brak- ing unnecessarily. If the operation of the Front Assist is im- paired by dirt or because the radar sensor has lost its settings, the system may issue unnecessary warnings and intervene inop- portunely in the braking. The Front Assist does not react to animals or vehicles crossing your path or ap- proaching head-on down the same lane.

243

Driving

The Front Assist does not react to pedes- trians walking head-on in the same lane. The driver must always be ready to take over the control of the vehicle.

Note When Front Assist is connected, the indi- cations of other functions on the screen may be hidden. When the Front Assist causes a braking, the brake pedal is harder. Automatic interventions by the Front As- sist on the brakes may be interrupted by pressing the clutch, accelerator or moving the wheel. The Front Assist may brake the vehicle until it stops completely. However, the brake system does not halt the vehicle per- manently. Use the foot brake! If the Front Assist does not work as de- scribed in this chapter (e.g. in intervenes several times unnecessarily), switch it off.

Operation of the emergency brake assistance system (Front Assist)

Fig. 177 On the instrument panel display: Front Assist deactivated indication.

The Front Assist is active whenever the igni- tion is switched on.

When the Front Assist is switched off, so too are the advance warning and the distance warning functions.

SEAT recommends leaving the Front Assist activated. Exceptions page 245, Deacti- vating Front Assist temporarily in the fol- lowing situations.

Switching the Front Assist on and off With the ignition switched on, the Front Assist can be deactivated or activated as follows: Select the corresponding menu option us- ing the button for the driver assistance sys- tems page 88.

OR: using the infotainment system: press the function button > SETTINGS > Driv- er assistance page 95.

When the Front Assist is deactivated, the indi- cation Fig. 177 will be displayed on the instrument panel.

Activating or deactivating the pre-warning (advance warning) The advance warning can be switched on or off in the infotainment system using the func- tion button > SETTINGS > Driver as- sistance page 95.

The system will store the setting for the next time the ignition is switched on.

SEAT recommends keeping advance warning active.

Depending on the vehicles infotainment sys- tem the advance warning function may be adapted in the following modes:

Advance Medium Delayed Deactivated

SEAT recommends driving with the function in Medium mode.

244

Driver assistance systems

Switching distance warning on and off The distance warning can be switched on or off in the infotainment system using the func- tion button > SETTINGS > Driver as- sistance page 95.

The system will store the setting for the next time the ignition is switched on.

SEAT recommends keeping the distance warning active.

Deactivating Front Assist tempora- rily in the following situations

In the following situations the Front Assist should be deactivated due to the system's limitations:

When the vehicle is to be towed. If the vehicle is on a test bed. When the radar sensor is damaged. If the radar sensor receives a violent im- pact. If it intervenes several times unnecessarily. If the radar sensor is temporarily covered by an accessory. When the vehicle is going to be loaded onto transportation.

System limitations

Fig. 178 On the instrument panel display: ini- tial system self-calibration indication.

Front Assist has certain limitations inherent to the system. Thus, in certain circumstances, some of the reactions may be inappropriate from the driver's standpoint. So pay attention in order to intervene if necessary.

The following conditions may cause the Front Assist not to react or to do so too late: In the first few instants of driving after switching on the ignition, due to the systems initial auto-calibration. During this period, a status icon Fig. 178is displayed. If the Front Assist is switched off or dam- aged. If the radar sensor is dirty or covered. On taking tight bends or complex paths.

Pressing the accelerator all the way down. If the ASR has been disconnected or the ESC activated in Sport mode page 271. If the ESC is controlling. If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec- trically connected trailer are damaged. If there are metal objects, e.g. guard rails or sheets used in road works. If the vehicle is reversing. In case of snow or heavy rain. In case of narrow vehicles, such as motor- bikes. Misaligned vehicles. Vehicles crossing the other's path. Vehicles approaching in the opposite direc- tion. Loads and accessories of other vehicles that protrude over the sides, backwards or over the top.

ACC - Adaptive Cruise Con- trol*

Introduction

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) maintains a constant speed set by the driver. When approaching another vehicle in front, the

245

Driving

ACC detects it and adapts the speed au- tomatically, maintaining a distance set by the driver.

Does my vehicle have ACC? Your vehicle has ACC if it has a configuration menu in the infotainment system page 95 and if it has the ACC function buttons on the multifunction steering wheel Fig. 179.

Speed range ACC regulates speeds between 30 km/h (20 mph) and 210 km/h (130 mph).

If the vehicle is fitted with an automatic gear- box, the ACC can bring the vehicle to a standstill if a vehicle in front of it stops.

If your vehicle is fitted with a manual gearbox, you must pay attention to speed and gear changes. The ACC is deactivated if the speed is too low (less than 30 km/h) of the engine RPM is too low or high.

Driver intervention prompt ACC is subject to certain limitations in- herent to the system. This means that the driver will have to control the speed and distance from other vehicles in cer- tain situations. In this case, the instru- ment cluster display will tell you to in- tervene by applying the brake, and an audio warning will be played.

Radar sensors The ACC uses the front radar technology. Read its maintenance instructions and infor- mation about its limitations page 234.

WARNING The ACCs technology cannot overcome the system's inherent limitations or change the laws of physics. If used negligently or involuntarily, it may cause serious acci- dents and injuries. The system is not a re- placement for driver awareness. Always be prepared to brake or acceler- ate. If you press the accelerator pedal the ACC will stop working. Therefore, it will not brake or request any braking intervention. Adapt your speed and safe distance to the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic condi- tions. Do not use the ACC in poor visibility, or on roads that are steep, with lots of curves or slippery. Never use ACC when driving off-road or on unpaved roads. The system does not react to stationary obstacles (such as a traffic jam queue). Re- act soon enough to avoid a hazardous sit- uation. The system does not react to people, ani- mals or vehicles that are crossing or ap- proaching in the opposite direction.

If you are driving with a spare wheel fit- ted, the ACC system could automatically switch off. Switch off the system when starting off. Brake immediately if the ACC does not slow down enough. Brake immediately when a driver inter- vention instruction is displayed on the in- strument cluster screen. If the vehicle continues to move involun- tarily after a driver intervention prompt, brake the vehicle.

Note If the ACC does not work as described in this chapter, do not use it until it has been checked by a specialised workshop. Visit- ing a SEAT dealership is recommended.

246

Driver assistance systems

ACC operation

Fig. 179 On the multifunction steering wheel: buttons to operate the ACC

Connecting Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel.

The ACC does not regulate anything yet (standby).

Start regulation To start regulation, press the button Fig. 179.

The ACC sets the current speed, or the clos- est speed within the valid range (30-210 km/h), as the cruise speed.

With manual transmission, the gear lever must be in any gear except first and reverse, and the speed must be higher than approxi- mately 30 km/h (18 mph). On vehicles with

automatic transmission, the gear lever must be in the D, S or M position.

Depending on the driving situation, the fol- lowing indicator lamps come on:

It lights up green

ACC connected, no vehicle detected in front.

It lights up green

ACC connected, vehicle detected in front.

When the ACC is in standby, the indicator lamps light up in grey.

Setting speed To program the speed, press the or Fig. 179 buttons to the desired speed. The speed is adjusted at intervals of 10 km/h (5 mph).

When the ACC is active, the button can be pressed to increase the desired speed by 1 km/h (1 mph). You can then press to de- crease it by 1 km/h (1 mph).

Setting your distance level The distance can be set to one of five levels, from very short to very long:

Press the button and then the button or Fig. 179.

Alternatively, press the button as many times as necessary to set the desired dis- tance.

Keep in mind each countrys regulations on minimum braking distances.

Suspend regulation (standby) Briefly press the button on the multifunc- tion steering wheel or press the brake pedal.

The ACC indicator lamp is grey; the speed and distance are saved.

If the ESC ASR page 271 is disconnected, the ACC is automatically suspended.

Reinstating the cruise control Press the button. The ACC regulates to the last speed and distance setting. OR: Press the button to use the current speed.

Switching off Press and hold the button . The set speed is cleared.

Exceeding the speed regulated by the ACC While driving with the ACC switched on, the driver can increase speed by pressing the

247

Driving

accelerator pedal. ACC regulation is suspen- ded until you release the accelerator pedal .

Set the default distance setting In the Infotainment system, you can pre-se- lect the distance level when connecting the ACC from:

Very short, Short, Medium, Long and Very long using the Infotainment system: > Driv- er assistance > ACC page 95.

Changing the driving profile In vehicles with SEAT Drive Profile, the driving profile selected can have an influence on the ACCs acceleration and braking behaviour page 229.

In vehicles without SEAT Drive Profile, the be- haviour of the ACC can also be affected if any of the following drive profiles are selec- ted in the infotainment system in Drive assist. ACC settings will be the same as those in the SEAT Drive Profile.

WARNING Before driving off, check that the road is clear. The radar sensor may not detect ob- stacles on the road. This could cause an accident and serious injuries. If necessary, apply the brake.

CAUTION If you increase speed using the accelerator pedal, the ACC may not be able to safely adjust the speed of the distance due to the limitations of the system. Be prepared to react if required by the situation.

Status display

Fig. 180 On the instrument panel display: ACC active.

Vehicle ahead detected. It will light up if the distance to the vehicle is adjusted. Selected distance level 2.

This information can be displayed on the central panel of the Assists view, or in the left hand information profile page 72. If these views are not selected, it will be automatical-

1

2

ly displayed in the lower central part of the instrument cluster in a simplified manner.

The set speed will be displayed next to the function status indicator described in page 247, Start regulation.

Special driving situations

Fig. 181 On the instrument panel display: ACC active, vehicle detected in an outer lane.

Be aware of the limitations and warnings de- scribed at the beginning of this chapter. in Introduction on page 246.

248

Driver assistance systems

Avoid undertaking on the right1)

If a vehicle is detected in the left lane that is travelling at a speed slower than that set by the driver, it will brake the vehicle within the comfort limits of the system to avoid passing it on the right Fig. 181.

You can cancel this regulation by changing the set speed or by pressing the accelerator pedal.

The function works at speeds over 80 km/h (50 mph). It may not be available in certain countries.

Overtaking When the turn signal is switched on for over- taking, the ACC reduces the distance from the vehicle in front to help with the overtaking manoeuvre. The set cruising speed will not be exceeded.

The function works at speeds over 80 km/h (50 mph). It may not be available in certain countries.

Stop&Go function 3 Valid for: vehicles with an automatic gearbox

The ACC can bring the vehicle to a standstill (0 km/h) if the vehicle in front stops.

The ACC remains active and the message ACC ready to start is displayed on the in- strument cluster for a few seconds. You can extend or reactivate this warning by pressing the button or, depending on your vehicles equipment, by grabbing the steering wheel. During this time, the vehicle will move off again if the vehicle in front moves forwards.

To move off when the message ACC ready to start is not longer displayed, once the vehicle in front has moved off:

Press the accelerator pedal. OR: press the button or on the multi- function steering wheel.

The ACC is deactivated while stopped in the following cases:

If the vehicle stops for several minutes. If a door is opened.

WARNING If the message ACC ready to start is dis- played on the instrument cluster display and the vehicle in front moves off, your ve- hicle will move off automatically. In this case, any obstacles in the road may not be detected. This may cause serious acci- dents and injuries.

Always check the road before moving off, and apply the vehicle brakes yourself if necessary.

1) Or on the left, in countries that drive on the left hand side of the road.

249

Driving

ACC system limitations

Fig. 182 Vehicle on a bend. Motorcyclist ahead, out of range of the radar sensor.

Fig. 183 Vehicle changing lanes. One ve- hicle turning and another stationary.

The limits of the ACC system mean that it is not appropriate in all situations in Intro- duction on page 246.

SEAT does not recommend using the function in the following cases :

Heavy rain, snow or fog. When going through tunnels. In sections with roadworks. On routes with curves, e.g. on mountain roads. On off-road routes. In covered car parks.

On roads with embedded metal objects such as train or tram tracks. On roads with loose gravel.

Pay special attention when using ACC in the following situations:

On curves The ACC may not detect the vehicle in front on a curve, or may regulate the distance from vehicles in other lanes Fig. 182 .

Vehicles outside the sensor zone In the following situations the ACC may not react, or may react slowly or inappropriately:

Vehicles that are not aligned while driving or that are outside the sensor's detection area, such as motorcycles Fig. 182 Vehicles that move into your lane, a short distance from your vehicle Fig. 183 . Vehicles with loads or accessories that pro- trude from the sides, rear or roof.

Objects that are not detected The ACC function only detects and reacts to vehicles moving in the same direction. There- fore it does not detect:

People Animals

250

Driver assistance systems

Vehicles travelling in the opposite direction or crossing the road. Other stationary obstacles

The ACC does not react to stationary vehi- cles. If, for example, a vehicle detected by the ACC turns or moves over and there is a sta- tionary vehicle in front of it, the ACC will not react to the second vehicle Fig. 183 .

WARNING Using the ACC in the above situations can cause serious accidents and injuries, and you could break the law.

Troubleshooting

ACC not available

The indicator lamp lights up yellow:

The radar sensor is dirty or adjusted incor- rectly. Take into account the warnings descri- bed at the beginning of this chapter page 235 There is a fault or a defect. Turn off the vehi- cle's ignition and turn it on again after a few minutes. If the problem persists, consult a special- ised workshop.

The ACC does not work as expected Make sure that the conditions are met for the radar sensor to operate properly page 235. If the brakes overheat, regulation stops au- tomatically. Wait for them to cool down and check the operation again. Unusual noises during automatic ACC braking are normal and do not indicate any anomalies.

The following conditions may lead the ACC not to react: The accelerator or brake is depressed. No gear is engaged or the vehicle is in gear R. The vehicle is reversing. ESC is operating. The driver is not wearing his/her seat belt. A vehicle or trailer brake light is faulty. The RPM is too high or too low. The parking brake is applied. Driving on an excessive slope.

Proactive speed adjustment

Introduction

The proactive speed adjustment adapts the speed to the speed limitations detected and to the road layout (curves, crossings, round- abouts, etc.).

Proactive speed adjustment is an additional function of the ACC page 245 and uses the traffic signal detection system page 79 and the navigation data of the in- fotainment system.

Proactive speed adjustment is available de- pending on the equipment, although not in all countries.

WARNING The proactive speed adjustment smart technology cannot overcome the limits im- posed by the laws of physics and it only works within the limits of the system. Never allow the enhanced convenience of this function induce you to take any risk that compromises safety. If used negligently or involuntarily, it may cause serious acci- dents and injuries. The system is not a re- placement for driver awareness. Always adapt your speed to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. Always pay attention to traffic and al- ways keep the vehicle environment in mind.

251

Driving

Always be prepared to adjust the speed yourself. If the traffic sign recognition sys- tem is not working properly or the naviga- tion data is not updated, the speed may change unexpectedly and suddenly or may not be suitable for the current traffic situa- tion. In addition, the speed adjusted by the system may not suit your driving style. Always be prepared to adjust the speed yourself. If you drive without any active gui- ded route, if you leave the route calculated by the navigation system or if the position of the vehicle cannot be determined cor- rectly because the GPS does not provide accurate data, the speed may change un- expectedly and suddenly or may not adapt to the current traffic situation. Always use up to date navigation data. Always take into account the maximum permitted speed. In the case of speed limi- tations that are not included in the naviga- tion data, the maximum permitted speed may be exceeded.

Note Also note the information related to the ACC relevant to safety page 245.

Limitations of the proactive speed adjustment

In addition to the limitations of the traffic sig- nal detection system page 79 and of the limitations of the ACC, proactive speed ad- justment has the following limitations inherent to the system:

Proactive speed adjustment only recogni- ses traffic signals that show a speed limita- tion. The proactive speed adjustment does not take into account, above all, the rules on priority of passage or traffic lights. On roads that are not included in the navi- gation data, or that are included with little accuracy, proactive speed adjustment is not available. If a speed limitation is notified based on the navigation data without it being detected by the traffic signal detection system, the indica- ted speed will be adjusted to the speed that was saved the last time. Proactive speed adjustment is not available for speed limitations below approx. 20 km/h (approx. 15 mph). In this case, a relevant mes- sage is displayed on the instrument panel screen.

Activating the proactive speed ad- justment

In the infotainment system, in the assist serv- ices menu, you can individually adjust the type of incident the vehicle should react to page 95:

Response to road layout. Reaction at permitted speeds.

Driving with the proactive speed adjustment

Connect the ACC page 247. Set the distance and speed. Activate the proactive speed adjustment.

As soon as the system recognises a speed limitation or a relevant road layout during the route, a warning will appear on the instru- ment panel display. This warning will indicate the reason and the speed to which the vehi- cle will adjust due to said limitation.

Adjustment due to a speed limitation.

Adjustment due to a road layout.

In the event of adjustment due to a speed lim- itation, the detected speed will be saved as the new desired speed. In the event of

252

Driver assistance systems

adjustment due to the road layout, the vehi- cle will accelerate again after leaving the reason for the adjustment behind and the speed will be adjustment to that which has been saved.

The speeds indicated for curves depend on the driving profile page 229.

Interrupting speed adjustment During the warning, press the button . During the adjustment, press the button .

Adjust the announced speed The announced speed can only be adjusted in the event of adjustment due to a speed lim- itation.

Multifunction steering wheel: + 1 km/h (1 mph), only while the ACC is adjusting - 1 km/h (1 mph), only while the ACC is adjusting + 10 km/h (5 mph)

- 10 km/h (5 mph)

If you adjust the indicated speed excessively, the proactive speed adjustment is interrup- ted.

+

Note When a speed limitation is recognised, the proactive speed adjustment also adapts the saved speed even if the ACC is switched off. However, it will not adjust. If the speed of travel considerably ex- ceeds the speed limit detected by the traf- fic signal detection system, a relevant warning is displayed in the instrument pan- el display. In the event of joining a highway without speed limitation, the recommended speed is automatically saved as the desired speed. If a higher speed has previously been saved for a motorway without a speed limit, this is used instead of the rec- ommended speed.

Troubleshooting

A message is displayed indicating that proactive speed adjustment is not current- ly available or not in your country. If this message is displayed for a long time and proactive speed adjustment is available in your country, contact a specialised work- shop.

Note Depending on the anomaly in question, ad- ditional information may be displayed in Vehicle status page 94.

Lane Assist*

Introduction

The Lane Assist System helps the driver stay in his/her lane within the physical lim- its of the system. This function is not suita- ble and is not designed to keep the vehicle automatically in the lane.

Using the camera located in the windscreen, the Lane Assist system detects the limits (lane lines) dividing the lanes in which the vehicle is travelling. If the vehicle gets too close to the detected lane limits, the system alerts the driver through a corrective motion of the steering wheel. The driver can cancel the steering corrective action at any time.

No warning is produced with the turn signals activated, given that the Lane Assist system understands that a lane change is required.

System limits Use the Lane Assist system only on large, well-maintained motorways and highways.

The system is not available under the follow- ing conditions:

The driving speed allowed is below approx. 55 km/h (30 mph). The system has not detected any lane lines.

253

Driving

On tight bends. Temporarily in very sporty driving situations.

WARNING The intelligent technology in the Lane As- sist system cannot change the limits im- posed by the laws of physics and by the very nature of the system. Careless or un- controlled use of the Lane Assist system may cause accidents and injury. The sys- tem is not a replacement for driver aware- ness or manoeuvres when driving. Always adapt your speed and the dis- tance to the vehicles ahead in line with visi- bility, weather conditions, the condition of the road and the traffic situation. Always keep your hands on the steering wheel so it can be turned at any time. The responsibility of staying in the lane is al- ways the driver's. The Lane Assist system does not detect all road markings. The road surfaces, road structures or objects in poor condition can be incorrectly detected as road markings under certain circumstances by the Lane Assist system. Immediately counter any un- wanted intervention of the system. Please observe the indications on the in- strument panel and act as is necessary if the traffic situation permits. In the following situations there may be undesired interventions of the system or it may be that the system does not intervene

at all. In these situations, special attention is required from the driver and, where ap- propriate, the temporary deactivation of the lane assist warning system: In very sporty driving situations. In adverse weather conditions and

roads in poor condition. When passing through areas undergo-

ing works. Before gradient changes of grade and

river beds. Always observe the vehicle surroundings carefully and drive proactively. When the area of vision of the camera becomes dirty, covered or is damaged, the Lane Assist system function can be affec- ted.

Control lamp

or It lights up green

Lane Assist system active and available.

or It lights up yellow

The Lane Assist system intervening with a rectifica- tion of the steering.

OFF Lights up yellow or white

Lane Assist system

Some control and warning lamps will light up briefly when the ignition is switched on to check certain functions. They will switch off after a few seconds.

WARNING Observe the safety warnings in Con- trol and warning lamps on page 90.

Driving with the Lane Assist System

Fig. 184 On the instrument panel display: indi- cations of the Lane Assist System.

Lane line detected. The system inter- venes assisting on the represented side.

1

254

Driver assistance systems

Lane line detected. The system does not intervene.

Switching the lane assist system on or off In some countries, the Lane Assist System is always activated when the ignition is switch- ed on. The connection status is shown in the Driver assistance menu of the Infotainment system or the driver assistance systems menu after pressing the corresponding button. The Lane Assist system can be activated and de- activated in these menus.

The Lane Assist system is ready to actively in- tervene as of approximately 60 km/h (35 mph) and if it has detected the lane limits (system status: active). The control lamp emits a green light. When the system inter- venes by rectifying the direction, the control lamp emits a yellow light.

If the control lamp of the instrument panel display is off, it means that the Lane Assist system is connected but not ready to inter- vene or it is disconnected.

When you activate a turn signal, the system temporarily goes into a passive state in order to allow manual lane change.

An energetic rotation or rectification of the steering wheel by the driver causes the sys- tem to temporarily switch to a passive state.

2 Driver intervention prompt If the steering is not corrected manually, the system prompts the driver through an indica- tion on the instrument panel display and acoustic warnings.

If no reaction is obtained from the driver, the system switches to a passive state.

Regardless of the steering manoeuvres, through an indication on the instrument panel display and acoustic warnings, the driver is also prompted to drive through the centre of the lane if the steering correction lasts more than reasonable.

Steering wheel vibration The following situations may result in a steer- ing wheel vibration:

The lane ceases to be recognised during a sudden intervention in the direction of the system.

It is also possible to select steering wheel vi- bration in the Vehicle menu of the infotain- ment system. In this case, when a vehicle with Lane Assist switched on crosses over a detec- ted lane marking, the steering wheel will vi- brate.

Troubleshooting

Error message, the system disconnects Clean the windscreen. page 339 Check that the windscreen is not damaged in the area of the camera's field of vision.

System behaviour is different than expec- ted Clean the field of vision of the camera reg- ularly and make sure it is free of dirt, snow and ice. Do not cover the field of vision of the cam- era. Check that the windscreen is not damaged in the area of the camera's field of vision. Do not mount objects on the steering wheel.

In the event of doubts or queries, go to a spe- cialised workshop.

Driving Assist (Travel Assist)

Introduction

The driving assist (Travel Assist) combines adaptive cruise control (ACC) and adap- tive lane guidance. Within the limitations of the system, the vehicle can maintain a

255

Driving

distance from the vehicle in front that is preselected by the driver and remain in the preferred position within the lane.

Travel Assist uses the same sensors as Adap- tive Cruise Control (ACC) and Lane Assist. Therefore, carefully read the information about the ACC page 245 and the Lane Assist page 253 and take into account the limitations of the systems and the indications given in the information.

Speed range Travel Assist adjusts at speeds between ap- prox. 30 km/h (approx. 20 mph) and approx. 210 km/h (approx. 130 mph); in the case of the adaptive lane guidance function, be- tween 0 km/h (0 mph) and approx. 250 km/h (approx. 155 mph). This range may vary de- pending on the market.

Driving with Travel Assist Travel Assist automatically controls the ac- celerator pedal, the brakes and the steering. In addition, Travel Assist may, within its limita- tions, decelerate the vehicle until it stops be- hind another that stops and automatically starts again.

You can override assisted adjustment at all times.

How to know if the vehicle is fitted with Travel Assist The vehicle is fitted with Travel Assist if the multifunction steering wheel has the button Fig. 187.

Driver intervention prompt If you remove your hands from the steering wheel, after a few seconds the system asks you to take over the steering with an indica- tion on the instrument panel display and acoustic warnings.

WARNING The Travel Assist smart technology cannot overcome the limits imposed by the laws of physics and it only works within the limits of the system. If Travel assist is used negli- gently or involuntarily, it may cause serious accidents and injuries. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness. Bear in mind the system limitations and the indications regarding the control of the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) and Lane Assist. Adapt your speed and safety distance to the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic condi- tions. Do not use Travel Assist when visibility is bad, on steep roads, on windy roads or in slippery circumstances (such as snow, ice, rain or loose gravel), or on flooded roads.

Do not use Travel Assist offroad or on roads where the surface is not firm. Travel Assist has been designed for use on paved roads only. Travel Assist does not react to people or animal or vehicles crossing your path or which approach you head-on in the same lane. Brake immediately if Travel Assist does not slow down enough. Brake immediately when a braking mes- sage is displayed on the instrument panel screen. Brake when, after an indication to brake, the vehicle rolls without it being desired. Keep your hands on the steering wheel at all times, to ensure you have control over the steering at all times. The driver is al- ways responsible for keeping the vehicle in its own lane. If possible, do not wear gloves while driv- ing. The system could interpret this as no driving activity. If driver intervention is requested on the instrument panel display, immediately re- sume control of the vehicle. Always be prepared to adjust the speed yourself.

256

Driver assistance systems

Indications on the instrument panel display

Fig. 185 On the instrument panel display: indi- cation with active adjustment.

Fig. 186 On the instrument panel display: con- trol lamps.

Displays on the screen Fig. 185

The adaptive lane guidance function is active.

1

Distance set.

In addition, depending on the equipment, control lamps indicate the status of the sys- tem on the instrument panel display:

Fig. 186 Travel Assist active, adaptive cruise con- trol and adaptive lane guidance function are active. Travel Assist active, adaptive cruise con- trol active and adaptive lane guidance function passive. Travel Assist active, adaptive cruise con- trol passive and adaptive lane guidance function active. Travel Assist active, adaptive cruise con- trol and adaptive lane guidance function are passive. Inactive Travel Assist.

Depending on the equipment, more details may be displayed on the instrument cluster, such as dashed lines or other vehicles on the road.

2

A

B

C

D

E

Operating Travel Assist

Fig. 187 Left side of the multifunction steering wheel: buttons for operating Travel Assist.

Connecting Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel.

The control lamp will light up green. The following warning is also displayed on the instrument panel screen: The Travel Assist maintains the current speed and the preset distance from the vehicle in front. At the same time, if it detects road markings it keeps the vehicle in the lane by moving the steering wheel.

Interrupting the adjustment Briefly press the button on the multifunc- tion steering wheel or press the brake pedal.

The set distance remains saved. 257

Driving

Making other adjustments For all else, Travel Assist is operated like the ACC page 247.

Troubleshooting

Travel Assist is not available or does not work as expected

The control lamp switches on yellow. A rele- vant warning is also displayed on the instru- ment panel screen.

There is a fault in the sensors. Check the causes and solutions described in page 235. The system limits are exceeded. If the fault continues, consult a specialised workshop.

or Take the wheel

The warning lamp comes on white or red, de- pending on the urgency of the intervention. A message is also displayed.

You released the steering wheel for a few seconds. Take hold of the steering wheel and take control of the vehicle. The system limits have been reached. Take hold of the steering wheel and take control of the vehicle.

Travel Assist disconnects automatically Vehicles without Emergency Assist: You have released the steering wheel for a long period.

Abnormal operation. Contact a specialised workshop.

The adjustment is interrupted unexpect- edly Vehicles without lane departure warning: You have turned on the turn signal.

Emergency Assist

How it works

Emergency Assist can detect whether there is inactivity by the driver and can au- tomatically keep the car within the lane and stop it altogether if necessary. This way the system can actively help avoid an accident or reduce its consequences.

Emergency Assist uses the same sensors as Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) and Lane As- sist. Therefore, carefully read the information about the ACC page 245 and the Lane Assist page 253 and take into account the limitations of the systems and the indications given in the information.

If the Emergency Assist detects that the driver does not perform any activity, it requests that

the driver take control of the vehicle. To do this, it emits optical and acoustic warnings and causes braking jolts. The seat belt is tightened (depending on the equipment). The system slows down the vehicle and keeps it in its lane.

You can cancel the adjustment at any time by moving the steering wheel, over-acceler- ating or braking.

While the emergency assistant is in operation, other road users are warned as follows:

The hazard warning lights are switched on soon after.

The following happens as soon as the vehicle stops:

The electronic parking brake is activated.

Connecting and disconnecting Emergency Assist can be connected and dis- connected in the infotainment system, in the assist services menu page 95.

When connected, the Emergency Assist is on- ly activated if the following requirements are met:

The adaptive cruise control (ACC) must be switched on . The Travel Assist or the Lane Assist are switched on.

258

Driver assistance systems

The system has detected a road lane mark- ing on both sides of the vehicle.

Troubleshooting

SOS

Emergency Assist not available

The control lamp switches on yellow. A rele- vant warning is also displayed on the instru- ment panel screen.

The field of vision of the camera is dirty. Clean the windscreen. The visibility of the camera is diminished due to weather factors, e.g. snow, or deter- gent residue or some coating. Clean the windscreen. The visibility of the camera is diminished due to accessories or adhesives. Leave the area around the cameras field of vision free. The camera has been altered or damaged, e.g. because of damage caused to the wind- screen. Check for visible damage. There is a fault or a defect. Switch the en- gine off and on again. If the fault continues, disconnect the Emer- gency Assist and consult a specialised work- shop.

WARNING The smart technology fitted into the Emer- gency Assist cannot overcome the limits

imposed by the laws of physics; it only works within the limits of the system. The driver is responsible for driving the vehicle. Adapt your speed and safety distance to the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit the visibility, weather, road and traffic con- ditions. The Emergency Assist cannot always avoid accidents or serious injuries by itself. If possible, do not wear gloves while driv- ing. The system could interpret this as no driving activity. If the radar sensor or the camera are cov- ered or have been altered or damaged, the system may intervene on the brakes or on the direction in an inappropriate manner. The Emergency Assist does not react to people or animal or vehicles crossing your path or which approach you head-on in the same lane.

WARNING If the Emergency Assist Intervenes inoppor- tunely, serious accidents and injuries may occur. If the vehicle behaves differently than ex- pected, interrupt the intervention of the Emergency Assist by over-accelerating, braking or moving the steering wheel. Do not use Travel Assist or Lane Assist. Have the system checked by a specialised workshop.

Note Automatic interventions by the Emergen- cy Assist on the brakes may be interrupted by pressing the accelerator or brake or by moving the wheel. Hazard warning lights that come on auto- matically can be switched off by pressing the accelerator or the break, moving the steering wheel or pressing the hazard warning light switch. If this occurs, the Emergency Assist may decelerate the vehicle until it comes to a complete stop. When the Emergency Assist is activated, it is only available again after the ignition has been switched off and back on again.

Side Assist with Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)*

Introduction

The lane departure warning (LCA) helps detect traffic that is at the rear of the vehi- cle.

The rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) helps the driver when backing out of a parallel parking spot and when manoeuvring.

259

Driving

WARNING The smart technology incorporated into the blind spot detector (BSD) with parking assistance (RCTA) included cannot over- come the limits imposed by the laws of physics; it only works within the limits of the system. Accidents and severe injury may occur if the blind spot detection system or the rear cross traffic alert are used negli- gently or involuntarily. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness. Adapt your speed and safe distance to the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic condi- tions. Keep your hands on the wheel at all times to be ready to intervene in the steering at any time. Pay attention to the indicator lamps that may come on in the external rear view mir- rors and on the instrument cluster, and fol- low any instructions they may give. The lane departure warning could react to any special constructions that might be present to the sides of the vehicle, e.g. high or irregular dividers. This may cause erro- neous warnings. Never use the lane departure warning on unpaved roads. The lane departure warn- ing has been designed for use on paved roads. Always pay attention to the vehicle's sur- roundings.

The control lamps of the lane departure warning may have limited functionality due to solar radiation.

Note If the blind spot detector with parking as- sistant does not work as described in this chapter, stop using it and contact a speci- alised workshop.

Control lamp

Fig. 188 Control lamp of the lane departure warning.

Fig. 189 Control lamp of the lane departure warning.

indicator lamp in external rear view mir- rors:

It lights up

It turns on once briefly: the lane departure warning is activated and ready to operate, i.e. when activating the system.

It lights up continuously: the lane departure warning has detected a vehicle in the blind spot.

Flashes

A vehicle has been detected in the adjacent lane and the turn signal has been engaged in the direction of the detected vehicle .

For vehicles that are also equipped with Lane Assist page 253, a warning to switch lanes will also ap- pear even though the turn signal has not been en- gaged (Lane Assist Plus page 261).

260

Driver assistance systems

The control lamps light up when the ignition is switched on and should turn off after approxi- mately 2 seconds. This is the time taken for the function check.

If there are no indications from the control lamp of the lane departure warning, this means that the lane departure warning has not detected any other vehicles at the rear area .

When the exterior lighting is low, the intensity with which the control lamps come on is dim- med. The user can modify the intensity of the control lamps with up to 5 levels in the info- tainment system menu.

WARNING If the warning lamps and the corresponding messages are ignored when they light up, the vehicle may stall in traffic and cause accidents and severe injuries. Never ignore the warning lamps or mes- sages. Carry out the necessary operations.

CAUTION Failure to heed the control lamps and cor- responding text messages when they light up may result in damage to the vehicle.

Lane departure warning (Side As- sist)

The lane departure warning uses radar sen- sors to monitor the areas behind the vehicle page 8. The system does this by measur- ing the vehicle's distance from other vehicles and its speed differential. The lane departure warning will not work at speeds of less than approx. 15 km/h (9 mph). The system uses optical signals in the external rear view mir- rors to notify the driver.

The lane width is not detected individually, but is rather pre-configured in the system. Thus if you are driving in wide lanes or in be- tween two lanes, the indications may be in- correct. Furthermore, the system can detect vehicles driving in the lane next to you (if there are any), and can also detect station- ary objects such as dividers, and thus give an incorrect indication.

Indication on the exterior mirror The control lamp provides an indication on the corresponding side regarding the traffic situation behind the vehicle, if it is deemed to be critical. The control lamp of the left-hand side Fig. 188 indicates the traffic situation to the rear left of the vehicle, and the control lamp of the right-hand side Fig. 189, indi- cates the traffic situation to the rear right of the vehicle.

In the case of retrofitted tinted windows or windows with tinted film, the indications of the external mirrors may not be seen clearly or correctly.

Keep the external mirrors clean and free of snow and ice, and do not cover them with ad- hesives or other similar materials.

Lane assist Plus.

The Lane Assist Plus function can be used by activating the Lane Assist page 253 and Side Assist functions. In this case its functions are expanded as described below.

If the driver initiates a lane change manoeu- vre in a potential critical situation:

The lamp flashes in the corresponding rear- view mirror even though the turn signal has not been activated. The steering wheel vibrates to warn the driver of the risk of collision. torque is applied to correct the steering and return the vehicle to its lane.

261

Driving

Driving situations

Fig. 190 Schematic representation: Pass- ing situation with traffic behind the vehicle. Indication from the blind spot detector in the left-hand external mirror.

Fig. 191 Schematic representation: Situa- tion of passing and then moving into the right- hand lane. Indication from the blind spot de- tector in the right-hand external mirror.

In the following situations, an indication will be displayed in the external mirror Fig. 190 (arrow) or Fig. 191 (arrow):

When being overtaken by another vehicle Fig. 190 . When passing another vehicle Fig. 191 with a speed differential of approx. 10 km/h (6 mph). If the vehicle is passing at a considera- bly higher speed, no indication will be dis- played.

The faster a vehicle approaches, the sooner an indication will be displayed in the exterior mirror, because Side Assist takes into account the different in speed compared to other ve- hicles. Thus even though the distance from the other vehicle is identical, the indication will appear sooner in some cases and later in others.

Physical limitations inherent to the system In some situations the lane departure warning may not interpret the traffic situation correct- ly. I.e. in the following situations:

on tight bends; in the case of lanes with different widths; in areas with significant gradient changes; in adverse weather conditions; in the case of special constructions to the side of the vehicle, e.g., high or irregular divid- ers.

262

Driver assistance systems

Rear cross traffic alert (RCTA)

Fig. 192 Schematic representation of the rear cross traffic alert assistant: zone monitored around the vehicle while leaving a parking space.

Park Assist uses the radar sensors on the rear bumper page 235 to monitor the traffic crossing behind the vehicle as it backs out of a parallel parking space or as it is being man- oeuvred, for example in very low visibility con- ditions.

When the system detects a relevant vehicle on the road that is approaching the rear of the vehicle Fig. 192, an acoustic alarm may sound if the relevance so requires it.

In addition to the acoustic alarm, the driver is also informed by means of a visual signal on infotainment system display. This signal is dis-

played in the form of a red or yellow strip at the back of the image of the vehicle on the in- fotainment system screen. This strip displays the side of the vehicle towards which traffic is approaching in transverse direction1).

Automatic braking to reduce damages If the rear cross traffic alert detects that someone else on the road is approaching the rear of the vehicle and the driver does not step on the brake, the system will engage the brakes automatically.

The parking system helps the driver by auto- matically engaging the brakes to reduce any damage. The automatic intervention on the brakes takes place when driving in reverse at approx. 1-12 km/h (1-7 mph). After detecting that the vehicle is stationary, the system keeps it that way for around 2 seconds.

After automatically braking to reduce dam- age, the system will not be able to automati- cally brake again for approximately 10 sec- onds.

You can interrupt the automatic braking by stepping hard on the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal in order to regain control of the vehicle.

WARNING The smart technology incorporated into the rear cross traffic alert cannot over- come the limits imposed by the laws of physics; it only works within the limits of the system. The parking assistant function should not tempt you into taking any risks. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness. The system should never be used in limi- ted visibility conditions or complicated traffic, e.g., in high-traffic areas or when crossing multiple lanes. Be sure to always be aware of the vehi- cle's surroundings, since the system often fails to detect things such as bicycles or pedestrians. The rear cross traffic alert itself will not brake the vehicle to a complete stop.

Managing the assist systems

Enabling and disabling the assist systems The blind spot detector with parking assistant can be switched on and off by accessing the Assistance systems menu on the dash panel display using the steering wheel controls. If the vehicle is equipped with a multifunction

1) It is only displayed if the vehicle is equipped with a parking system.

263

Driving

camera, it can also be accessed by means of the driver assistance systems key located on the main beam headlight lever.

Open the Assistants menu. Side Assist Rear cross traffic alert

If the verification box on the instrument panel or the infotainment system is checked , the functionality will be automatically activated when switching on the ignition.

When the Side Assist is ready to operate, the indicator turns on briefly on the exterior rear view mirrors as confirmation.

When the vehicle is restarted, the last adjust- ment in the system will remain active.

Trailer mode Side Assist and the rear cross traffic alert are automatically deactivated and cannot be switched on if the factory-fitted tow-bar is electrically connected to a trailer or similar device.

As soon as the driver starts to drive with a trailer connected electrically to the vehicle, a message is displayed on the instrument pan- el display indicating that the Side Assist and the rear cross traffic alert are switched off. Once the trailer has been unhooked from the vehicle, if you want to use the Side Assist and

the rear cross traffic alert, you will have to re- activate them in the corresponding menu.

If the tow-bar is not factory fitted, Side Assist and the rear cross traffic alert should be switched off manually when driving with a trailer.

Braking and parking

Braking system

Control lamps

It lights up red

Brake fluid level too low page 320 or fault in the brake system. Do not carry on driving!

It lights up red

Electronic parking brake page 266. The warning lamp turns off when the handbrake is re- leased.

It lights up green

Auto Hold function activated page 268.

It lights up yellow

Front brake pads worn. Contact a specialised workshop immediately.

WARNING If the brake warning lamp does not go out or if it lights up when driving, the brake fluid level in the reservoir is too lo so there is a risk of an accident page 320, Brake fluid. Stop the vehicle and do not drive on. Obtain technical assistance.

264

Braking and parking

If the brake warning lamp lights up to- gether with the ABS lamp this could be due to an ABS fault. When this function fails, the rear wheels can lock up. Under certain circumstances, the rear of the vehi- cle may skid, with the danger of losing con- trol. Stop and seek technical assistance. If the lamp lights up, alone or accom- panied by a warning message on the in- strument panel display, please go immedi- ately to a specialised workshop to check the brake pads and to replace them if they are worn.

Information about the brakes

New brake pads For the first 200 to 300 km (100 to 200 miles), new brake pads have not yet reached their maximum braking capacity, and need to be run in first. However, you can compen- sate for the slightly reduced braking effect by applying more pressure on the brake pedal. Avoid overloading the brakes while running them in.

Wear The rate of wear on the brake pads depends a great deal on how you drive and the condi- tions in which the vehicle is operated. This is a particular problem in urban traffic and short stretches, or with very sporty driving.

Depending on the speed, the braking force and the environmental conditions (e.g. tem- perature, air humidity, etc.) noises may be produced when braking.

Wet roads or road salt In certain situations (for example, on driving through flooded areas, in severe downpours or after washing the vehicle) the braking ac- tion could be delayed if the discs and pads are damp, or frozen in winter. In this case the brakes should be dried by pressing the brake pedal several times.

At high speed and with the windscreen wipers activated, the brake pads will briefly touch the brake discs. This takes place, although unnoticeable to the driver, at regular intervals to improve the response time of the brakes when they are wet.

The effectiveness of the brakes can also be temporarily reduced if the vehicle is driven for some distance without using the brakes when there is a lot of salt on the road in winter. The layer of salt that accumulates on the discs and pads can be removed by gently apply- ing the brakes a few times.

Corrosion There may be a tendency for corrosion to form on the discs and dirt to build up on the brake pads if the vehicle is used infrequently or the brakes are not used very often.

If the brakes are not used frequently, or if rust has formed on the disks, it is advisable to clean off the pads and disks by braking firmly a few times at a moderately high speed .

Fault in the brake system If the brake pedal travel should ever increase suddenly, this may mean that one of the two brake circuits has failed. Drive immediately to the nearest specialised workshop and have the fault repaired. Drive there slowly and re- member that you will have to apply more pressure on the brake pedal and allow for longer stopping distances.

Low brake fluid level Malfunctions can occur in the brake system if the brake fluid level is too low. The brake fluid level is monitored electronically.

Brake servo The brake servo increases the pressure you apply to the brake pedal. It works only when the engine is running.

WARNING Any anomaly in the brake system can in- crease the braking distance, with the re- sulting risk of an accident. New brake pads and discs must be run in and do not have the correct friction during the first 200 km (124 miles). This reduced

265

Driving

braking capacity may be offset by pressing on the brake pedal a little harder. If you are driving on roads which have been salted, braking effectiveness may be decreased. Brakes can overheat if used excessively on slopes. Before driving down a long steep slope, it is advisable to reduce speed and change down into a lower gear or range. Therefore, using the engine brake relieves the brakes. Gentle continuous braking causes the brakes to overheat and the braking dis- tance will increase. Apply and then release the brakes alternately. Apply the brakes heavily to clean the brake system only in a suitable traffic situa- tion. Do not put other road users in danger: there is risk of causing an accident. Ensure the vehicle does not move while in neutral, when the engine is stopped. The braking distance is increased considerably when the brake servo is not active. If the brake is subjected to high stresses, vapour bubbles may form in the brake sys- tem's pipes. This reduces the efficiency of the brakes. Non-standard or damaged front spoilers could restrict the airflow to the brakes and cause them to overheat. Before purchasing accessories please read the relevant in- structions.

CAUTION Never let the brakes drag by leaving your foot on the pedal when it is not neces- sary to brake. This overheats the brakes, re- sulting in longer stopping distances and greater wear. Before driving down a long, steep gradi- ent, it is advisable to reduce speed and se- lect a lower gear. This makes use of engine braking and relieves the brakes. If you still have to use the brakes, it is better to brake firmly at intervals than to apply the brakes continuously.

Note If the brake servo is out of action, for ex- ample when the car is being towed, you will have to press the brake pedal considerably harder than normal to make up for the lack of servo assistance. If you wish to equip the vehicle with ac- cessories such as a front spoiler or wheel covers, it is important that the flow of air to the front wheels is not obstructed, other- wise the brakes can overheat.

Electronic parking brake

Fig. 193 In the lower part of the centre con- sole: electronic parking brake button

The electronic parking brake replaces the handbrake .

Applying the electronic parking brake The electronic parking brake can be activa- ted whenever the vehicle is at a standstill, even when the ignition is switched off. Acti- vate it whenever you leave or park the vehi- cle.

Pull and hold the Fig. 193 button. The parking brake is activated when the control light of button Fig. 193 (arrow) is on and the red control lamp on the instrument panel is always on. Release the button.

266

Braking and parking

Disconnecting the electronic parking brake Switch the ignition on. Press the button Fig. 193. At the same time step hard on the brake pedal or, if the engine is running, press the accelerator pedal slightly. The control lamp of button Fig. 193 (ar- row) and the red control lamp on the in- strument panel go out.

Automatic release of the electronic park- ing brake upon moving off The electronic parking brake is automatically switched off when starting if, after the driver's door is closed and the driver's seat belt fas- tened, any of the following situations take place:

In vehicles with automatic gearboxes: a gear is engaged or changed to another and the accelerator is pressed gently. In vehicles with manual gearboxes: the clutch pedal is pressed fully before starting off and the accelerator is pressed gently. To facilitate certain manoeuvres there are exceptions that allow the automatic parking brake to be released without the driver's seat belt being fastened.

The parking brake can be prevented from be- ing automatically released by continuously

pulling up the Fig. 193 switch when starting off.

The electronic parking brake is not discon- nected until the button is released. This can facilitate starting off when a heavy load is towed page 294.

Automatic activation of the electronic parking brake when exiting the vehicle in- correctly In vehicles with automatic transmission, the electronic parking brake is activated auto- matically when exiting the vehicle incorrectly if:

The selector lever is in the D/S or R position or in the Tiptronic selector gate. AND: the vehicle is stationary. AND: the driver door is open.

Emergency brake function Only use the emergency brake function if you are unable to stop the vehicle with the foot brake .

Pull and hold the Fig. 193 button in this position to forcefully stop the vehicle. At the same time, an acoustic warning can be heard. To stop the braking process, release the button or press the accelerator.

WARNING The improper use of the electronic parking brake can cause accidents and serious in- jury. Never use the electronic parking brake to stop the vehicle, unless it is an emergency. Braking distances can be considerably lon- ger, since, under certain circumstances, only the rear wheels brake. Always use the foot brake. Never accelerate from the engine when a gear range or a gear is engaged and the engine is running. The vehicle could move, even if the electronic parking brake is acti- vated. When the electronic parking brake is switched on or off, there is a slight move- ment of the brake pedal. Be careful not to position your foot under the pedal.

CAUTION To prevent the vehicle from unintentionally moving when parking it, first apply the electronic parking brake and then remove your foot from the brake pedal.

Note In vehicles with a manual gearbox, re- leasing the clutch and accelerating at the same time automatically disconnects the electronic parking brake.

267

Driving

If the 12-volt vehicle battery is flat, it will not be possible to switch off the electronic parking brake. Use the jump-start page 50. When the electronic parking brake is ap- plied or released, noises may be heard. The system performs automatic and au- dible tests sporadically in the parked vehi- cle if some time elapses without the elec- tronic parking brake being used.

Auto Hold Function 3 Not valid for the 1.4L 110 kW engine with 8- speed automatic transmission

Fig. 194 In the lower part of the centre con- sole: Auto Hold function button.

The Fig. 194 button's indicator lamp re- mains on while the Auto Hold function is switched on.

Once connected, the Auto Hold function as- sists the driver in keeping the vehicle station- ary at repeated intervals or for a certain peri- od of time with the engine running, for exam- ple, when going up a slope, when stopped at traffic lights or in heavy traffic with intermit- tent stops.

When connected, the Auto Hold function au- tomatically prevents the vehicle from rolling when stationary without pressing the brake pedal.

After detecting that the vehicle is stationary and the brake pedal has been released, the Auto Hold function holds the vehicle. The driv- er can lift their foot off the brake pedal.

When the driver touches the accelerator pedal or accelerates slightly to continue driv- ing, the Auto Hold function releases the brake. The vehicle moves according to the slope of the road.

If the vehicle is stationary and one of the con- ditions required by the Auto Hold function is impaired, it disconnects itself and the button's control light goes out Fig. 194. The elec- tronic parking brake connects automatically, if necessary, to park the vehicle safely .

Conditions for keeping the vehicle station- ary with the Auto Hold function The driver door must be closed. The driver's seat belt must be fastened.

The engine is running.

Switching the Auto Hold function on and off Press the button. The control lamp on the button goes out when the Auto Hold func- tion is switched off.

Automatically engaging and disengaging the Auto Hold function If the Auto Hold function was switched on with the button before switching off the ignition, the function will remain on the next time the ignition is switched on.

If the Auto Hold function was not switched on, it will automatically remain off next time the ignition is engaged.

The Auto Hold function connects automat- ically if the following conditions are met (all points must be met at the same time ):

The vehicle is kept stationary with the brake pedal on a flat surface or on a slope. The engine rotates correctly.

The Auto Hold function is automatically turned off if the following conditions are met:

If any of the conditions mentioned on page 268, Conditions for keeping

1.

2.

1.

268

Braking and parking

the vehicle stationary with the Au- to Hold function are no longer met. If the engine is running irregularly or an anomaly is detected. If the engine is turned off or stalls. Manual gearbox: The clutch and the ac- celerator are pressed at the same time. Automatic gearbox: If the accelerator is pressed Automatic gearbox: If any of the tyres has only minimal contact with the ground, e.g. in the case of axle articula- tion.

WARNING The smart technology incorporated into the Auto Hold function cannot defy the laws of physics; it only works within the lim- its of the system. The greater convenience provided by the Auto Hold function should never tempt you to take any risk that may compromise safety. Never leave the vehicle running and with the Auto Hold function switched on. The Auto Hold function cannot always keep the vehicle stationary uphill or down- hill or stop it sufficiently, for example, on slippery or frozen surfaces.

2.

3. 4.

5.

Note Before entering a car wash, always switch off the Auto Hold function, because if the electronic parking brake is automatically connected, it may cause damage.

Stabilisation and brake as- sistance systems

Control lamps

It lights up

Fault in the ESC or ABS, or disconnection caused by the system. The ESC works in combination with the ABS. If the ABS fails, the lamp also lights up.

Flashes

ESC or ASR activated.

It lights up

ASR switched off manually.

Or: ESC in Sport mode page 271.

It lights up

ABS faulty or does not work.

The control lamps light up together when the ignition is switched on and should turn off af- ter approximately 2 seconds. This is the time taken for the function check.

Brake assist systems

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) The ESC helps to improve safety. It reduces the tendency to skid and improves the stabili- ty and roadholding of the vehicle. The ESC detects critical handling situations, such as vehicle understeer or oversteer, or wheelspin on the driving wheels. It stabilises the vehicle by braking individual wheels or by reducing the engine torque. The warning lamp will flash on the instrument panel when the ESC is intervening .

The ESC includes the anti-lock brake system (ABS), the hydraulic brake assist (HBA), the traction control system (ASR), electronic dif- ferential lock (EDS), electronic torque control (XDS) and tractor-trailer sway mitigation*.

ESC also helps stabilise the vehicle by changing the torque.

The ASR can be deactivated when wheel spin is desirable page 271.

Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ABS prevents the wheels from locking up un- der braking until the vehicle has reached a

269

Driving

virtual standstill. You can continue to steer the vehicle even when the brakes are on full. Keep your foot on the brake pedal and do not pump the brakes. You will feel the brake pedal pulsate while the ABS is working.

If the running gear or brake system is modi- fied, the effectiveness of the ABS could be se- verely limited.

Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA) The brake assist system can reduce the re- quired braking distance. The braking force is automatically boosted if you press the brake pedal quickly in an emergency. You must keep pressing the brake pedal until the dan- ger has passed.

Traction control system (ASR) In the event of the wheels spinning, the ASR reduces the engine torque to adapt to the road condition. This helps the car to start moving, accelerate or climb a gradient.

Electronic differential lock (EDL) When the EDL detects wheelspin, it brakes the spinning wheel and directs the power to the other driven wheel. This function is active up to approximately 100 km/h (62 mph).

To prevent the disc brake of the braked wheel from overheating, the EDL cuts out automati- cally if subjected to excessive loads. The ve- hicle can still be driven. The EDL will switch on

again automatically when the brake has cooled down.

Tractor-trailer sway mitigation* If the vehicle is pulling a trailer, it will control the following: tractor-trailers tend to sway. When the swaying of the trailer is felt by the vehicle and detected by the ESC, it will auto- matically brake the towing vehicle within the limits of the system and mitigate the sway. Tractor-trailer sway mitigation is not available in all countries page 300.

Electronic engine torque management (XDS) When taking a curve, the driveshaft differen- tial allows the outer wheel to turn at a higher speed than the inner wheel. In this way, the wheel that is turning faster (outer wheel) re- ceives less drive torque than the inner wheel. This may mean that in certain situations the torque delivered to the inner wheel is too high, causing the wheels to spin. On the other hand, the outer wheel is receiving a lower drive torque than it could transmit. This can cause a loss of grip on the drive axle, in this case the front axle, which results in under- steer or lengthening of the trajectory.

The XDS can detect and correct this effect via the sensors and signals of the ESC.

Via the ESC, the XDS will brake the inside wheel and counter the excess driving torque

of that wheel. This means that the requested trajectory is much more precise.

XDS works in combination with the ESC and is always active, even when ASR is switched off, or when the ESC is in Sport mode or discon- nected.

Multi-collision brake The multi-collision brake consists of automat- ic braking activated by the Airbag control unit. It is activated when, in the event of an accident, the Airbag control unit detects de- celerations above the activation level, and braking is managed by the ESC system.

In the event of an accident, the multi-collision brake can help the driver by braking to avoid the risk of skidding during the accident and causing other collisions.

The following actions control automatic brak- ing during the accident:

When the driver presses the accelerator, the automatic braking does not take place. When the braking pressure through press- ing the brake pedal is greater than the sys- tems braking pressure the vehicle will brake automatically. Multi-collision braking will not be available if there is an anomaly in the ESC system.

270

Braking and parking

WARNING Driving at high speed on icy, slippery wet ground can result in loss of vehicle control and serious injury to the driver and passen- gers. The ESC, ABS, ASR, EDS or electronic tor- que management are not in a position to overcome the limits imposed by physics. Always bear this in mind, especially on wet or slippery roads. If you notice the systems cutting in, you should reduce your speed immediately to suit the road and traffic conditions. Do not be encouraged to take risks by the presence of more safety sys- tems. If you do, an accident may occur. Please remember that the accident risk always increases if you drive fast, espe- cially in corners or on a slippery road, or if you follow too close behind the vehicle in front of you. The ESC, ABS, brake assist, EDS and the electronic torque control sys- tem cannot prevent accidents: risk of acci- dents! Accelerate with caution on slippery sur- faces (for example, icy or snow-covered). Despite the control systems, the driven wheels could spin, affecting the stability of the vehicle: risk of accident!

Note The ABS and ASR will only operate cor- rectly if the four wheels have identical tyres. Any differences in the rolling radius of the tyres can cause the system to re- duce engine power when this is not desired. The regulating processes of the systems can make noises due to their operation. If the warning lamp or lights up, there could be a fault page 88. Any modifications made to the vehicle (for example, to the engine, brake system, running gear or to the combination of wheels and tyres) may affect the operation of the ABS, ASR and EDS.

Connecting and disconnecting the ESC and ASR

The ESC is switched on automatically when the engine is started, and only works when the engine is running and includes the ABS, EDS and ASR systems.

The ASR function should only be switched off in situations where traction is insufficient.

Depending on the finishes and versions, it is possible to only switch off the ASR, or to switch on the ESC in Sport mode.

Switching the ASR off and on The ASR can be switched off and on using the infotainment system page 91. In vehi- cles with a driver information system* the corresponding indication will be displayed.

When the ASR is switched off, the indicator lamp lights up on the instrument cluster.

Disconnecting and connecting the ESC in Sport mode In Sport mode, the ESC can be discon- nected and connected using the infotainment system page 91. In vehicles with a driver information system* the corresponding indi- cation will be displayed.

When Sport mode is connected, the inter- ventions of the ESC to stabilise the vehicle, and the anti-slip regulation (ASR1)) interven- tions are limited. In addition, the control lamp lights up on the instrument panel.

1) In vehicles with 4-wheel drive, the ASR is dis- connected completely .

271

Driving

ESC in Offroad mode1)

Turn the Driving Experience button to select the Offroad mode and connect it page 230. The interventions of the ESC, as well as of the ASR, EDS and the ABS, adapt to irregular terrain.

In the following exceptional situations it may make sense to activate the Offroad mode to allow the wheels to spin:

When swinging the vehicle to get it un- stuck. Driving in deep snow or on loose surfaces. When driving on rough terrain with much of the car's weight is lifted off the wheels (axle articulation). Steep descents with braking on unpaved terrain.

For your safety we recommend that you turn off the Offroad mode when it is not absolute- ly necessary.

To disconnect the Offroad mode, select a different driving mode.

ESC in Snow mode1)

Turn the Driving Experience button to select the Snow mode and connect it page 230. Traction control system (ASR)

interventions adjust to the adhesion of snowy roads.

To disconnect the Snow mode, select a dif- ferent driving mode.

WARNING The ESC Sport mode should be activated only when traffic conditions and the ability of the driver allow it. Danger of skidding! With ESC in Sport mode, the stabilising function will be limited to allow for a sporti- er drive. The driving wheels could spin and the vehicle could skid.

WARNING You should only activate the Offroad Mode or disable the ASR if the driver is experi- enced and if permitted by the traffic condi- tions. Danger of skidding! The stabilisation function is limited when the Offroad profile is switched on. In partic- ular, if the road is too smooth and slippery, the driving wheels could spin and the vehi- cle could skid.

Note If the ASR is switched off or the Sport mode is selected, the cruise control* is switched off.

Parking

To park the vehicle

When parking your vehicle, all legal require- ments should be observed.

Always note the following points when park- ing the vehicle:

Park the vehicle on a suitable surface . Connect the electronic parking brake page 266. For an automatic gearbox, move the selec- tor lever to position P. Stop the engine and turn off the ignition. Turn the steering wheel slightly to engage the steering lock. With a manual gearbox, engage first gear on flat ground and slopes, or even reverse gear on hills, and release the clutch pedal. When leaving the vehicle, take all keys with you.

Additionally, on steep slopes and inclines Before switching off the engine, rotate the steering wheel so that if the vehicle should move, it will be held by the kerb.

1) Only for 4Drive models. 272

Help with parking and manoeuvring

On slopes, turn the front wheels so that they are against the edge of the kerb. Uphill, turn the wheels towards the centre of the road.

WARNING Avoid parking the vehicle where the hot exhaust system could ignite inflammable materials, such as dry grass, low bushes, spilt fuel or flammable materials. Do not leave passengers inside a closed vehicle, they may not be able to open doors or windows. Locked doors hinder the possibility of a rescue. Children should not be left alone in the vehicle. They could tamper with the hand- brake or the gears, which could cause the vehicle to move without control. Depending on weather conditions, it may become extremely hot or cold inside the vehicle. This can be fatal.

Help with parking and ma- noeuvring

Assisted parking system (Park Assist)*

Introduction

The parking assist system is an additional function of the ParkPilot page 279 and helps the driver find a suitable parking space from among the following types:

park driving in reverse in suitable perpen- dicular and parallel spaces, park driving forwards in suitable perpendic- ular spaces, exit a parking space driving forwards from a parallel space.

In vehicles with a Park Assist system and fac- tory infotainment system, the front, rear and side areas are represented, and the position of obstacles is shown relative to the vehicle.

The Park Assist system is subject to certain limitations inherent to the system and its use requires special attention by the driver .

WARNING The technology used in the park assist sys- tem involves a series of limitations inherent

in the actual system and in the use of ultra- sonic sensors. The use of Park Assist should never tempt you to take any risk that may compromise safety. The system is not a re- placement for driver awareness. Any accidental movement of the vehicle could result in serious injury. Adapt your speed and driving style at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. Certain surfaces of objects and gar- ments do not reflect the ultrasound sen- sors' signals. The system cannot detect, at least correctly, these objects or people wearing such clothes. Ultrasound sensor signals may be affec- ted by external sound sources. In certain circumstances this may prevent them from detecting people or objects. The ultrasound sensors may have blind spots in which obstacles and people are not detected. Monitor the area around the vehicle at all times, since the ultrasound sensors do not detect small children, animals or certain objects in all situations.

WARNING Quick turns of the steering wheel when parking or exiting a parking space with Park Assist can cause serious injury.

273

Driving

Do not hold the steering wheel during manoeuvres to park or exit a parking space until the system requests it. Doing so disa- bles the system during the manoeuvre, re- sulting in the parking being cancelled.

CAUTION In certain circumstances, the ultrasonic sensors do not detect objects such as trail- er tongues, bars, fences, posts or thin trees, or an open (or opening) rear lid, which could damage the vehicle. Retrofitting of certain accessories to the vehicle, such as a bicycle rack, may inter- fere with the operation of the Park Assist system and cause damage. The Park Assist system uses as a refer- ence parked vehicles, curbs and other ob- jects. Make sure that the tyres and wheels are not damaged while parking. If necessa- ry, opportunely interrupt the parking ma- noeuvre to avoid damaging the vehicle. The ultrasound sensors on the bumper may be damaged or shifted in the event of a collision, for example, when entering or exiting a parking space. If you use high-pressure or vapour equip- ment to clean the ultrasound sensors, do not apply it directly unless very briefly and always from a distance of more than 10 cm. A registration plate or plate holder on the front with larger than the space for the reg-

istration plate, or a registration plate that is curved or warped can cause: False detections. The sensors to lose visibility. Cancellation of the parking manoeuvre

or defective parking. If one of the ultrasonic sensors is dam- aged, the area corresponding to that group of sensors (front or rear) is deactivated and cannot be activated until the fault is cor- rected. However, you can still use the sen- sors of the other bumper as per usual. If there is a fault in the system, consult a spe- cialist workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.

Note In order to guarantee good system oper- ation, keep the ultrasound sensors of the bumper clean, free of snow or ice, and do not cover them with adhesives or other ob- jects. Certain sources of noise, such as rough asphalt or paving stones and the noise of other vehicles can induce the Park Assist system or ParkPilot to give erroneous warn- ings. The presence of metal objects can al- so affect the manoeuvre. In order to become familiar with the sys- tem and its functions, SEAT recommends that you practice operating the Park Assist system in an area where there is not too much traffic or in a car park.

Description of the parking assist system

Fig. 195 In the upper part of the centre con- sole: button to switch on the Park Assist system.

The components of the Park Assist system are the ultrasonic sensors located in the front and rear bumpers, the Fig. 195 to switch the system on and off and the messages on the instrument cluster display.

Prerequisites for parking The traction control system (ASR) must be turned on page 271. Speed when passing next to the parking space (parallel parking): do not exceed ap- prox. 40 km/h (25 mph). Speed when passing next to the parking space (angle parking): do not exceed approx. 20 km/h (12 mph).

274

Help with parking and manoeuvring

Keep a distance between 0.5 and 2.0 me- tres when driving past the parking space. Space length (parallel parking): vehicle length + 0.8 meters. Space width (angle parking): vehicle width + 0.8 meters. Do not exceed approximately 7 km/h (4 mph) when parking.

Requirements for leaving the parking space (only for parallel parking) The traction control system (ASR) must be turned on page 271. Space length: length of the vehicle + 0.5 metres. Do not exceed approximately 7 km/h (4 mph) when exiting the parking space.

Prematurely stopping or automatically in- terrupting the manoeuvres for parking or exiting a parking space Park Assist interrupts the manoeuvres for parking or exiting a parking space in any of the following cases:

Press the button. The speed exceeds approximately 7 km/h (4 mph). The driver takes control of the steering wheel.

The parking manoeuvre does not end within 6 minutes from the activation of automatic steering. There is a fault in the system (the system is temporarily unavailable). The ASR is disconnected. ASR or ESC intervene with regulation. The driver door is opened.

To restart the manoeuvre it is necessary that none of these things occur and that the button is pressed again.

Special characteristics The Park Assist system is subject to certain limitations inherent to the system. For exam- ple, it is therefore not possible to enter or exit a parking space on sharp bends.

While entering or exiting a parking space, a brief signal sounds to prompt the driver to change between forward and reverse gears (depending on the case). In successive ma- noeuvres, the assistant tells the driver to change gears, at the latest, when the contin- uous audible signal is given (object present at a distance of 30 cm) by Park Pilot.

When the Park Assist system turns the steer- ing wheel with the vehicle stationary, the in- strument panel also displays the symbol . Keep the brake pedal depressed while the symbol remains on the dash panel display to turn the wheels with the vehicle stopped. This

way, the system will require fewer manoeu- vres to complete the parking action.

Trailer mode The Park Assist system cannot be switched on if the factory-fitted towing bracket page 294 is electrically connected to a trailer.

After changing a wheel If, after changing a wheel, the vehicle stops entering and exiting parking spaces correct- ly, the circumference of the new wheel may be different and the system may need to adapt to it. The adaptation is automatic and takes place during driving. Making turns slow- ly and in both directions (20 km/h [12 mph]) for a few minutes may contribute to this adaptation process in Introduction on page 273.

275

Driving

Selecting a parking mode

Fig. 196 On the instrument panel display: view of the parking assist system with reduced view.

Fig. 197 On the instrument panel display: indi- cation of parking modes.

Parking assist has the following 3 parking modes:

Reverse parallel parking. Reverse angle parking. Forward angle parking.

Selecting a parking mode after passing in front of the space After activating the Park Assist system and af- ter detecting a parking space, the display on the instrument panel proposes a parking mode. The Park Assist system selects the parking mode automatically. The selected mode is shown on the instrument panel dis- play Fig. 196. The reduced display of other possible parking modes is also shown Fig. 197. If the mode selected by the sys- tem does not correspond to the desired mode, you can select another mode by pressing the button Fig. 195.

The necessary conditions to park with Park Assist have to be met page 274. Press the button. A control lamp on the button lights up when the system is switched on. Additionally, the selected parking mode is shown on the instrument panel display and the reduced display shows another parking mode it can be changed to. Turn on the corresponding turn signal to- wards the side of the road where you are parking. The instrument panel displays the side corresponding to the road. By default, if

the turn signal is not on, it parks on the right in the direction of traffic. If necessary, press the button again to change to the next parking mode. Once you have switched to all possible parking modes, if the button is pressed again, the system switches off. Press the button again to switch the sys- tem back on. Follow the instructions displayed on the in- strument panel while paying attention to traf- fic and drive the vehicle past the parking space.

Special case of perpendicular parking space to park forwards without driving past first The necessary conditions to park with Park Assist have to be met page 274. Drive forward towards the parking space while paying attention to traffic and stop the vehicle. Press the button once. A control lamp on the button lights up when the system is switched on. Additionally, the selected parking mode is shown on the instrument panel display without reduced display. Release the steering wheel in Intro- duction on page 273.

276

Help with parking and manoeuvring

Parking with the parking assist system

Fig. 198 On the instrument panel display: paral- lel parking. Finding a parking space. Park- ing position. Manoeuvring.

Fig. 199 On the instrument panel display: angle parking. Finding a parking space. Parking position. Manoeuvring.

Message to move forwards Your vehicle Parking space detected Message to park Message to press the brake pedal Progress bar

1

2

3

4

5

6

The necessary conditions have to be met to park with Park Assist page 274 and the parking mode must be selected page 276.

Parking Look at the display on the instrument panel to see if the space has been detected as ap- propriate and if the correct position for park- ing has been reached Fig. 198 or Fig. 199 . The space is considered

appropriate if the display on the instrument panel shows the message to park 4 . Stop the vehicle and, after a brief pause, engage the reverse gear. Release the steering wheel in Intro- duction on page 273. Please note the following message: Inter- vention in active direction. Watch your surroundings!. While you keep watch

277

Driving

around you, carefully start accelerating up to no more than 7 km/h (4 mph). During the parking manoeuvre, the system only takes charge of the steering. You, as the driver, have to accelerate, engage the clutch if necessary, change gears and brake. Reverse until the continuous ParkPilot sig- nal sounds; OR: reverse until the indication to move forward appears on the instrument panel display Fig. 198 or Fig. 199 ; OR: reverse until the Park Assist finish- ed message appears on the instrument panel display. The progress bar 6 indicates the distance to cover page 278. Press the brake pedal until the parking as- sist system completes the steering wheel turns; OR: until the symbol goes out on the instrument panel screen. Select first gear. Move forward until the continuous ParkPilot signal sounds; OR: move forward until the re- verse indication appears on the instrument panel display. The Park Assist system steers the vehicle forward and back until it centres it in the space Fig. 198 or Fig. 199 . For best results, wait at the end of each manoeuvre until the Park Assist system has finished turning the steering wheel. The park- ing manoeuvre ends when a corresponding message is displayed on the instrument pan- el and, in some cases, an acoustic signal sounds.

Progress bars The progress bar Fig. 198 6 and Fig. 199 6 on the screen of the instrument panel displays the relative distance to be covered. The greater the distance, the fuller the progress bar. When driving forward, the content of the pro- gress bar decreases upwards, and when re- versing, it decreases downwards.

Note If the manoeuvre is terminated prematurely during parking, the result may not be the best.

Leaving a parking space with the parking assist system (only for par- allel parking)

Fig. 200 On the instrument panel display: exit a parallel parking space.

Your vehicle in reverse gear Message giving the proposed manoeuvre to exit the parking space Progress bar to indicate the distance left to cover

Leaving a parking space (parallel parking) The necessary conditions to exit a parking space with Park Assist have to be met page 275.

Press the button Fig. 195. A control lamp on the button lights up when the sys- tem is switched on. Turn on the corresponding turn signal to- wards the road you will enter when exiting the parking space. Select reverse gear. Release the steering wheel in Intro- duction on page 273. Please note the fol- lowing message: Intervention in active steering. Watch your surroundings!. While you keep watch around you, carefully start accelerating up to no more than 7 km/h (4 mph). When exiting the parking space, the system only takes charge of the steering. You, as the driver, have to accelerate, en- gage the clutch if necessary, change gears and brake. Reverse until the continuous ParkPilot sig- nal sounds; OR: reverse until the instrument panel display shows the forward indication.

1

2

3

278

Help with parking and manoeuvring

The progress bar Fig. 200 3 indicates the distance to cover page 278. Press the brake pedal until the parking as- sist system completes the steering wheel turns; OR: press the brake pedal until the symbol goes out on the instrument panel screen. Move forward until the continuous ParkPilot signal sounds; OR: move forward until the re- verse indication appears on the instrument panel display. The Park Assist system steers the vehicle forward and back until it can exit the space. The vehicle can exit the space when a cor- responding message is displayed on the in- strument panel and, in some cases, an acoustic signal sounds. Take charge of the steering with the turning angle set by the Park Assist system. Paying attention to the traffic, exit the park- ing space.

Automatic operation of the brakes by the parking assist system

Park Assist helps the driver by automatically braking in certain situations.

The driver is always responsible for braking in time .

Automatic braking intervention to avoid exceeding the speed limit To avoid exceeding the allowed speed of ap- prox. 7 km/h (4 mph) when entering or leaving a parking space, the brakes may activate au- tomatically. After automatically activating the brakes, the manoeuvres to enter or exit a parking space may continue.

The brakes are only automatically activated once for each attempt to enter or exit a park- ing space. If the speed of approximately 7 km/h (4 mph) is exceeded again, the corre- sponding operation is halted.

Automatic braking to reduce damages Depending on certain conditions, the Park Assist system can automatically brake the vehicle when faced with an obstacle, briefly actioning and holding down the brake ped- al . Following this the driver must press the brake pedal.

Automatic braking intervention to reduce damage leads to the parking manoeuvre fin- ishing.

WARNING The automatic braking intervention by Park Assist should never tempt you to take any risk that may compromise safety. The sys- tem is not a replacement for driver aware- ness.

The Park Assist system is subject to cer- tain limitations inherent to the system. In certain situations, the automatic braking intervention may only work in a limited way or not work at all. Always be ready to use the brakes your- self! The automatic braking intervention will end after approximately 1.5 seconds. After- wards, brake the vehicle yourself.

Parking aid parking and ma- noeuvring (ParkPilot)

Introduction

These assist systems help you when parking and manoeuvring:

Plus Parking Aid page 281. It is an assist system that provides a visual and audio warning of obstacles detected in front and behind the vehicle .

Rear Parking Aid page 284. This is an assistant that gives a visual and audio warning of obstacles detected behind the vehicle page 284.

WARNING Always pay attention, by looking directly, to traffic and the area around the vehicle.

279

Driving

Assistance systems are not a replacement for driver awareness. Responsibility always lies with the driver. The sensors have blind spots in which ob- stacles and people are not detected. Pay special attention to children and animals. Always keep visual control of the sur- roundings: use the mirrors for additional help.

CAUTION Parking distance warning system functions can be affected by different factors that can cause damage: Under certain circumstances, the system does not detect or display certain objects: Chains, trailer draw bars, bars, fences,

posts and thin trees. Objects that are located above the

sensors, such as protrusions in a wall. Objects with certain surfaces or struc-

tures, such as wire mesh fences or pow- der snow.

Certain surfaces of objects and gar- ments do not reflect the ultrasound sen- sors' signals. The system cannot detect these objects or people wearing such clothes correctly. Sensor signals may be affected by exter- nal sound sources. This may prevent them from detecting people or objects.

If the system warns you of the proximity of a low obstacle, please note that after being detected by the system, the obstacle in question may disappear from the meas- urement sensors as the vehicle moves clos- er, and the system will no longer warn of its presence. In certain circumstances, ob- jects such as high kerbs that could damage the underside of the vehicle are not detec- ted. If the parking distance warning system is ignored, the vehicle could suffer considera- ble damage. Damage to the radiator grille, bumper, wheel arch and vehicle underbody can modify the orientation of the sensors. This can affect the parking aid function. Have the function checked by a specialised workshop. A number plate or number plate holder with dimensions that exceed the space for the number plate, or a cured or deformed number plate can cause false detections or a loss of visibility for the sensors.

Note The display on the Infotainment system screen shows a slight time delay. In certain situations, the system can give a warning even though there is no obstacle in the detected area: Rough or cobbled surfaces or surfaces

with long grass.

External ultrasound sources, such as other vehicles equipped with ultra- sound systems.

Heavy rain or snow, hail or dense ex- haust gases.

If the number plate is not properly se- cured to the surface of the bumper.

Gradient changes. In order to guarantee good operation, keep the sensors clean, free of snow and ice, and do not cover them with stickers or other objects. If you use high-pressure or vapour equip- ment for cleaning, do not apply it directly, unless you do so very briefly, and always keep a distance of more than 10 cm away. Fitting certain accessories to the front of the vehicle, such as a plate holder with ad- vertising, may interfere with the operation of the Park Assist. We recommend that you practice park- ing in an area without traffic. The volume and tone of the signals and indications can be changed page 285. Please observe information on towing a trailer page 285.

280

Help with parking and manoeuvring

Parking System Plus*

Description

Fig. 201 Parking aid view on the Infotainment system display.

Parking aid plus assists the driver by giving visual and audio warnings about obstacles detected in front of and behind the vehicle.

The bumpers are fitted with sensors. When an obstacle is detected, it is indicated by audible signals and in the Infotainment system Fig. 201.

When moving close to an obstacle, it is possi- ble to know if the obstacle is in front of the ve- hicle or behind it by choosing different sounds.

The approximate measurement range of the sensors is:

1.20 mA

1.60 m 0.90 m

As you approach the obstacle, the frequency of the audible signals will increase. The signal will sound continuously at around 0.30 m: Stop!

If the separation is maintained, the warning volume is reduced after about 4 seconds.

In order to view the entire periphery of the ve- hicle, the vehicle must be moved a few me- tres forwards or backwards. Thus, the missing areas are screened and obstacles at the sides of the vehicle are displayed C .

Special features of ParkPilot with Area View In the following situations the screened area on the side of the vehicle is automatically hid- den:

When a vehicle door is opened. When the ASR is switched off. When there is ASR or ESC regulation. If the vehicle remains stationary for more than approximately 3 minutes.

B

C Parking Aid operation

Fig. 202 Centre console: parking aid button (depending on the version).

Manually connecting and disconnecting the parking aid Press the button once.

Manual disconnection of Parking Aid dis- play (the audible sounds remain active) Press a button on the main menu of the fac- tory-assembled infotainment system. OR press the BACK function button.

Automatic connection of Parking Aid Select reverse gear. OR: If you drive forward at a speed of less than 15 km/h (9 mph) and an obstacle is en- countered, it is detected when it is approx. less than 95 cm. away. If the automatic con- nection is activated, a reduced view is shown. OR: if the vehicle moves backwards.

281

Driving

Automatic disconnection of Parking Aid Move the selector lever to position P. OR: drive forwards at 15 km/h (9 mph) or faster.

Temporary suppression of sound in Park- ing Aid Press the function button.

Change from reduced view to full view Select reverse gear. OR: press the car icon on the reduced view.

Switch to the reverse assist image (Rear View Camera RVC) Select reverse gear. OR press the RVC function button.

A short confirmation signal will be heard and the button symbol will light up when the sys- tem is switched on.

Automatic activation

When the Plus Parking Aid connects auto- matically, a diagram of the vehicle and the segments will appear on screen.

It only operates every time the speed is re- duced below 15 km/h (9 mph) for the first time.

If it is switched off using the button, one of the following actions must be taken for it to reactivate automatically:

Switch off the ignition and switch it on again. OR: drive forward at over 15 km/h (9 mph) approx. OR: move the lever into position P and pack again. OR: switch the automatic activation on and off in the Infotainment system.

Automatic activation of the park assist can be switched on and off in the infotainment sys- tem page 95:

Switch the ignition on. Press the function button > SETTINGS > Parking and manoeuvring. Select Automatic activation. If the box is checked, the function is connected.

If activated automatically, an audible sound warning will only be given when obstacles in front are at a distance of less than 50 cm. ap- prox.

CAUTION The automatic connection of the Parking Aid only works when you are driving slowly. If driving style is not adapted to the circum-

stances, an accident and serious injury or damage may be caused.

Visual indication segments

Fig. 203 Parking aid view on the Infotainment system display.

The optical indication of the segments works as follows:

White segments: the obstacle is more than approx. 30 cm away from the path or in the direction opposite to travel. They are also displayed when the elec- tronic parking brake is activated. Yellow segments: the obstacles lie on the vehicles path and are at a distance of less than approx. 30 cm away. Red segments: obstacles are less than approx. 30 cm away.

282

Help with parking and manoeuvring

A wake will indicate the anticipated forward or backward trajectory, depending on the en- gaged gear.

If an obstacle is located in the vehicles way, the corresponding audible warning will sound.

When the penultimate segment is displayed, the vehicle has reached the collision zone. In the collision zone, the obstacles are repre- sented in red (including those out of the path). Stop the vehicle! in Introduction on page 279, in Introduction on page 280 !

In the event the car is equipped with the Top View Camera system, Park Assist visual guid- ance will appear in accordance with the view selected in the Top View Camera system.

Setting the indications and audio signals

The audio indications and signals are set in the infotainment system page 91:

Setup

Automatic activa- tion On/off

Front volume* Volume in the front and rear area.

Rear volume* Volume in the rear area.

Setup

Adjust volume

When the parking aid is switched on, the volume of the audio source will be re- duced, depending on the se- lected option.

Front sound set- tings/sharpness* Sound tone in the front area.

Rear sound set- tings/sharpness* Sound tone in the rear area.

Error messages

If a an error or fault message appears on the instrument cluster in Park Assist, there is a fault.

If the fault doesn't disappear before discon- necting the ignition, it will not be indicated next time the parking aid is connected.

If a rear sensor is faulty, only the obstacles in area A are displayed Fig. 201. If a front sensor is faulty, only the obstacles in area B are displayed. Symbol is displayed.

We recommend taking the vehicle to a speci- alised workshop to have the fault repaired.

Trailer mode

Fig. 204 Parking assist display on the screen with trailer attached.

On vehicles with a factory-fitted trailer hitch, when the trailer is connected, the rear sen- sors will not activate when reverse gear is en- gaged or button is pressed. Therefore, any objects behind or to the side of the vehicle will not be indicated on the screen and no audio signals will sound.

The screen will only display objects detected at the front, and the vehicle's trajectory will be hidden.

Manoeuvre braking function*

The emergency braking function is used to minimise damage in the event of a collision.

Depending on the equipment, if the Parking Aid is active, the braking while manoeuvring

283

Driving

function activates emergency braking when it detects an obstacle in the vehicles path that could cause a collision, driving forwards or in reverse.

The function will not brake if the Parking Aid is activated automatically. For the system to operate, manoeuvring speed must be be- tween 2.5-10 km/h (1.5-6 mph) for the front area and between 1.5-10 km/h (1-6 mph) for the rear.

Following an intervention, the braking while manoeuvring function will be inactive in the same direction of travel for 5 metres. Once the gear is changed, or the selector levers position is changed, the function will be ac- tive again. The Parking Aids limitations apply.

The manoeuvre brake function (RBF) can be set in the infotainment system using the func- tion button > SETTINGS > Parking and manoeuvring.

on permits the use of the braking while manoeuvring function. off does not permit the use of the braking while manoeuvring function.

Temporary suppression of emergency braking When the function is deactivated with the Braking while manoeuvring button that ap- pears on the Parking aid screen of the Info- tainment system.

Whenever any of the car doors, rear lid or bonnet are opened.

Rear parking aid*

Description

The rear parking aid is an optical and audi- ble assistant that warns of obstacles located behind the vehicle.

There are sensors integrated in the rear bumper. When they detect an obstacle, you are alerted by audible and visible warnings on the Infotainment system.

If the Top View Camera* system is installed, the rear parking aid will give an audible warn- ing of objects in the vicinity of the rear of the vehicle and the infotainment systems screen will display the image from the Top View Camera*, which provides a real-time image of objects located around the vehicle.

Make particularly sure that the sensors are not covered by adhesives, residues, dirt and the like, as this could affect the system's op- eration. Cleaning instructions page 340.

The approximate measurement range of the rear sensors is:

Side area: 0.60 m Central area: 1.60 m

As you approach the obstacle, the frequency of the audible signals will increase. The signal will sound continuously at around 0.30 m: Stop! in Introduction on page 279, in Introduction on page 280!

If the separation is maintained, the warning volume is reduced after about 4 seconds.

Parking Aid operation

Parking Aid connection Select reverse gear.

Parking Aid disconnection Place the selector level in position P, N or D (for automatic gearboxes) or disengage re- verse (for manual gearboxes).

Set the lever to the N or D position to maintain the system active for approximately 8 sec- onds before switching off. During that time, Parking assist will switch off if:

The selector lever is moved to position P. OR: the vehicle accelerates to approx. 15 km/h (9 mph) or faster.

If the Top View Camera* is installed, rear parking aid will be automatically deactivated when disengaging reverse gear.

284

Help with parking and manoeuvring

Manual disconnection of Parking Aid dis- play (the audible sounds remain active) Press a button on the main menu of the fac- tory-assembled infotainment system. OR press the BACK function button.

Temporary suppression of sound in Park- ing Aid Press the function button. If you have the Top View Camera* system installed, you can- not use the temporary suppression of sound in Parking Aid.

Change from reduced view to full view Select reverse gear. OR: on vehicles fitted with reverse assist (Rear View Camera RVC) click on the car icon of the reduced display.

Switch to the reverse assist image (Rear View Camera RVC) Select reverse gear. OR: press the RVC function button.

Setting the indications and audio signals The indications and audio signal settings are in the infotainment system page 91.

Rear volume*: volume in the rear area. Rear sound settings/treble*: sound tone in the rear area.

Lower volume: when the parking aid is switched on, the volume of the audio source will be reduced, depending on the selected option.

Error messages If a an error or fault message appears on the instrument panel in Parking assist, there is a fault.

If the fault doesn't disappear before discon- necting the ignition, it will not be indicated next time the parking aid is connected.

If there is a fault in a sensor, the symbol is displayed on the infotainment system display.

We recommend taking the vehicle to a speci- alised workshop to have the fault repaired.

Towing device In vehicles equipped with a towing bracket device from the factory, when the trailer is connected, the parking aid will not be activa- ted when reverse gear is engaged.

Visual indication segments

Fig. 205 Parking aid view on the Infotainment system display.

The distance to the obstacles can be estima- ted with the help of the segments at the rear of the vehicle.

The optical indication of the segments works as follows:

White segments: the obstacle is more than approx. 30 cm away from the path or in the direction opposite to travel. They are also displayed when the elec- tronic parking brake is activated. Yellow segments: the obstacles lie on the vehicles path and are at a distance of less than approx. 30 cm away. Red segments: obstacles are less than approx. 30 cm away.

285

Driving

Whenever the obstacle is located in the vehi- cles direction of travel, the corresponding audible warning will sound.

As the vehicle approaches an obstacle, the segments are displayed closer to the vehicle. When the penultimate segment is displayed, this means that the vehicle has reached the collision zone. In the collision zone, the obsta- cles are represented in red (including those out of the path). Do not continue to reverse in Introduction on page 279, in Introduction on page 280!

If you are equipped with the Top View Camera* Segments are not displayed when the vehicle is equipped with Top View Camera*.

The Parking Aid system will issue an audible warning for objects that are near the rear of the vehicle, and the Top View Camera* im- age will be available on the screen, giving a real image of the objects around the car.

Trailer Assist

Introduction

Trailer assist helps the driver to reverse and manoeuvre with a trailer.

By moving the rotary knob of the exterior mir- rors, the trailer assist directs the trailer that is hitched. The driver has to accelerate, change gears and brake!

System limitations Under certain circumstances, the camera does not detect objects such as trailer draw bars, bars, fences, posts or thin trees, or an open (or opening) rear lid, which could dam- age the vehicle.

In order to guarantee good system operation, keep the camera clean, free of snow or ice, and do not cover it with adhesives or other objects. Do not allow the draw bar to be cov- ered by external influences.

Use the trailer manoeuvre assistant only when the rear lid is closed correctly.

CAUTION The trailer maneuver assistant does not take the vehicles surrounding as a refer- ence. No obstacle detection takes place. The driver alone has to assess whether it is possible to manoeuvre safely with the tow vehicle and trailer set. Always observe the movement of the trailer and, if necessary, actively interrupt the manoeuvre to avoid damage. Even if the trailer manoeuvring assistant is operat- ed correctly, on rare occasions the trailer may move in a different way to the setting.

Do not rely solely on the indications on the instrument cluster display.

Note The trailer manoeuvre assistant automati- cally switches off approx. 10 minutes after being activated. The assistant is also deac- tivated if the driver does not perform any action over the course of approx. 3 mi- nutes.

Requirements

The following requirements must be met for the trailer manoeuvre assistant to work:

The engine is running. The ESC must be connected. The driver's door and the rear lid are closed. The exterior mirrors are not folded. There is a non-articulated one or two axle trailer hitched and electrically connected. Both the tow vehicle and trailer are stop- ped. The maximum bending angle has not been exceeded. The length of the trailers drawbar has been determined.

286

Help with parking and manoeuvring

Determine the length of the trailer's draw- bar In order for the trailer manoeuvre assistant to determine the length of the trailers drawbar, drive the vehicle-trailer set through some turning manoeuvres or curves. The more pre- cisely the length of the drawbar is deter- mined, the wider the angles that will be avail- able when manoeuvring. The assistant subdi- vides the maximum available end stops of the angle indicator into four levels: approx. 30, 45, 60 and 75.

Note For technical reasons, the trailer manoeu- vre assistant cannot always correctly de- tect trailers with LED technology taillights.

Operating

Fig. 206 Rotary exterior mirror controls.: ad- just the trailer angle.

Fig. 207 Instrument panel display: engage re- verse gear

Key of the Fig. 206, Fig. 207: Rotary exterior mirror controls. Trailer orientation to the left Trailer orientation to the right Move the vehicle in the direction of the towing device. Actual trailer position Target trailer position Angle indicator zero position

Manoeuvre with the tow vehicle and trailer set The system requirements must be met page 286.

Select reverse gear. Press button . Release the steering wheel .

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Tilt the rotary control until the desired di- rection is reached Fig. 206. A representa- tion of the tow vehicle and trailer set is shown on the instrument cluster screen for guidance purposes Fig. 207. Reverse by accelerating slowly. Pay atten- tion to your surroundings! If necessary, correct the angle with the ro- tary control. Press the control towards the left or right: the set will move to the left or right. Press the control backwards: the vehicle will follow the trailer. Reverse and move forwards until the de- sired position is reached. The manoeuvre ends when a message is displayed on the instrument cluster display and, in some cases, an audio signal sounds.

Automatic brake operation The trailer manoeuvre assistant helps the driver by automatically operating the brakes in certain situations.

The driver is responsible for braking in time .

The brakes may be applied automatically and the function deactivated in the following situations:

A certain speed is exceeded. The steering wheel is grabbed. The vehicle brakes automatically until it stops.

287

Driving

If the key is pressed during the manoeu- vre or the drivers door opens.

WARNING The quickly turning steering wheel can cause serious injuries. Do not hold the steering wheel during the manoeuvre until the system requests it. Exception: If a dangerous situation oc- curs, intervene and take over the steering.

WARNING Never allow the automatic operation of brakes to lead you to take any risk that compromises safety. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness. The manoeuvre assist system is subject to certain limitations inherent to the sys- tem. In certain situations, the automatic braking intervention may only work in a limited way or not work at all. Always be ready to use the brakes your- self! Automatic brake operation ends after 1.5 seconds approx. if the vehicle is stopped. After this, brake the vehicle yourself.

Note The exterior mirrors cannot be adjusted while the assistant is active. The saved set- ting for the passengers mirror can be acti- vated page 131.

Troubleshooting

Camera with no visibility, fault message, the system disconnects Clean the camera or remove possible ad- hesives or accessories from it page 341. Check for visible damage.

The system behaves differently than ex- pected There can be several causes: The camera is dirty page 341. In addi- tion to dirt and snow, camera visibility can be reduced by detergent residue or any type of coating. The system requirements must be met page 286. The camera is covered with water. The vehicle has some type of damage in the camera area, e.g. due to a parking im- pact. The field of view of the camera is blocked by an accessory, e.g. a bicycle carrier sys- tem. Changes have been made to the paint in the camera area and structural modifications have been made, e.g. to the front part of the vehicle and the running gear.

Solution for all cases Temporarily disconnect the system.

Check if one of the causes indicated above has occurred. Once the source of the problem has been eliminated, the system may be reconnected. If the system still behaves unpredictably, have it checked by a specialised workshop.

Peripheral view system (Top View Camera)*

Introduction

Using 4 cameras, the system generates a representation that is shown on the infotain- ment system display. The cameras are loca- ted on the radiator grille, the exterior mirrors and the rear lid.

The functions and representations of the Area View system may vary depending on whether or not the vehicle has ParkPilot.

WARNING The image from the cameras does not make it possible to calculate the distance to the obstacles (people, vehicles, etc.) precisely, so using them could cause seri- ous accidents and injury. The camera lenses augment and distort the visual field and the objects on the

288

Help with parking and manoeuvring

screen are seen differently and imprecise- ly. Certain objects may not be shown or may not be shown very clearly, for example, posts or thin rails, due to the screen resolu- tion or if light conditions are insufficient. The cameras have blind spots in which obstacles and people are not registered.

WARNING The smart technology incorporated into the Top View Camera* system cannot over- come the limits imposed by the laws of physics and it only works within the limits of the system. The greater convenience provi- ded by the Area View system should never tempt you to take any risk that may com- promise safety. If used negligently or invol- untarily, it may cause serious accidents and injuries. The system is not a replace- ment for driver awareness. Adapt your speed and driving style to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic condi- tions. Do not be distracted from the traffic by looking at the screen. Monitor the area around the vehicle at all times, since the cameras do not capture small children, animals and certain objects in all situations. The system will probably be unable to represent all areas clearly.

CAUTION The camera images are only two-dimen- sional. Due to a lack of spatial depth, ob- jects that jut out or holes on the road, for example, are more difficult to detect or may not be seen at all. In certain circumstances, the camera does not capture objects such as beams, fences, posts or thin trees, which could damage the vehicle. The system displays the auxiliary lines and boxes regardless of the vehicle's envi- ronment, no objects are detected. The driv- er is responsible for determining that the vehicle will fit in the parking space.

Area View system

Fig. 208 Viewing the top view system: aerial view.

There are four different views to choose from:

Front camera area Right camera area Rear camera area Left camera area

Function buttons: Exit the current display.

Adjust the display: bright, contrast and colour. Three-dimensional views

Depending on the equipment: connect- ing and disconnecting the ParkPilot sound.

The aerial view is generated by combining the images from all the cameras Fig. 208. The aerial view can be selected by pressing the vehicle in the area.

Select the corresponding view by pressing the different areas Fig. 208 A to D of the aerial view or the reduced aerial view.

Conditions necessary for the use of the Area View system The doors and the rear lid must be closed. The image must be reliable and clear. For this reason, for example, the camera lens must be clean. The area around the vehicle must be clear- ly and totally visible.

A

B

C

D

289

Driving

The area for parking or manoeuvring should be a flat surface. The vehicle should not be loaded very heavily at the rear. The driver must be used to the system. There should be no damage to the vehicle in the camera area. If the position or installa- tion angle of the cameras have been changed, e.g. after a rear-end collision, the system should be checked by a specialised workshop.

Special characteristics The images on the area view system cameras are only two-dimensional. Due to a lack of spatial depth, it is difficult or impossible to make out on-screen any holes there may be on the ground, objects jutting out from the ground or parts protruding from other vehi- cles.

Situations in which the objects or other vehi- cles appear to be further away or closer than they really are:

On moving from a horizontal plane to a slope. On moving from a slope to a horizontal plane. If the vehicle is heavily loaded at the rear. If the vehicle approaches protruding ob- jects. These objects may be outside the cam- eras' angle of visibility.

Trailer mode The Area View system conceals, in the rear camera area, all the auxiliary guiding lines when the factory-fitted towing bracket is connected electrically to a trailer page 294.

Note In order to become familiar with the system and its functions, SEAT recommends that you practice handling the Area View sys- tem in an area where there is not too much traffic or in a car park.

Connecting and disconnecting

Fig. 209 Centre console: button for activat- ing/deactivating the Area View system manual- ly in combination with the parking aid system () or else with the rear ParkPilot system ().

Manual activation Press button once Fig. 209.

The infotainment system screen displays the aerial view Fig. 208. If you press the button when driving at over 15 km/h (9 mph), the image will not be displayed.

Automatic activation Select reverse gear. OR: The vehicle moves backwards.

The view of the image of the vehicle's rear camera is shown in parallel parking mode with the reduced aerial view.

Manual disconnection Press button again Fig. 209. OR: press a button on the factory-equip- ped infotainment system, for example the button. OR: press the function button.

Automatic off Drive forwards at over 15 km/h (9 mph) ap- proximately. OR: switch off the ignition. The Area View system menu disappears immediately.

290

Help with parking and manoeuvring

Views of the peripheral vision sys- tem (modes)

Fig. 210 Display on the top view system screen: Front camera: off-road view. Rear camera: off-road view.

Depending on the equipment: connect- ing and disconnecting the ParkPilot sound. Exiting the Area View system screen:

Adjust the display: bright, contrast and colour.

The selected view is displayed on the right side of the screen. The reduced aerial view

shown on the right side displays the view framed in yellow. In addition, the right margin of the screen displays the menu options pos- sible and the views (the so-called modes) of the camera in question. The active view (mode) at the time is highlighted.

The red lines are indicate a distance of ap- prox. 40 cm away from the vehicle.

Aerial views (bird's eye view) Main mode:

The vehicle and its immediate vicinity seen from above are shown. Depending on the equipment, the ParkPilot's path may also be displayed.

Three-dimensional views: The vehicle and its vicinity seen from above are shown. The vehicle and its vicinity seen from above are shown obliquely.

The vehicle and its vicinity seen obli- quely are shown.

Swipe the infotainment system display with your finger in the direction of the arrows to change the angle of vision in the three-di- mensional views of the vehicle and its vicinity.

Front camera views (front view) Cross traffic. This visualization helps to monitor traffic to the left, front and right

of the vehicle and can be used, for ex- ample, when exiting garages or narrow exits. Angle parking. The area in front of the vehicle is shown. Orientation lines are shown to give guidance. Off-road. The area directly in front of the vehicle seen from above is shown. For example, on a slope, in order to see the area directly in front of the vehicle.

Side camera views (side view) Right and left sides. The areas located directly to the side of the vehicle seen from above are represented in order to navigate possible obstacles more pre- cisely.

The drivers or passenger's side seen from above is shown. This makes it

possible to visualize the blind spots along the vehicle.

Rear camera views (rear view) Angle parking. The area behind the vehi- cle is shown. Auxiliary lines are shown to give guidance.

Parallel parking. The area directly be- hind the vehicle is shown. The coloured

boxes and auxiliary lines serve as orien- tation. Off-road or hitching a trailer function. The vehicle's rear is presented.

291

Driving

Green and red semicircular auxiliary lines are displayed in vehicles with a fac- tory-fitted towing bracket. The auxiliary lines indicate the distance from the tow- ing bracket. The distance between the auxiliary lines (green and red) is approx. 30 cm The orange auxiliary line indi- cates, according to how the steering wheel is turned, the precalculated direc- tion of the towed device. Cross traffic. This visualization helps to monitor traffic to the left, front and right of the vehicle and can be used, for ex- ample, when exiting garages or narrow exits.

Reverse Assist (Rear View Camera)*

Operating and safety warnings

WARNING The reverse assist does not make it possi- ble to precisely calculate the distance from obstacles and nor can it overcome the sys- tem's own limits, hence its negligent use may cause serious accidents and injuries if used without due care. The driver should be aware of his/her surroundings at all times to ensure safe driving.

The camera lens expands and distorts the field of view and displays the objects on the screen in a way that is different from reality. Distance perception is also distor- ted. Due to the screen resolution or light con- ditions, some items may be blurry or not displayed at all. Take care with thin posts, fences, railings or trees that might not be seen on the screen and could damage the vehicle. The reverse assist has blind spots where it cannot see people or objects. Monitor the vehicle's surrounding area at all times. The system is not a replacement for driv- er awareness. Supervise the parking ma- noeuvre and the vehicle's surrounding area at all times. Do not be distracted from the traffic by looking at the screen. The images are only two-dimensional. Protruding objects or holes in the road, for example, are more difficult to detect or may not be seen at all. Vehicle load modifies the representation of the guide lines Fig. 211. The width rep- resented by the lines decreases with vehi- cle load. Pay special attention to the sur- roundings when the inside of the vehicle of the luggage compartment are loaded. In the following situations, objects or oth- er vehicles appear to be further away or

closer than they actually are. Pay special attention: If moving from a flat surface to a slope

and vice-versa. If the vehicle is heavily loaded. When the vehicle approaches objects

that are not on the ground surface or that protrude from it. These objects may be outside the camera angle when reversing.

Note It is important to take great care and pay special attention if the driver is not familiar with the system. Reverse assist will not be available if the rear lid is open.

Usage instructions

A camera installed in the rear lid handle as- sists the driver with reverse parking or ma- noeuvring page 237.

The camera image is viewed together with orientation lines projected on the Infotain- ment system screen. Part of the bumper can be seen at the bottom, which can be used by the driver as a reference point.

292

Help with parking and manoeuvring

Rear assist settings Rear assist offers the user the possibility to change the image's brightness, contrast and colour settings.

To change these settings:

Stop the vehicle in a safe place without switching off the ignition or the infotainment system. Apply the parking brake. Select reverse gear. Press the function button displayed on the screen. Make the desired adjustments on the menu by pressing the /+ function buttons or by moving the scroll button.

Requirements for parking and manoeu- vring with the rear assist The system should not be used in the follow- ing cases:

If the image displayed is not very reliable or is distorted, or if the lens is dirty. If the area behind the vehicle is incomplete. If the vehicle is heavily loaded. If the position of the camera has changed after a rear-end collision. Have the system checked by a specialised workshop.

Familiarising yourself with the system To familiarise yourself with the system, the orientation lines and their function, SEAT rec- ommends practising in a place without too much traffic or in a car park when there are good weather and visibility conditions.

Parking and manoeuvring with re- verse assist

Fig. 211 Display on the Infotainment system screen.: guide lines.

Meaning of the orientation lines Fig. 211 Lateral lines: extension of the vehicle (approximately in its total width) on the road. End of the side lines: approx. 2 m behind the vehicle on the road. Intermediate line: approx. 1 m behind the vehicle on the road.

1

2

3

Horizontal red line: a safe distance of approx. 40 cm at the rear of the vehicle on the road.

Switching the system on and off Reverse assist is connected by a contact when engaging reverse gear. The system switches off 8 seconds after disengaging reverse gear and immediately after removing the contact. The camera will stop transmitting images above the speed of 15 km/h (9 mph) with re- verse engaged.

In combination with the parking aid plus sys- tem page 281, the camera image will no longer be displayed when reverse gear is dis- engaged, and the system will display the op- tical information provided by the parking aid system.

It is also possible to hide the reverse assist im- age:

By pressing one of the Infotainment system buttons on the display. OR: by clicking on the miniature vehicle shown on the screen.

If you wish to display the rear assist image again:

Disengage and re-engage reverse gear.

4

293

Driving

OR: Press the RVC function button1)

Parking manoeuvre Stop the vehicle in front of a space and se- lect reverse gear. Reverse slowly, and turn the steering wheel so that the side lines lead towards the park- ing space. Guide the vehicle into the parking space so that the side lines run parallel to it.

Towing bracket device*

Trailer mode

Introduction

Take into account country-specific regula- tions about driving with a trailer and the use of a towing bracket.

The vehicle has been developed primarily for carrying people, although it can also be used to tow a trailer if fitted with the corresponding technical equipment. This additional load has an effect on the useful life, fuel consumption and vehicle performance and in some cases can reduce the service intervals.

Driving with a trailer requires more force from the vehicle, and thus more concentration from the driver.

In winter, winter tyres should be fitted on both the vehicle and the trailer.

Maximum vertical load technically permit- ted on the coupling device The maximum technical permitted vertical load of the trailer's towing bracket on the hook of the tow-bar is 90 kg.

Vehicles with the Start-Stop system If the vehicle has a factory-fitted towing bracket or one that is retrofitted by SEAT, the Start-Stop system operates as normal. No special characteristics need to be taken into account.

If the system does not recognise the trailer or the trailer bracket has not been retrofitted by SEAT, the Start-Stop system must be discon- nected by pressing the corresponding button in the lower part of the centre console before driving with the trailer, and it should remain off for the rest of the journey .

Vehicles with driving profile selection If you are going to be towing a trailer, the use of the Eco driving profile is not recommen- ded. You are advised to select another of the available driving profiles before beginning to drive with a trailer.

Trailer weight/drawbar load Never exceed the authorised trailer weight. If you do not load the trailer up to the maximum permitted trailer weight, you can then climb correspondingly steeper slopes.

The maximum trailer weights listed are only applicable for altitudes up to 1000 m above

1) The RVC button will only be displayed when re- verse gear is engaged.

294

Towing bracket device*

sea level. Since higher altitude decreases en- gine performance and the ability to climb slopes, the tow load decreases proportional- ly. The weight of the vehicle and trailer com- bination must be reduced by 10% for every 1000 m of altitude. When possible, operate the trailer with the maximum authorised drawbar load on the ball joint of the towing bracket, but do not exceed the specified lim- it.

WARNING Never use the trailer to transport people, since it would put their life in danger and is also prohibited.

WARNING Undue use of the towing bracket may cause injury and accidents. Only use the towing bracket if it is in a perfect state of repair and is properly se- cured. Never modify or repair the towing bracket in any way. In order to reduce the danger of injury in the event of rear-end collisions and to avoid injury to pedestrians and cyclists when parking the vehicle, cover or remove the tow hook when you are not using a trail- er. Never fit a towing bracket with weight distribution or load compensation. The vehicle has not been designed for this type

of towing bracket. The towing bracket could fail and the trailer could be released from the vehicle.

WARNING Driving with a trailer and transporting heavy or large objects can affect driving properties and even cause an accident. Always secure the load properly using belts or straps that are suitable and in good condition. Adapt your speed and driving style at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. Trailers with a high centre of gravity are more likely to overturn than those with a low one. Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres. Take great care when overtaking. Reduce speed immediately if you notice that the trailer is swaying, however slightly. Never drive at more than 80 km/h (50 mph) when towing a trailer (or at more than 100 km/h (60 mph) in exceptional cir- cumstances). This also applies in countries where driving at higher speeds is permit- ted. Take into account the speed limit for vehicles with trailers in the corresponding country, as it could be less than the speed limit for vehicles without a trailer. Never attempt to straighten the towing vehicle and trailer while accelerating.

WARNING If the towing bracket has been retrofitted by a non-SEAT workshop, the Start-Stop system must be disconnected manually whenever driving with a trailer. Otherwise the brake system could be damaged and could consequently cause a serious acci- dent or injury. Always disconnect the Start-Stop system manually when using a towing bracket that has not been fitted by a SEAT workshop.

Note Before hitching or unhitching a trailer, al- ways deactivate the anti-theft alarm page 99. Otherwise, the tilt sensor could cause the alarm to go off. Do not drive with a trailer for the engine's first 1000 km page 231. If a removable and retractable tow hook is fitted, it should not be mounted when not in use. In the event of a rear-end collision, the damage to the vehicle could be greater if the tow hook is fitted. Some retrofitted towing brackets cover the rear towing eye. In these cases, the towing eye should not be used for tow- starting or for towing other vehicles. For this reason, if the vehicle has been retrofit- ted with a towing bracket, always keep the tow hook in the vehicle when you remove it.

295

Driving

Technical requirements

Vehicles that are factory-mounted with a towing device meet all the technical and le- gal requirements for driving with a trailer page 301.

If the vehicle is retrofitted with a towing bracket, only a bracket that is authorised for the maximum authorised load of the trailer that is to be towed may be fitted. The towing bracket must be suitable for the vehicle and the trailer and must be properly secured to the vehicle's chassis. Only use a towing bracket that has been authorised by SEAT for this vehicle. Always check and take into ac- count the towing bracket manufacturer's in- structions.

Towing bracket fitted on the bumper Never fit a towing bracket to the bumper or to the area where the bumper is mounted. The towing bracket should not impair the bum- per's function. Do not make modifications or repairs to the exhaust system or the brake system. Make regular checks to ensure that the towing bracket is secure.

Engine cooling system Driving with a trailer increases the load on the engine and cooling system. The cooling sys- tem should have sufficient coolant and be prepared for the additional effort involved in driving with a trailer.

Trailer brakes If the trailer has its own brake system, please take the relevant legal requirements into ac- count. Never connect the trailer's brake sys- tem to the vehicle's brake system.

Tow cable Always use a cable between the vehicle and the trailer page 297.

Trailer tail lights The trailer's rear lights should comply with the statutory safety regulations page 297.

Never connect the trailer's rear lights directly to the vehicle's electric system. If you are not sure that the trailer's electrical connection is correct, have it checked by a specialised workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.

Exterior mirrors If you cannot see the area behind the trailer with the exterior mirrors of the towing vehicle, additional mirrors will have to be installed in accordance with the regulations of the coun- try in question. The exterior mirrors should be adjusted before you start driving and must provide a sufficient field of vision at the rear.

Trailer maximum electricity consumption Never exceed the values indicated!

Europe, Asia, Africa, South America and Central America

Brake lights (total) 84 Watts

Turn signal (on each side) 42 Watts

Side lights (on each side) 50 Watts

Reverse lights (in total) 42 Watts

Rear fog light 42 Watts

Australia

Brake lights (total) 108 Watts

Turn signal (on each side) 54 Watts

Side lights (on each side) 100 Watts

Reverse lights (in total) 54 Watts

Rear fog light 54 Watts

WARNING If the towing bracket is wrongly fitted or is not the right one, the trailer could become detached from the vehicle and cause seri- ous injury.

CAUTION If the rear lights of the trailer are not cor- rectly connected, the vehicle's electronic system may be damaged. If the trailer absorbs excessive electric current, the vehicle's electronic system may be damaged.

296

Towing bracket device*

Never connect the trailer's electric sys- tem directly to the electrical connections of the tail lights or any other power sour- ces. Only use the connections intended for providing electric current to the trailer.

Hitching and connecting a trailer

Fig. 212 Schematic representation: assign- ment of the pins of the trailer's electrical sock- et.

Pin Meaning

1 Left turn signal

2 Rear fog light

3 Earth for pins 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8

4 Right turn signal

5 Rear light, right

6 Brake lights

Pin Meaning

7 Rear light, left

8 Reverse lights

9 Permanent live

10 Live charge cable

11 Earth for pin 10

12 Unassigned

13 Earth for pin 9

Power socket for trailer The vehicle is fitted with a 13-pole power socket for the connection between the trailer and the vehicle. With the engine running, electrical devices on the trailer receive power from the electrical connection (pin 9 and pin 10 of the trailer power socket).

If the system detects that a trailer has been connected, the consumers on the trailer will receive electricity through this connection (pins 9 and 10). Pin 9 has a permanent live. This powers, for example, the trailer's interior lighting. Electrical devices such as a fridge in a caravan only receive electrical power if the engine is running (through pin 10).

To avoid overloading the electrical system, you cannot connect the ground wires of pin 3 , pin 11 or pin 13 to each other.

If the trailer has a 7-contact connector, you will need to use an adapter cable. In this case the function corresponding to pin 10 will not be available.

Tow cable The tow rope must always be securely fixed to the towing vehicle and loose enough so that the vehicle can handle turns smoothly. However, make sure that the cable does not rub on the ground while driving.

Trailer tail lights Always check the trailer's rear lights to ensure they are working correctly and that they comply with the relevant safety regulations. Make sure that the maximum permissible power that can be absorbed by the trailer is not exceeded page 296.

Include in the anti-theft alarm The trailer is included in the anti-theft system if the following conditions are met:

If the vehicle is factory-equipped with an anti-theft alarm and towing bracket. If the trailer is electrically connected to the towing vehicle through the trailer power sock- et. If the electrical systems of the vehicle and trailer are in perfect condition and have no faults or damage.

297

Driving

If the vehicle is locked with the key and the anti-theft alarm is activated.

When the vehicle is locked, the alarm is trig- gered if the electrical connection with the trailer is cut off.

Before hitching or unhitching a trailer, always turn off the anti-theft alarm. Otherwise, the tilt sensor could cause the alarm to go off.

Trailers with LED tail lights For technical reasons, trailers fitted with LED rear lights cannot be connected to the anti- theft alarm system.

When the vehicle is locked, the alarm does not go off when the electrical connection with the trailer is cut if it has rear lights with light-emitting diodes.

If the Eco driving profile was selected when hitching the trailer, this will automatically switch to the Normal profile. If the system cannot detect the attached trailer or if the towing bracket has been retrofitted by an au- to repair shop other than SEAT, you must manually select the Normal profile before you start driving with a trailer attached. To re- connect the Eco profile once the trailer has been unhitched, switch the ignition off and back on once.

WARNING If the cables are improperly or incorrectly connected, it may lead to an excessive amount of current supplied to the trailer, which can cause abnormalities in the entire vehicle electronic system, as well as acci- dents and serious injuries. Ensure that any repairs that need to be carried out on the electrical system are carried out by a specialised workshop. Never connect the trailer's electric sys- tem directly to the electrical connections of the tail lights or any other power sour- ces.

WARNING Contact between the pins of the trailer power socket can cause short circuits, overloading of the electrical system or fail- ure of the lighting system, and consequent- ly can cause accidents and serious injuries. Never connect the pins of the trailer pow- er socket to each other. Make sure any work on bent pins is car- ried out by a specialised workshop.

CAUTION Do not leave the trailer connected to the vehicle when parked; place it on its support wheel or its supports. If the vehicle rises or falls due, for example, to a variation of the load or a burst tyre, increased pressure will

be placed on the towing bracket and the trailer, and both the vehicle and the trailer can be damaged.

Note In case of anomalies in the electrical sys- tems of the vehicle or trailer, as well as in the anti-theft alarm system, have them in- spected by a specialised workshop. If the trailer accessories consume energy through the power socket to the trailer and the engine is turned off, the battery will dis- charge. If the 12-volt vehicle battery is running low, the electrical connection with the trail- er will be automatically cut off.

Trailer loading

Technically permissible maximum trailer weight and vertical load on the coupling device The technically permissible maximum trailer weight is the weight that the vehicle can tow . The vertical load on the coupling is ex- erted vertically from above on the hook of the towing bracket.

The information on the maximum trailer weight and vertical load on the coupling de- vice contained in the type plate of the towing bracket are experimental values only. The

298

Towing bracket device*

correct figures for your specific model, which may be lower than these figures, are given in the vehicle documentation. The information in the vehicle documentation takes precedence at all times.

To promote safety while driving, SEAT recom- mends making the most of the maximum ver- tical load technically permissible on the coupling device page 294. An insufficient vertical load has a negative influence on the behaviour of both the vehicle and trailer.

The vertical load increases the weight on the rear axle, reducing the vehicle's carrying ca- pacity.

Gross combination weight of the towing vehicle and trailer The gross combination weight is the actual weight of the loaded vehicle plus the actual weight of the loaded trailer.

In some countries trailers are classified into distinct categories. SEAT recommends ob- taining information from a specialised work- shop regarding which type of trailer is most suitable for your vehicle.

Trailer loading The weight of the towing vehicle and trailer must be balanced. In order to do this, the load must be as close as possible to the max- imum vertical load technically permissible on the coupling point, and it must be evenly dis- tributed between the back and front of the trailer:

Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavy objects are as near to the axle as possible or above it. Secure the trailer load properly.

Tyre pressure Set the tyre pressure of the trailer tyres in ac- cordance with the trailer manufacturer's rec- ommendations.

When towing a trailer, inflate the tyres of the towing vehicle with the maximum allowable pressure page 328.

WARNING If the maximum permissible axle weight, the maximum load technically permissible on the coupling point, the maximum author- ised vehicle weight or the gross combina- tion weight of the towing vehicle and trailer

are exceeded, accidents and serious inju- ries may occur. Never exceed the values indicated! The actual weight on the front and rear axles must never exceed the maximum per- missible axle weight. The weight on the front and rear axles must never exceed the maximum permissible weight.

WARNING A shift in weight could jeopardize the stabil- ity and security of the towing vehicle and trailer, which could lead to accidents and serious injuries. Always load the trailer correctly. Always secure the load properly using belts or straps that are suitable and in good condition.

Driving with a trailer

Adjusting the headlights The front part of the vehicle may be raised when the trailer is connected and the light may dazzle the rest of the traffic.

Adapt the height of the headlights using the headlight range adjuster page 1261).

1) This does not apply for vehicles with Full LED xenon headlights.

299

Driving

Specific features of driving with a trailer If your trailer has an overrun brake, brake gently at first and then rapidly. This will pre- vent the jerking that can be caused by the locking of trailer wheels. Due to the gross combination weight of the towing vehicle and trailer, the braking dis- tance increases. When going down a slope, go into a lower gear (if using a manual gearbox or the tip- tronic automatic gearbox mode) to take ad- vantage of the braking power provided by the engine. Otherwise, the braking system could overheat and even fail. The trailer weight, as well as the gross com- bination weight of the towing vehicle and trailer, change the centre of gravity and the properties of the vehicle. If the towing vehicle is empty and the trailer is loaded, then the load distribution is incor- rect. Under these conditions, drive slowly and with extra caution.

Hill starts with a trailer Depending on the slope of the hill and the combination weight of the towing vehicle and trailer, the vehicle might start rolling back- wards slightly when you first start up.

For hill-starting with a trailer, do the following:

Press and hold the brake pedal.

Press the button once to disconnect the electronic parking brake page 266. If the vehicle is equipped with a manual gearbox, push the clutch pedal all the way down. Engage first gear or move the selector lever to the position D/S. Pull out the button and hold it in that po- sition to immobilise the towing vehicle and trailer with the electronic parking brake. Release the brake pedal. Start driving slowly. To do this, in the case of a manual gearbox, slowly release the clutch pedal. Do not release the button until the en- gine has sufficient power to start driving.

WARNING If a trailer is pulled incorrectly, this may lead to loss of control of the vehicle and serious injury. Driving with a trailer and transporting heavy or large objects will change the ve- hicle handling and braking distances. Always drive cautiously and carefully. Brake earlier than usual. Adapt your speed and driving style at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. Slow down, especially when driving down hills or slopes.

Accelerate with particular care and cau- tion. Avoid sudden braking and manoeu- vres. Take great care when overtaking. Reduce speed immediately if you notice that the trailer is swaying, however slightly. Never attempt to straighten the towing vehicle and trailer while accelerating. Take into account the speed limit for vehi- cles with a trailer, as it could be lower than for vehicles without a trailer.

Stabilisation of the towing vehicle and trailer combination

The stabilisation of the vehicle and trailer combination is an additional function of the electronic stability control (ESC).

If the vehicle and trailer stabilisation system detects that the trailer is weaving, it takes ac- tion on the steering control to reduce the weaving of the trailer.

Vehicle and trailer combination stabilisa- tion requirements The vehicle is factory-equipped with a tow- ing bracket or has been retro-fitted with a compatible towing bracket. The ESC and the ASR are switched on. The control lamp or is not lit up on the instru- ment cluster.

300

Towing bracket device*

The trailer is connected to the towing vehi- cle through the trailer power socket. The vehicle is travelling at over 60 km/h (approx. 37 mph). The maximum vertical load technically per- missible is not being exceeded on the cou- pling device. The trailer has a rigid draw bar. If the trailer has brakes, it must be equipped with a mechanical overrun brake.

WARNING The enhanced safety provided by the elec- tric stability control of the vehicle and trail- er should not lead you to take any risks that could compromise your safety. Adapt your speed and driving style at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. Accelerate with caution when the road is slippery. When adjusting any settings, stop accel- erating.

WARNING The electric stability control for the vehicle and trailer may not correctly detect all driving conditions. When the ESC is switched off, the stabili- sation of the towing vehicle and trailer is al- so switched off.

The stability system does not always de- tect light trailers, so it may not stabilise these correctly. When driving on surfaces with poor grip, the trailer can even interfere with the sta- bility system. Trailers with a high centre of gravity can tip over without having previously weaved. If a trailer is not attached, but a connec- tor is plugged into the power socket (e.g. installation of a bicycle rack with lights), repeated automatic braking may occur in extreme driving conditions.

Electrically unlocking trailer hook*

Description

Fig. 213 On the right side of the luggage com- partment: button for unlocking the tow hook.

The towing brackets hook is located in the bumper. Tow hooks for electrical unlocking cannot be removed.

There should be no person, animal or object in the path of the tow hook .

Unlocking the tow hook and removing it Stop the vehicle and connect the electronic parking brake page 266. Switch off the engine. Open the rear lid. Pull the Fig. 213 button briefly. The tow hook unlocks electrically and automatically turns outwards. The button's control lamp flashes. Finish remove the tow hook by hand until you feel and hear that it has engaged and the control lamp on the button stays on. Close the rear lid. Hitching and connecting a trailer page 297.

Retracting the tow hook Stop the vehicle and apply the electronic parking brake. Switch off the engine. Unhook the trailer and interrupt the electri- cal connection between it and the vehicle. If you are using an adapter, remove it from the trailer's power socket.

301

Driving

Open the rear lid. Pull the Fig. 213 button briefly. The tow hook unlocks electrically. Turn the tow hook under the bumper with your hand until you feel and hear that it en- gages and the control lamp on the button re- mains on continuously. Close the rear lid.

The control lamp If the warning light on the button Fig. 213 flashes, this means that the tow hook has not been attached properly or is damaged . If the warning lamp Fig. 213 remains on with the rear lid open, the tow hook is cor- rectly in place both when extracted and when covered.

The control light of the lamp switches off ap- proximately 1 minute after closing the read lid.

WARNING Undue use of the towing bracket may cause injury and accidents. Only use the tow hook if it is properly en- gaged. Always ensure that no person, animal or object is to be found in the path of the tow hook. Never use a tool or instrument while the tow hook is moving.

Never press the Fig. 213 button when there is a trailer hooked to the vehicle or when a carrier system or other accessories are mounted on the tow hook. If the tow hook is not attached properly, do not use it. Instead, go to a specialised workshop and have the towing bracket checked. If you detect any fault in the electrical system or in the towing bracket, contact a specialised workshop and ask them to check it. If the ball has a diameter of less than 49 mm at any one point, do not use the towing bracket under any circumstances.

CAUTION If you clean the vehicle with high-pressure or steam devices, do not point the jet di- rectly towards the retractable tow hook or the trailer power socket, as this may dam- age the joints or remove the grease neces- sary for lubrication.

Note At extremely low temperatures, the tow hook may be impossible to operate. In this case, place the vehicle in a warmer loca- tion (for example, a garage).

Fitting a bicycle carrier on the re- tractable towbar

The maximum authorised weight of the roof carrier system, including the load, is kg. The carrier system should not protrude more than 700 mm backwards from the spherical head. Only carrier systems on which up to 3 bikes can be mounted are allowed. Heavier bicycles must be mounted as close to the ve- hicle as possible (tow hook).

WARNING The incorrect use of the tow hitch with a bi- cycle rack mounted on the tow hook can cause accidents and injury. Never exceed the maximum weight or the limits indicated above. The bicycle rack may not be mounted to the neck of the hook below the ball be- cause, due to the shape of the neck and depending on the rack model, the rack could be incorrectly mounted on the vehi- cle. Always read and take the manufacturer assembly instructions into account.

CAUTION If the maximum weight and limits indicated above are exceeded, the vehicle may suf- fer considerable damage. Never exceed the values indicated!

302

75

Towing bracket device*

Note SEAT recommends removing, as far as pos- sible, all removable parts of the bicycles before setting off. These parts include, for example, baskets and saddlebags, child seats or batteries. This improves aerody- namics and the centre of gravity of the rack system.

Retrofitting a towing bracket

Description

Fig. 214 Limits and attachment points for ret- rofitting a towing bracket.

SEAT recommends that towing brackets be retrofitted at a specialised workshop. For ex-

ample, it may very well be necessary to ad- just the cooling system or mount thermal pro- tection plates. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.

If a towing bracket is retrofitted, the distance specifications should always be kept in mind.

The distance between the centre of the ball head and the road Fig. 214 C must never be less than that indicated. This also applies when the vehicle is fully loaded, including the technically permissible maximum vertical load on the coupling device.

Distance specifications Fig. 214: Mounting points on the vehicle 65 mm (minimum) 350 mm to 420 mm (fully laden vehicle) 1,043 mm 413.5 mm 633.5 mm 951.5 mm

WARNING If the cables are improperly or incorrectly connected, this may lead to malfunctions in the entire vehicle electronic system, as well as to accidents and serious injuries. Never connect the trailer's electric sys- tem to the electrical connections of the tail

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

303

Driving

lights or any other unsuitable power sour- ces. Only use suitable connectors to con- nect the trailer. The towing bracket should be retrofitted only at a specialised workshop.

WARNING If the towing bracket is badly fitted or un- suitable, the trailer may separate from the vehicle while driving. This could cause seri- ous accidents and fatal injuries.

Note Only use towing brackets that have been approved by SEAT for the model in ques- tion. In some versions, the fitting of a conven- tional towing hook solution is not recom- mended. Please consult your Technical Service.

304

Checking and refilling levels

Practical tips

Checking and refilling lev- els

Refuelling

Refuelling

Fig. 215 Fuel tank flap with tank cap attached.

The fuel tank flap is on the rear right of the vehicle.

The flap that covers the tank cap is unlocked and locked automatically using the central locking.

Open the fuel tank flap by pressing on it. Unscrew the cap by turning it to the left.

Place it in the space on the hinge of the open flap Fig. 215. Start refuelling. The tank is full as soon as the pumps automatic nozzle cuts off the fuel supply. Do not try to put in more fuel after the nozzle cuts out, as this will fill the expansion chamber in the fuel tank. Unscrew the cap by turning it to the right as far as it will go. Close the lid.

The correct fuel grade for your vehicle is giv- en on a sticker on the inside of the fuel tank flap. Further notes on fuel can be found at page 306.

The capacity of your vehicle's fuel tank is giv- en in page 352.

WARNING Fuel is highly flammable and can cause se- rious burns and other injuries. When refuelling, turn off the engine, the auxiliary heater page 161 and turn off the ignition for safety reasons. Do not smoke when filling the fuel tank or a canister. Naked flames are forbidden in the vicinity due to the risk of explosion. Observe legislation governing the use, storage and carrying of a spare fuel canis- ter in the vehicle. For safety reasons we do not recommend carrying a spare fuel canister in the vehi-

cle. In an accident the canister could be damaged and could leak. If, in exceptional circumstances, you have to carry a spare fuel canister, please observe the following points: Never fill fuel into the spare fuel canis-

ter if it is inside or on top of the vehicle. This could cause an explosion. Always place the canister on the ground to fill it.

Insert the filling nozzle as far as possi- ble into the spare fuel canister.

If the spare fuel canister is made of metal, the filling nozzle must be in con- tact with the canister during filling. This helps prevent an electrostatic charge building up.

Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in the luggage compartment. Fuel vapour is explosive. Risk of fatal accident!

CAUTION If any fuel is spilt onto the vehicle, it should be removed immediately. It could otherwise damage the paintwork. Never run the tank completely dry. The catalytic converter can be damaged. When filling the fuel tank after having run it completely dry on a vehicle with a diesel engine, the ignition must be switched on for at least 30 seconds before starting the en- gine. When you then start the engine it may

305

Practical tips

take longer than normal (up to one minute) to start firing.

For the sake of the environment Do not overfill the fuel tank, it may cause the fuel to overflow if it becomes warm.

Note There is no emergency mechanism for the manual release of the fuel tank flap. If nec- essary, request assistance from special- ised personnel.

Note Diesel vehicles are fitted with a protective device that prevents the insertion of the wrong fuel hose1). It is only possible to re- fuel with Diesel nozzles. If the pump nozzle is worn, damaged, or if it is very small, it is possible that it will not be able to open the protective device. Be- fore trying to insert the pump nozzle by turning it, try a different pump or request specialist help. If you fill the tank from a reserve fuel can- ister, the protective device will not open.

One way to resolve this is to pour the fuel in very slowly.

Fuel types

Identification of fuels1)

Fig. 216 Identification of fuels according to European Union (EU) Directive 2014/94/

Fuels are identified by different symbols on the pump and on your vehicle's tank flap. The identification serves to prevent confusion when choosing the fuel.

Petrol with ethanol (E stands for Etha- nol). The number indicates the percent-

1

age of ethanol in the petrol. E5 means, for example, an ethanol ratio of 5% max. Diesel with biodiesel (B stands for Bio- diesel). The number indicates the per- centage of biodiesel in the diesel. B7 means, for example, a proportion of bio- diesel of max. 7%. Natural gas: CNG means Compressed Natural Gas.

Type of petrol 3 Valid for: vehicles with petrol engines

The correct grade of petrol is listed inside the fuel tank flap.

The vehicle is equipped with a catalytic con- verter and must only be run on unleaded petrol. The petrol must comply with the standard EN 228 and be sulphur-free. Fuels with a 10% ethanol ratio can be refuelled (E10)2). The types of petrol are differentiated by using the octane numbers (RON) or via the anti-knock index (AKI).

2

3

1) Depending on country 2) Follow the regulations of the country you are driving in.

306

Checking and refilling levels

Super unleaded petrol 95 octane petrol or normal 91 octane petrol at least We recommend refuelling with super 95 oc- tane petrol (91 AKI). If not available, normal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI) (with a slight power loss) may be used.

Super unleaded petrol, 95 octanes at least You should use super 95 octane petrol (91 AKI) at least.

If super is not available, if necessary, use nor- mal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI). In this case only use moderate engine speeds and a light throttle. Refuel with super as soon as possi- ble.

Unleaded super plus 98 octane petrol or super 95 octane petrol at least We recommend refuelling with super plus 98 octane petrol (93 AKI). If not available: super 95 octane petrol (91 AKI) (with a slight power loss).

If super is not available, if necessary, use nor- mal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI). In this case only use moderate engine speeds and a light throttle. Refuel with super as soon as possi- ble.

CAUTION Fuels high percentage of ethanol, e.g. E30 - E100 button must not be used. The fuel system would be damaged. Exception: vehicles with Totalflex engine page 307, Ethanol fuel. A single refuelling with leaded fuel or other metal additives entails a permanent deterioration of the effectiveness of the catalytic converter. Only use fuel additives that have been approved by SEAT. The products that con- tain substances to increase the octane rat- ing or decrease knocking may contain met- al additives that damage the engine and catalytic converter. This type of products must not be used. Do not use fuels shown in the pump as containing metals. LRP (lead replacement petrol) fuels contain high concentrations of metal additives. Risk of engine damage! High engine speed and full throttle can damage the engine when using petrol with an octane rating lower than the correct grade for the engine.

Note Fuel with an octane rating higher than the one required by the engine can be used.

In countries in which there is no sulphur- free fuel, it is also allowed to use low sul- phur content fuel.

Ethanol fuel 3 Valid for: vehicles with Totalflex engines

You can recognise vehicles with Totalflex en- gines1) by label on the fuel tank lid with the marking Petrol/ethanol.

Vehicles with Totalflex engine can run with unleaded petrol (95 octane / 91 AKI) accord- ing to ANP No. 57 and with fuels with any high percentage of ethanol. The vehicle is refuel- led in the same way as petrol refuelling.

Also consider that page 306, Type of petrol

Note SEAT recommends filling the tank exclu- sively with petrol every 10,000 km to de- crease impurities that using E100 ethanol fuel might have left in the engine.

1) This motor is only available in some markets. 307

Practical tips

Diesel 3 Valid for: vehicles with diesel engines

Please note the information on the inside of the fuel tank flap.

We recommend you use Diesel according to standard EN 590.

The diesel can thicken at very low tempera- tures, thus affecting the start or operation of the engine. Ask your service station attendant if their diesel is suitable for winter use.

Water in the fuel filter1)

If your vehicle has a diesel engine and is equipped with a fuel filter with a water sep- arator, the instrument panel may display the following warning: Water in the fuel filter. If this is the case, take the vehicle to a specialised workshop so that they can drain the fuel filter.

CAUTION Never use of FAME (biodiesel), petrol, heating oil, other fuels or thinning agents as they can cause severely damage the fuel system and the engine. If the wrong fuel has been filled, do not start the engine under any circumstances.

Risk of damaging the fuel system and the engine! Obtain technical assistance.

AdBlue

Information about AdBlue

AdBlue consumption depends on your per- sonal driving style, the temperature of the system and the outdoor temperature when the vehicle is used.

AdBlue freezes at temperatures of -11 C (+13F). The system has heating elements that guarantee its operation even at low tem- peratures.

The AdBlue tank has a capacity of approx. 11 litres.

When the range is less than 2400 km the instrument cluster screen displays a message requesting an AdBlue refill.

If this message is ignored, the yellow warning lamp will come on when the remaining range is less than 1000 km. . The indica- tion that in XXX km it will no longer be possible to restart the engine will appear on the instru- ment panel display.

If the yellow indicator lamp is ignored, when remaining range of 0 km is displayed, it will no longer be possible to restart the engine. The red warning lamp will light up .

AdBlue is a registered trademark of the Ger- man Association of the Automotive Industry (VDA) and is also known as AUS32 or DEF (Diesel Exhaust Fluid).

CAUTION Overfilling with AdBlue can cause dam- age to the tank system.

Control and warning lamps

It lights up red

The engine cannot be restarted! The AdBlue level is too low. Stop the vehicle in a suitable, safe and flat area then top up with the minimum required quantity of AdBlue page 309.

and They light up red

The engine cannot be restarted! Fault in the AdBlue system. Contact a specialised workshop. Have the system checked there.

1) Depending upon country. 308

Checking and refilling levels

It lights up yellow

The AdBlue reserve is low. Refill AdBlue within the next kilometres (or miles) that are indicated page 309. SEAT recommends con- tacting a specialised workshop.

and They light up yellow

There is a fault in the AdBlue system or unsuitable AdBlue fluid has been used. Contact a specialised workshop. Have the system checked there.

Several warning and control lamps should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on, signalling that the function is be- ing verified. They will switch off after a few seconds.

WARNING Observe the safety warnings in Con- trol and warning lamps on page 90.

Fill AdBlue

Fig. 217 AdBlue tank cap.

Operations prior to refilling Park the vehicle on a flat surface and turn off the ignition. If the vehicle is on a slope or on a curb, the level indicator may not detect the refill properly.

If an AdBlue warning message is shown on the instrument cluster display, fill with at least the minimum required amount (ap- prox. 5 litres). Only after adding this amount will the system detect that AdBlue has been added and you will be able to start the en- gine again. The maximum amount that can be refilled is 11 litres.

Fill with a refill bottle Only use AdBlue that complies with the ISO 22241-1 standard. Only use original containers.

Open the tank cover Fig. 217. Unscrew the tank cap by turning it in an an- ti-clockwise direction. Please observe the manufacturer's instruc- tions, indicated on the refill bottle. Check the expiry date. Remove the cap of the refill bottle. Insert the neck of the bottle in the tank filler neck vertically and screw the bottle on by hand, by turning it in a clockwise direction. Press the refill bottle in the direction of the filler neck and hold it in this position. Wait until the contents of the refill bottle have been poured into the AdBlue tank. Do not compress or break the bottle! Turn the bottle in a counter-clockwise di- rection and gently pull it upwards . The AdBlue tank is full when no more liq- uid comes out of the bottle. Screw on the tank cap in a clockwise direc- tion until it is tightly closed. Close the fuel tank flap.

Operations before driving After refilling the tank, only switch on the ig- nition. Leave the ignition on for at least 30 sec- onds for the system to detect the fluid load. Make sure you wait for at least 30 seconds before starting the engine!

309

Practical tips

Refilling the dispenser with AdBlue Valid for vehicles with selective catalytic re- duction.

Open the tank cap. Turn the SCR tank cap anti-clockwise Fig. 217. Add AdBlue until the nozzle stops for the first time. Close the SCR tube by turning it clockwise until you hear a click.

WARNING AdBlue should only be stored in its origi- nal container, which should be tightly closed and kept in a safe place.

CAUTION When refilling, the nozzle grip should be aligned downward. Otherwise the nozzle will not connect automatically. Do not try to add any more additive after the nozzle has stopped for the first time. The AdBlue tank could overflow and AdBlue could spill out. Only use AdBlue that complies with the ISO 22241-1 standard. Only use original containers. Never mix AdBlue with water, fuel or ad- ditives. Any type of damage caused by such a mixture will not be covered by the warranty.

Never pour AdBlue into the fuel tank! This could result in engine damage. Do not carry the refill bottle inside the vehicle. If there is a leak (due to tempera- ture changes or damage to the bottle), the AdBlue may damage the vehicle's interior.

For the sake of the environment Dispose of the refill bottle in an environ- ment-friendly manner.

Note Suitable AdBlue refill bottles can be pur- chased from SEAT dealerships.

Engine management and emissions control system

Introduction

WARNING Due to the high temperatures reached by the exhaust gas scrubbing system, you should not park your vehicle near a surface that can catch fire easily. Fire hazard! Do not apply wax underneath the vehicle around the area of the exhaust system: Fire hazard!

Control lamps

It lights up

Fault in the emission control system. Reduce speed and drive carefully to the nearest spe- cialised workshop to have the engine checked.

Flashes

Combustion failures that can damage the catalytic converter. Reduce speed and drive carefully to the nearest spe- cialised workshop to have the engine checked.

It lights up

Particulate filter blocked page 311.

It lights up

Fault in the petrol engine management. Have the engine checked as soon as possible by a specialised workshop.

When the ignition is switched on, the (Electronic Power Control) lights up and should go off once the engine has started.

It lights up

Diesel engine preheating system. The engine can be started straight away when the lamp switches off.

310

Checking and refilling levels

Flashes

Fault in the diesel engine management. Have the engine checked as soon as possible by a specialised workshop.

Note While the control lamps , , or are on, there might be faults in the engine, fuel consumption may go up and the engine might lose power.

Catalytic converter

To maintain the useful life of the catalytic converter Only use unleaded petrol with petrol en- gines. Never run the fuel tank dry. When changing or adding engine oil, do not exceed the necessary amount page 317, Topping up the engine oil. Never tow the vehicle to start it, use jump leads if necessary page 50.

If you should notice misfiring, uneven running or loss of power when the car is moving, have the vehicle inspected by a specialised work- shop. In general, the emissions warning lamp will light up when any of these symptoms occur. If this happens, any unburnt fuel can enter the exhaust system and escape into the

atmosphere. The catalytic converter can also be damaged by overheating.

CAUTION Never run the fuel tank completely dry be- cause an irregular fuel supply can cause ignition faults. This allows unburnt fuel to enter the exhaust system, which could cause overheating and damage the cata- lytic converter.

For the sake of the environment Even when the emission control system is working perfectly, there may be a smell of sulphur from the gases on occasions. This depends on the sulphur content of the fuel used. This can quite often be avoided by changing to another brand of fuel.

Particulate filter 3 Valid for: vehicles with petrol or diesel particu- late filters

The particulate filter eliminates most of the soot from the exhaust gas system. Under nor- mal driving conditions the filter cleans itself. If the filter does not clean itself (e.g. if short journeys are made continuously), it becomes blocked with soot and the following indica- tion is displayed to the driver: Particu- late filter: cleaned while the vehi-

cle is moving. See Manual. The partic- ulate filter needs cleaning (regeneration).

Regeneration of the petrol particulate fil- ter (only for 2.0l TSI engines) Requirements for the regeneration journey: the engine is at operating temperature.

Drive at a speed of at least 80 km/h Completely remove your foot from the ac- celerator pedal for a few seconds to let the vehicle roll with the gear engaged. Consider the legal speed limits as well as the recommended gears. Repeat this procedure (accelerate and let roll) until the control lamp turns off.

This procedure involves an autonomous par- ticulate filter cleaning process and may take some time.

If the warning lamp does not turn off, go im- mediately to a specialised workshop to repair the fault.

Regeneration of the petrol (except the TSI 2.0l engine) and diesel particulate filter Requirements for the regeneration journey: the engine is at operating temperature.

Drive at a speed of between 50-120 km/h (31-75 mph). This increases the temperature and burns the soot in the filter .

311

Practical tips

Consider the legal speed limits as well as the recommended gears. End the regeneration journey once the con- trol warning lamp has gone out.

If the warning lamp stays on after 30 minutes of running in regeneration mode, have a spe- cialised workshop repair the fault

WARNING Always adjust your speed to suit the weath- er conditions, roads, braking distance and traffic if the particulate filter is in its regen- eration phase. Route recommendations should never make you disregard each country's specific traffic regulations.

CAUTION When the exhaust system detects that the particulate filter is close to saturation, the self-cleaning function of this system recommends optimal driving for this func- tion. Due to the high temperatures caused by the regeneration of the particulate filter, it is possible that the radiator fan will acti- vate after stopping the engine, even it its operating temperature has not been reached. Noise, smells and high idle speeds can occur during regeneration. Always use the correct engine oil and the correct fuel to make sure the useful life of

the particulate filter is not affected. Also avoid making short trips all the time.

Engine compartment

Working in the engine compart- ment

Always be aware of the danger of injury and scalding as well as the risk of accident or fire when working in the engine compartment (e.g. when checking and refilling fluids).

Always observe the warnings listed below and follow all general safety precautions.

The vehicle's engine compartment is a po- tentially hazardous area .

WARNING When work is done in the engine compart- ment, injuries, burns, accidents and even fires can occur. Turn off the engine, disconnect the igni- tion e and apply the electronic parking brake. If the vehicle has a manual gearbox, place the lever in neutral; if it has an auto- matic gearbox, place the selector lever in position P. Wait for the engine to cool down. Never open the bonnet if you see steam or drips of coolant being released from the engine compartment. Wait until no steam

or coolant can be seen before opening the bonnet. Keep children away from the engine compartment. Never spill liquids used for vehicle opera- tion on the engine compartment, as these may catch fire (e.g. the antifreeze in cool- ant). Avoid causing short-circuits in the elec- trical system, particularly at the points where the jump leads are attached page 50. The battery could explode. If working inside the engine compart- ment, remember that, even when the igni- tion is switched off, the radiator fan may start up automatically, and therefore there is a risk of injury. Never cover the engine with additional in- sulating materials such as a blanket. Risk of fire! Do not unscrew the cap on the coolant expansion tank when the engine is hot. The cooling system is under pressure. Protect face, hands and arms by cover- ing the cap with a large, thick rag to protect against escaping coolant and steam. Always make sure you have not left any objects, such as cleaning cloths or tools, in the engine compartment. If you have to work underneath the vehi- cle, you must use suitable stands addition- ally to support the vehicle, there is a risk of accident!. A hydraulic jack is insufficient for

312

Checking and refilling levels

securing the vehicle and there is a risk of injury. If any work has to be performed when the engine is started or with the engine running, there is an additional, potentially fatal, safety risk from the rotating parts, such as the drive belts, alternator, radiator fan, etc., and from the high-voltage ignition system. You should also observe the following: Never touch the electrical wiring of the

ignition system. Ensure that jewellery, loose clothing

and long hair do not get trapped in ro- tating engine parts. Danger of death. Before starting any work remove jewel- lery, tie back and cover hair, and wear tight-fitting clothes.

Never accelerate with a gear engaged without taking the necessary precau- tions. The vehicle could move, even if the handbrake is applied. Danger of death.

Observe the following additional warn- ings if work on the fuel system or the elec- trical system is necessary: Always disconnect the 12-volt vehicle

battery from the on-board network. Do not smoke. Never work near naked flames. Always keep an approved fire extin-

guisher immediately available.

For the sake of the environment Inspect the ground underneath your vehi- cle regularly so that any leaks are detec- ted at an early stage. If you find spots of oil or other fluids in the area where it was parked, have your vehicle inspected at the workshop. Service fluids leaks are harmful to the en- vironment. For this reason you should make regular checks on the ground underneath your vehicle. If you find spots of oil or other fluids, have your vehicle inspected in a specialised workshop.

Note In right-hand drive vehicles* some brake fluid reservoirs are on the other side of the engine compartment Fig. 220.

Opening and closing the bonnet

Fig. 218 Release lever in the driver's footwell area.

Fig. 219 Cam under the bonnet

Opening the bonnet The bonnet is released from inside the vehi- cle.

Before opening the bonnet, make sure that the windscreen wiper arms are in place against the windscreen.

313

Practical tips

Open the door and pull the lever under the dashboard Fig. 218 1 . To lift the bonnet, press the release catch under the bonnet upwards Fig. 219 2 . The arrester hook under the bonnet is released. The bonnet can be opened. Release the bonnet stay and secure it in the fixture de- signed for this in the bonnet.

Closing the bonnet Slightly lift the bonnet.

Release the bonnet stay and replace it in its support. At a height of approximately 30 cm let it fall so it locks.

If the bonnet does not close, do not press downwards. Open it again and let it fall as mentioned above.

WARNING Make sure that the bonnet is properly closed. If it opens when driving, it can cause an accident.

CAUTION To avoid damage to the bonnet and to the windscreen wiper arms, only open it when the windscreen wipers are in place against the windscreen.

Checking levels

Fig. 220 Diagram for the location of the various el- ements.

From time to time, the levels of the different fluids in the vehicle must be checked. Never

fill with incorrect fluids, otherwise serious damage to the engine may be caused.

Coolant expansion tank page 318 Engine oil level dipstick page 316

1

2 314

Checking and refilling levels

Engine oil filler cap page 317 Brake fluid reservoir page 320 Battery (under the cover) page 321 Windscreen washer reservoir page 320

Note The layout of parts may vary depending on the engine.

Engine oil

General notes

The engine comes with a special, multi-grade oil that can be used all year round.

Because the use of high-quality oil is essen- tial for the correct operation of the engine and its long useful life, when topping up or changing oil, use only those oils that comply with VW standards.

We recommend that the oil change be done by a technical service or specialised work- shop.

If the engine oil level is too low You can get information about the correct en- gine oil for your vehicle at your workshop.

3

4

5

6

If the recommended engine oil is not availa- ble, in the event of an emergency you can change the oil once with a maximum of 0.5 L of the next oil until the next oil change:

Petrol engines: standard VW 504 00, VW 502 00, VW 508 00, ACEA C3 or API SN. Diesel engines: standard VW 507 00, VW 505 01, ACEA C3 or API CK-4.

Have the oil changed by a specialised work- shop.

SEAT recommends using original SEAT oil to guarantee high SEAT engine performance.

Engine oil additives No type of additive should be mixed with the engine oil. The deterioration caused by these additives is not covered by the warranty.

CAUTION Take the following into account if you have refilled with an engine oil different to those specified in the aforementioned standards, or by your SEAT technical service centre: There is no way of completely avoiding the danger of causing damage to the en- gine and particulate filter*. You can continue driving with the vehicle if the refill was no more than 0.5 l of engine oil. Go to a specialised workshop as soon as possible and request an oil change. Oth-

erwise, there is a danger of engine dam- age. If you have topped up more than 0.5 l of engine oil, drive with the engine at low load levels and within the medium RPM range as a maximum. Do not drive at more than 80 km/h and do not travel more than 300 km (approximately). Go to a specialised work- shop as soon as possible and request an oil change. Otherwise, there is a danger of en- gine damage. You are responsible for the risk of possi- ble damage to the vehicle (engine, exhaust system). If in doubt, do not start the engine and request assistance from the technical service centre. Do not start the engine if you have top- ped up with a fluid other than engine oil. Request assistance from the technical service centre. Danger of engine damage!

Note Before a long trip, we recommend finding an engine oil that conforms to the corre- sponding VW specifications and recom- mend keeping it in the vehicle. This way, the correct engine oil will always be available for a top-up if needed.

315

Practical tips

Warning lamp

It lights up red

Do not carry on driving! Engine oil pressure too low. Switch off the engine. Check the engine oil level.

If this warning lamp starts to flash, and is accom- panied by three audible warnings, switch off the en- gine and check the oil level. If necessary, add more oil page 317.

If the warning lamp flashes although the oil level is correct, stop driving. Do not even run the engine at idle speed! Obtain technical assistance.

It lights up yellow

Check the engine oil level as soon as possible. Replace oil as soon as you have the opportunity to do so page 317.

It flashes yellow

Fault in the oil level sensor. Have the check done by a specialised workshop. Un- til then it is advisable to check the oil level every time you refuel.

WARNING Observe the safety warnings in Con- trol and warning lamps on page 90.

Checking the engine oil level

Fig. 221 Engine oil dipstick.

The engine oil dipstick indicates the level of the oil.

Checking oil level Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.

Briefly run the engine at idle speed until the operating temperature is reached and then stop.

Wait for about two minutes.

Pull out the dipstick. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth and insert it again, pushing it in as far as it will go.

Then pull it out once more and check the oil level Fig. 221. Top up with engine oil if necessary.

The oil must leave a mark between zones A and C . It can never go above zone A .

Zone A : do not add oil. Zone B : you can add oil but keep the level in that zone. Zone C : add oil until zone B .

Depending on how you drive and the condi- tions in which the vehicle is used, oil con- sumption can be up to 0.5 l/1000 km. Oil consumption is likely to be higher for the first 5,000 km. For this reason the engine oil level must be checked at regular intervals, prefera- bly when filling the tank and before a journey.

WARNING Any work carried out in the engine com- partment or on the engine must be carried out cautiously. When working in the engine compart- ment, always observe the safety warnings page 312.

CAUTION If the oil level is above area A , do not start the engine. This could result in damage to the engine and catalytic converter. Con- tact a Technical Service.

316

Checking and refilling levels

Topping up the engine oil

Fig. 222 In the engine compartment: Engine oil filler cap.

Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings in Working in the engine compartment on page 312.

Topping up engine oil Unscrew cap from engine oil filler opening Fig. 222. Carefully add oil in small quantities (no more than 0.5 l). To avoid adding too much oil, whenever you add a certain amount, wait about 2 minutes and recheck the oil level page 316. If necessary, add some more oil. When the oil level reaches at least zone Fig. 221 B , unscrew the engine oil filler cap carefully .

The position of the oil filler opening is shown in the corresponding engine compartment il- lustration page 314.

Engine oil specification page 315.

WARNING Oil is highly inflammable! Ensure that no oil comes into contact with hot engine compo- nents when topping up.

CAUTION If the oil level is above area Fig. 221 A , do not start the engine. This could result in damage to the engine and catalytic con- verter. Contact a specialised workshop.

For the sake of the environment The oil level must never be above zone Fig. 221 A . Otherwise oil can be drawn in through the crankcase breather and leak into the atmosphere via the exhaust sys- tem.

Note Before a long trip, we recommend finding an engine oil that conforms to the corre- sponding VW specifications and recom- mend keeping it in the vehicle. This way, the correct engine oil will always be available for a top-up if needed.

Engine oil change

We recommend that you have the engine oil changed by a Technical Service.

WARNING Only change the engine oil yourself if you have the specialist knowledge required! Before opening the bonnet, read and ob- serve the warnings page 312. Wait for the engine to cool down. Hot oil may cause burn injuries. Wear eye protection to avoid injuries, such as acid burns, caused by splashes of oil. When removing the oil drain plug with your fingers, keep your arm horizontal to help prevent oil from running down your arm. Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes into contact with engine oil. Engine oil is poisonous! Used oil must be stored in a safe place out of the reach of children.

CAUTION No additives should be used with engine oil. This could result in engine damage. Any damage caused by the use of such addi- tives would not be covered by the factory warranty.

317

Practical tips

For the sake of the environment We recommend that you change the en- gine oil and the filter at a technical service centre. Never pour oil down drains or into the ground. Use a suitable container when draining the used oil. It must be large enough to hold all the engine oil.

Cooling system

Coolant specifications

The engine cooling system is supplied from the factory with a specially treated mixture of water and at least 40 % of the additive G12evo (TL-VW 774 J), purple. This mixture gives the necessary frost protection down to -25C (-13F) and protects the light alloy parts of the engine cooling system against corrosion. It also prevents scaling and con- siderably raises the boiling point of the cool- ant.

To protect the cooling system, the percent- age of additive must always be at least 40 %, even in warm climates where anti-freeze pro- tection is not required.

If for weather reasons further protection is necessary, the proportion of additive may be

increased, but only up to 60 %; otherwise an- tifreeze protection will diminish and this will worsen cooling.

When the coolant is topped up, use a mixture of distilled water and at least 40 % of the additive G12evo for optimal protection against corrosion. Mixing G12evo with G13 (TL-VW 774 J), G12 plus-plus (TL-VW 774 G), G12 plus (TL-VW 774 F), G12 (red) or G11 (green blue) engine coolants decreases pro- tection again corrosion and should be avoi- ded.

WARNING If there is not enough anti-freeze in the coolant system, the engine may fail lead- ing to serious damage. Ensure that the percentage of additive is correct for the lowest expected ambient temperature in the zone in which the vehi- cle is to be used. When the outside temperature is very low, the coolant could freeze and the vehi- cle would be immobilised.

CAUTION The original additives should never be mixed with coolants which are not ap- proved by SEAT. If the fluid in the expansion tank is not purple but is, for example, brown, this indi- cates that the G12evo additive has been

mixed with an inadequate coolant. The coolant must be changed as soon as possi- ble if this is the case!

For the sake of the environment Coolants and additives can contaminate the environment. If any fluids are spilled, they should be collected and correctly dis- posed of, with respect to the environment.

318

Checking and refilling levels

Refilling coolant

Fig. 223 In the engine compartment: marking on coolant expansion tank.

Fig. 224 Engine compartment: coolant expan- sion tank cap.

The coolant tank is located in the engine compartment page 314.

Top up coolant when the level is below the (minimum) mark.

Checking coolant level Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.

Switch the ignition off.

Read off the coolant level on coolant ex- pansion tank. When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be between the marks Fig. 223. When the engine is hot, it may be slightly above the upper mark.

Topping up coolant Wait for the engine to cool down.

Cover the coolant expansion tank cap with a cloth and carefully unscrew it to the left .

Top up the coolant only if there is still cool- ant in the expansion tank, otherwise you could damage the engine. If there is no coolant in the expansion tank, do not con- tinue driving. You should obtain professional assistance .

If there is still some coolant in the expansion tank, top up to the upper mark.

Top up with coolant until the level becomes stable.

Screw the cap back on correctly.

If there is a coolant leak, take the vehicle spe- cialised workshop to have the cooling system examined.

WARNING The cooling system is under pressure. Do not unscrew the cap on the coolant expan- sion tank when the engine is hot: risk of burns! Store the antifreeze in its original con- tainer and keep it out of reach of children. If working inside the engine compart- ment, remember that, even when the igni- tion is switched off, the radiator fan may start up automatically, and therefore there is a risk of injury.

CAUTION If you run out of coolant in the expansion tank, park the car in a safe place and do not continue driving. Obtain technical as- sistance.

319

Practical tips

Brake fluid

Check and refill the brake fluid

Fig. 225 Engine compartment: brake fluid res- ervoir cap.

The brake fluid reservoir is located in the en- gine compartment page 314.

Checking the brake fluid level The brake fluid level must be between the and markings.

However, if the brake fluid level goes down noticeably in a short time, or drops below the mark, there may be a leak in the brake system. Seek specialist assistance. A warning light on the instrument panel display monitors the brake fluid level page 88.

In right-hand drive vehicles the brake fluid reservoir is on the other side of the engine compartment.

Changing brake fluid We recommend that you have the brake fluid changed by a Technical Service.

WARNING If the brake fluid level is low or unsuita- ble/old brake fluid is used, the brake sys- tem may fail or braking power may be re- duced. Check the brake system and the brake fluid level regularly! When the brake fluid is used and brakes are subjected to extreme braking forces, bubbles of vapour form in the brake sys- tem. These bubbles can significantly re- duce braking power, notably increasing braking distance, and could result in the to- tal failure of the brake system. Be sure to always use the correct brake fluid. Only use brake fluid that expressly meets the VW 501 14 standard. You can buy VW 501 14 standard brake fluid in a SEAT dealership or a SEAT Official Service. If none is available, use only high- quality brake fluid that meets DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 standards, or USA Standards FMVSS 116 DOT 4. The replacement brake fluid must be new. Brake fluid should be stored in the closed original container in a safe place out of reach of children. Risk of poisoning!

CAUTION Brake fluid should not come into contact with the vehicle paintwork, as it is abrasive.

For the sake of the environment Brake fluid is an environmental pollutant. Collect any spilt service fluids and allow a professional to dispose of them.

Windscreen washer reservoir

Checking the level of the window washer tank and refilling it

Fig. 226 In the engine compartment: window washer tank cap.

The window washer tank is in the engine compartment page 314.

320

Checking and refilling levels

Check the water level in the windscreen washer reservoir regularly and top up as re- quired.

The container for the windscreen washer contains the cleaning fluid for the wind- screen, the rear window and the headlight washer system*.

Open the bonnet page 312. The window washer tank is marked with the symbol on the cap. Check there is enough windscreen water in the reservoir.

Plain water is not enough to clean the wind- screen and headlights. We recommend that you always add a product to the windscreen washer fluid.

Recommended windscreen wipers For the hottest seasons we recommend summer G 052 184 A1 for clear glass. Propor- tions of the mixture in the washer fluid tank: 1:100 (1 part concentrate per 100 parts wa- ter). All year round, G 052 164 A2 for clear glass. Approximate proportion of the winter mixture, up to -18C (0F): 1:2 (1 part concentrate per 2 parts water); otherwise, a 1:4 proportion of mixture in the washer fluid tank.

The capacity of the window washer tank can be found in page 352.

CAUTION If the water from the windscreen washer does not contain enough anti-freeze, it may freeze on the windscreen and rear window, reducing forward and rear visibility. In winter, ensure the windscreen washer contains enough anti-freeze. In cold conditions, you should not use the windscreen wiper system unless you have warmed the windscreen with the ventila- tion system. The antifreeze could freeze on the windscreen and reduce visibility.

CAUTION Never mix an unsuitable antifreeze or other similar additives with the windscreen wash- er water. A greasy layer may be formed on the windscreen which will impair visibility. Use clean water with a window cleaner recommended by SEAT. If necessary, add a suitable antifreeze to the water in the reservoir.

CAUTION Do not mix cleaning products recommen- ded by SEAT with other products. This could lead to flocculation and may block the windscreen washer jets. When topping up service fluids, make ab- solutely certain that you fill the fluids into the correct reservoirs. Using the wrong flu-

ids could cause serious malfunctions and engine damage! Not having windscreen wiper fluid re- duces visibility through the windscreen, and leads to loss of visibility in headlights in models with headlight washer.

12-volt battery

General information

The battery is located in the engine compart- ment and is almost maintenance-free. It is checked as part of the Inspection Service. Nevertheless, check the terminals are clean and have the correct tightening torque, espe- cially in summer and winter.

All work on batteries requires specialist knowledge. Please refer to a SEAT Official Service or a workshop specialising in batter- ies: risk of burns or exploding battery!

The battery must not be opened. Never try to change the fluid level of the battery. Oth- erwise explosive gas is released from the bat- tery that could cause an explosion.

Battery warning indications

Wear eye protection.

321

Practical tips

Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear pro- tective gloves and eye protection. Rinse any splashes of electrolyte with plenty of water.

Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking are prohibited.

The battery should only be charged in a well- ventilated zone. Risk of explosion!

Keep children away from acid and batteries!

Always follow the instruction manual.

Disconnecting the battery The battery should only be disconnected in exceptional cases. When the battery is dis- connected, some of the vehicle's functions are lost. These functions will require resetting after the battery is reconnected.

When disconnecting the battery from the ve- hicle on-board network, disconnect first the negative cable and then the positive cable.

Deactivate the anti-theft alarm* before you disconnect the battery Otherwise the alarm will be triggered.

If the vehicle is not used for long periods The vehicle has a system for monitoring the current consumption when the engine is left unused for long periods of time page 324. Some functions, such as the interior lights, or the remote door opening, may be temporarily disabled to prevent the battery from running

flat. These functions will come back on as soon as the ignition is switched on and the engine started.

Winter conditions During the winter, the starting power may be reduced, and if necessary, the battery should be charged

WARNING Any work to be done on the 12-volt vehicle battery or electrical system can cause in- juries, burns, accidents and fires: Wear eye protection. Protect your eyes, skin and clothing from acid and particles containing lead. Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear protective gloves and eye protection. Do not tilt the batteries. This could spill acid through the vents. Neutralise any electrolyte splashes on the skin, eyes or clothing with a soapy solu- tion, and rinse off with plenty of water. If acid is swallowed by mistake, consult a doctor immediately. Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking are prohibited. When handling cables and electrical equipment, avoid causing sparks and electrostatic charge. Never short the battery terminals. High-energy sparks can cause injury. A highly explosive mixture of gases is re- leased when the battery is under charge.

The batteries should be charged in a well- ventilated room only. Keep children away from acid and bat- teries. Before working on the electrical system, you must switch off the engine, the ignition and all electrical devices. The negative ca- ble on the battery must be disconnected. When a light bulb is changed, you need on- ly switch off the light. Deactivate the anti-theft alarm by un- locking the vehicle before you disconnect the battery! The alarm will otherwise be triggered. When disconnecting the battery from the vehicle on-board network, disconnect first the negative cable and then the positive cable. Switch off all electrical devices before reconnecting the battery. Reconnect first the positive cable and then the negative cable. Never reverse the polarity of the connections. This could cause an electrical fire. Never charge a frozen battery, or one which has thawed. This could result in ex- plosions and chemical burns. Always re- place a battery which has frozen. A flat battery can also freeze at temperatures close to 0C (+32F). Ensure that the vent hose is always con- nected to the battery.

322

Checking and refilling levels

Never use a defective battery. This could cause an explosion. Replace a damaged battery immediately.

WARNING The 12 volt battery is a subject to wear. A reduction in battery power can mean that some important safety systems, such as power steering, braking intervention, lights or airbag systems, operate with limitations or stop working entirely. This may cause serious accidents and injuries. To avoid this, it is necessary to take the following safety measure: Get a professional service centre to re- place the 12-volt vehicle battery every four years.

CAUTION Do not expose the battery to direct sun- light over a long period of time, as the in- tense ultraviolet radiation can damage the battery housing. If the vehicle is left standing in cold con- ditions for a long period, protect the bat- tery from freezing. If it freezes it will be damaged.

Control lamp

It lights up red

Alternator fault.

The control lamp lights up when the ignition is switched on. It should go out when the engine has started running.

If the indicator lamp lights up while driving, the alternator is no longer charging the 12- volt vehicle battery. You should immediately drive to the nearest specialised workshop.

You should avoid using electrical equipment that is not absolutely necessary because this will drain the battery.

Charging or changing the battery

If you often drive short distances or if the ve- hicle is not driven for long periods, the 12-volt battery should be checked by a specialised workshop more frequently than the service intervals.

If the battery has discharged and you have problems starting the vehicle, the battery might be damaged. If this happens, we rec- ommend you have the vehicle battery checked by a Technical Service where it will be re-charged or replaced.

Charging the battery The vehicle battery should be charged by a specialised workshop only, as batteries using special technology have been installed and they must be charged in a controlled environ- ment.

Replacing a vehicle battery The 12-volt vehicle battery has been de- signed to suit its location and has special safety features. If you need to change the battery, please go to a service centre before buying a new one to get information about the electromagnetic compatibility, size and maintenance requirements, performance and safety of your vehicles new battery. SEAT recommends you have the battery replaced by a technical service.

Start-Stop systems ( page 216) are equip- ped with a special battery. Therefore, it must only be replaced with a battery of the same specifications.

Your vehicle is equipped with an intelligent power management system to control the distribution of electrical energy page 324. The power management function ensures that the battery is charged much more effi- ciently than on vehicles without a power management system. To maintain this func- tion after replacing the battery, we recom- mend that the replacement battery used is of the same make and type as the original fitted

323

Practical tips

battery. To make proper use of the power management function after the battery has been changed, have the battery coded to the power management mode at a specialised workshop.

WARNING Always use only maintenance free bat- teries that do not run flat alone and whose properties, specifications and size corre- spond to the standard battery. The specifi- cations are indicated on the battery case. Before starting any work on the batteries, you must read and observe the warnings in General information on page 322.

For the sake of the environment Batteries contain toxic substances such as sulphuric acid and lead. They must be disposed of appropriately and must not be disposed of with ordinary household waste.

Energy management

Optimisation of the starting ca- pacity

The power management controls the distri- bution of electrical energy and thus helps to ensure that there is always enough power available to start the engine.

If a vehicle with a conventional electrical sys- tem is left parked for a long time, the battery will gradually lose its charge because certain electrical devices, such as the electronic gearbox lock continues to draw current even when the ignition is off. In some cases there may not be enough power available to start the engine.

Your vehicle is equipped with an intelligent power management system to control the distribution of electrical energy. This signifi- cantly improves reliability when starting the engine, and also prolongs the useful life of the battery.

The main functions incorporated in the power management system are battery diagnosis, residual current management and dynam- ic power management.

Battery diagnosis The battery diagnosis function constantly registers the condition of the battery. Sensors detect the battery voltage, battery current and battery temperature. This enables the system to calculate the current power level and charge condition of the battery.

Residual current management The residual current management reduces power consumption while the vehicle is parked. It controls the supply of power to the various electrical devices while the ignition is

switched off. The system takes the battery di- agnosis data into consideration.

Depending on the power level of the battery, switch off the individual electrical devices one after the other to prevent the battery from losing too much charge and to ensure that the engine can be started reliably.

Dynamic power management While the vehicle is moving, this function dis- tributes the available power to the various electrical devices and systems according to their requirements. The power management ensures that on-board systems do not con- sume more electrical power than the alterna- tor can supply, and thus maintains the maxi- mum possible battery power level.

Note Neither is the power management system able to overcome the given physical limits. Please remember that the power and use- ful life of the battery are limited. When there is a risk that the vehicle will not start, the alternator power failure or low battery charge level warning lamp will be shown page 88.

Flat battery

Starting ability has first priority.

324

Checking and refilling levels

Short trips, city traffic and low temperatures all place a heavy load on the battery. In these conditions a large amount of power is consumed, but only a small amount is sup- plied. The situation is also critical if electrical devices are in use when the engine is not run- ning. In this case power is consumed when none is being generated.

In these situations you will be aware that the power management system is intervening to control the distribution of electrical power.

When the vehicle is parked for long peri- ods If you do not drive your vehicle for a period of several days or weeks, the power manage- ment will gradually shut off the electrical de- vices one by one or reduce the amount of current they are using. This limits the amount of power consumed and helps to ensure reli- able starting even after a long period. Some convenience functions, such as remote vehi- cle opening, may not be available under cer- tain circumstances. These functions will be restored when you switch on the ignition and start the engine.

With the engine switched off For example, if you listen to the sound system with the engine switched off the battery will run down.

If the energy consumption means there is a risk that the engine will not start, a text will appear in vehicles with a driver information system*.

This driver indicator tells you that you must start the engine so that the battery can re- charge.

When the engine is running Although the alternator generates electrical power, the battery can still become dis- charged while the vehicle is being driven. This can occur when a lot of power is being con- sumed but only a small amount supplied, es- pecially if the battery is not fully charged ini- tially.

To restore the necessary energy balance, the system will then temporarily shut off the elec- trical devices that are using a lot of power, or reduce the current they are consuming. Heat- ing systems in particular use a large amount of electrical power. If you notice, for instance, that the seat heating* or the rear window heater is not working, they may have been temporarily switched off or regulated to a lower heat output. These systems will be available again as soon as sufficient electri- cal power is available.

You may also notice that the engine runs at a slightly faster idling speed when necessary. This is quite normal, and no cause for con- cern. The increased idling speed allows the

alternator to meet the greater power require- ment and charge the battery at the same time.

325

Practical tips

Wheels

Wheels and tyres

General notes

When driving with new tyres, be especially careful during the first 500 km (300 miles).

If you have to drive over a kerb or similar obstacle, drive very slowly and as near as possible at a right angle to the obstacle.

Check from time to time if the tyres are damaged (punctures, cuts, cracks or dents). Remove any foreign objects em- bedded in the treads.

Damaged wheels and tyres must be re- placed immediately.

Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres.

Replace any missing valve caps as soon as possible.

Mark the wheels before taking them off so that they rotate in the same direction when put back.

When removed, the wheels or tyres should be stored in a cool, dry and preferably dark place.

Low profile tyres Low profile tyres have a wider tread, a larger wheel diameter and a lower sidewall height. Therefore, its driving behaviour is more agile.

Low profile tyres may deteriorate more quick- ly than standard tyres, for instance due to strong knocks, potholes, manhole covers and kerbs. Correct tyre pressure is very important page 329.

To avoid damage to tyres and wheels, drive with special care when driving on roads in poor condition.

Visually check your wheels every 3000 km.

If the tyres or rims have received a heavy im- pact or have been damaged, have a special- ised workshop check whether or not it is nec- essary to change the tyre.

Low profile tyres may deteriorate more quick- ly than standard tyres.

Concealed damage Damage to tyres and rims is often not readily visible. If you notice unusual vibration or the car pulling to one side, this may indicate that one of the tyres is damaged. Reduce speed immediately if there is any reason to suspect that damage may have occurred. In- spect the tyres for damage. If no external damage is visible, drive slowly and carefully to the nearest specialised workshop and have the car inspected.

Foreign objects inserted in the tyre Do not remove foreign bodies if they have penetrated through the tyre wall! If the vehicle comes with a tyre mobility system, where necessary seal the damaged tyre as shown in section page 42. Use a specialised workshop for repair or replace- ment. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.

The sealant at the lower part of the tyre tread wraps around the foreign body and provision- ally seals the tyre.

Tyres with directional tread pattern An arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the di- rection of rotation on single drive tyres. Al- ways note the direction of rotation indicated when mounting the wheel. This makes sure that optimal use is made of tyre properties in terms of aquaplaning, grip, excessive noise and wear.

Subsequent fitting of accessories If you wish to change or fit wheels, rims or wheel trims, we recommend that you consult with a SEAT Official Service centre for advice regarding current techniques.

Speed symbols The speed rating indicates the maximum speed permitted for the tyres.

326

Wheels

max. 150 km/h (93 mph) max. 160 km/h (99 mph) max. 170 km/h (106 mph) max. 180 km/h (112 mph) max. 190 km/h (118 mph) max. 200 km/h (124 mph) max. 210 km/h (130 mph) max. 240 km/h (149 mph) max. 240 km/h (149 mph) max. 270 km/h (168 mph) max. 300 km/h (186 mph)

Some manufacturers use the letters ZR for tyres with a maximum authorised speed above 240 km/h (149 mph).

WARNING New tyres do not have maximum grip dur- ing the first 500 km. Drive particularly carefully to avoid possible accidents. Never drive with damaged tyres. This may cause an accident. If you notice unusual vibrations or if the vehicle pulls to one side when driving, stop the vehicle immediately and check the tyres. Never use old tyres or those with an un- known history of use.

P Q R S T U H V Z W Y

New wheels and tyres

It is best to have all wheels and tyres serviced by a specialised workshop. There they have the required knowledge, the special tools and the corresponding spare parts.

Even winter tyres lose their grip on ice. If you have installed new tyres, drive the first 500 km carefully and at a moderate speed. All four wheels must be fitted with tyres of the same type, size (rolling circumference) and, if possible, tread pattern. When changing tyres, do not change just one; change at least two on the same axle. If you want to equip your vehicle with a combination tyres and rims that are different to those fitted in the factory, inform your spe- cialised workshop before purchasing them The sizes of the rims and tyres approved for your vehicle are listed in the vehicle docu- mentation (e.g. EC Certificate of Conformity or COC document1)). The vehicle documen- tation varies depending on the country of res- idence.

If the type of spare wheel is different form the normal wheels e.g. in the case of winter tyres or particularly wide tyres the spare wheel should only be used temporarily in the

event of a puncture, and the vehicle should be driven with care. Refit the normal road wheel as soon as possible.

In vehicles with four-wheel drive, the 4 wheels must be fitted with tyres of the same brand, type and tread so that the traction system is not damaged by a difference in the number of turns of the wheels. Therefore, in the event of a puncture, only a spare wheel with the same perimeter as normal tyres should be used.

Manufacturing date The manufacturing date is also indicated on the tyre sidewall (or on the inside face of the wheel):

DOT ... 2218 ... it means, for example, that the tyre was man- ufactured in the 22nd week of 2018.

WARNING Use only combinations of tyres and rims, as well as suitable wheel nuts, approved by SEAT. Otherwise the vehicle may be dam- aged, causing an accident. For technical reasons it is not possible to use wheels of other vehicles; in some cases not even wheels from the same vehicle model should be used.

1) COC = certificate of conformity. 327

Practical tips

Always ensure that the tyres you have chosen have adequate clearance. When selecting replacement tyres, do not rely entirely on the nominal tyre size marked on the tyre, since the nominal tyre size can dif- fer significantly depending on the manu- facturer. Lack of clearance can damage the tyres or the vehicle and, as a result, en- danger road safety. Risk of accident! Only use tyres that are over 6 years old in an emergency, and drive with due care. The fitting of tyres with run-flat proper- ties is not permitted on your vehicle! Pro- hibited use can cause accidents or can damage your vehicle. If decorative hubcaps are subsequently fitted, make sure that they allow enough air in to cool the braking system. Risk of acci- dent! Models with aerodynamic wheel rims and/or with bolt-on plastic elements (more closed design) increase the likelihood of ice and snow accumulating on the inside. This should be taken into account, depend- ing on the driving situations, as snow or ice accumulated in the wheels can cause vi- bration in the vehicle when it drives at over 40 km/h. It is advisable to remove ice and snow from the inside of the wheels using hot water. If you drive on dirt or gravel tracks, the likelihood of stones becoming trapped in- side wheel rims with plastic elements in- creases when driving at high speed or in a

sporty manner. If you see that there are stones trapped between the aluminium wheel rim and the insert, you can attempt to remove them using pressurised water.

For the sake of the environment Old tyres must be disposed of according to the laws in the country concerned.

Note A SEAT Service Centre should be consul- ted to find out whether wheels or tyres of different sizes to those originally fitted by SEAT can be fitted, and to find out about the combinations allowed between the front axle (axle 1) and the rear axle (axle 2). Never mount used tyres if you are not sure of their previous history. When 245/40 R19 tyres are outfitted, the corresponding reflector must also be in- stalled.

Tyre life

Fig. 227 Location of the tyre pressure sticker.

Correct inflation pressures and sensible driv- ing habits will increase the useful life of your tyres.

Check tyre pressure at least once a month, and also prior to any long trip. The tyre pressure should only be checked when the tyres are cold. Do not reduce the pressure of warm tyres. Adjust tyre pressure to the load being car- ried by the vehicle Fig. 227. In vehicles with a tyre pressure indicator, save the modified tyre pressure page 332.

328

Wheels

Avoid fast cornering and hard acceleration. Inspect the tyres for irregular wear from time to time.

Tyre pressure The tyre inflation pressures are listed on a sticker on the rear of the front left door frame Fig. 227.

Insufficient or excessive pressure greatly re- duces the useful life of the tyres and adverse- ly affects vehicle performance and ride. Cor- rect inflation pressures are very important, especially at high speeds.

Depending on the vehicle, tyre pressure can be adjusted to medium load to improve driv- ing comfort (tyre pressure Fig. 227). When driving with comfort tyre pressure fuel consumption may increase slightly.

The tyre pressure must be adjusted accord- ing to the load the vehicle is carrying. If the vehicle is going to carry the maximum load, the tyre pressure should be increased to the maximum value indicated on the sticker Fig. 227.

Do not forget the spare wheel when checking the tyre pressures: Keep this spare wheel in- flated to the highest pressure required for the road wheels.

In the case of a minimised temporary spare wheel (), inflate to a pressure of 4.2 bar as in- dicated on the tyre pressure label Fig. 227.

Driving style Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hard braking (squealing tyres) all increase tyre wear.

Wheel balance The wheels on new vehicles are balanced. However, certain circumstances may lead to imbalance (run-out), which is detected as vi- brations in the steering wheel.

Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced, as they otherwise cause excessive wear on steering, suspension and tyres. A wheel must also be rebalanced when a new tyre is fitted or if a tyre is repaired.

Incorrect wheel alignment Incorrect running gear alignment causes ex- cessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of the vehicle. If you notice excessive tyre wear, you should check wheel alignment at a SEAT Of- ficial Service.

WARNING Unsuitable handling of the wheels and tyres may lead to sudden tyre pressure los- ses, to tread separation or even to a blow- out. The driver is responsible for ensuring that all of the vehicle tyres are correctly infla- ted to the right pressure. The recommen-

ded tyre pressure is indicated on the label Fig. 227. Check tyre pressures regularly and en- sure they are maintained at the pressures indicated. Tyre pressure that is too low could cause overheating, resulting in tread detachment or even burst tyres. When the tyres are cold, tyre pressure should be that indicated on the label Fig. 227. Regularly check the cold inflation pres- sure of the tyres. If necessary, change the tyre pressure of the vehicle tyres while they are cold. Regularly check your tyres for damage and wear. Never exceed the maximum permitted speed or loads specified for the type of tyre fitted on your vehicle.

For the sake of the environment Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel con- sumption.

329

Practical tips

Tread wear indicators

Fig. 228 Tyre profile: tread wear indicators.

Fig. 229 Interchanging tyres.

Wear indicators around 1.6 mm high can be found on the base of the original tyre treads, ordered at regular intervals and running across the tread Fig. 228. The letters "TWI"

or triangles on the sidewall of the tyre mark the position of the wear indicators.

The minimum permitted profile depth1) have been reached when the tyres have worn down to the wear indicators. Replace the tyres with new ones .

Changing wheels around To ensure that the wear is equal on all tyres the wheels should be changed round from time to time according to the system Fig. 229. The useful life of all the tyres will then be about the same time.

WARNING The tyres must be replaced at the latest when the tread is worn down to the tread wear indicators. Failure to follow this in- struction could result in an accident. Particularly in difficult driving conditions such as wet or icy roads. It is important that the tyre tread be as deep as possible and be approximately the same on the tyres of both the front and the rear axles. The scant driving safety due to insuffi- cient tread depth is particularly evident in vehicle handling, when there is a risk of aquaplaning in deep puddles of water

and when driving through corners, and braking is also adversely affected. The speed has to be adapted according- ly, otherwise there is a risk of losing control over the vehicle.

Wheel nuts

The wheel nuts are matched to the rims. When installing different wheels (for instance alloy wheels or wheels with winter tyres) it is important to use the correct wheel nuts with the right length and correctly shaped bolt heads. This ensures that wheels are fitted se- curely and that the brake system functions correctly.

The wheel nuts must be clean and turn easily.

A special adapter is required to turn the anti- theft wheel nuts* page 45.

WARNING Wheel nuts should never be greased or oiled. Use only wheel nuts which belong to the wheel. If the prescribed torque of the wheel nuts is too low, they could loosen whilst the

1) Follow the regulations of the country you are driving in.

330

Wheels

vehicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tightening torque is too high, the wheel nuts and threads can be damaged.

CAUTION See page 48to find out the recommen- ded tightening torque for wheel nuts for steel and alloy rims.

Winter tyres

Winter tyres must be fitted on all four wheels.

Only use winter tyres that are approved for your vehicle.

Please note that the maximum permissible speed for winter tyres may be lower than for summer tyres.

Also note that winter tyres are no longer ef- fective when the tread is worn down.

After fitting the wheels you must always check the tyre pressures. When doing so, take into account the correct tyre pressures listed on the rear of the front left door frame page 328.

In winter road conditions winter tyres will con- siderably improve vehicle handling. The de-

sign of summer tyres (width, rubber com- pound, tread pattern) gives less grip on ice and snow. This applies particularly to vehicles equipped with wide section tyres or with high speed tyres (code letters H, V or Y on the sidewall).

Only use winter tyres of the correct type ap- proved for your vehicle. The sizes of these tyres are specified in the vehicle's documents (e.g. EC Certificate of Conformity or COC1)). The vehicle documentation varies depending on the country of residence.

Winter tyres lose a great deal of their proper- ties when the tread is worn down to a depth of 4 mm.

The performance of winter tyres is also se- verely impaired by ageing, even if the tread is still much deeper than 4 mm.

A code letter indicating the speed limit is stamped on all winter tyres page 326.

Vehicles capable of exceeding these speeds must have an appropriate sticker attached so that it is visible to the driver. Suitable stick- ers are available from the SEAT Official Serv- ice and specialised workshop. Please note the regulations to this effect in your country.

All-weather tyres can also be used instead of winter tyres.

Using winter tyres with V-rating Please note that the generally applicable 240 km/h (149 mph) speed for winter tyres with the letter V is subject to technical re- strictions; the maximum permissible speed for your vehicle may be significantly lower. The maximum speed limit for these tyres de- pends directly on the maximum axle weights for your car and on the listed weight rating of the tyres being used.

It is best to contact a SEAT Official Service to check the maximum speed which is permissi- ble for the V-rated tyres fitted on your car on the basis of this information.

WARNING Exceeding the maximum speed permitted for the winter tyres fitted on your car can cause tyre failure, resulting in a loss of con- trol of the vehicle risk of accident.

For the sake of the environment When winter is over, change back to sum- mer tyres at an appropriate moment. In temperatures above +7C (+45F), perform- ance will be improved if summer tyres are used. Fuel consumption, wear and noises while driving will all be reduced.

1) COC = certificate of conformity. 331

Practical tips

Snow chains

Snow chains must only be fitted to the front wheels, even on vehicles with four-wheel drive.

Check that they are correctly seated after driving for a few yards; correct the position if necessary, in accordance with the manufac- turer's fitting instructions. Keep your speed below 50 km/h (30 mph). If there is a danger of being trapped de- spite having mounted the chains, it is best to disable the driving wheels (ASR) in the ESC page 271, Connecting and disconnect- ing the ESC and ASR.

Snow chains will improve braking ability as well as traction in winter conditions.

For technical reasons snow chains may only be used with the following wheel rim/tyre combination.

Tyres Wheel rim Chains

215/60 R16 6Jx16 VAS 43

Max. link 15 mm215/55 R17 7Jx17 VAS 45

215/50 R18 7Jx18 VAS 45

225/55 R17 7Jx17 VAS 45

Max. link 9 mm225/50 R18 7Jx18 VAS 45

225/45 R19 8Jx19 VAS 45

Other dimensions do not allow chains

Remove any central wheel trims before fitting snow chains.

WARNING The use of unsuitable or incorrectly fitted chains could lead to serious accidents and damage. Always the appropriate snow chains. Observe the fitting instructions provided by the snow chain manufacturer. Never exceed the maximum permitted speeds when driving with snow chains.

CAUTION Remove the snow chains to drive on roads without snow. Otherwise they will im- pair vehicle handling, damage the tyres and wear out very quickly.

Wheel rims may be damaged or scratch- ed if the chains come into direct contact with them. SEAT recommends the use of covered snow chains.

Tyre pressure monitor sys- tem

Control lamp

It lights up

The inflation pressure of one or more wheels is much lower than the value set by the driver, or the tyre has structural damage. In addition, a audible warning sounds and a text message is displayed on the instrument panel screen. Stop the vehicle! Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible. Check all tyres and pressures. Replace any damaged tyres.

Flashes

System fault The control lamp flashes for approximately 1 minute and then lights up permanently. If the tyre is inflated correctly, switch the ignition off and on again. Re-calibrate the tyre pressure monitor indicator page 333. If the fault continues, go to a specialised workshop.

Several control and warning lamps light up for a few seconds when the ignition is

332

Wheels

switched on while the function is verified. They will switch off after a few seconds.

WARNING Observe the safety warnings in Con- trol and warning lamps on page 90.

Tyre pressure monitor system

Fig. 230 Instrument panel: warning of loss of tyre pressure.

The tyre pressure monitoring system com- pares the individual speeds of each wheel and thus the dynamic radius with the help of the ABS sensors.

If the rolling circumference of one or more wheels has changed, the tyre pressure moni- toring indicator will indicate this on the instru- ment panel through a warning lamp and a warning to the driver Fig. 230. When only

one specific tyre is affected, its position within the vehicle will be indicated.

Loss of pressure: Check left tyre pressure!

Wheel tread change The wheel diameter changes when:

Tyre pressure is changed manually. Tyre pressure is insufficient. The tyre structure is damaged. The vehicle is unbalanced because of a load. The wheels on an axle are subject to a heavier load (e.g. with a heavy load). The vehicle is fitted with snow chains. The temporary spare wheel is fitted. The wheel on one axle is changed.

There may be a delay in the reaction of the tyre pressure monitoring indicator or it may not indicate anything under certain circum- stances (e.g. sporty driving, snow-covered or unpaved roads, or when driving with snow chains).

Calibrate the tyre pressure monitoring in- dicator After changing the tyre pressure or replacing one or more wheels, the tyre pressure moni- toring indicator must be recalibrated. Do the

same, for example, when the front and rear wheels are swapped.

Switch the ignition on. Save the new inflation pressure in the Info- tainment system: function button > SET- TINGS > Tyres page 95.

When driving, the system self-calibrates the tyre pressure provided by the driver and the wheels fitted. After a long journey with varied speeds the programmed values are collected and monitored.

With the wheels under very heavy loads, the tyre pressure must be increased to the total recommended tyre pressure before calibra- tion Fig. 227.

WARNING When the tyres are inflated at different pressures or at a pressure that is too low then a tyre may be damaged resulting in a loss of control of the vehicle and a serious or fatal accident. If the lamp lights up, reduce speed im- mediately and avoid any sudden turning or braking manoeuvre. Stop when possible, and check the tyre pressure and status. The tyre pressure monitoring system can only operate correctly if all of the tyres are inflated to the correct pressure when cold. If a tyre has not been punctured and it does not have to be changed immediately,

333

Practical tips

drive to the nearest specialised workshop at a moderate speed and have the tyre checked and inflated to the correct pres- sure.

Note Driving for the first time with new tyres at a high speed can cause them to slightly ex- pand, which could then produce an air pressure warning. If excessively low tyre pressure is detec- ted with the ignition on, an audible warning will sound. In the event that there is a fault in the system, an audible warning will sound. Driving on dirt tracks for a long period of time or driving in a sporty style can tempo- rarily deactivate the TPMS. The control lamp shows a fault, but disappears when road conditions or the driving style change. Do not only rely on the tyre pressure monitoring system. Regularly check your tyres to ensure that the tyre pressure is cor- rect and that the tyres are not damaged due to puncture, cuts, tears and im- pacts/dents. Remove objects from the tyres only when they have not pierced the tyres. The tyre pressure monitoring indicator does not function when there is a fault in the ESC or ABS page 269.

Spare wheel

Location and use of the temporary spare wheel

Fig. 231 In the luggage compartment: load floor raised.

Fig. 232 In the luggage compartment: remove the subwoofer.

The temporary spare wheel is stored under the floor panel in the luggage compartment and is attached by a thumbnut.

The temporary spare wheel has been de- signed to be used for short periods of time. Have the tyres checked and replaced as soon as possible at a SEAT Official Service or at a specialised workshop.

The spare wheel must not be switched for a spare wheel from another vehicle.

Removing the temporary spare wheel Lift and hold up the floor panel to remove the temporary spare wheel page 142. Turn the thumb wheel anti-clockwise Fig. 231. Take out the temporary spare wheel.

334

Wheels

Getting the spare wheel out of vehicles with BEATS Audio 10 speakers (with sub- woofer)* To remove the spare wheel, you must first re- move the subwoofer.

Lift and secure the luggage compartment floor as explained in page 142. Disconnect the subwoofer Fig. 232 1 speaker cable. Turn the securing wheel in an anti-clock- wise direction Fig. 232 2 . Remove the subwoofer speaker and the spare wheel. When re-mounting the spare tyre, place the subwoofer on the base of the wheel rim with care. When doing so, the tip of the FRONT arrow on the subwoofer should point forward. Reconnect the speaker cable and firmly ro- tate the securing wheel clockwise so that the subwoofer system and wheel are firmly in place.

Chains For technical reasons, snow chains must not be used on the temporary spare wheel.

If you have a puncture on one of the front wheels when using snow chains, fit the tem- porary spare wheel in place of one of the rear wheels. Fit the snow chains on the rear wheel that you have removed and replace the punctured front wheel with this wheel.

WARNING After fitting the temporary spare wheel, check the tyre pressures as soon as possi- ble. Failure to do so may cause an acci- dent. The tyre pressure is listed on the back of the left front door frame Fig. 227. Do not drive at over 80 km/h (50 mph) when the temporary spare wheel is fitted on the vehicle: risk of accident! Never travel more than 200 km using a temporary spare wheel. Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and fast cornering: risk of accident! Never use more than one temporary spare wheel at the same time, risk of acci- dent. No other type of tyre (normal summer or winter tyre) may be fitted on the compact temporary spare wheel rim. If you are driving using the spare wheel, the ACC system could automatically switch off during the journey. Switch off the system when starting off.

335

Maintenance

Maintenance

SEAT Maintenance Pro- gramme

Service intervals

Service work and the Digital Main- tenance Plan

Log of services performed (Digital Main- tenance Plan) The SEAT dealership or a specialised work- shop records Service receipts in a central system. Thanks to this comprehensive docu- mentation of the service history, it is possible to reproduce the services performed any time. SEAT recommends requesting a Service receipt after every service carried out con- taining all the services carried out on the sys- tem.

Whenever there is a new service the receipt is replaced with a current one.

The Digital Maintenance Plan is not avail- able in some markets. In this case, your SEAT dealer will inform you about the cur- rent documentation of the work.

Service works In the Digital Maintenance Plan, your SEAT authorised service or specialised workshop documents the following information:

When each one of the services was carried out. Whether a specific repair has been sugges- ted, e.g. changing the brake pads in the near future. If you have expressed a special request for the maintenance. Your Service Advisor will write the work order. The components or fluids that were changed. The date of the next service.

The Long Life Mobility Warranty is valid until the next inspection. This information is docu- mented in all checks performed.

The type and the volume of the service may vary from one vehicle to another. A special- ised workshop will be able to provide specific information on the jobs for your vehicle.

WARNING If the services are insufficient or not per- formed and if the service intervals are not observed, the vehicle may be immobilised in traffic cause an accident and severe in- juries.

Make sure that any repairs are carried out by a SEAT authorised service or speci- alised workshop.

CAUTION SEAT cannot be held liable for any damage to the vehicle due to insufficient work or of lack of availability of spare parts.

Note Regular services on the vehicle not only maintain its value, but also its correct oper- ation and road safety. For this reason, con- duct the services in accordance with SEAT guidelines.

Set Service or Flexible Service In- tervals

Services are classified as oil change service and inspection. The service interval display on the instrument panel display serves as a reminder of the next service.

Depending on the features, the engine and the conditions of use of the car, either the Fixed service or the Flexible service will be applied for an oil change service..

336

SEAT Maintenance Programme

How to know which type of service needs to his vehicle Check the tables below:

Oil change servicea)

PR No. Type of service Service interval

QI1

Fixed

Every 5000 km or after 1 yearb)

QI2 Every 7500 km or after 1 yearb)

QI3 Every 10000 km or after 1 yearb)

QI4 Every 15000 km or after 1 yearb)

QI6 Flexible According to the service in- terval display

a) The data are based on normal conditions of use. b) Whatever happens first.

Inspection Servicea)

According to the service interval display

a) The data are based on normal conditions of use.

Particular characteristics of the Flexible Service Regarding the Flexible Service, the oil change service only has to be performed when the vehicle needs it. To calculate when

you have to carry out this service, take into account the individual conditions of use and personal driving style. A major component of the flexible service the use of LongLife oil in- stead of conventional engine oil.

Bear in mind the information about the speci- fications of the engine oil according to the VW standard page 315.

If you do not want to the flexible service you can select the fixed service However, a fixed service may affect service costs The Service Advisor will gladly advise you.

Service interval display At SEAT, the dates of the services are indica- ted by the service interval display on the in- strument panel page 85 or in the Vehicle settings menu of the infotainment system page 95.

The service interval display gives information for service dates that involve an engine oil change or an inspection. When the time for the corresponding service comes, additional work required, such as the change of brake fluid and the spark plugs, can be carried out.

Information about the terms of use

The service intervals and groups are usually based on normal conditions of use.

If, on the other hand, the vehicle is under ad- verse conditions of use, some of the work must be carried out before the next service period or even between service intervals.

Conditions of use adverse include:

The use of fuel with a high sulphur content. Frequent short trips. Letting the engine idle for a long period of time, as in the case of taxis. Using the vehicle in areas with thick dust. Frequent driving with a trailer (depending on equipment). Using the vehicle mostly in situations with a lot of traffic and stops (e.g. in a city). Using the vehicle mostly in winter.

This applies especially for the following parts (depending on equipment):

Dust and pollen filter Air Care allergen filter Air filter Toothed chain Particulate filter Engine oil

The Service Advisor of your specialised workshop will gladly inform you about the need of performing service work between

337

Maintenance

normal service intervals, always considering the conditions of use of your vehicle.

WARNING If the services are insufficient or not per- formed and if the service intervals are not observed, the vehicle may be immobilised in traffic and cause accidents and severe injuries. Have the services conducted at author- ised SEAT services or specialised work- shops.

CAUTION SEAT cannot be held liable for any damage to the vehicle due to insufficient work or of lack of availability of spare parts.

Service sets

Sets of services include all the maintenance works needed to ensure the safety and the smooth running of the vehicle (depending on the conditions of use and the features of the vehicle, such as the engine, gearbox, or operating fluids). Maintenance services are divided into inspection and review services. Consult the details of the jobs required for your vehicle at:

Your SEAT authorised service Your specialised workshop

Due to technical reasons (continuous devel- opment of components) the sets of services may vary. Your SEAT authorised service or specialised workshop is always receiving up- dates in time.

Additional service offers

Approved spare parts

Original SEAT Spare Parts have been con- ceived for their vehicles and approved by SEAT, with a special emphasis on safety. These parts correspond exactly to the manu- facturer's requirements in terms of design, accuracy of the measurements and materi- als. The original SEAT Spare Parts have been conceived exclusively for your vehicle. For this reason, we always recommend the use of Original SEAT Spare Parts. SEAT cannot be held liable for the safety and suitability of parts from other manufacturers.

Approved spare parts

Approved spare parts, following the manu- facturer's requirements, are an additional service to you, offering the possibility of re- placing complete sets, such as: light engine, gearboxes, heads, control units, electrical components, etc.

These parts are, approved parts, and are the same as the factory parts, which are also ap- proved spare parts.

Original accessories

We recommend you only use SEAT Original Accessories and SEAT approved accessories for your vehicle. The reliability, safety and suitability of these accessories have been in- spected specifically for this type of vehicle. SEAT cannot be held liable for the safety and suitability of parts from other manufacturers.

SEAT Service Mobility

Since the moment you purchase your SEAT vehicle you will be able to enjoy the benefits and coverage of the SEAT Mobility Service.

For the first two years after the purchase, your new SEAT vehicle is automatically cov- ered by the SEAT Mobility Service without ad- ditional costs.

If you wish to enjoy this service after this peri- od, you can extend SEAT Mobility as long as you carry out the recommended Inspection and Maintenance Services at a SEAT Author- ised Service.

338

Vehicle maintenance

If your SEAT vehicle is immobilised due to a fault or an accident, our assistance services will help you keep moving.

Take into account that the SEAT Mobility Service differs depending on the country in which the vehicle was purchased. For further information ask your SEAT dealership or the SEAT website in your country.

Warranty

Fault-free operation warranty

SEAT Authorised Services ensure the perfect condition of new vehicles. Check the pur- chase agreement or complementary addi- tional documentation provided by your Tech- nical Service to see the conditions and the terms of the warranty. Consult further infor- mation in this regard in your SEAT Official Service.

Vehicle maintenance

Maintenance and cleaning

Basic observations

Regular and careful care helps to maintain the value of your vehicle. In addition, it may become a prerequisite to demand the war- ranty in the event of corrosion damage and deficiencies in the paint coat of the body- work.

Specialised workshops have the necessary care products. Please follow the instructions for application on the packaging.

WARNING Cleaning products and other materials used for car care can be damaging to your health if misused. Always keep care products in a safe place, out of the reach of children. Danger of poisoning!

For the sake of the environment When purchasing car care products, chose products that are compatible with the environment. The waste from car-care products should not be disposed of with ordinary household waste.

Washing the vehicle

The longer you take to clean the tanks, e.g. remains of insects, bird excrements, tree resin or anti frost salt adhered to your vehicle, the more damage it can cause to the surface. High temperatures, for instance strong sun- light, further intensify the damage.

Before washing the car, soften the dirt using plenty of water.

To remove encrusted dirt such as insects, bird droppings or tree resin, use a lot of water and a microfibre cloth.

Have the underside of the vehicle washed af- ter the end of the anti frost salts in winter.

High pressure cleaning equipment When washing the vehicle with a high-pres- sure cleaner, always follow the operating in- structions for the equipment. This applies particularly to the operating pressure and the distance between the spraying water. Do not aim the jet directly to the side window gas- kets, doors, covers or the panoramic sun- roof*; the same applies to tyres, rubber ho- ses, soundproofing material, sensors* or camera lenses*. Keep a distance of at least 40 cm.

Do not remove snow and ice with a high- pressure cleaner.

339

Maintenance

Do not use a nozzle that sprays the water out in a direct stream or one that has a rotating jet for forcing off dirt.

The water temperature must not exceed 60C.

Automatic car washes Spray the vehicle before starting the car wash.

Make sure that the windows and the panor- amic sunroof* are closed and the windscreen wipers are deactivated. Bear in mind the in- structions of the car wash tunnel operator, especially if your vehicle has detachable parts.

Use of car washes without brushes if possible.

Washing by hand Clean your vehicle from top to bottom with a soft sponge or with a brush. Only use clean- ing products that do not contain solvents.

Washing vehicles with a matte paint by hand To prevent damage to the vehicle when washing it, first remove the thicker dust and dirt. To remove traces of insects, grease and fingerprints, it is best to use a special cleaner for matte paint.

Apply the product with a microfibre cloth. To avoid damaging the surface of the paint, do not apply too much pressure.

Rinse with plenty of water. Then clean it with a neutral cleaning product and a soft microfi- bre cloth.

Rinse the vehicle again with plenty of water and then leave it to dry. Remove traces of water with a leather cloth.

WARNING Only wash the vehicle with the ignition switched off or according to the specifica- tions of the car wash tunnel operator. Risk of accident! When cleaning the underbody or the in- side of the wheel arches, protect yourself from sharp or pointy metal parts. Risk of cut! After cleaning the brakes could act more slowly due to moisture or, in winter, the ice on the brake discs and pads. Risk of acci- dent! In this case the brakes should be dried by pressing the brake pedal several times.

CAUTION Before washing the vehicle in an auto- matic car wash, please make sure to re- tract the exterior mirrors to prevent them from being damaged. Electric exterior rear-

view mirrors must always be folded/de- ployed electrically! Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Risk of damaging the paint job! Do not use sponges, abrasive household sponges or similar to clean insect remains. Risk of damaging the surface! Vehicle parts with matte paint: Do not use polish or hard wax. Risk of

damaging the surface! Never select washing programs that in-

clude the use of wax. This could dam- age the appearance of matte paint.

Do not put stickers or magnets on parts with matte paint, as removing them may damage the paint.

For the sake of the environment The car should only be washed in special wash bays. These places are prepared to prevent oily water from getting into the public drains.

Cleaning and maintenance instruc- tions

The cleaning and maintenance of individual components of the vehicle can be checked in the following tables. The contents should be understood merely as a recommendation. Go to your specialised workshop if you have

340

Vehicle maintenance

special questions or parts that are not listed. Take he general considerations into account in Take special care with... on page 344.

Cleaning the exterior

Windscreen wipers

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft cloth with wipers

Headlights / Tail lights

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft sponge with neutral soap solutiona)

a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in 1 litre of water

Sensors / Camera lenses

Problem Solution

Dirt

Sensors: soft cloth with a sol- vent-free cleaning product Camera lenses: soft cloth with an alcohol-free cleaning prod- uct

Snow/ice Hand brush/Anti frost spray with no solvents

Wheels

Problem Solution

Antifreeze salt Water

Brake abrasion dust

Acid-free special cleaning product

End exhausts

Problem Solution

Antifreeze salt Water, if a steel cleaning prod- uct is required

Covers / Trims

Problem Solution

Dirt Neutral soap solutiona), if a steel cleaning product is re- quired

a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in 1 litre of water

Paint

Problem Solution

Paint flaws Check the paint's colour code in an authorised service and re- store with a touch-up pencil

Spilled fuel Immediately rinse with water

Environmental rust tank

Apply rust remover and then apply hard wax. Go you your specialised workshop if you have any queries

Problem Solution

Corrosion Have your specialised work- shop take care of this

The water does not create drop- lets on the clean paint

Maintain with hard wax (at least 2 times a year)

No shine de- spite sober main- tenance/paint

Treat with suitable wax and ap- ply paint preservative after- wards if the wax used does not contain preservative ingredi- ents

Tanks, e.g. insect remains, bird droppings, tree sap, road salt

Immediately soften with water and remove with a microfibre cloth

Fat-based dirt, e.g. cosmetic products or sunscreen

Delete immediately with a neu- tral soap solutiona) and a soft cloth

a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in 1 litre of water

Carbon fibre parts

Problem Solution

Dirt Clean the same way as pain- ted parts page 339

341

Maintenance

Decoration slides

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft sponge with neutral soap solutiona)

a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in 1 litre of water

Interior cleaning

Windows

Problem Solution

Dirt Apply windscreen cleaner and then dry with a cloth

Covers / Trims

Problem Solution

Dirt Neutral soap solutiona)

a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in 1 litre of water

Plastic parts

Problem Solution

Dirt Damp cloth

Encrusted dirt Neutral soap solutiona), if pos- sible solvent-free plastic clean- er

a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in 1 litre of water

Displays/instrument panel

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft cloth with a liquid crystal display cleaner

Control panels

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft brush, then soft cloth with neutral soap solutiona)

a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in 1 litre of water

Seat belts

Problem Solution

Dirt Neutral soap solutiona), al- lowed to dry before retracting

a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in 1 litre of water

Fabrics, artificial, Alcantara leather

Problem Solution

Particles of dirt stuck to surfaces

Vacuum cleaner

Water-based dirt, e.g. coffee, tea, blood etc.

Absorbent cloth and neutral soap solutiona)

Problem Solution

Grease-based dirt, e.g. oil, make- up, etc.

Apply a neutral soap solutiona). Absorb the dissolved grease and paint particles drying with an absorbent cloth, in case you must treat it with water after- wards

Special dirt, e.g. pens, nail polish, dispersion paint, shoe cream etc.

Special stain remove: dry with an absorbent cloth, if applica- ble, apply neutral soap solution afterwardsa)

a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in 1 litre of water

Natural leather

Problem Solution

Recent dirt Cotton cloth with neutral soap solutiona)

Water-based dirt, e.g. coffee, tea, blood etc.

Recent stains: absorbent cloth Dry stains: stain remover suita- ble for leather

Grease-based dirt, e.g. oil, make- up, etc.

Recent stains: absorbent cloth and suitable stain remover for leather Dry stains: grease solvent spray

Special dirt, e.g. pens, nail polish, dispersion paint, shoe cream etc.

Stain remover suitable for leather

342

Vehicle maintenance

Problem Solution

Care Apply preservative cream regu- larly to protect from sunlight. Use a colour preservative if re- quired

a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in 1 litre of water

Carbon fibre parts

Problem Solution

Dirt Clean like plastic parts

Take special care with...

Headlights/tail lights Do not clean the headlights/tail lights with a dry cloth or sponge. Do not use cleaning products that contain alcohol. Risk of cracks!

Wheels Do not use for paint wax or other abrasive products. If the protective coating on the paint of the rim has been damaged due to stone impacts, scratches, etc., the damage should be re- paired immediately.

Camera lenses Do not use hot or warm water to remove ice or snow from the camera lenses. Risk of cracking the lens! To clean the camera lens, never use abra- sive cleaning products or products with alco- hol. Risk of scratches and cracks!

Windows Remove snow and ice from windows and exterior mirrors with a plastic scraper only. To avoid scratches, the scraper should only be pushed in one direction and not moved to and fro. Never remove snow or ice from windows and rearview mirrors with warm or hot water. Risk of cracks on the windows! To prevent damage to the heating of the rear window, do not put stickers over the heating elements.

Covers/trims Do not use cleaning products or chrome based cleaning agents.

Paint The vehicle must be free from dirt and dust before applying wax or care products. Risk of scratches! Do not apply wax or care products if the vehicle is exposed to direct sunlight. Risk of damaging the paint job!

The ambient rust deposits must not be re- moved through friction. Risk of damaging the paint job! Remove cosmetic products and sunlight immediately. Risk of damaging the paint job!

Displays/instrument panel The screens, the instrument panel and the trim around it must not be cleaned dry. Risk of scratches! Make sure that the instrument panel is switched off and cooled down before clean- ing. Make sure that no liquid leaks between the instrument panel and the trim. Risk of dam- age!

Control panels Make sure that no liquid leaks into the con- trol panels. Risk of damage!

Seat belts Do not remove the seat belts to clean them. Seat belts and their components must nev- er be cleaned with chemical products, nor should they be allowed to come into contact with corrosive liquids, solvents or sharp ob- jects. Risk of damaging the fabric! If you find any damage to the belt webbing, belt fittings, the belt retractor or the buckle, ask your specialised workshop to replace the belt in question.

343

Maintenance

Fabrics/artificial leather/Alcantara leath- er Do not treat artificial leather/Alcantara leather with leather care products, solvents, floor wax, shoe polish, stain removers or simi- lar products. If the stain is very hard to remove, take the vehicle to a specialised workshop to have it removed there. This will prevent damage. Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hard sponges, etc. to clean. Do not turn on seat heating* to dry the seats. Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, riv- ets or belts can damage the surface. Open Velcro, e.g. on clothes can damage the seat upholstery. Make sure that Velcro fasteners are closed.

Natural leather Never use solvents, wax polish, shoe cream, spot removers or similar products on leather. Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, riv- ets or belts can damage the surface. Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hard sponges, etc. to clean. Do not turn on seat heating* to dry the seats. Avoid exposing leather to direct sunlight for long periods, otherwise it may tend to lose some of its colour. If the car is left for a pro-

longed period in the bright sun, it is best to cover the leather.

WARNING Do not use water-repellent coatings on the windscreen. In bad visibility conditions such as humid weather, darkness or when the sun is in its lowest point, visibility may be impacted. Risk of accident! Such coat- ings can also cause the windscreen wiper blades to make noise.

Note Remains of insects can be removed much more easily with previously treated paint. Regular car care treatments can prevent deposits of ambient rust.

Remove the vehicle from traffic

If you want to leave your vehicle stationary for a long period of time, contact a qualified workshop. They will gladly inform you about the necessary measures, such as anti-corro- sion protection, Service and storage.

Also take into account instructions regarding the 12-volt vehicle battery page 321.

Accessories and modifi- cations to the vehicle

Accessories, spare parts and repair work

Introduction

Always ask your dealer or specialist retailer for advice before purchasing accessories and replacement parts.

Your vehicle is designed to offer a high stand- ard of active and passive safety. For this rea- son, we recommend that you ask a SEAT Offi- cial Service for advice before fitting accesso- ries or replacement parts. Your SEAT Official Service has the latest information from the manufacturer and can recommend accesso- ries and replacement parts which are suita- ble for your requirements. They can also an- swer any questions you might have regarding official regulations.

We recommend only using SEAT accesso- ries and genuine SEAT parts. SEAT has tested these parts and accessories for suita- bility, reliability and safety. SEAT Official Services have the necessary experience and facilities to ensure that the parts are installed correctly and professionally.

344

Accessories and modifications to the vehicle

Any retro-fitted equipment which has a di- rect effect on the vehicle and/or the way it is driven, such as a cruise control system or electronically-controlled suspension, must be approved for use in your vehicle and bear the e mark (the European Union's authorisa- tion symbol).

If any additional electrical devices are fit- ted which do not serve to control the vehicle itself (for instance a refrigerator box, laptop or ventilator fan, etc.), they must bear the sign (manufacturer conformity declaration in the European Union).

WARNING Accessories, for example telephone hold- ers or cup holders, should never be fitted on the covers, or within the working range of the airbags. Otherwise, there is a danger of injury if the airbag is triggered in an acci- dent.

Technical modifications

Unauthorised modifications to the electronic components, software, wiring or data transfer in the vehicle may cause malfunctioning.

You will appreciate that your SEAT dealership cannot be held liable for any damage caused by modifications and/or work per- formed incorrectly.

For this reason we recommend asking official SEAT service centres to do any necessary work using genuine SEAT parts.

WARNING Incorrectly performed modifications or other work on your vehicle can lead to mal- functions and cause accidents.

Radio telephones and office equip- ment

Radio transmitters (fixed installation) Any retrofit installations of radio transmitters in the vehicle require prior approval. SEAT generally authorises in-vehicle installations of approved types of radio transmitters provi- ded that:

The antenna is installed correctly. The aerial is installed on the exterior of the vehicle (and shielded cables are used to- gether with non-reflective aerial trimming). The effective transmitting power does not exceed 10 Watts at the aerial base.

A SEAT Official Service and specialised work- shop will be able to inform you about options for installing and operating radio transmitters with a higher transmitting power.

Mobile radio transmitters Commercial mobile telephones or radio equipment might interfere with the electron- ics of your vehicle and cause malfunctions. This may be due to:

No external aerial. External aerial incorrectly installed. Transmitting power more than 10 W.

You must, therefore, do not operate portable mobile telephones or radio equipment inside the vehicle without a properly installed exter- nal aerial .

Please note also that the maximum range of the equipment can only be achieved with an external aerial.

Business equipment Retrofit installation of business or private equipment in the vehicle is permitted, provi- ded the equipment cannot interfere with the driver's immediate control of the vehicle and that any such equipment carries the mark. Any retrofit equipment that could influence the driver's control of the vehicle must have a type approval for your vehicle and must carry the e mark.

WARNING Mobile telephones or radio equipment which is operated inside the vehicle without

345

Maintenance

a properly installed external aerial can create excessive magnetic fields that could cause a health hazard.

Note The posterior fitting of electric and elec- tronic equipment in this vehicle affects its licence and could lead to the withdrawal of the vehicle registration document under certain circumstances. Please use the mobile telephone/radio operating instructions.

346

Information for the user

Information for the user

Information for the user

Information stored by the control units

Storage of accident data (Event Data Recorder)

Your vehicle has an event data recorder (EDR).

The EDRs function is to record data in the event of a mild or serious accident. These da- ta are used to support the analysis of how dif- ferent vehicle systems behaved.

The EDR records, over a reduced time range (normally 10 seconds or less), dynamic driv- ing data and data from the restraint systems, such as:

How different vehicle systems worked. Whether the driver and the occupants were wearing their seat belts. How hard the acceleration or brake pedal was pressed. Vehicle speed.

These data will provide a better understand- ing of the circumstances of the accident.

Data from the driving assist systems are also recorded. This includes data such as whether the systems were inactive or active and if such action had an impact on the vehicles dynamic behaviour, changing its path in the aforementioned situations, accelerating or decelerating the vehicle.

Depending on vehicle equipment, this in- cludes data from systems such as:

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Emergency brake assistance system (Front Assist). Park Pilot system Parking aid system (Park Assist). Lane Assist

The EDR data are only recorded in specific accident situations. No data are recorded in normal driving conditions.

No audio or video data inside or around the vehicle are recorded. Under no circumstan- ces are personal data such as name, age, or gender recorded. Nevertheless, third parties (such as criminal proceedings authorities) may relate the contents of the EDR data to other data sources and create a personal reference in the context of an accident inves- tigation.

In order to read the EDR data it is necessary to access (if legally permitted to do so) the

vehicle's ODB (On-Board-Diagnose) inter- face while the vehicle is switched on.

SEAT will not have access to EDR data unless the owner (or, in Leasing cases, the lessee or hirer) gives their consent. There may be ex- ceptions to this, depending on legal or con- tractual provisions.

Due to legal requirements in safety-related products, SEAT may use the EDR data for field research and in order to improve vehicle system quality. Any data used for the purpo- ses of research will be treated anonymously (in other words, no reference will be made to the vehicle, their owner or the lessee/hirer).

Other important information

Environmental compatibility

Environmental protection is a top priority in the design, choice of materials and manufac- ture of your new SEAT.

Constructive measures to encourage re- cycling Joints and connections designed for easy dismantling. Modular construction to facilitate disman- tling. Increased use of single-grade materials.

347

Information for the user

Plastic parts and elastomers are marked in accordance with ISO 1043, ISO 11469 and ISO 1629.

Choice of materials Use of recycled materials. Use of compatible plastics in the same part if its components are not easily separated. Use of recycled materials and/or materials originating from renewable sources. Reduction of volatile components, including odour, in plastic materials. Use of CFC-free coolants.

Ban on heavy metals, with the exceptions dictated by law (Annex II of ELV Directive 2000/53/EC): cadmium, lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium.

Manufacturing methods Reduction of the quantity of thinner in the protective wax for cavities. Use of plastic film as protection during vehi- cle transport. Use of solvent-free adhesives. Use of CFC-free coolants in cooling sys- tems. Recycling and energy recovery from resi- dues (RDF). Improvement in the quality of waste water.

Use of systems for the recovery of residual heat (thermal recovery, enthalpy wheels, etc.). The use of water-soluble paints.

Recycling of electrical or electron- ic devices

All electrical or electronic devices (EED) that are not permanently fitted in the vehicle must be marked with the following symbol:

This symbol indicates that EED must not be discarded as home waste but through selec- tive waste collection.

Information about the EU Di- rective 2014/53/EU

Simplified EU compliance declara- tion

Your vehicle has different radioelectrical devi- ces. The manufacturers of these devices de- clare that they comply with Directive 2014/53/EU when legally required.

The full text of the EU compliance declaration is available online at the following address:

www.seat.com/generalinfo

Addresses of the manufacturers

According to the Directive 2014/53/EU, all relevant components must include the ad- dress of the manufacturer.

The address of the manufacturers of compo- nents that, due to their size or nature, cannot include a sticker are listed below, as long as it is legally required:

Radioelectrical equipment fitted in the vehicle

Addresses of the manufacturers

Radiofrequency remote control key

Della KGaA Hueck & Co. Rixbecker Strae 75 59552 Lippstadt, GERMANY

Radio frequency re- mote control (auxiliary heater) Transmitted-Receiver (independent heating)

Digades GmbH uere Weberstrae 20 02763 Zittau, GERMANY

Webasto Thermo & Comfort SE Friedrichshafener Str. 9 82205 Gilching, GERMANY

348

Information for the user

Radioelectrical equipment fitted in the vehicle

Addresses of the manufacturers

Radar sensors for as- sistance systems

ADC Automotive Distance Control Systems GmbH Peter-Dornier-Strae 10 88131 Lindau, GERMANY

Robert Bosch GmbH Postfach 16 61 71226 Leonberg, GERMANY

Frequency bands, station power

Radioelectrical equipmenta) Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models

Radiofrequency remote control (vehicle)

433.05-434.78 MHz 10 mW (ERP)

All SEAT models 433.05-434.79 MHz 10 mW

868.0-868.6 MHz 25 mW

434.42 MHz 32 W

Radio frequency remote control (auxiliary heater)

868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 25 mW Leon, Ateca and Tarraco

868.0-868.6 MHz (868.3 MHz) 3.1 mW Alhambra

Transmitted-Receiver (independent heating) 868.0-868.6 MHz (868.3 MHz) 23.5 mW Alhambra

868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 23.5 mW Leon, Ateca and Tarraco

Bluetooth 2402-2480 MHz 6 dBm

All SEAT models 2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm

349

Information for the user

Radioelectrical equipmenta) Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models

Connection to the external antenna of the car

GSM 900: 880-915 MHz 33 dBm

Leon, Ateca, Alhambra and TarracoGSM 1800: 1710-1785 MHz 30 dBm

WCDMA FDD I: 1920-1980 MHz 24 dBm

WCDMA FDD lll: 1710-1785 MHz 21 dBm

Tarraco and Leon

WCDMA FDD VIII: 880-915MHz 21 dBm

LTE FDD1: 1920-1980 MHz 23 dBm

LTE FDD3: 1710-1785 MHz 23 dBm

LTE FDD7: 2500-2570 MHz 23 dBm

LTE FDD8: 880-915 MHz 23 dBm

LTE FFD20: 832-862 MHz 23 dBm

Wireless hotspot 2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm Leon, Ateca and Tarraco

Keyless Access 434.42 MHz 32 W Ibiza, Arona, Leon, Ateca and Tarraco

Radar sensors for assistance systems 76 GHz-77 GHz

28.2 dBm Leon and Alhambra

35.0 dBm Ibiza, Arona, Ateca and Tarraco

24050-24250 MHz 20 dBm Arona, Ateca, Tarraco and Alhambra

Wireless charging 110-120 kHz 10 W Ibiza, Arona, Leon, Ateca and Tarraco

111-120 kHz 10 W New Leon

Instrument panel 125 kHz 40 dBA/m Ibiza, Arona, Ateca, Tarraco and Alhambra

350

Information for the user

Radioelectrical equipmenta) Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models

Online Connectivity Unit

EGSM900: 880-915 MHz 33 dBm

Ibiza, Arona, Leon, Ateca and Tarraco

DCS1800: 1710-1785 MHz 31 dBm

UMTS FDD 1: 1920-1980 MHz 24 dBm

UMTS FDD 3: 1710-1785 MHz 24 dBm

UMTS FDD 8: 880-915 MHz 24 dBm

E-UTRA FDD 1: 1920-1980 MHz 23.5 dBm

E-UTRA FDD 3: 1710-1785 MHz 23.0 dBm

E-UTRA FDD 7: 2500-2570 MHz 23.5 dBm

E-UTRA FDD 8: 880-915 MHz 23.0 dBm

E-UTRA FDD 20: 832-862 MHz 23.5 dBm

E-UTRA FDD 28: 703-748 MHz 23.0 dBm

a) The commissioning or authorisation of radioelectrical technology may be restricted in some European countries, forbidden or only allowed with additional requirements.

Hereby, Molex CVS Dabendorf GmbH de- clares that the radio equipment type LTE- MBC-EU2 is in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU. The full text of the EU declara- tion of conformity is available at the following internet address:

http://www.molex.com/doc

351

Technical data

Technical data

Indications about the technical data

Important information

Introduction

The values indicated in the technical data may differ depending on optional equipment or version of the model, as well as in the case of special vehicles and equipment for certain countries.

The information in the official vehicle docu- mentation takes precedence at all times.

Abbreviations used in the Technical Speci- fications section

kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement.

PS Pferdestrke (horsepower), formerly used to denote engine power.

rpm, 1/min Revolutions per minute - engine speed.

Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque.

CZ Cetane number, indication of the die- sel combustion power.

RON Research octane number, indication of the knock resistance of petrol.

Vehicle identification data

Vehicle ID number The vehicle ID number can be found in the following places:

In the infotainment system, using the func- tion button > SETTINGS > Service > Vehicle identification number. One the vehicle's data label. In front, under the windscreen. To the right in the engine compartment.

Type plate The type plate is located on the vehicles right hand door frame. Vehicles for certain export countries do not have a type plate.

Fuel consumption

Approved consumption values are derived from measurements performed or supervised by certified EU laboratories, according to the legislation in force at the time (for more infor- mation, see the Publications Office of the Eu- ropean Union on the EUR-Lex website: Eu- ropean Union, http://eur-lex.europa.eu/) and apply to the specified vehicle characteristics.

The values relating to fuel consumption and CO2 emissions can be found in the documen-

tation provided to the purchaser of the vehi- cle at the time of purchase.

Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions de- pend on the equipment/features of each indi- vidual vehicle, as well as on the driving style, road conditions, traffic conditions, environ- mental conditions, load or number of passen- gers.

Filling capacities

Tank level

Vehicles with front-wheel drive:

50 l, of which approx. 7l reserve

Vehicles with four-wheel drive:

55 l, of which approx. 8.5 l reserve

Capacity of the windscreen washer fluid con- tainer

approx. 3 litres

Weights

Load on the roof The maximum authorised load on the roof of your vehicle is 75 kg.

352

Indications about the technical data

Empty weight, total weight, axle loads The empty weight of the vehicle with driver (75 kg) was calculated according to the (EU) 1230/2012 standard. Optional equipment can increase the empty weight, which means that the possible useful load decreases propor- tionally.

Trailer weight The maximum permitted drawbar load on the ball head of the towing bracket is 90 kg.

WARNING The values indicated for the maximum per- mitted weights must not be exceeded. There is a risk of accident and damage!

353

Technical data

Engine specifications

Petrol engines 1.0 TSI Start-Stop 1.4 TSI Start-Stop 1.5 TSI Start-Stop 2.0 TSI Start-Stop

Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 81 (110)/5,500 110 (150)/5,000-6,000 110 (150)/5,000-6,000 140 (190)/4,200-6,000

Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 200/2,000-3,000 250/1,500-3,500 250/1,500-3,500 320/1,500-4,100

No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 3/999 4/1,395 4/1498 4/1,984

Fuel Super 95 / Normal 91 (with a slight power loss) ROZ

Gearbox manual DSG manual DSG DSG 4Drive

Top speed (km/h) a) a) 198 (5) 198 (6) 212 (5)

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) a) a) 8.5 8.6 7.1

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,890 a) 1,930 1,940 2,100

a) Data not available as this edition goes to print.

Diesel engines 2.0 TDI CR Start-Stop 2.0 TDI CR Start-Stop

Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 85 (115)/2,750-4,250 110 (150)/3,000-4,200 110 (150)/3,000-4,200

Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 300/1,600-2,500 340/1,700-2,750 340/1,600-2,750

No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 4/1,968 4/1,968 4/1,968

Fuel Diesel according to standard EN 590, min. 51 CN

Gearbox manual manual DSG

Top speed (km/h) a) a) a)

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) a) a) a)

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 2,000 1,990 2,030

a) Data not available as this edition goes to print.

354

Indications about the technical data

Dimensions

Fig. 233 Dimensions.

355

Technical data

Fig. 233 ATECA ATECA 4Drive

A Front projection (mm) 868 868

B Rear projection (mm) 857 865

C Wheelbase (mm) 2,638 2,630

D Length (mm) 4,363

E Fronta) track (mm) 1,576 1,572

F Backa) track (mm) 1,541 1,544

G Width (mm) 1,841

H Height at kerb weight (mm) 1,601b)

1,615c) 1,611b)

1,625c)

I Ground clearance between the axles (mm) 176 189

J Front projection angle limited by the bumper maximum 19.4 maximum 20.6

K Rear projection angle limited by the bumper maximum 27.9 maximum 25.5

Turning radius (m) 10.8

a) This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim. b) Distance to the roof. c) Dimension to the roof bars.

356

Index

Index Numbers and Symbols 12-volt battery

assisted start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 charge level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 disconnect and connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86, 321 energy management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 winter operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

4Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

A ABS

see Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151, 344 Activating SEAT CONNECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Active cylinder management (ACT)

status indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Adapting the playback volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

control and warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 noises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 special driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

AdBlue control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 minimum filling capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

Additional heating see Auxiliary heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Adjust front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 seat with memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Adjusting the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

activating and deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 for the head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 for the knees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 deactivation of the front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Air conditioning air recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 manual air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Air recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Alternator

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Ambient lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Android Auto

Disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 establish connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Anti-puncture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42, 43 Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 42

check after 10 minutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 inflating the tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 sealing the tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Anti-puncture set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297, 298 Anti-trap function

sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 sunshade blind (glass roof) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Apple CarPlay

Disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 establish connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Applications (apps) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Aspects to think about before starting the ve-

hicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

357

Index

ASR see Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Assistance systems adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 assisted parting system (Park Assist) . . . . . . 273 Auto Hold function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 driver alert system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 driving assist (Travel Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 emergency braking (Front Assist) . . . . . . . . . . 242 front camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 front radar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 general notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 hill descent control (HDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 lane departure warning (Side Assist) . . . . . . 259 parking aid Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 peripheral view system (Top View Cam-

era) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 PreCrash system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 proactive speed adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 rear camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . . 259, 263 rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 rear radar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 road sign detection system messages . . . . . . 79 safety advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 system limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Trailer assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Tyre pressure monitor indicator . . . . . . . . . . . 333

Tyre pressure monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 ultrasound sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Assisted start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Audible warning

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 unbuckled seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Auto Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Auto Hold Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Auto Lock (central locking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Automatic car wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

disconnecting the Auto Hold function . . . . . 268 Automatic dipped beam headlight control . . 120 Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 downhill assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 emergency release of the selector lever. . . 226 kick-down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 launch-control program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 operating fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 parking lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 steering wheel with shift paddles . . . . . . . . . . 221 tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219, 221 towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Auxiliary heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 electricity consumers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 radio-operated remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

remote control range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Average fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

B Backrest of the rear seat

folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 raise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Bag hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145, 150 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

change on the remote control (independ- ent heating) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Before starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Belt tightening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Bicycle carrier

fitting onto the coverable tow hook . . . . . . . 302 max. load rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

Biodiesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Blown bulbs

change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312, 314

opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 braking assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 emergency brake function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 new brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Braking assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Braking system

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 358

Index

C Camera

cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Care

see Cleaning the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Central armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 emergency lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 remote control key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 selective unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 unlock and lock the vehicle (Keyless Ac-

cess) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Cetane index (diesel fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

dipped beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 main beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 number plate light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 tail light bulb in the bodywork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 tail light bulb in the rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 turn signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Change the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

subsequent work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Changing parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Checking levels

engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

Check lists requirements for Android Auto . . . . . . . . . . . 184 requirements for Apple CarPlay . . . . . . . . . . . 183 requirements for MirrorLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Childproof locks electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Child seats group classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 securing with the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35, 37, 38

Cleaning the vehicle high pressure cleaning equipment . . . . . . . . 339 special care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 vehicle exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 vehicle interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 wash the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Climate control auxiliary heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 windscreen heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Clocks

set the time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 sunshade blind (glass roof) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Clutch (lamp) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Coming Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

WLAN access point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Connectivity Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Connectors faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 adBlue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 anti-lock brake system ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 ASR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269, 271 audible warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 braking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 cruise control (GRA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 diesel preheating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 EDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 emissions control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269, 271 fuel reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 hill descent control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 lane departure warning (Side Assist) . . . . . . 260 lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310, 311 press on the brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242, 245 rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83, 305 remote control (independent heating) . . . . . 163 replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

359

Index

seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 steering column lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 tow hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Travel Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Tyre pressure monitor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

Controls and displays overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Controls on the steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Convenience close function

windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Convenience open function

windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Cooling system

check the coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 refilling coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

Copyright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

control and warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Current documentation attached . . . . . . . . . . . 166

D Dangers of not using the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Data label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Data transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Deactivating SEAT CONNECT services . . . . . . . 181 Deactivation of cylinders

see Active cylinder management (ACT) . . . . 73 Deactivation of the front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Diesel engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

Display of road signs on the instrument panel activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Disposal seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Distance control see Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Door handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

child lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Downhill assistance function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Downhill assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Drawers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Drink holder

bottle holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Driver see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Driver alert system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Driving

driving on flooded roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 economical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 parking on inclines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 park on upward slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 trips abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126, 234 with trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

Driving Assist (Travel Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Driving data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Driving data indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Driving mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Driving on flooded roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Driving profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 DSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Duplicate keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Dust and pollen filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Dynamic headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

E e-Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 E10

see Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Easy Open

special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 EDL

see Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Electric

windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Electrical accessories

see Power sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Electronic engine torque management

(XDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Electronic immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109, 214 Electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

automatic connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 automatic disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

360

Index

disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 emergency brake function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

Electronic self-locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 emergency vehicle towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 replace a blown fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 connecting and disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 see also Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Emergency brake function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Emergency braking assist system . . . . . . . . . . . 235

operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 temporarily deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Emergency braking warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Emergency call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Emergency call service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Emergency locking of the front passenger

door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Emergency opening

driver's door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Emergency operation front passenger door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 gear selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Emissions control system AdBlue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Energy management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 Engine

assisted start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 noises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 start (driver instructions with the mechani-

cal contact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Engine and ignition

automatic ignition disconnection . . . . . . . . . . 212 emergency start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 My Beat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 preheat the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 starting the engine with Press & Drive . . . . . . 213 switching off the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312, 314 battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318, 319 engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 window washer tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 check the level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 G12evo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 G12 plus-plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 G13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 temperature indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Engine failure control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

Engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

Engine oil change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315, 317 checking the oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 maintenance frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

Engine oil pressure control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Environment

ecological driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 environmental compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

Environmental tip refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

Equipment telephone interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

ESC electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . 269 multi-collision brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Sport mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Exhaust gases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

361

Index

Exterior lighting change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Exterior mirrors driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 External antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 external audio sources

adapting the playback volume . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

F Fabrics: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Factors that have a negative influence on

safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Filling capacities

AdBlue tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 window washer tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 window washer water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Filling the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Fog lights with cornering light function . . . . . . . 124 Four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Frequency bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Front Assist

see Emergency braking assist system . . . . . 242 Front fog light bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Fuel

diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Fuel consumption inertia disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 why does consumption increase? . . . . . . . . . 310

Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Fuel tank cap opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

Fuel tank flap opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

Full-LED headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Full Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 colour coded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57, 58, 59 preparations for replacing fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 recognise blown fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

G Gear-change recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Gearbox DSG

see Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Gear change

manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Gear indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

H Handbrake

see Electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Hangers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 HDC

see Hill descent control (HDC). . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Head-on collisions and the laws of physics . . . 18 Headlights

change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 trips abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134, 135 Heating and fresh air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Hill descent control (HDC).

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

I Identification of fuels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Identifying letters on engine (LDM) . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Identity accreditation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Inertia mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Information profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91, 166

adapt menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Android Auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Apple CarPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 before first use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 connecting and disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 customise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 customised menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 drop-down menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 executing functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 function buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

362

Index

initial configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Internet access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Media mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 MirrorLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 overview and controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Radio mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 share a WLAN connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 sound settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 telephone interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 vehicle information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 vehicle settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Infotainment system see Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315, 336 Inspection reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70, 71

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 digital (SEAT Digital Cockpit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 service intervals display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73, 75 use with the multifunction steering wheel . . . 86 use with the wiper lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Instrument panel display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72, 73 Instrument panel lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Interior door handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Interior mirror anti-dazzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Interior monitoring and the anti-tow system activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Interlock button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

J Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

position points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

K Keyless Access

Easy Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Keyless Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Press & Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 unlocking and locking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . 102

Keyless Access lock and ignition system: see Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Keys assign a key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 instructions for the driver (mechanical con-

tact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 spare key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

synchronise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 unlock and lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101, 109 vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Key switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Kick-down

automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

L Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

control and warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Lane assist Plus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Lane Assist system

see Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Lane departure warning (Side Assist)

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 indication on the exterior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Launch-control (automatic transmission) . . . . 223 Leather: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Leaving a parking space with the parking as-

sist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Leaving Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Legal provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Levels control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Lift the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Light Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Light range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

audible warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 coming home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

363

Index

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 control lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 controlling the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 cornering light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 daylight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 dipped beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 fog light with cornering light function . . . . . . 124 headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 instrument lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 leaving home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 main beam headlight lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 main beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 motorway light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 switching on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 welcome light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Loading the luggage compartment fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 general advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111, 139 positioning the load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 positioning the luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 trapdoor for transporting long objects . . . . . 145

Load on the roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Lock and unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 in the locking cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 with the central locking switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111, 139 electric opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 emergency unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 enlarge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 features of the electric rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 luggage compartment lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 net bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 net partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 opening and closing controlled by sensors

(Easy Open) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 storing the rear shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 variable luggage compartment floor . . . . . . 142

Luggage compartment floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Luggage compartment shelf

storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

M Main beam assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Main beam headlight lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Maintenance

see Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Maintenance frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Malfunction

adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 assisted parting system (Park Assist) . . . . . . 273 clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 PreCrash system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Media Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Memory function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 MirrorLink

Disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 establish connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Mirrors adjusting the exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 anti-dazzle interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 see also Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Mobile phones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Mobile Signal Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Multi-collision brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191, 210

favourites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 select source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 use streaming services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

My Beat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

N Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

decrease the navigation map . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 detailed view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 edit route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 enter an address for a guide destination . . . 201 favourite destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 frequent destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 function: entering destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 increase the navigation map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

364

Index

last destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 learn usage pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 managing the map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199, 202 navigation announcements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 offroad mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Other options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 route details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 saved data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199, 204 saved destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 save destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 split screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 use contact details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 use the map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 use the map to enter the destination . . . . . . 202

Net bag luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Net for luggage luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Net partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Noise

auxiliary heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326, 331

Number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

O Octane (petrol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71, 72

partial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Oil change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 One-touch signalling function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Online services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 sunshade blind (glass roof) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 in the locking cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 rear lid with electric opening and closing . . . 111 sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 with the central locking switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Operating fault automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Operation in winter battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 heated windscreen washer jets . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 salt on the roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Original accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Original SEAT Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Overview (left hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Overview (right hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Ownership accreditation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

P Painting the vehicle

care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Panoramic roof

see Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Park Assist

see the assisted parking system (Park As- sist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 with the assisted parking system (Park As-

sist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Parking aid

automatic activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 braking during the manoeuvre . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283, 285 parking aid plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 see the assisted parking system (Park As-

sist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 sensors and camera: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 setting the indications and audio sig-

nals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283, 285 surroundings warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 visual indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282, 285

Parking aid system see Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279, 281, 284

Parking aid system (Park Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 angle parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 automatic brake operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 automatic interruption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 conditions for leaving a parking space . . . . 278

365

Index

leaving a parking space (only when paral- lel parked) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 parallel parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 parking conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 stop early . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

Parking distance warning system see Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279, 281, 284

Parking lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 ParkPilot

see Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279, 281, 284 Particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 15 Peripheral view system (Top View Camera) . 288

display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 usage instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Petrol additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

Places with risk of explosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Places with special regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Power socket

faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Power sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Power steering

see Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 PreCrash system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Front Assist monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

selecting the driving profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Preheating system control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

Preheat the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Press & Drive

start button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Proactive speed adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

R Radar sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 frequency bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 preset buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Traffic information (TP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 tune station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Radio-operated remote control see Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Radio mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Radio screen: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Radio telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

function control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Raise the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 RCTA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

see Rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . 259 Rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . 259, 263

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Rear fog light control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111, 114 see also Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Rear mounting towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

Rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Rear Traffic Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Rear View Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Rear window wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Refuelling

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 opening the fuel tank flap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

Releasing the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Remote control key

unlock and lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Remote control (independent heating) . . . . . . 163

changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Repair work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Requirements for Apple CarPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Reverse assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 usage instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

Reverse assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Reverse (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Revolution counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71, 72, 82 Road signs

shown on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Road signs detection system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 limited operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 shown on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

366

Index

speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 windscreen damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 fix the crossbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Rotation direction

tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Running in

new brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 new engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 new tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

S S-PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Safe security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Safety

child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

head-protection airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 using child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 using seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Save fuel inertia mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 adjusting the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 protective function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 23 safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 unfastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

SEAT CONNECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 legal provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

SEAT Digital Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 information profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 navigation map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

SEAT Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 SEAT Ident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Seats

adjusting the headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 backrest of the rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 electric settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 fitting the headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 incorrect positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 manual adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 memory function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 removing the headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

SEAT Service Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Seat's Mobility Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Selective catalytic reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Selective unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Selector lever (automatic gearbox)

emergency unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Selling the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Service

Digital Maintenance plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 flexible service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 oil change service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 proof of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 service sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 service works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 set service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 terms of use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

Service interval display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Service Menu

identifying letters on engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 restart the oil service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 restart Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 service intervals display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Service notification: consult . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Set of vehicle keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Shift paddles (automatic transmission) . . . . . . 221 Signal amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Sound settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Sound system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

367

Index

Special characteristics Android Auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Apple CarPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 high pressure cleaning equipment . . . . . . . . . 301 MirrorLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 peripheral view system (Top View Cam-

era) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 54 tow start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

Speed limiter control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 indication on display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Speed symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Stabilisation of the towing vehicle and trailer

combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Start-Stop system

disconnect and connect manually . . . . . . . . 218 driver indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 stopping and starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . 216 the engine does not turn off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 the engine starts by itself . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Starter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Start the engine by towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

ACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 active cylinder management status (ACT) . . 73 adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

compass indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 doors, bonnet and rear lid open . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Emergency brake assistance system (Front

Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 gear-change recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 identifying letters on engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 PreCrash system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 road signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 SEAT Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74, 220 service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Travel Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Tyre pressure monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 warning and information messages . . . . . . . . . 77

Steering control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 steering assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Steering assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Steering wheel

adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 multifunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 shift paddles (automatic transmission) . . . . . 221

Steering wheel heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 drawers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 glove compartment light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 on-board documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 on the front passenger side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 other object holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Storage compartment accessories see Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Storage of accident data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Storing objects

bag hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 loading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 net bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 net partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 positioning the load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 positioning the luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146, 147 trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 trapdoor for transporting long objects . . . . . 145

Sun blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Sun protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

anti-trap function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 sunshade blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Sunshade blind anti-trap function (glass roof) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

368

Index

Switching off telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 telephone interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

System settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

T Tail lights

change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Tail lights on the bodywork

remove the tail light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Tail lights on the rear lid

remove the bulb holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 load on the roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 vehicle dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 vertical load on the tow hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Telephone

contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 favourites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 pairing a mobile phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Phone book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 send messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 speed dial buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 to call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Telephone interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 places with risk of explosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Temperature indicator exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Time adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76, 82

Tiptronic (automatic transmission) . . . . . . 219, 221

To change the battery of the vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Top Tether . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35, 37, 38 Top Tether System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35, 37, 38 Top View Camera

see the Peripheral view system (Top View Camera) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Torque wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Touch screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Touch zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Towable loads

loading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Tow cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296, 297 Tow hook

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 unlocking electrically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Towing device fitting a bicycle carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 fitting later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 tow hook with electric unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Towing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 54 automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 54 four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 front towline anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 54 rear towline anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 54 tow bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 towing cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 towing prohibited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 with towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Traffic information (TP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Traffic programme

see Traffic information (TP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

adjusting the headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297, 298 connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 hitching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 LED tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296, 297 loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283, 285 power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 retrofitting a towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 stabilisation of the towing vehicle and trail-

er combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296, 297 technical requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 towable loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 towing cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296, 297 Trailer assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 unlocking the tow hook electrically . . . . . . . . 301 vertical load on the tow hitch . . . . . . . . 294, 298

Trailer Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 automatic brake operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 check list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 see Trailer Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Trailer mode see Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

369

Index

Transportation of children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Trapdoor for transporting long objects . . . . . . . 145 Travel Assist

see Driving Assist (Travel Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Trips abroad

headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Troubleshooting Trailer assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Turning off the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Turning on the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Tyre Mobility System

see Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Tyre pressure monitor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Tyre pressure monitor systems

Tyre pressure monitor indicator . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Tyre profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Tyre repair kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

see also Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Tyre repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Tyres

accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 foreign objects inserted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 for winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 new tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 speed symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 tread wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 useful life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 with directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

Tyre tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

Tyre wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

U Unlock and lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 with the central locking switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 USB port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

V Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Variable luggage compartment floor . . . . . . . . 142 Vehicle

data label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 lending or selling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 parking on inclines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 parking on upward slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 raise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 unlocking and locking (Keyless Access) . . . 102 vehicle ID number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

Vehicle care wiper blade service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Vehicle conservation products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Vehicle dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Vehicle information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Vehicle location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Vehicle seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Vehicle settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Vehicle wallet compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Vertical load on the tow hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 loading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Android Auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Siri (Apple CarPlay) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Volume set for external audio sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

W Warning symbols

see Control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Washing the vehicle

conserving the exterior of the vehicle . . . . . 339 high pressure cleaning equipment . . . . . . . . 339 special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Welcome light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Wheel balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Wheel central trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 330

anti-theft device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 46 caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Wheels change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 47 changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 new wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 wheel central trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

Wheel spanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 370

Index

Wheel trim remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Wi-Fi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Window controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Windows

automatic opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 convenience closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 convenience opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Window washer window washer lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Window washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Window washer water

check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 filling quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Windscreen heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Windscreen heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154, 160 Windscreen washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 lift the blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 reposition the blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 thermal washing ejectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Winter conditions sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Wiper and rear window wiper blades cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 341

replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Wireless Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Wireless charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

X XDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

371

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook. All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print. Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form. SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the Copyright Act. All rights on changes are reserved.

This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.

SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.11.20

Vehicle identification da a

Model:

Vehicle Registration:

Vehicle identification number:

Date of vehicle registration or vehicle delivery:

SEAT Official Service:

Service advisor:

Telephone:

Confirmation of eceipt of documentation and vehicle keys

The following items were delivered with the vehicle: YES NO

On-board documentation

First key

Secon

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the Ateca Seat works, you can view and download the Seat Ateca Edition 11.20 2020 Crossover SUV Owner's Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Seat Ateca as well as other Seat manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Seat Ateca. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Seat Ateca Edition 11.20 2020 Crossover SUV Owner's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Seat Ateca Edition 11.20 2020 Crossover SUV Owner's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Seat Ateca Edition 11.20 2020 Crossover SUV Owner's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Seat Ateca Edition 11.20 2020 Crossover SUV Owner's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Seat Ateca Edition 11.20 2020 Crossover SUV Owner's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.